Home

Manual - Prodance

1. 8 5 Copying and Moving Palettes To make a copy of a palette in a new location 1 Open Colour open the Colour directory 2 Make sure that the Guard button is pressed so that you do not accidentally apply palettes when trying to select them 3 Select the palette that you want to copy by pressing its button in the directory 158 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 4 Press the Copy key 5 Press the button of the location in the directory you want to copy the palette to Or using the command line Colour 2 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 e Group 5 Colour 2 Copy Colour 3 Enter copies fixtures that are in Colour Palette 2 and Group 5 into Colour Palette 3 Similarly to move a palette to a new location Colour 2 Move Colour 3 Enter moves the contents of Colour Palette 2 to Colour Palette 3 leaving 2 empty If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 165 Tip References to palettes refer to the palette not its location in the directory If you move a palette from location 3 to location 4 references to the palette still refer to it in its new location not to another palette you put in location 3 8 6 8 6 1 Record Options Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture When you record a palette parameter values can be recorded as global per fixture type or per fixture
2. cece cence eee e eee eee ee anes anes a eeea tees 170 9 8 Spreedsheet View vs Button View of Colour Directory 008 171 10 1 Media Picker WiINdOW s essssssssrsrssrssrrsrrsrerrrersrerrrerrernsnrsrrerenererene 173 10 2 Media Picker WiINdOW ccecece tect teeter teeter teste eee nee ne tenes 180 10 3 Fixt re WiINdOW croiteir ieaiai tas eat Aia aa Eaa 181 11 1 The Cue Editor WINdOW sssssssssrsrsrersresrrssrsrssrrsrrnrererererreresnrerens 188 11 2 Cue 3 with a Fade Mark ssssssssrsrsssrsrerererrsrrsrrsrrsrererarerenereneereen 197 11 3 Cue 3 Actively Fading into its Mark sssseeesrsrrerrerrerrerrerrene 197 11 4 Cue 3 Fully Marked iists ir nnee des naeia A EAEE EEA RETER 197 11 5 The Cuelist Directory W INdOW ssssessssssssrssisrisrrsrrernrrrsrtrerrerrerrerns 198 11 6 The Cuelist WINdOW sssssssssssrssrssrrrrererrrsrrsrnsrrsrrnrerirarereeresrrerenens 199 ae Eeen ae E ETE T E 208 13 2 Path YPES siaii a a E A aA 211 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist WINdOW esssserierrerseeereerereen 212 13 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing TIMING ssssessssssrssrssisrrerisrrsrnerrrrrersns 213 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar ssec 214 13 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths ccceeeeeeee cece eee eeee tesa tena eeaaes 214 High End Systems Lighting Control System 13 7 The Paths Toolbar srcssn Merini datand ia a iai aaa 214 13 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected esesecerrenerree
3. 149 6 6 Separating Parameters cece cece eee eect ee eee a eee a eesa nese tena eeaaes 149 7 GrOUPS wecesceeecceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeegeeseeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeneegaeneaee 151 7 A Recording Group siecccis ct onipin ee epee aua A kaaa iaia iia 151 7 2 NAMING GrOUPS irian cee aad eens a a i 151 7 3 Using Groups in Programming sssssseesseerseresrerrerrerrerrernerrens 152 7 4 Editing Group Contents sssessssserserssrsrisrrerrerrsrnerrnrerrerrerrens 152 7 4 1 Removing Fixtures from GroupS ssessssseeereereererer 152 7 5 Deleting Groups sirini ii aani iaa EE 152 7 6 Copying and Moving GrouUpS s sesssssssssissisrrsrrerrsrrerrrrersrrerrenns 153 7 7 Insert Merge and Replace sssssssserssrsrrsrisrrerrerrersrrrrrrrrerrenns 154 8 Palettes niiina a Aa aa a aaaea Eaa 155 8 1 Recording a Palette cece eect eee eee tenes ates nessa eee eeaee 155 8 1 1 Naming a Palette 20 0 eee etter eater ates eee eaeeae ees 155 8 2 Using Palettes in Programming cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 156 8 3 Editing Palette Contents ccc eccc cece eee eee ee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 156 8 3 1 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter Types 157 8 4 Deleting Palettes iniinis ceeds exten e tiie eager 158 8 5 Copying and Moving Palettes cccceceeeeee cece tees eeeaeeeneeenaes 158 8 6 Record Options sissioni inpe A aa a E EA aai 159 8 6 1 Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture 0
4. 27 2 Fixture Builder Tutorial This tutorial takes you through the process of building a custom fixture library for a fictitious fixture Follow the steps to create a custom fixture library 378 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fictitious 575 Protocol Ch Purpose Value Description 1 Intensity 0 to 255 0 is out 255 is full 2 Pan Coarse 0 to 255 540 degree pan 3 Pan Fine 0 to 255 4 Tilt Coarse 0 to 255 270 degree tilt 5 Tilt Fine 0 to 255 6 Cyan 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 7 Magenta 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 8 Yellow 0 to 255 0 is full 255 is out 9 Gobo 0 Open 20 30 Gobo 1 breakup 31 40 Gobo 2 bubbles 41 50 Gobo 3 cone 51 60 Gobo 4 radial 100 150 Gobo wheel spin fwd slow to fast 151 200 Gobo wheel spin rev slow to fast 201 255 Random gobo slow to fast 10 Shutter 0 Closed 1 127 Linear Strobe slow to fast 128 200 Random Strobe fast to slow 201 210 Reset Fixture 221 230 Strike Lamp 231 240 Shutdown fixture 241 250 Douse Lamp 255 Open 27 2 1 Step 1 Create the New Fixture To create the new fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window Press the Fixture Builder button 2 3 Click OK on the warning dialog 4 Press the Create New button The Create New Custom Type window will open 27 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details Enter the Model Name Author and Notes by clicking in each cell and pressing Set 1 Name the model Tutorial High End Systems 379
5. To use aggregation 1 Make sure the spreadsheet is sorted by Fixture Type right click on the Type column and select Sort If the Type column isn t visible right click on any column heading and select Type Press a to open the Configuration window 3 Select Enable Aggregation 4 Click on OK Note that aggregation is always on if the spreadsheet is in compact mode see Compact Mode p 41 Tip Aggregation is turned on by default in all editors such as the Programmer Collapsing Aggregated Sections 42 You can collapse aggregated sections to hide all the rows in that section see Figure 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows To collapse an aggregate section right click the black heading bar and select Collapse To expand the aggregation section again right click the section s black heading bar and select Expand High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Programmer Edit a Compact Palettes Changes Positior Num amp intensity zate Pan Studio Spot 575 11 12 Technobeam Iris 21 100 22 100 Desk Channel 31 100 32 100 Studio Color 575 BAA Programmer Value Fade Delay Path gt gt Show Fade Palettes Changes Position Edit Compact A Num amp Intensity Studio Spot 575 Studio Color 575 Technobeam Iris R OO T a A 22 E 7 1 1 A Desk Channel tH Figure 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed Rows Priority of Aggregat
6. x Cancel Midi Channel 6 Select the MIDI Notes tab and click on the MIDI Notes In checkbox button 21 2 2 Assigning MIDI Notes to Playback Bars To assign MIDI Note information to playback bars 330 High End Systems Section 21 MIDI Dov oP Nn Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab in the Console Settings window In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select a Playback Bar to asso ciate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the selected playback bar and its associated functions fel Ge Dect Dect Dect Dest Deel Del Kel Keel Sacro Ro Soxhov P b i 1 BA 8l 21 2 3 Assigning MIDI Notes to Programming Keys To assign MIDI Note information to programming keys 1 On ee eS Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list
7. 1 Cuelist 1 select the cuelist unless the desired cuelist or master is already the chosen master 2 Cue 2 Time 7 Enter assigns a fade time of 7 seconds Different Fade in and Fade out Times You can assign different fade in and fade out times known as a split time using the key For example 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 10 Enter select a fade in time of 7 seconds and a fade out time of 10 seconds 4 Record record the cue on the currently selected master Important Hog 40S s definition of fade in and fade out times is different to that used by some other consoles Some consoles use fade in and fade out times for intensity parameters only and have a separate time for all other parameters Hog 40S has fade in and fade out times for each individual parameter Also with some consoles the fade out time applies when the cue goes out so that cue 2 s fade out time takes effect during the change from cue 2 to cue 3 rather than as with Hog 40S cue 1 to cue 2 Fade Time with Masks You can record fade times with a mask For example e Cue1fFixture1 2 Colour Time 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of Fixtures 1 and 2 in Cue 1 Tip If you want to assign individual times for several fixtures or fixture para meters you can edit them in the Cue Editor window by clicking on its Fa
8. High End Systems 44 Section 32 Cheat Sheets S 5 wane yy gt lt an wee Vee SJ yey yy i HEEL ix edited ve V 644 EN ENIS A oy OATS Saeed C y gt lt V Va a ak SY gt lt A gt lt SrA OB y yaz Li a e LN be os A TIT tt FF EEE I H KIA Ka lt i AEC a ON ONNAN ek Yatra cy ye a OAA TN ott t ttt AK NV NVN LTI TI HiH wane jek oN sA S yay y P NENA NNN a a PAN AAN ASA yaey A rd ENA ON 6a 4 7 A o yry rg eA WNN S yry aks Damn A m ae ON ANNS A m A OITS Ca TTT To HID PTA OWIANA LITA A estes C saa HD RES ZNN NN S a A SrA BAY a NE asiesiysd C O NNT m m PEPE TT TT va ii Gs oN w Se SJ OC i Daas Dan A S Figure 32 3 Playback section of the Hog 4 front panel High End Systems Section 33 Troubleshooting If you are having problems with the console try the troubleshooting procedures covered in this chapter If you cannot rectify the problem or you think that it is because the console is not working as it should please contact support highend com 33 1 Console won t startup If a software update has failed the console can get into a state where it either fails to start properly or it goes immediately to the shutdown screen A full re install will be necessary see Full Install Sy
9. Main gt Control PanelSet to Defaults Locking the DMX Processor Front Panel Controls You can use the Lock function to lock the DMX Processor s controls The default PIN is 1234 a new PIN can be assigned from a Hog console via Setup Network on the Setup Toolbar Select the required DMX Processor in the network window and click Settings Change PIN and OK to apply and close the window To lock the DMX Processor locally High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 e Inthe Control Panel select Lock the Enter PIN to Unlock screen will appear To unlock the DMX Processor locally e Enter your chosen 4 digit code number and cursor right to confirm The code number will be the default 1234 if you have not changed it to your own You can lock and unlock remotely from a console via the DMX Processor Settings window for each specific DMX Processor 1 Setup Network the Network button can be found on the Setup Toolbar 2 Select the required DMX Processor in the Network window and click Settings to open the DMX Processor Settings window 3 Lock or unlock the DMX Processor and OK to apply and close the window Important Make sure that you keep a record of your lock code close to hand if your DMX Processor is located away from the console The DMX Processor cannot be unlocked without it or a console operator Backlight Off Time Selecting Backlight in the Control Pa
10. To change the platform model of a HedgeHog console manufactured in January 2015 or later 1 Power on the HedgeHog console Press the Control Panel button on the start screen to open the control panel 2 Navigate to the diagnostics tab of the control panel window Press the Console Upgrade button 3 The console upgrade utility wizard will now appear Press Next to begin 4 Select the platform model you wish to upgrade to and press Next High End Systems 417 Section 30 Updating Console Software Console Upgrade Current Platform Hedge Hog 4X gt Hog4 Hedge Hog 4 gt Hog4 Hedge Hog 4N 5 Contact a High End Systems Sales representative and provide them with the upgrade code shown on the screen as well as which console platform model you are upgrading from and which console model you are wanting to upgrade to The High End Systems sales representative will provide you with the current pricing for the upgrade and will process your order 418 High End Systems Section 30 Updating Console Software Console Upgrade Validation Upgrade Code pmdk kkfk mkgp mzcb Please enter the validation code 6 Once your HedgeHog upgrade order is complete High End Systems will send you a validation code Enter the validation code into the upgrade wizard and press Next High End Systems 419 Section 30 Updating Console Software Console Upgrade Validation Upgrade Code pmdk kkfk mkgp mzcb Please enter
11. iWheel Down Button Pig Key Trackball POS Mode Trackball Posi tion Value Period Key 0 key 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 key 5 key 6 key 7 key 8 key 9 key Arrow Up key High End Systems hog hardware choose master hog hardware go master hog hardware pause master hog hardware goback master hog hardware flash master hog hardware fader master hog hardware fader 0 hog hardware encoder wheel hog hardware ewheel button hog hardware rate wheel hog hardware iwheel hog hardware iwheelup hog hardware iwheel down hog hardware pig hog hardware posmode hog hardware trackball hog hardware period hog hardware zero hog hardware one hog hardware two hog hardware three hog hardware four hog hardware five hog hardware six hog hardware seven hog hardware eight hog hardware nine hog hardware up 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 lt 255 discreet fader value 0 lt 255 discreet fader value 20 lt 20 variable value 0 button up 1 button down 20 lt 20 variable value 20 lt 20 variable value 0 button up 1 button down 0 butt
12. 3 Press a button in the Page Directory where you want to create the new page A new blank page is created 4 Set name Enter name the page Or using the command line 1 Page number Enter a new blank page is created 2 Set name Enter name the page Important When you create a new blank page it is automatically loaded onto the physical playback masters By default any cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that were previously loaded will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console You can change this behaviour see Options When Changing Page p 302 High End Systems 301 Section 18 Pages 18 3 Changing Page Changing the page loads a different set of cuelists scenes and or inhibitive masters onto the physical playback masters You can do this in several ways e Press the Next Page key to go to the next page in the Page Directory To go to the previous page hold Pig and press Next Page e Using the command line Page number Enter e Select the desired page from the Page Directory window Check that the Guard button in the directory window is not selected e Use a macro within a cuelist see Macros p 353 e Set a trackball key to select the next page see Trackball Keys p 95 The current page is shown in the status area at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar The current page Programmer Renumber Tip You can control which page loads n
13. Cue timings shows how the main kinds of timing and triggering values control the playback of cues Cue 1 Cue 1 Cue 2 trigger completes trigger Intensity Follow on time Delay in Fade in Wait Delay out Fade out Figure 13 1 Cue timings Hog 40S allows you to assign timings to each parameter of each fixture in a cue scene or palette Often you will want to assign the same value to every fixture parameter this is described in Fade Delay and Path p 208 Assigning timings for individual parameters is described in Indi vidual Parameter Timings p 212 13 2 13 2 1 208 Fade Delay and Path You can assign fade time and delay times as well as paths to cues and scenes Cues recorded without assigning any time information will be given the default time this can be adjusted in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window Fade Time To record a cue with a fade time other than the default 1 Create the desired look for the cue in the Programmer 2 Fixture Enter select all the fixtures currently in the Programmer 3 Time 7 Enter assign a fade time of 7 seconds 4 Record Cue 1 Enter record the cue on the currently chosen master To assign times greater than 1 minute enter the number of minutes followed by the number of seconds High End Systems Section 13 Timing e Time 140 Enter select a fade time of 1 minute 40 seconds To change the time of an already recorded cue
14. Lighting Control System User Manual Version 3 0 1 EN High End Systems Hog 4 Lighting Control System User Manual High End Systems by Chris Muenchow and Michael Graham Copyright High End Systems Inc 2015 All Rights Reserved Changes Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks The High End Systems Flying Pig Systems and Hog 4 logos are registered trademarks of High End Systems Inc All other brand names and product names used in this book are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Product Modification Warning High End Systems products ar
15. Playback Bar 7 None Not Connected Playback Bar 8 None Not Connected R conos Figure 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Mapping 3 6 Adding Master Wings You can increase the number of physical masters by adding Master Wings to the console The Master Wing is a USB device with 30 faderless masters a rate wheel and a 15 LED baclit screen The backit LED screen can be enabled to display any information you move to that monitor including Playback Bars The Master Wing connects to the console in the control panel under the playback wings section The Master wing s desklight and front panel LED settings will always match the console The virtual fader level of the 30 faderless masters on the Master Wing can be configured in the Virtual Faders pane of the User Preferences window To attach a Master Wing 1 Apply AC power to the wing and connect the wing s USB port and DVI port to the console The rate wheel on the Master Wing will already begin to function at this time with no further configuration 2 Setup gt Control Panel Wings open the Wings pane of the Control Panel window see Figure 3 15 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing mappings 3 Click on the drop down menu for one of the playback bars listed in the control panel and select one of the master wing s sections to assign it to that playback High End Systems 85 Section 3 Setting Up the System
16. Section 27 The Fixture Builder 2 Enter your name for Author 3 Enter any notes 4 Adjust the channel count to match Protocol 10 channels Create New Custom Type Create New Custom Type Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial O Create Blank Create From Channel Count v LE 4 Patchpoints channel s 1 Add patchpoint channel aim 5 Click OK to close this window and start the fixture creation The blank new fixture will be displayed 380 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modifi Notes the Tutorial Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 T P4 o D ro Function B o 4 5 6 B 9 O a New Dmx Entry Build Type High End Systems 381 Section 27 The Fixture Builder 27 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel Features Intensity Fixture Builder Tutorial W Create New Copy From ype information Model Name Tutorial Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Not The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s Channe Function Feat ure x es 09255 100 Build Type 1 Select the Function cell for channel 1 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories 3 Select Intensity as the desired function The window will close and
17. The Output Window To open the Output window e Press and hold the Open key then select Output from the Main Toolbar High End Systems 281 Section 17 Playback e Select Output from the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touchscreen Values Eff Num amp Intensity 100 14 15 16 17 LES open ohz O firack il SALLALI LELLA oen Hz A A M 26 84 24 59 open LLIA Figure 17 7 The Output Window The Output window by default displays raw parameter values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Effects displays the base value before the effect is applied along with a per centage indication of the effect cycle e Sources displays the source that currently has control of a parameter for ex ample the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number e Plots displays the name of the plot that has control of the parameter if you want to see the real world value being calculated by the plot for the parameter then choose value instead of plots e Show Palettes as with sources displays the palette that is supplying the para meter value e Compact Compacts the display of information in the window see Compact Mode p 41 Crossfading values will appear in the Output window in the following colors 282 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Output Show Palette
18. To show a hidden spreadhseet column Right click on a column header and choose the name of the column from the menu To sort the spreadsheet Right click on a column header and select Sort to sort the spreadsheet by the values in that column Select Sort again to the reverse the direction of the sort You can also right click on a column header and select Sub sort to assign a second level of sorting For example if you sort the Fixture window by fixture type and sub sort by Patch then all the Desk Channels will be shown grouped together in the order of their patch address 40 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals To select all the cells in a spreadsheet column Double click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet To select a single spreadsheet cell Click or press in the cell You can use the cursor keys below the Trackball to change which cell is selected If the cell is editable it will have a red border e To select a range of cells in a spreasheet You can click or press and then drag across a range of cells to select them all Alternatively you can click in the first cell press and hold Thru and click in the last cell this is useful if you want to select a large range and need to scroll the window To edit the contents of cells in a spreadsheet Click or press in the cell and press the Set key or double click in the cell Type in the new value and press Enter This works for both a singl
19. angle will be selected If a fixture is der in which only partially inside the rectangle it will they are not be selected touched Lasso Encompassing Selection Tool Fixtures inside selects fixtures by drawing a free form the selection circle around the fixtures you wish to lasso are selec select Any fixture that is entirely inside ted in order in the lasso will be selected If a fixture which they are is only partially inside the lasso it will touched not be selected Plot window fixture selections follow many of the same rules as the selections made using the command line The syntax for selecting fixtures in plots is as follows Fixture selections made in a plot are added to the current fixture selection until an edit is made Once an edit is made such as adjusting pan tilt then a new fixture selection is started High End Systems Section 20 Plots 20 3 2 20 3 3 High End Systems e Holding the key while selecting fixtures in a plot adds those fixtures to the current fixture selection e Holding the key while selecting fixtures in a plot removes those fixtures from the current fixture selection Tapping on an a fixture that is already selected will deselect the fixture Navigation zoom scroll Plots are 2 dimensional layouts that can be zoomed and scolled to ensure good visibility and easy selection There are three main ways to zoom in and out of the plot window 1 Use the zoom tool a
20. bar The Master Wing has three three assignable sections Hog4Master Top Hog4Master Middle and Hog4Master Bottom which cordinate to the three rows of masters on the control surface of the Master Wing 4 Ifyou have more than one wing you can identify which wing is which by pressing the Beacon button for any assigned playback bar The LEDs on the wing will flash 5 Ensure that the playback bars that you have assigned to the Master Wing are visible by selecting the Display button for those particular playback bars 6 To enable the external monitor included on the wing navigate to the displays tab of the control panel and enable the cordinating DVI output where you plugged in the wing a Figure 3 15 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing mappings 3 7 86 Adding DMX Widgets The number of physical dmx connections on the back of the Hog 4 Console and the DP8000 is actually lower than the number of dmx universes these devices are actually capable of outputting Connecting external USB dmx widgets to your Hog 4 Console DMX Processor 8000 or Hog 4PC is the best way realize the full dmx output potential of your setup DMX Built in Widgets to fully Output DMX Out reach DMX output Poten puts potential tial Hog 4 16 Uni 8 Universes 8 Single or 2 Super or Console verses 1 Super duper DMX 16 Uni 8 Universes 8 Single or 2 Super or Pro verses 1 Super duper cessor 8000 Full 12 Uni 4 Universes 8 Single
21. cece eee e eee sees ante d teen nese eeaaeeaee 293 17 8 Configuring Playback Controls cceceeeeeeeeee tees eeea teen nena 294 High End Systems ix 18 19 20 21 Lighting Control System 17 8 1 Configuring Master Controls cceeeseeeeeeeeeee teenie es 296 17 8 2 Configuring the Main Controls cceeeeeeeeeeeee teres 300 PAGES innii ctse cence adadaeie cee facaecswevsegusedveetcesanenscetueacceaeuen 301 18 1 How Pages Are Used cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tesa tena eeneesneesaeeeaeeaaes 301 18 2 Creating a New Page ccceeeeeeee ene e eee teeta eee eee eee eeaeeeaeeeas 301 18 3 Changing Page gt citeai vent wend cc ta tee ia Ea ke iaaea iiaa 302 18 3 1 Options When Changing Page cc eeeeeeeeeeee eee 302 18 3 2 Matching Levels When Changing Page 6068 304 18 3 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages 6 304 18 4 Modifying Pages vccsciseveveesdeetescctesis cetaeeteeessereecdeneveeraseeeedaa 305 18 4 1 Copying Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a PAQC EE araveend gatierspabevecnp A 306 18 4 2 Moving Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a PAGE cess secectitacsccaslivecstbatecedesteredshteccecarynedeaseeetectsrieceteveuesedes 306 18 4 3 Removing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a PAGE sinri peectiin Ha cena E yar a arcditens ha castes T 306 18 4 4 Clearing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a PAGE cesiscceicaveacicdbeneecetsueeradha
22. open the Settings window In the MIDI pane check MSC Out High End Systems Section 21 MIDI 21 1 3 Tip You can selectively disable MSC output for individual cuelists or scenes by enabling the Supress MSC out option in the options window Using MIDI Show Control Hog 40S recognises and sends the following MSC commands Hog 40S Com MSC Command MSC Data mand Go 0x1 GO cue number cuelist number Halt 0x2 STOP cuelist number Resume 0x3 RESUME cuelist number Skip Forward 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Skip Back 0x4 TIMED_GO time 0 cue number cuelist number Release Oxb GO_OFF cuelist number Change Page Ox1d OPEN_CUE_PATH page number MIDI show control is enabled by default for all cuelists and scenes You can assign a cuelist or scene to ignore incoming MIDI Show Control commands 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Ignore MSC In Similarly you can prevent the MIDI Show Control commands for a cuelist being sent out from the console 1 Open Choose Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Suppress MSC Out Tip MSC doesn t distinguish between cues and scenes as Hog 40S does so there are no MSC commands to control scenes To work round this you can send an MSC command with a CUE_PATH value of 5 Hog 40S will treat the cue number as a scene number instead 21 2 MIDI Notes MIDI Notes is a common language of the well established MIDI standard that can be used to
23. yp 1 Studio Color 575 fh D 512 Free Channels 1 512 Free Channels 512 Free Channels i7 Studie Coor S75 k2 33 Studio Cor S75 B 49 Studio Cobr575 H 6S _ Studio Color 575 _ S 81 _ Studio Cor 575 f6 97 Studio Color 575 7 113 7 Free Channe s 120 Desk Channel ia 121 DeskChannel 12 122 _ Desk Channel N3 123 _ Desk Chanae fis 130 383 Free Channels Figure 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture window You can see an overview of all patched fixtures in the Fixture window by using View by DP see Figure 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture window This shows a spreadsheet with start address fixture type and user number for each DMX universe Additional rows show where there is an available space in the allocated DMX addresses This is useful when you are patching additional fixtures and you need to know what ranges of DMX addresses are free To show this view e Setup gt Patch View by DP the View by DP button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window You can use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of the window to view each group of four uni verses of a DMX Processor Deselect the View by DP button to return the Fixture window to its normal view High End Systems 109 5 2 4 5 2 5 110 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Adding and Removing DMX Processors All fixtures in the Hog 40S are patched to DP8000s The Hog 40S automatically detects and m
24. 24 2 2 Additional Comment Macro Syntax secere 356 24 3 Keystroke MACroS cccceceeeneee eee teen ees e tena een eeaaeeneeeaeeeaeeeas 357 24 3 1 Recording Keystroke MAaCTOS serere 357 24 3 2 Naming Keystroke Ma Cr0S cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 358 24 3 3 Keystroke Macro Playback cceeeeeee tees eee teeta 358 24 3 4 Editing Keystroke Macros ccceeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeeeaeeeaes 361 24 3 5 Deleting Keystroke MacroS secere 362 24 3 6 Copying and Moving Keystroke Macros esec 363 Direct Control of DMX Channels cccseeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeees 365 25 1 Manually specifying DMX Channel Values eeeeeeeees 365 25 2 Setting DMX Channels to External Art Net Source 365 25 3 Reverting DMX Channels to HogNet Control eee 366 25 4 DMX WESC st cccestectvensicent Sassen candi Ea Ea EEA 366 Reporting scceceeeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeaneeaeeeaeeaneeaeeaee 369 26 1 Building Saving Deleting and Running Report Queries 369 26 2 Organizing and Saving Report Results ccceeeeeeeee eee ees 370 26 3 Using Report Results to Edit Programming essercene 370 The Fixture Builder cccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenaee 371 27 1 Working With the Fixture Builder cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee aetna es 371 High End Systems xi xii 28 29 30 31 32 Lighting Control System 27 1 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Librar
25. A way of displaying values in a grid Hog 40S editor windows use a spreadsheet to display parameter values A console function that will put any values that are on stage in playback from a master for the selected fixtures into your current active editor When you want to connect more than two Hog components together then you need a special piece of equipment to allow them to interconnect called an Ethernet Hub or Ethernet Switch See Also ethernet A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet A long thin window with a series of buttons that generally sits along the top or bottom edge of the screens When in this position a toolbar is said to be docked See Also Soft Key The two LCD screens on the console which display and allow the user to select information from them A parameter value that has been assigned or edited by the user Values which are not touched will remain at their default value See Also default value tracking A method of synchronising the console with other playback sources such as music video or film Hog 40S supports MIDI Linear Timecode and Video Timecode See Also MIDI SMPTE Cues have seve
26. If you want to record a palette as a reference palette select the Allow Refs record option 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures using other palettes as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Press the Allow Refs button 4 Press akey to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Direct ory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Direct Palettes Normally when you use a palette to assign parameter values for recording in a cue or scene a reference to the palette is inserted rather than numerical values To insert numerical values instead of references use direct palettes Cues and scenes recorded using direct palettes will not update if the palette is later changed because they contain ordinary parameter values rather than refer ences to a palette You can use a palette as a direct palette on a one off basis as you program or you can assign it to always act as a direct palette a direct palette is shown by a symbol D in the directory win dow To temporarily use an existing palette as a direct palette when calling it into the Programmer or editor e 1 Colour 1 the key indicates that the palette should be used in direct mode High End Systems Section 8 Palettes To create a direct palette 1 Assign the fixtures as required 2 Record 3 As Direct 4 Position 2
27. Lighting Control System 11 12 10 2 4 Refreshing CITP Previews sscscecererereerieee 176 10 2 5 Disabling CITP on DP8000 cceeeeeeeeee teeta eee aetna es 176 10 3 Catalyst Previews in the Media Picker cceeseeeeeeeeeeees 177 10 3 1 Configuring DP8000 for Catalyst Previews 0068 177 10 3 2 Patching Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst Media Serv ORS a se ondielg dec seat ne A Sedeas Prove E A res E teas eaedet 177 10 3 3 Refreshing Catalyst Previews cceeeeeeeeeee teen tees 178 10 3 4 Disabling Catalyst Preview Fetching on DP8000 178 10 4 Adding Previews to Pre v2 0 0 Show Files eeeeeeeeee es 179 10 5 Renaming amp Customizing Preview IMagQe S eccere 179 10 6 Managing Preview Packages ccceceeeeeneeeneeeeeeea esse een eeaee 180 Cues and Cuelist ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeeaees 183 11 1 Recording a CUe ins ap eaei ana eieae EAEE Eada TE aas 183 11 1 1 Recording to a Cuelist on a Master escenes 183 11 1 2 Programmer contents after Recording a Cue 183 11 1 3 Insert Merge and Replace ascsncccccccrcreere 184 11 1 4 Numbering Cues 0 0 cece eee teers teste nee need 184 11 15 NAMING CUCS esde eeoa paea bets sadte ences eee EA ees 184 11 2 Record Optlonss ive aunean ioari a eee 185 11 2 1 Recording Selected Fixtures Only cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 185 11 2 2 Record Remove Values from CUES cecer 185 14 3 Deleting Cues eisch
28. Midi Timecode brought into a console is automatically distributed over the network and can be used by any other console Connecting Midi Timecode Input To connect a Midi timecode source to the console 1 Connect the Midi source to the console s MIDI In port on the rear panel If you are connecting a generic Midi Class USB device for Midi Timecode input then you can ignore this step 2 Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi input port to bring Midi Timecode into the console then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected High End Systems Section 21 MIDI 21 3 2 21 3 3 as the midi input device If you are using an external Generic Midi Class USB device the make sure you select that device from the input drop down menu Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Nn a In the Timecode pane select MIDI as the active port Viewing Incoming MIDI Timecode You can view the timecode generated by any source in a Timecode Toolbar 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select a network node such as a console or a MIDI Timecode Processor 3 Press Timecode Toolbar The Timecode Toolbar will open If you have a cuelist with a timecode source selected you can also open the Timecode Toolbar with the View Timecode button in the Cuelist window The Tim
29. Output Show Palettes Num amp Intensity Studio Spot 575 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 A The Parked Output Window You can view and modify the parked settings of fixtures in the Parked Output window see Figure 16 4 The Parked Output window To open the Parked Output window e Open Parked the Parked button is on the toolbar that appears when you press the Open key Within this window you can edit parameter values in the same way as in any editor You can knockout fixtures or parameter values to stop them being parked or add or modify parameter values to park them 256 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Desk Compact q a obe Position r1 Colour 2 Num 4 intensity Studio Spot 575 13 100 PPS eow Per Fotre voe Pan TR r Shake Bink Colour Shake Bink Gobo Desk Channel queen 0 II SAISAISAISIISASSASPSDSSASSASSLLS LAL JS E0 SINISHAPSSASSASSLASLSLECLAELMDDLADEELLDL LS fen 0 VI SW ISIN SINPFPNSIAPPNIPNIPPNPPNPPSRISAS SS 00 II II III ITITI IV EEN IOV III IVINS ISS 4 gt Figure 16 4 The Parked Output window The Wheels Toolbar Parked parameters are shown in the Wheels Toolbar with an orange background or hatch pattern e Solid orange outline all selected fixtures have the parameter on this wheel parked e Diagonal line orange background some of the selected fixtures have the parameter on this wheel parked High End Systems 257 Section 17 Playback 17 1 Physical
30. Select Payback Mask 2 Disco Chase Cue 1 Cu Each cue step is by default equivalent to a beat so to set a chase that advances every second the rate needs to be 60 bpm By holding down the master s Choose key you can modify the playback rate effect rate and effect size on the parameter wheels Effect Size 288 High End Systems Section 17 Playback When you select Is a Chase the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window the following chase options appear e Playback Rate the speed of the chase defined in Beats Per Minute bpm e Crossfade the amount of each step that a crossfade is active for as a percentage Step Length by default each cue step is the equivalent to a beat This is helpful when you enter a rate using Tap Sync but then wish the chase to step at half or double speed For more on Tap Sync see Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync p 290 e Direction four directions are available Up stepping up through cue numbers Down stepping down through cue numbers Random stepping randomly through cue numbers and Bounce stepping up then down through cue numbers Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options Oi Or gi o You can also configure the following loop types in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window High End Systems 289 Section 17 Playback Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options o me axon g Mert Tase New Cues e Continuous the chase steps i
31. Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select a Programming Keys to associate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated Programming Keys High End Systems 331 Section 21 MIDI 21 2 4 Assigning MIDI Notes to Encoders and Wheels To assign MIDI Note information to the console s encoders and wheels not supported on Hog 4PC 1 Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window Dy Pe Pe oN In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Encoders to associate encoder messages with that MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated encoders and wheels not supported on Hog 4PC 332 High End Systems Section 21 MIDI Function Note Function Note i Wheel Encoder 3 12 i Wheel Encoder 3 13 Trackball Pan Encoder 4 14 Trackball Pan Encoder 4 15 Trackball Tilt Encoder 5 16 Trackball Tilt Encoder 5 17 Rate Wheel 18 Rate Wheel 19 Cente
32. Status Running Sessor Session Connected Session Connected Info Iniiaksing network OK Infor Loading Foture Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog DP application can be configured similarly to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Hog network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be as signed to the same port as your Hog console on the network The User Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the User Number to a unique device net number that is not used by any other devices on the Hog network 29 3 2 Configuring WYSIWYG To configure WYSIWYG 1 High End Systems In WYSIWYG open the Device Manager Live Device Manager Device Manager i Derice Marager Nore Type sms Connecten bad New Click on New to add an additional device Select Wholehog III DP as the new device Moerg 407 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity 3 The device window will now display the Hog DMX Processor 8000 Device Manager a m Delete _Commect Seba Al Urtnd AumoF ocs Connect onload Gose J Double click on this device or select it and press Properties The Properties window will open Consale Manufacturer Open Protocol Model Wholehag DP8000 Bind Name Wholehog DP3000 Ta UnBrr Address i Ports Universe Cha
33. Tip If you have a show file that contains reporting queries that you find particularly useful and that you wish to use in other show files then you can use the show merge utility to merge those report queries into other show files 26 2 Organizing and Saving Report Results By default the results of a report are aggregated and sorted by container list scene and then further sorted by location fixture and function value However you can custom sort sub sort and subaggregate the results as you wish To master sort and master aggregate the report results right click on any one of the column headers and select sort You can add other column headers into your master sort amp aggregation by right clicking on a column header and selecting sub aggregate For example you can sort and aggregate the reporting results by container and then sub aggregate by location so that each aggregate header encapsulates data reported for each cue in a list e g List 1 Cue 1 Once a report is run and the data is organized to your liking you can export the results as a CSV file or a PDF document by pressing the corresponding button in the report window A file browser will pop up allowing you to select a storage location for the saved report 26 3 Using Report Results to Edit Programming Clicking on any location cell in the report results will open that location inside of an editor This allows users to view the data in the origina
34. cael sees a een ee iba ieee 185 11 4 Copying and Moving CUES ccceeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeee anes a eeeaeeeee 186 1174 1 Copying Cues aieia nori pate Sa A Eaa aNu 186 11 4 2 Moving CUGS sssssssssssssserssrrrrstrtnrerrerrsrrernererrersern 187 11 5 Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist escncccccecreneee 187 11 6 Editing Cue Contents essssssssssrsssssrssrrersrtrrrerisrrsresererererere 188 11 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor ssseeccecece 189 11 7 Working with Tracking sssssssssssssrssrssresirrsrrernnrrernnrnnrenrenres 189 11 7 1 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording 189 11 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward 08 190 11 7 3 Deleting without Tracking Forward c eeeeeeeeees 191 11 7 4 Blocking CUES 0 eee teeter eee tere eee eaten teed 192 17 725 UADIOCKING piirinen ynn vaxge eget es rerata aata aE gaai 193 11 8 Mark Cues Move in Black ssssssssssrssrssrsrrsrrsrrsrnrrnrrrrrnrrrrenen 194 11 8 1 How to Mark to a Cue 20 cece e eee ee eee ates atten eeeae 194 11 8 2 Fade Mark verses Time Marks cceeeeeeeee sete eee aetna 195 11 8 3 Marking the First Cue in a Cue List aenescens 196 11 8 4 Cuelist Feedback for Mark CUES ceeeeeeeeee tees eee 197 11 9 Understanding Cuelists ccccceeceee nets cess tesa eee eeae een ees 197 11 10 Naming Cuelists 2 0 0 0 cence eee e tesa esate ae eeaeeea een eeeee 198 LIT Deleting GueliSts Arsiero a a e ies deere ba
35. control console features such as Programming buttons Playback buttons Touch Screen Soft Keys and Comment Macros Each of these feature categories uses a specific MIDI map to asso ciate notes with console functions High End Systems 329 21 2 1 Section 21 MIDI Bringing MIDI Notes into the Console To bring MIDI Notes into the console 1 6 Connect a MIDI device to the MIDI In port on the back of the console If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or an external USB Midi Widget to send Midi Notes into the console then connect the USB con nection of your external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi input port to bring Midi notes into the console then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected as the midi input device If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or external USB Midi widget to bring Midi notes into the console then select that device from the input drop down menu Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Console Settings Enable MIDI Notes In MIDI Show Control Unassigned Midi Channel MIDI Notes z ORAE Unassigned MIDI Timecode OERSEMGER Unassigned Open Sound Control Aeneas Unassigned Diagnostics ORAE UGE Unassigned Unassigned v
36. ers e 1Thru5 5 Thru 10 Enter fixture 1 has an intensity of 50 and fixture 5 an intensity of 10 6 4 4 Fanning Options By default fanning adjusts parameter values proportionally from the centre of the fixture selection You can have fanning work in other ways Fan Normal As described above the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in opposite directions For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 10 20 30 40 50 e Fan From Start The first fixture in the selection order remains unchanged while the last one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 30 40 50 60 70 e Fan From End The last fixture in the selection order remains unchanged while the first one s value changes the most For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 70 60 50 40 30 e Fan To Centre the middle fixture remains unchanged while the first and last fixtures values change the most in the same direction For example Before fanning 30 30 30 30 30 After fanning 50 40 30 40 50 You can set the fanning mode from the Fanning Toolbar e Press and hold the Fan key to display the Fanning Toolbar see Figure 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar All subsequent fans will follow the currently selected fanning mode until the editor is cleared Centre Reverse Reorder Figure
37. gt Cuelist 2 Select Use HTP Properties 0O Use HTP Pile add Effects O qo ls A Chase 0O Track Through Loops 0O Mark Fade New Cues Mark Time New Cu QO Mask Playback Select Payback Mask High End Systems Section 17 Playback Alternatively you can turn on Use HTP for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Important If you have an HTP master with the fader up i e intensities above zero then using Release or Pig Release has no effect on the intensity para meters To release the intensities of HTP masters bring the fader to zero For more on releasing cuelists see Releasing Masters p 263 17 3 2 Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others When you have several cuelists active at the same time control of fixture parameters programmed into one cuelist may be taken by another cuelist that also has programming for that fixture para meter For example if Cuelist 1 has programming for desk channels 1 3 and Cuelist 2 has pro gramming for desk channels 3 6 then running a cue in Cuelist 2 will override the intensity parameter of desk channel 3 You may want to return control of desk channel 3 to Cuelist 1 without having to run a cue in Cuelist 1 this is known as asserting Cuelist 1 Asserting a cuelist forces all fixture parameters to their programmed value in the cuelist To assert parameters on the cuelist attached to Master 3 for example pr
38. kind mask settings will determine which function values are recorded into the palette By default Hog 40S records the appropriate parameter values of all fixtures in the Programmer or editor not just those of the selected fixtures To only record from selected fixtures see Record ing Only Selected Fixtures p 163 To record for example a position palette 1 Inthe Programmer or editor assign the position parameters of the desired fixtures as you want them in the palette 2 Record Position the Position Directory opens 3 Palette 2 choose a location in the directory Or using the command line e Record Position 2 Enter If you leave out the palette location Record Position Enter the palette will be recorded in the next available location If the destination palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 165 8 1 1 Naming a Palette You can give a palette a name that will be displayed in the Palette Directory 1 Open Position opens the Position Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the palette to be named by pressing its button in the directory 4 Set name Enter type in the name High End Systems 155 Section 8 Palettes Tip To name a palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window
39. network Network nodes are items of equipment connected to the network Con soles DMX Processors and Hog 4PC systems are all nodes See Also DMX Processor The output of the console more specifically the fixtures that have non zero intensities a protocol for communication among computers sound synthesizers and other multimedia devices that is optimized for modern networking tech nology The time of the fade of the outgoing cue during a crossfade All fixtures that are decreasing in intensity will go down over this time See Also split fade path fade time A preset arrangement of cuelists residing on the masters Pages can be changed allowing masters to be used by many cuelists High End Systems Glossary palette parameter Parameter Wheel patch patch point path pig key pile on pixelMap pixelmap Layer playback wing plot point cue port number High End Systems A stored parameter setting such as position for one or more fixtures Fixtures of different make or type may share the same palette See Also directory A controllable property of the light produced by a fixture For example a fresnel has one attribute intensity Moving fixtures have pan and tilt parameters and perhaps colour beam shape and so on A wheel that facilitates the control of fixture parameters Parameter Wheels are fixture sensitive once loaded from the fixture library para meters are allocated logically
40. of the selected widget press the Beacon button to flash the LEDs on the widget If the drop down menu displays No DMX Widgets found check your USB connections Press Next to continue to the next step Step 2 of 4 Select DMX Widget Select DMX Widget to upgrade v 5 Enter the authorization code for the selected widget and press Next the au thorization code is delivered with the Widget Upgrade Kit If the code is in correct an error message will be displayed Re enter the proper authorization code Codes are unique for each USB DMX Widget and will not function unless they match the expected serial number and Widget ID number 422 High End Systems Section 30 Updating Console Software Step 3 of 4 Enter Authorization Code Enter the authorization code for Widget 2005 6 Once complete the widget will be fully upgraded You can now select Up grade Another to upgrade another widget or press Finish to exit the applic ation In the event of an error a message will be displayed Please contact High End Systems support for further assistance see How to Report Problems to Support p 446 Step 4 of 4 Complete The DMX Widget has been upgraded Please disconnect then reconnect the widget High End Systems 423 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Hog 4PC is a software program that runs the Hog 40S on Windows based computers You can download the current version for no charge at www flyingpig com The software
41. on the optional external displays You can move and resize windows using keys and buttons or by using the mouse or trackball Using Keys and Buttons The Window Control Toolbar sits at the top of the right hand touch screen and provides a quick and easy way to manipulate windows Its functions are also available as keyboard shortcuts High End Systems 25 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Button Function Shortcut Page Up Page Down Page Left and Page Right scroll the currently selected window The cursor isn t moved Copy creates a copy of the selected window This is Open slash helpful when you need to view two parts of the same window at once Size rotates through a range of set positions and Open plus or sizes for the selected window within its current minus screen The options are full screen and top bottom left and right half and quarter screens Holding down the Pig key while pressing Size rotates through the options in the reverse order E eee Move Screen moves the selected window between Open touch screens and external displays Maximise toggles the size of the currently selected Open Full window between full screen and its previous size Focus switches between windows in turn bringing Open Thru each to the front The unlock button allows the positions and sizes of Open all windows to be changed by the Trackball or mouse but not the toolbar buttons Windows are unlocked
42. rather than parking them Touches specified parameters and fixtures but as record ineligible Allows fine adjustment of the wheel s value inverts the current kind masking scheme for that record operation inverts the current kind masking scheme for that merge operation Tokens the word plot on the commandline Sets wheel to maximum value when encoder turned clockwise or minimum value when encoder turned counter clockwise Inverts wheel between positive and negative values when available ex gobo rotation knocks out the coordinating parameter value for selected fixtures in the current active editor Sets wheel to default value Sets wheel to default value and mode Sets all parameters of that kind to their default val ues Opens the fixture window When patching with View by DP enabled unpatches the selected fixtures Increases decreases intensities in proportion to their individual level For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 Opens the Colour Picker window Opens the Media Picker window Opens the Plots directory Closes active window Cycles through open windows change focus Maximizes active window Moves active window to next screen Copies and splits active window High End Systems Section 32 Cheat Sheets Open Open Pig Size on Window Control Toolbar Open 1 9 Open 0 Pi
43. se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci n continua contra incendios descarga el ctrica y lesiones personales Lea por favor todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje montaje y operaci n de este equipo BEGREIAT SiR Mit Lic KR BE RU ADORED ONRET OHERA LERI Sle p 457 FSERLTRS LY CORBEMAUT RE RSET ETORRERA TEE Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise stated your product is covered by a one year parts and labour limited warranty It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manufacturer will make the final determination as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all returned Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 2105 Gracy Farms
44. small medium and large Set the button size menu option to the desired setting and press okay The button size option you select for each directory is unique to that directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view Configuration Directory 0O Mask 0O C ntire Button Cl Show Auto Colour Swatch Button size Medium v Medium 0 Cancel Figure 9 5 Button Sizes Option 9 4 Show Fewer Buttons By default directory windows display both active buttons buttons that contain data and inactive buttons buttons with no data In some cases you may wish to hide the inactive buttons in the directory To hide the inactive buttons in a directory click on noes icon to open the window configuration menu and enable the show fewer buttons option The option to show fewer buttons is unique to each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view High End Systems 169 Section 9 Directory Windows Configuration Directory 0O Show Fewer Buttons Mask 0O C r Code Entire Button O Show Auto Colour Swatch Figure 9 6 Show Fewer Buttons Option 9 5 Show Auto Color Swatch The show auto color swatch option is avaiable only in palette directory windows and is only useful in cases where the user has programmed color mixing values into a palette within that directory When this option is turned on any buttons in the directory window that contain pale
45. values range for the first gobo value 0 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of slot names Select a slot name and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for the other DMX entries for each gobo in the protocol Define each DMX entry for Spins Tutorial W CreateNew Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Dmx Value a Real World gt 255 100 gt 65535 540 gt 65535 540 gt 65535 gt 270 gt 65535 gt 270 fariable 55 gt 0 gt 100 55 gt 0 gt 100 55 gt 0 2100 lt RJE BHHE H ao 7 lt lt D Gi w oni oni onion BEElElESislsieleleleie ziz eoto fS AAR 5 FAFAFA i e Goo ses hsz n Gobo TSn onas oorstop 0 UNS PEIEE F WEI New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Build Type 388 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder High End Systems Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categor ies Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9
46. 0 0 cece eee eee e eee cette eee a teen eee neta 112 5 2 7 Cloning DMX Processors cecene 113 5 2 8 Unpatching Fixtures ecceeceeeeeee eee tees teen eeeaeeene eed 114 5 3 Replicating Fixtures 20 0 0 hiin n T 116 5 4 Changing the Fixture Type ccececeeeeeee eee e eee e een eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 116 5 5 Removing a Fixture from the SNOW ccceeeeeeeeee nese eeeeeeeaes 117 5 6 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically cee 117 5 7 Configuring Fixtures ssssssssssrsssrersrrrrrsrrerrerrsrrsrerererereerrerens 119 5 7 1 Fixture Configuration sssssssssssrsserersresrrsrrsresrrsrrererere 119 5 7 2 Parameter Configuration ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea een ees 122 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters 0e 000 127 6 1 Selecting Fixtures cc csc ieee ia r aA AEE EEA 127 6 1 1 Selecting Single Fixtures cece eee eee ee eeeeeae ees 127 6 1 2 Selecting Multiple Fixtures 2 1 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeee eee nena es 127 6 1 3 Select All pripiti a irea es a rO EEEE ENEAN 128 6 1 4 Inverting the Selection sessererrerrerrerrirrrrerrerrenns 128 6 1 5 SUB Selections jee cicada inn ee eae os 129 6 1 6 Deselecting Fixtures cc cceeeeeceee cece nets a eeea nese eee eeaee 129 6 1 7 Reselecting FIXtureS 1 00 cece cece cece eee eee anes atest 130 6 2 Selection Ordef iiss ea p E cease AAE ei 130 6 2 1 Reverse Shuffle and Reorder cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 130 6 3 Modify
47. 1 Target DP Target Universe Net Name Typ O 1 DP 8000 DP 8000 DP 8000 DP 8000 O Offset Specify a value to offset the addresses by Figure 5 6 The Clone Universe window High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures If cloning will overwrite patch information in the destination you will be asked for confirmation The console will only unpatch previous fixtures that are in the way of new ones the rest of the destination universe will be untouched Z Tip You can also move patching from one universe to another by cloning the patch to the new universe and then unpatching the old universe see Unpatching Fixtures p 114 5 2 7 Cloning DMX Processors You can copy fixture and associated patch information from one DP8000 to another by cloning a DP8000 s patch A selected fixture will then control recurring patch locations across several DP8000s To clone the patching of one DP8000 to another 1 High End Systems Setup Patch gt View by DP open the Fixture window in View by DP view Select the DP8000 to clone by selecting it from the DP8000 drop down menu Press Clone DP The Clone DMX Processor window will open see Figure 5 7 The Clone DP window Select a source DP8000 from the source section of the window Click Unpatch Source if you wish to move patch entries to the destination DP8000 instead of copying them Select a destination DP8000 from t
48. 12 Note 21 2 6 Assigning MIDI Notes to Comment Macros To assign MIDI Note information to comment macros Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab ee Ne o In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Comment Macros to associate with the MIDI Channel 334 High End Systems Section 21 MIDI Console Settings Enable MIDI Notes In Channel 1 Comment Macros MIDI Notes Unassigned MIDI Timecode nce Unassigned si CEGE Unassigned Diagnostics SEGER Unassigned Unassigned 6 Midi Notes Mapping Note Macro 7 Assign a comment macro in the macro field to a specific MIDI Note value High End Systems 335 21 2 7 Section 21 MIDI Using Midi to Control Faders You can control the front panel faders of your console including the Grand Master fader by sending Midi controller event messages to the console Not supported on Hog 4PC Since the Hog 40S listens for Midi controller events on all midi channels a midi channel assign ment for faders is not neccesary The Hog 4 console s front panel faders are hard coded to the following midi controller events event values 0 lt 127 Hog 4 fader values 0 lt 100 Fader Controller Grand Master One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oO 21 3 21 3 1 336 MIDI timecode
49. 159 8 6 2 Recording Palettes with Kind Masking ceeee 161 8 6 3 Palette TIMING ccc cece eee eee ee eeeneeea essa een eeaeeaeeeaes 163 8 6 4 Reference Palettes 20 2 0 eceeeceee cece eeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeea need 164 8 6 5 Direct Palettes 2 0 0 0 cecceeceeeeeeeee eee tesa tesa ees eeae een eed 164 8 7 Insert Merge and Replace cceeceeeeeeeeee eee e eee a teen eeea tesa eenaes 165 9 Directory WINKOWS ccccceseeeee eee eee eee sees eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaee 167 9 1 Mask IPBCE Palette Directories Only ccccecceeseeeeeneeeeeneees 167 9 2 Color COdING sc eee ene tL eit ea eee 168 9 2 1 Coloring the entire button 2 1 0 eect e eee eee eee 168 9 3 Button SIZES ieni thers aeea iei ia daaa eaaa ai EN 169 9 4 Show Fewer Buttons ssssssssssssrssrssresrrsrererererenrrenrsrnerenererene 169 9 5 Show Auto Color Swatch sssssssssssrserssrsrsrierrerrerrerrsrererrerrn 170 9 6 Spreadsheet VIEW ssssssssrsrssrssrrsrrsrsrrrersrtrrrerierrerrsrrerererere 171 10 Media Picker cccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeuaeeeaeeeaeeaneeaeeas 173 10 1 Media Picker Window Options ssssssssserssrssrsrierierrerrerrerrersns 173 10 2 CITP Previews in the Media Picker scscscererereeerreee 175 10 2 1 Supported CITP Media Server Clients a c 175 10 2 2 Configuring DP8000 for CITP Discovery sesescccees 175 10 2 3 Patching fixtures to CITP discovered fixtures 175 vi High End Systems
50. 2 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeee eens 277 17 4 Understanding Feedback ccccceeceee eee e testes eee nessa nena eeaee 278 17 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback 0 278 17 4 2 Cuelist Feedback sssssssssssssrrsrssrerrrereresresresrrerererere 280 17 4 3 The Output WINdOW 2 0 0 eect cette eee eae ee anes eeeee 281 17 4 4 The Levels View WiNdOW ccceceeeeeee eee eeee nesta eeenes 284 17 5 Advanced Playback ccceeececeee eee sete nett ates atten teen eeaeeaeeas 285 17 5 1 Adjusting the Playback and Effect Rates of a Mas COP edie neGecnhataeenamrah teens siiaeaacecccunesiveeaseieadtenmesrarecn set T 285 17 5 2 Adjusting the Effect Size of a Master ee 286 17 5 3 Manually Crossfading Cuelists ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeee es 286 17 54 PCB F dEr ee tag a A ots terete 287 17 5 5 Using a Cuelist as a Chase 2 00 ee eee sete eeeeaee 288 17 5 6 Cuelists and Tracking cccceceeeeeee eee eeeee tesa eee eeaee 291 17 5 7 Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs 291 17 5 8 Playback Masking ccceeeceeeee tees teen teen teen eee a teen nena 291 1776 Grand Master eiae ank arere des gece s san dh cede cette tees aKa TATENA F 292 17 621 GM KEY teccvcscccartverecsserececen epider enectccisctacceatecuncdesteents 292 17 6 2 DBO KE veces acide stesso ye Wendie Gadde seeing nara ave 293 17 6 3 Flash key below the Grand Master eeeeeeeeees 293 17 7 Inhibitive Masters 0 0
51. 261 Time 213 trackball 95 update 46 252 killing processes 444 kinds 239 fixed kinds 239 user kinds 239 knockout button 148 L launch existing show 89 automatically 90 launch macros 91 launch new show 89 learn timing 219 leave in background 302 matching master levels 304 levels view window 284 library merged status 48 merging 99 linear timecode see timecode link cues 223 links see link cues live key 245 248 locking console 57 dmx processor 60 logging off 57 High End Systems Index loops 223 action of go key 223 tracking through 225 lower priority 43 lowlight 252 lowlight palette 34 LTP 31 273 274 M macro command syntax 353 when changing pages 304 when cues run 291 when launching a show 91 maintain state 225 maintenance 449 manual crossfade 286 manual cues 218 mark cues 194 mask syntax 21 when recording effect palettes 236 when recording palettes 161 masking playback 291 when recording fade times 209 master wing adding 85 master wing 4 technical specifications 465 masters choosen 266 grand master 292 inhibitive 293 pages 301 physical 259 selected 266 virtual 259 271 which is the currently chosen master 22 matching Levels 304 media picker 173 adding custom images and names to previews 179 catalyst 177 CITP 175 media preview package management 180 options 173 175 High End Systems updating older show files wit
52. 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 30 40 50 Because of tracking when you copy a cue to another location you only copy the hard values so you do not create a new cue that actually represents the on stage look that you would get by running the original cue To copy both hard and tracked values you can use Copy and State e List 1 Cue 5 Copy State List 2 Cue 1 Enter creates a new cue in Cuelist 2 that is the state of Cue 5 in Cuelist 1 11 7 5 Unblocking Unblocking removes redundant hard parameter values A parameter value is redundant in a cue if itis the same as the value for that parameter in the previous cue in the same cuelist For example Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 50 100 100 50 In this cuelist the values for channels 1 3 and 4 are redundant in cue 3 After unblocking the values in the cuelist would be Channel 1 2 3 4 Cue 1 100 0 50 50 Cue 2 50 100 Cue 3 100 To unblock cues use the Unblock button in the Main Toolbar e Cue3Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 on the currently chosen master ListlCue3Unblock Enter unblock cue 3 of cuelist 1 High End Systems 193 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists e Cue 1 Thru 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only colour parameters in cues 1 through 10 of the cuelist on the currently chosen master e List 1 Cue 3 Group 10 Colour Unblock Enter unblock only the colour parameters of fixtures in Group 3
53. 399 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity All Hog 40S consoles are capable of connecting directly to visualisers via the HogNet network Currently ESP Vision WYSIWYG MSD Capture and Light Converse are supported The Hog 4 Connectivity application must be installed on the visualization computer for this connectivity to function This section describes the basic information needed to install the Hog 4 Connectivity application on your visualiser computer as well as the configuration of the application For in depth visualiser usage please contact the visualiser manufacturer see Visualiser Support Contacts p 411 29 1 Installing the Connectivity Application You can download the current Hog 4 Connectivity installation application from the High End Systems website www highend com or or you can select to install the connectivity driver when installing Hog 4PC The following instructions assume you are running the separate connectivity driver installation To install the connectivity application 1 Double click the HogConnect_x x x x msi file to launch the install wizard 2 The Hog Connect installer will check your operating system and windows installer versions and then display the welcome screen Press Next to begin the installation process Hog Connectivity 10 0 266 Setup Welcome to the Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard wil instal Hog Conmectity 1 0 0 266 on your computer Cick Next t
54. 60Hz 2 5 A maximum USB 2 x Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports rear Ethernet 1 x Gigabit base TX Ethernet port DMX out 2 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Keyboard Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Supported 36 5 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 250W Weight 17 Ibs 7 7 kg Dimensions 20 74 526 8mm wide by 21 83 554 37mm deep by 3 97 100 78mm high 462 High End Systems Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 6 Hedge Hog 4 Console Jan 2015 and later 36 6 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 2 5 A maximum Video Out 1 x DVI D 1 x VGA only 1 can be used at a time USB 2 x Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports rear 2 x Universal Serial Bus 3 0 ports rear Ethernet 2 x Gigabit base TX Ethernet port DMX out 2 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Keyboard Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Supported 36 6 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 250W Weight 17 Ibs 7 7 kg Dimensions 20 74 526 8mm wide by 21 83 554 37mm deep by 3 97 100 78mm high 36 6 3 Back Panel Drawing x Figure 36 2 Back panel of HedgeHog 4 Console Manufactured 2015 and later 36 7 Nano Hog 4 Console 36 7 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back High End Systems 463 Section 36 Technical Specifications Main
55. 9 10 2012 4 32 46 PM Hog 4 Show Hog 4 Show E 2945 50AM Hog 4 Show 7 2012 11 4012 AM Figure 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window Tip You can use drag and drop to move files to the CD Master list Note that files will always be copied not moved High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 1 Setting Up the Console 3 1 1 Starting Up the Console To power on and start up the console plug one end of a standard IEC power cable into any 100 220 VAC power source and plug the other end into the console s dedicated IEC power port and then turn the power switch on the back of the console to the on position Make sure that any ex ternal bootable media such as bootable USB flash drives or CDs are removed from the console before booting as the console may try to boot to that media instead of to the installed operating system When the console has finishing booting you will see two windows the Hog 40S splash screen and the Hog 40S start screen Your console is now ready for operation Important Using an ungrounded power source leads to a greater risk of shock and may cause the motorized faders on the Hog 4 and Full Boar 4 consoles to not function properly Always make sure that the power source for your console is properly grounded Hog Start Figure 3 1 Start Screen your console is ready to use 3 1 2 Adjusting the Date and Time The console has a built in clock which is shown at the far right
56. A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Lamp Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Lamp Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Strike Select this cell and press Set Choose Douse from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the lamp douse according to the DMX protocol 245 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the lamp strike ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Lamp Control functions 27 2 4 Step 4 Build the Fixture 392 Your fixture should be similar to the example below High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Type Information Model Name Tutorial Auth Michael Date Modified Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel To build the fixture 1 Press the Build Type button to build the fixture library 2 If any errors are found a dialog will explain the error Make any corrections and build again 3 A dialog box will confirm a successful build of a library High End Systems a Functio Feature D e Vorid mx Valu a Re A intensity intensity 0 gt 255 ____ 0 gt 100 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535___ 0 gt 540 Slots lo
57. Cc Cue 1 100 50 100 Cue 2 100 25 50 Cue 3 100 79 75 With a non tracking console each value would have to be recorded into each cue as displayed above However with a tracking console such as the Hog 4 the only data that really needs to be recorded is much simpler as shown in the table below Fixture A B C Cue 1 100 50 100 Cue 2 100 Cue 3 75 As you can see fixture A only has to be recorded at 100 in cue 1 because that value will track all the way from cue 1 to cue 3 On the other hand since fixtures B and C change value in each cue the tracking console needs to have unique values recorded in each cue When discussing the contents of a cue or the state of playback on stage the following terms are commonly used e Hard Values Touched Values Values programmed into the current cue e Tracked Values Transparent Values Values assigned e State The summation of both tracked and hard coded values in playback The Hog 40S automatically recalls the state of any cue regardless of whether or not the cuelist was played in order this allows allows the console operator to jump around and play cues out of order while preserving the way the cue was meant to look 2 5 HTP and LTP Taditional theater desks that are not designed to handle moving lights will work on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis This means that if a fixture s intensity is being controlled by two different parts of the console such as a pl
58. Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World intensity 0 gt 255 0 gt 100 Pan Pan SSS Pan Pan gt B5535 as rit e 065535 0 gt 270 frit tf 65535 0 gt 270 New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Define each DMX entry for Slots 386 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Tutorial W Create New Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World 2 Ee ee Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 OT 0 gt 540 Tit e o 065535 0270 l6 Cyan Variable 255 gt 0 0 gt 100 Yellow i cal eal ale l sisisisis s 2 B G a o a a 5 o o a Ss a a obo obo obo UNUSED 0 0100 0 0 0O Sisis o o sislc c lc j j j j New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry 1 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 9 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Beam on the left column to display a list of Beam function sub categor ies 3 Select Gobo as the desired function The window will close and you will see Gobo assigned as the function and feature for channel 9 Note the feature column will auto fill with slots High End Systems 387 Section 27 The Fixture Builder 4 Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX
59. Dmx 6 Dmx 7 321 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 5 2 The Fixture Patch window You can also use the keypad to patch fixtures For example to patch Studio Color 1 to DMX Processor 2 Universe 4 at address 17 Fixture 1 2 4 17 Enter High End Systems 107 5 2 1 5 2 2 108 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures To patch further fixtures to the same DMX Processor and universe you can use the shorthand Fixture 2 33 Enter To patch a fixture at the next available address on the same DMX Processor and universe Fixture 3 Enter Again if you have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Patching Several Fixtures at Once If you select several fixtures and patch them Hog 40S will allocate them to a continuous range of DMX addresses assigning each fixture s patch address so that it follows on from the last For example to patch 5 Studio Colors starting at DMX address 1 1 Open Fixture open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Thru 5 Patch 1 Enter You can use the key as an al ternative to the Patch button Studio Colors 1 to 5 will now have the incremental patch addresses of 1 1 1 17 1 33 1 49 and 1 65 Note that the fixtures selected do not have to be from a contiguous range and they can be of different types Tip When you patch a range of fixtures Hog 40S takes the selection order into account so t
60. E A 0O O Make Intensity palettes Make Position palettes Make Colour palettes Separate by whee Make Beam palettes Separate by wheel Alignment spacing v 10 a Figure 5 10 The Auto Palettes window You can choose to have the console automatically make 118 Groups If the Make Groups button is depressed the console will make groups for each fixture type You can specify the repeat multiple for the groups to be created For example with a value of 3 Group 1 will contain fixtures 1 4 7 10 Group 2 fixtures 2 5 8 11 Group 3 fixtures 3 6 9 12 Intensity Palettes If the Make Intensity Palettes button is depressed the console will make intensity palettes Position Palettes If the Make Position Palettes button is depressed the console will make position palettes Colour Palettes If the Make Colour Palettes button is depressed the console will make colour palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by Wheel button the console will create separate colour palettes for each colour wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to program looks that use both wheels simultaneously without the palettes conflicting with each other Auto generated Colour palettes that make use of colour mixing in formation will automatically have their buttons colour coded with appropriate custom colour selections High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing
61. Enter choose the Sine table from the drop down menu and confirm by pressing Enter Select Offset select the Offset view in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read 0 Deg Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging Set 1 Thru 288 Enter offset pan and tilt equally across the fixtures Once you have applied an effect to a parameter it will appear in the Value view of the Programmer or editor with the effects symbol next to the value Programmer 232 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Tip When assigning effect parameters such as Offset remember that values 0 and 360 Degrees are the same Fanning a range of fixtures from 0 through to 360 degrees of offset will mean that the first and last fixtures will share the same offset value 14 1 5 Tracking Table Effects By default effects values track through to subsequent cues until a new value for the particular parameter is reached You can turn effects on and off set them to track through in the Table column of the Effects Engine Programmer or editor In the Programmer for example 1 Select Table view 2 Select the cell of the parameter for which you want to turn the effect off or allow to track through and press Set 3 Select Off or Track from the drop down menu 14 1 6 Cue Timing and Table Effects When you record a cue scene or palette that includes effects values each fixture parameter has its fade de
62. High End Systems Section 7 Groups 7 1 Recording Groups When recording a group only the active fixture selection is recorded not all the fixtures currently in the editor To record a group 1 Select the desired fixtures in the Programmer or editor Record Group the Group Directory window opens Select the destination location in the Group Directory window Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter RS If the destination location is already used you will be asked to choose an op tion Insert Merge and Replace p 154 When you record a group the selection order is also saved This controls how fanning and effects are applied to the fixtures in the group and is significant when using the Next and Back buttons see Selection Order p 130 Fanning p 144 and Effects p 227 Tip Hog 40S can automatically generate a useful set of groups based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically p 117 7 2 Naming Groups You can give a group a name that will be displayed in the Group Directory window 1 Open Group opens the Group Directory window 2 Select the group to be named 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can name a group cue scene or palette immediately after recording it by pressing the Set key The Quickname window will open and you can enter the name and select OK High End Systems 151 Section 7 Groups 7 3 Using Groups in
63. Hog show is using a version 2 5 or greater fixture library Check with Cast regarding the WYSIWYG fixture libraries 29 5 Visualiser Support Contacts ESP Vision www espvision com WYSIWYG Cast www castlighting com MSD www martin com Capture www capturesweden com Light Converse www lightconverse net High End Systems 411 Section 30 Updating Console Software 30 1 Software Update Hog console software can be updated using an fpspkg installer package downloadable from the Flying Pig website Hog 4PC is upgraded using an msi installer package For details on in stalling upgrading Hog 4PC see Installing Hog 4PC p 425 To upgrade software on your Hog 4 not Hog 4PC 1 Download the FPSPKG installer from the Flying Pig website once downloaded the file name will be Hog4_X X X X fpspkg where the Xs represented the software version number 2 Copy the file to a USB Flash drive 3 Insert the USB Flash drive containing the upgrade file into any USB slot on the console 4 Go to the Start window on your console and press the Software button located at the bottom of the Start window 5 Browse to the USB flash drive and select the file containing the software version to upgrade and press OK 6 Hog 4OS will continue with the upgrade without further interaction Upgrades typically less than 20 seconds unless otherwise noted in the release notes When the console completes the upgrade all upggrade dialogue boxes wil
64. KEE ODT TILE JITOA ZELI FP ROV URI OORHOHSMIR fei SD Green Yellow WEE OWI LT Fel e Blue O7 DPILE FIT OBRICN NRE N MALE BICKSSONEBMILEELTERSL Brown Kf OF TPILE FIT OIwWRAIXK L HR ECS MEMELS Id HILSON MICHGMLTRS bs CO BIE Class I ATC ITQAITQREIL7 AZ LINIE YEA COR BILEIR LIKE COMEAHRET CORBEMRtaR IFS HSEWCKSEL S32 RET DAAR BRADY RL OR SL Sip MRO LAKE OLRMOAOMTS 1 7 kD CEH RIRETTAS AN VILFELTHECA 457 Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 1 Hog 4 Console 36 1 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in MIDI in out thru LTC In DVI out Ethernet USB DMX out Keyboard V Lock style locking IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 90 250V 50 60Hz 2A maximum 1 x 5x20mm 5A T fuse Musical Instrument Digital Interface input output and thru ports 3 pin XLR Linear Timecode Input 3 x DVI I single link female connectors 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit Ethernet port Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 6 rear 1 inside front utility tray 1 inside armrest 8 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Galvanized Isolated Built in Miniature QWERTY keyboard 36 1 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power Weight Dimensions with Screen Down Dimensions with Screen Up 300W 75 Ibs 34 kg 40 5 wide x 28 49 723 7mm deep x 6 49 164 75mm high 40 5 1028 7mm wide x 28 49 723 7mm d
65. Lane Austin Texas 78758 USA High End Systems 3 Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for products shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality Third Party Software Acknowledgements AMD This product uses the Catalyst fglrx drivers Boost The product include Boost software distributed under the Boost Software License Version 1 0 ht tp www boost org LICENSE_1_0 txt Botan This product includes s
66. Learn Timing p 219 Clock Triggers the cue when the specified real world time and date is reached on the Hog 40S built in clock see Clock Triggers p 220 13 4 1 Learn Timing Learn Timing allows you to assign a cue s wait time value by manual executing the cues with the Go key when the learn timing option is selected for the cuelist If a timecode clock assigned to that list is running when learn timing is enabled then the wait value recorded into the wait cell will be a timecode value To use Learn Timing with timecode 1 2 8 Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Options Cuelist Options open the Cuelist pane of the cuelist s Options window Select Enable Timecode and choose a timecode source Close the Options window In the Cuelist window click View Timecode The Timecode Toolbar will open If your timecode source is not currently running click Simulate on the Timecode Toolbar to have the console create a timecode source Controls for the timecode will appear In the Cuelist window select Learn Timing Start the timecode and press the Go key when the timecode reaches the time that you want each cue to go A timecode frame value will appear in the Wait cell for each cue When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the timecode the cues will be triggered when the timecode reaches each cue s assigned frame For more information on timecode see MIDI time
67. Note the feature column will auto fill with slots Select this cell and press Set Choose Spin from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range values for the gobo spin according to the DMX protocol 100 gt 200 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in RPM 100 gt 100rpm and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the random spin portion of the protocol using an other DMX entry for channel 9 389 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Strobe Control Channel Fixture Builder Tutorial Create New Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value a Real World intensity intensity 0 gt 255 _ _ 0 gt 100 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 05 40 Pan Pan 0 gt 65535 0 gt 540 Tit o e 065535 0 gt 270 mt sit o 065535 f0 gt 270 6 Cyan Variable ___ 255 gt 0 0 gt 100 7 Magenta i gt 100 Yellow fariable gt 100 x a a 3 Strobe trobe Fixture Control Fixture Control w Strobe nT Adai inl p 3 g g New D o o oD m 3 x m 3 2 Build Type The number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel cell for channel 10 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an
68. Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Hog system and WYSIWYG should begin working You can close the Wholehog DP window and the connectivity will continue as long as the Hog logo remains in the task bar High End Systems 409 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity m o 11 57AM Autofocus Feature WYSIWYG can send information back to your Hog console to allow lights to be automatically positioned to a particular location on stage rather than individually positioning the fixtures using the console s controls Refer to the WYSIWYG Users Manual for further details on the Autofocus feature When WYSIWYG Autofocus is enabled selecting and deselecting fixtures in WYSIWYG will do the same on your console You can also use the functions in WYSIWYG to assign the intensity iris pan tilt and CMY colour mixing values in the active editor or programmer on the Hog console Note that the Autofocus feature requires that the Hog show file uses a fixture library version 2 5 or greater 29 4 410 Troubleshooting 1 When launching a visualiser a message saying Error loading lt path gt lxhog3dp dll or hog4 dll appears The driver can not be located Run the installer again 2 Windows 98 or ME will not run the msi installer Download and install the Windows Installer 2 0 update from Microsoft and run the Hog Connectivity installer again 3 The Wholehog DP window does not open when the visualiser is lau
69. Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select its SwpAxes cell 3 Press Set and choose Swap to swap axes Proportional Patch You can use proportional patching to change the intensity value output by the console to a fixture relative to the intensity value that has been programmed All intensity values for the fixture are High End Systems 121 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures reduced in proportion so that with a proportional patch of 80 a programmed intensity of 100 would be output as an intensity of 80 and one of 50 would be output as 40 You can use this to limit the maximum intensity of a fixture so that it never goes above 80 for example by assigning the proportional patch to 80 To assign a fixture s proportional patch 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the Intensity cell for the fixture required 3 Set percentage Enter enter a percentage 4 To return the proportional patch to normal assign the value to 100 You can assign a proportional patch value of above 100 For example if you patch at 200 the intensity value that the console outputs will be twice that programmed A programmed value of 25 will give 50 output and 50 will give 100 Programmed levels above 50 will not regrettably give fixture intensities above 100 Note that if you proportionally patch a fixture its intensity will still be displayed on the console in the range 0 to 100 even though the output v
70. Programming You use groups in the same way that you would use fixture selections for example e Group 1 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 e Group 1 50 Enter selects all the fixtures in Group 1 and sets their intens ity to 50 e Group 1 Fixture 3 50 Enter you can mix fixture and group selections One particularly useful syntax to use with groups is the key e Group 1 Group 3 selects only fixtures that are in both groups 7 4 7 4 1 Editing Group Contents To edit a group s contents select the group within the Programmer or editor make changes to the selection and re record the group Hog 40S will ask you to choose from Insert Merge and Replace p 154 Select Replace to update the group with the new selection Removing Fixtures from Groups You can remove the fixtures that are currently selected in the Programmer or editor from a pre viously recorded group If you have a fixture selected in the Programmer or editor that is not in the group that fixture is ignored For example if you have a group containing fixtures 1 5 and you want to remove Fixture 2 1 Fixture 2 Enter select the fixture you want to remove 2 Record Remove the Remove button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Group 5 Enter removes Fixture 2 from Group 5 7 5 152 Deleting Groups To delete a group 1 Group 1 Delete deletes group 1 2 Click OK to confirm the
71. Systems aD Section 3 Setting Up the System You can adjust the timings for Repeat Delay Repeat Period and Double Press in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window Tip You can use an external keyboard to control many of the console s func tions as well as entering numbers and text see Keyboard Shortcuts p 435 Using the On screen Keyboard 3 1 9 You can use the on screen keyboard to enter text when an external keyboard is not present see Figure 3 3 The On screen Keyboard When prompted to insert text press the Set key to launch a touch screen keyboard You can use the Pig key as a shift for uppercase characters Press the Enter key when you have finished typing To close the on screen keyboard without making any changes press Set instead of Enter Caps Lock Shift Esc Figure 3 3 The On screen Keyboard Trackball Using an External Trackball 56 External USB trackballs can be connected to the console via the console s USB ports Most ex ternal USB trackballs are supported only as an external mouse with left and right click capabilities however a select set of trackballs listed below are fully supported as functional Hog 4 OS trackballs support for all four trackball buttons and support for the use of the trackball in both pointer and POS mode Kensington Expert Mouse Model K64325 Kensington Orbit Wireless Mobile Trackball Model K72352US note does not have top left and
72. Tables e Iris Chase A Sawtooth table is applied to the iris Tip You can create many of these useful combinations of tables using the predefined effects palettes see Predefined Effect Palettes p 235 14 1 2 Table Effect Attributes The appearance of the effect table through a combination of adjustments to its attributes rate size offset begin end start length direction bounce and N shot Effect Rate 228 The effect rate controls the speed of the effect in cycles per minute Adjusting an effect s rate globally will increase or decrease the number of cycles it completes per minute When combining effects you can use the rate attribute to build a specific look For example if you create an effect where a fixture performs a circular motion fading in on the first circuit out on the second then the effect on the intensity parameter would need to be half of the rate on the position parameters The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different rate values 60 cpm 30 cpm 120 cpm High End Systems Section 14 Effects Effect Size The range over which the parameter value varies This is described in terms appropriate for the parameter for example degrees for position parameters or slots for slotted colour parameters For example applying a Sine wave with the default size of 5Hz to a base value strobe rate of 5Hz will vary it from O0Hz throug
73. The three kinds work in different ways when you apply the palette to fixtures during programming e Global the palette s parameter values are applied to all selected fixtures that have that parameter For example a colour palette containing hue and saturation parameters is applied to all selected fixtures that have hue and saturation e Per Fixture Type the palette s parameter values are applied to all fixtures of that type For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575s will only be applied to selected Studio Color 575s e Per Fixture the palette s parameter values are applied only to those specific fixtures that are both in the palette and selected in the editor For example a palette containing parameter values for Studio Color 575 1 will only be applied to that fixture and only then if it is selected High End Systems 159 160 Section 8 Palettes By default the following rules determine how the palette is recorded 1 Position palettes are always recorded Per Fixture 2 Ifall the fixtures to be recorded have exactly the same parameter values then the palette is recorded as Global 3 Otherwise the palette is recorded Per Fixture In the palette s editor the parameter values in a Global palette will appear as All Types Similarly a palette with Per Fixture Type values will show them grouped by fixture type see Figure 8 3 A Palette with Global Parameter Values Figure 8 4 A Pale
74. Trackball and Trackball Ring Preferences 0 08 94 High End Systems Lighting Control System 4 11 4 Center Wheel Preferences cccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeene ees 96 4 11 5 Encoder Wheel Button Options cc eeeeeeeeeeee eee 98 4 11 6 Keys and Button Preferences ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 98 4 11 7 Importing and Exporting Show Preferences 98 4 12 Merging SHOWS iige iedit ananin E eaeese esse essa ikan nena een esaeeaes 99 4 12 1 Merging Fixture Types eeen 100 4 12 2 Merging Fixtures ceecceeeeceee eee eee a eee eeee eee eeae eee 101 4 12 3 Merging Programming cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeea tesa eeaaes 103 4 12 4 Dependencies ccceec eee cece cette eee e en eeeaeeea ees eeaee 104 4 12 5 Patching after show Merge cceeeeeeeee tees eeeneeene es 104 4 12 6 Merging Examples cccseeeeeeeceee eee eee eee een een ees 104 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 0c cesseeseeeeeeeee 105 5L Adding FIXCUPES anera reta Ddepo teens PE aaa Ta reas ated 105 5 2 Patching Fixtures pianeta aeia aa EA AA TARE 106 5 2 1 Patching Several Fixtures at ONCE cececceeeeeeeeee eee eees 108 5 2 2 Patching Fixtures to Multiple Addresses 0 108 5 2 3 Finding Unused DMX Addresses eener 109 5 2 4 Adding and Removing DMX Processors 0 seeeeeees 110 5 2 5 Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points ceeeeeeeeeees 110 5 2 6 Cloning Universes
75. Y Trackball Keys Setup Preferences Trackball Select Pointer or Position from the drop down menu to lock the Trackball in that mode Select Toggles to restore the ability to change modes with the top right Trackball key Select OK to apply and close Tip Make sure you have an external mouse connected if you lock the Trackball in position mode and you don t want to control the on screen pointer only by pressing the touchscreens You can configure the function of the four keys surrounding the Trackball according to the current mode pointer or position For example in pointer mode you can have Right Click Left Click Flip and Ball Mode mapped while in position mode you could have Flip Next Ortho Toggle and Ball Mode mapped The Trackball keys are assigned in the Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window User Preferences Figure 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences window The following navigation functions are available High End Systems Ball Mode switches the Trackball between position and pointer modes Ortho Toggle switches the Trackball between Ortho and Normal When in position mode with ortho on the Trackball will only control pan or tilt not both at the same time This can be useful for accurately setting fixtures Right Click the same as a right click with the mouse This is usually used to bring up a cont
76. and press the Report button on the main toolbar to open a new reporting window Choose an option from the drop down menu for Find programming that matches When set to all of the following the console will only return data that matches all the query statements When set to any of the following the console will return data that matches any of the query statements At least one query statement is required in the query pane of the report window in order for the console to successfully run the report To add or subtract query statements use the and X buttons to the right of each query statement Once you are finished editing the query press the Run button The console will now run the query against the data in the show file and post the results of the query in the bottom half of the reporting window Follow these instruction to save a query High End Systems SAL ES Dts BS Create a query in the query section of the report window Press the Save Query button Name the query in the save query dialogue box Press OK The saved query will be listed in the query drop down menu at the top left of the report window To recall a saved query simply select the query from the drop down menu Section 26 Reporting Follow these instruction to delete a query 1 Select a saved query from the queries drop down menu at the top left of the report window 2 Press the Delete Query button
77. appropriate kind key To restore the default values for all parameters of the current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and press the Fixture key 6 4 6 4 1 144 Fanning Fanning allows you to assign a parameter across several fixtures so that the parameter values are equally spaced For example if you have five fixtures all at 50 intensity you can use fanning easily to assign intensities of 30 40 50 60 and 70 across five fixtures Note that in this example the middle value of the five stays the same and the end values change the most while the other values change proportionally You can fan any values including parameters and timings For example you can use fanning with position suppose that you have seven moving lights on an upstage position all pointing downstage towards the audience You could fan the Pan parameters so that the centre fixture still points downstage and the others turn progressively out to stage left and right The fixture selection order is significant when fanning see Selection Order p 130 The value change when fanning is always relative to its current value if there is no current value the para meter will fan from its default value Tip Choosing the initial or base value is important when fanning as the parameter values cannot go below 0 or above 100 Make sure that you leave enough of the value range for the value to fan into Using the Fan Key To fa
78. arrangement of windows that can be accessed with a single button press from the View Toolbar A means of running a cuelist without having it attached to a physical master on the console See Also cuelist master A real time computer rendering package that allows the Programmer to create their lighting virtually before getting to the venue The time between the previous cue being triggered and the current one being run automatically Not to be confused with the delay time See Also delay time the building blocks of both fixed kinds and user kinds that specify how fixture funtions assigned within a kind are displayed on the console s main encoder wheels when a fixture selection is made See Also kinds A definition of white light used by Hog 4OS s colour calibration system to match the colour of fixtures with different lamp types such as tungsten and arc A device that allows the connection of accessories to the console or PC via USB Such accessories may range from input control panels to DMX outputs See Also USB High End Systems Glossary Z zoom Allows the size of beam image to be adjusted whilst maintaining its focus High End Systems 477 Symbols key 131 A abstraction 29 action of go when looping 269 aggregation collapsing sections 42 jumping between sections 44 section priority 43 spreadsheets 42 all button 128 allow refs button when recording palettes 164 apply patch 106 arrow
79. can also click and drag to alter the various encoders or faders In addition when you right click on the trackball it will illuminate blue allowing you to then left click and drag on the trackball to adjust the pan and tilt of the selected fixtures To hold down a single key and make another selection simply press and hold Shift on your computer keyboard when you click the key As long as you are holding shift this key and sub sequent keys will remain held down You can then click on another key button cell or encoder to access further functions 432 High End Systems Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Right Click Menu Spaces Default Positions Lock Front Panel Position Toggle Front Panel Show A Minimize Minimize All Maximize Quit When right clicking in most portions of the Hog 4PC application the following options are dis played Workspaces opens a sub selection allowing various portions of the front panel to be displayed Default Positions restores all Hog 4PC screens to their default location on the Windows desktop Lock Front Panel Position toggles the ability to move the Hog 4PC Front Panel on the Windows desktop Toggle Front Panel toggles the Front Panel on off Show All restores all Hog 4PC screens to their previous size Minimize minimizes the current Hog 4PC screen Minimize All minimizes all Hog 4PC screens Maximize maximizes the current Hog 4PC screen and hides the title
80. can be used as an offline editor a backup server or a stand alone controller through the use of USB DMX Widgets or DMX Processors 31 1 Software Installation Hog 4PC system requirements e Operating System Windows Vista 32 bit or 64 bit SP2 or greater Windows 7 32 bit or 64 bit SP1 or greater Windows 8 32 bit or 64 bit Windows 8 1 32 bit or 64 bit e Processor Dual Core 1 7Ghz or faster e Memory 2GB minimum e Hard Drive 5GB of free hard drive space Since the Hog 40S makes use of multiple processes communicating via TCP IP sockets some Windows computer configurations may prevent the Hog 4PC processes from communicating with each other Not meeting the system requirements a lack of an enabled network connection or multiple active network connections and or firewall settings can all result in Hog 4PC communication failures These communication failures typically cause the Splash Screen to repeatedly display Scanning port 6600 in its status window or other system errors when launching Hog 4 PC To install Hog 4PC 1 Download the installer for the latest version of Hog 4PC from the High End Systems website once downloaded the file name will be Hog4PC_X X X X msi where the Xs represented the software version number 2 Double click on the Hog4PC installer file to launch the install wizard The Hog 4PC installer will check your operating system and windows installer versions and then display the welcome
81. cece e eee e eee e cette eee a eee teen teen teed 322 20 4 2 Programming lighting fixtures to use PixelMaps 323 20 4 3 Programming PixelMap Layers cceeeeeeeeee tees tenes 323 20 4 4 Managing PixelMap Layer Content ceeeeeeeeees 324 MIDI cceece E T 327 21 1 MIDI Show Controh asese anr aa ia a en 327 21 1 1 Bringing MSC into the Console sssesecererereee 327 21 1 2 Sending MSC from the Console cceeeeeeeeeeeeee es 328 21 1 3 Using MIDI Show Control cccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee tena ees 329 21 2 MIDI NOLES e a chs eae seckyn acca a EAT EN FRETES ASN 329 21 2 1 Bringing MIDI Notes into the Console assesseer 330 21 2 2 Assigning MIDI Notes to Playback Bars 06 330 High End Systems Lighting Control System 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 2 3 Assigning MIDI Notes to Programming Keys 331 21 2 4 Assigning MIDI Notes to Encoders and Wheels 332 21 2 5 Assigning MIDI Notes to Monitor Soft Keys esse 333 21 2 6 Assigning MIDI Notes to Comment Macros 334 21 2 7 Using Midi to Control Faders eceeecceeeeeeeeee teenies 336 21 3 MIDI timecode iraia ceed astern 336 21 3 1 Connecting Midi Timecode Input eee ees 336 21 3 2 Viewing Incoming MIDI Timecode ceeeeeeeeeees 337 21 3 3 Triggering Cues from MIDI Timecode eee 337 21 3 4 Editing Timecode Values seese 338 21 3 5 Simulating MIDI Timeco
82. changes should track forwards and whether references should be allowed when updating palettes See Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 161 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 190 and Reference Palettes p 164 High End Systems 253 Section 16 Advanced Programming Backward Figure 16 2 The Update Toolbar 16 5 16 5 1 16 5 2 254 Editing Discreetly It is often useful to make changes to parameter values discreetly or without them appearing on stage at all during a rehearsal or performance for example To do this use Hog 40S s Fade Changes and Blind functions Fade Changes If you select the Fade Changes button in an editor window any changes you make will appear on stage over the current time settings for the changed parameters For example if you have in tensity values in the Programmer with a fade time of ten seconds and you select all of the fixtures and press 0 Enter all of the lights would fade to 0 over 10 seconds This is useful for making changes on the fly during a performance Parameters that don t have timing values in the Programmer will fade in the default time which you can assign in the Default Timing pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Default Timing Press the Fade Changes button again to revert to having parameter values appear in the output instantly To view and assign time values for parameters see Individual Parameter Timings p 212
83. connected USB USB Device connected USB Device found but not No USB Device found and active configured HogNet Link light for HogNet HogNet activity HogNet not connected connection FixtureNet Link light for fixture Fixture activity Fixture not connected Art Net connection Write Writing flash memory Fast bootloader active Normal activity Slow updating firmware 3 2 11 Expanding the DMX Outputs of a DP8000 The DMX Processor 8000 is always processing 16 universes of DMX These universes are available via the eight 5 pin XLR outputs on the front of the unit as well as via Art Net You can expand the XLR outputs to access the full sixteen universes by using external USB Widgets Expanding a DMX Processor 8000 Using an Expander When you connect a USB Expander to a USB port of a DMX Processor 8000 you will need to configure it to outputs 9 16 of the DMX Processor To manually configure Widgets 1 2 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on its net number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Processor Settings window see Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window Select the Widget Outputs pane To configure an expander to output ports 9 16 of a DMX Processor 8000 click on a box associated with a port 9 16 and select the expander from the list of serial numbers that appears Repeat for all the universes you want to output v
84. current page and playback state High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 8 More than One Show on the Network If you want to run more than one show on the same network you need to choose a port number for each show The default port number is 6600 so the second show could be on 6601 the third on 6602 and so on You need to assign the port number of each console system and network device according to the show it is used with 3 3 9 Connecting to an Existing Network You can connect the console to an existing ethernet network if desired Contact the administrator of the network to obtain the correct network settings Important You should disable the DHCP server of the console before connecting to an existing computer network otherwise it may interfere with the correct operation of the network 3 3 10 Network File Sharing You can connect to drives on a local network or remote computer to transfer show files Only compressed show file backup tar gz or shw files can be transferred with Network File Sharing Mapping Network Drives Network drives are available within the Start window and the Backup window To map a network drive 1 Connect a remote computer or network to the HogNet network 2 Click the Browse button in the Start or Backup window Click on the Map Network Drive button 4 Enter data for the following fields in the Connect to Network Disk window e Server name the host name or IP add
85. delete High End Systems Section 7 Groups Or from the group directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the group to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK You can also delete several groups at once 1 Group 1 Thru 5 Delete deletes groups 1 through 5 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the group directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting all the groups to be deleted from dir ectory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 7 6 Copying and Moving Groups To make a copy of a group e Group 1 Copy Group 2 Enter copies the contents of Group 1 to Group 2 Similarly to move a group to a new location e Group 1 Move Group 2 Enter moves Group 1 to Group 2 If the destination group already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 154 To copy parameter values from the fixtures of one group to the fixtures of another group within an editor e Group 1 Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the parameter values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 S
86. drag to select a range of cells to edit For example you could assign in one action the default value for the pan parameter of all the Studio Color 575 fixtures in the show see Figure 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function High End Systems 123 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures intensty Pan Release Feature Delat r open twng bva Spn 0 rpm 00 rpm 300 rpm 0 5 rpm Lmear Figure 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function Assigning Minimums and Maximums for Parameters When fixtures are placed close to obstacles such as trussing or set pieces it may be important to limit movement to prevent accidental damage especially when the fixture is out of view of the operator However other functions can also be limited for example to implement a house or event policy on the use of strobe lighting Note that limits can only be assigned for continuous parameters not slotted ones To assign limits 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Minimum cell of the parameter you wish to limit 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit In the case of pan and tilt it will be a plus or minus number of degrees from the fixture s default position 4 Repeat to assign the Maximum value Assigning a Custom Default The default value is the value that the parameter will take when no playbacks or editors are controlling it Fixtures also go to t
87. each parameter within the cue A cue can contain multiple Delay times but it can only have one Wait time See Figure 13 1 Cue timings A wait is displayed as the time value in the Wait cell e Follow Triggers the cue once the previous cue has completed all its fade and delay times You can enter a time after pressing the Follow button which de termines the time between the previous cue completing and the follow cue being triggered See Figure 13 1 Cue timings The follow is displayed in the Cuelist window as Follow time The follow time should not be confused with the wait time The follow time controls the time between the end of one cue and the triggering of the next while the wait time controls the time between the triggering of one cue and the triggering of the next Timecode Triggers the cue when the specified timecode value is received See MIDI timecode p 336 The timecode value will be displayed in the wait cell 218 High End Systems Section 13 Timing Manual A manual cue can only be triggered by pressing the Go key This means the cuelist will stop until the Go key is pressed irrespective of any wait follow or timecode triggers that later cues in the list may have Manual cues are useful because the word Manual appears in the Cuelist win dow to remind the operator that they need to press the Go key They are also useful to prevent times being recorded into the Wait column when using
88. exactly the data from one fixture to another including any palette references You can optionally have the hard values from within the referenced palette copied to the destination instead of the palette references 1 Fixture 1 select the fixture you want to copy Copy Deselect the Allow Refs button on the copy toolbar 8 select the fixture to copy to Sd R S Enter copies the parameters of Fixture 1 to Fixture 8 converting any palette references to hard values Tip You can copy a fixture to itself with Allow Refs deselected to convert palette references to hard values High End Systems 143 6 3 9 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Restoring Default Values You can reset parameter values to their default settings by using the point key or Pig keys as a modifier Default values for parameters can be set in the Edit Fixtures window When using the key as a modifier modes such as gobo rotate will be restored to default value but the current mode will remain gobo rotate When using the Pig keys as a modifier modes such as gobo rotate will be restored to default value and default mode index To restore the default value for a single parameter of the current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and turn the appropriate parameter wheel To restore the default values of a parameter kind for the current selection e Press and hold the key or Pig keys and press the
89. hard drive ft has iof 1 uibjestures selected The mdfeatures requre 4908 on your hard dive Ci Program Fies x86 Fling Pig Systems HogPC Syomse Dage J Bd JC rea __ cancel 6 By default the software will be installed into the C Program Files Flying Pig Systems hog4pc directory You can use the Browse button to navigate to another location for the application 7 After selecting a drive location and components to install click on Next to continue installation 8 The installer will now offer a link to the Elo TouchSystems website If you plan to use Elo touchscreens with your Hog 4PC setup then it is recommended you click on the Elos Drivers button bookmark the website in your browser and download and install the latest touchscreen drivers from the Elo Touch Systems website after you complete the Hog 4PC installation Click on Next to continue the installation 9 This prompts a Ready to Install screen with instructions on beginning or can celling the installation Click Install to begin installing High End Systems 427 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Ready to install Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 ick retal to begin the installation Click Back to review or change any of your nstallaton settings Ock Cancel to exit he wizard 10 When the installation has finished a final screen confirms that the application has successfully installed Click Finish You will then be prompted to restart your comp
90. if your syntax is not valid 2 1 2 The Status Bar To the right of the command line is the Status Bar Abc Page 1 Programmer Master 10 7 Figure 2 2 The Status Bar 22 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The Status Bar gives you basic information about the status of the console as well as connected network items Below is a list of the different kinds of data the status toolbar can show Description Example The Trackball mode The name of the current page Current Mode of the Function Keys The current editor The currently chosen master The network status The current time in hours and minutes pointer POS position POS ortho ortho mode Page 1 CMD command key mode KIND kind key mode Programmer Cue 3 Master 4 The network is working normally N Consoles are syncing show data Fa Connected DP8000 s need a software upgrade A rere is a problem with the network 16 28 2 2 The Graphical User Interface In addition to the conventional command line the Hog 40S uses a graphical user interface similar to those found on personal computers The advantages of the graphical user interface are far reaching and will become fully apparent as you get more familiar with Hog 40S Key features of the GUI are e You can work with on screen controls and windows using the touch screen or through a pointer controlled by the built in Trackball or an e
91. in cue 3 of cuelist 1 To unblock complete cuelists List 1 Unblock Enter Or on a master Unblock Choose Tip Unblocking obeys the linked parameter preferences assigned in Setup Preferences gt Programming For example if position parameters are not separated and Pan is blocking but Tilt is not Pan will not be unblocked For more on linked functions see Separating Parameters p 149 Important Unblocking will remove parameter values from blocking cues so any fu ture changes to subsequent cues will be tracked through the whole cuelist 11 8 11 8 1 194 Mark Cues Move in Black A Mark cue is a special designator for a cue that looks at the previous cue and any fixtures with an intensity of zero after completion of the cue If a fixture meets these requirements the mark cue allows the fixture s to preset for the next cue by executing the crossfade for all parameters except intensity This allows the fixture s to move in black as they change to their new para meter values When the next cue is later executed only the intensity parameter changes as all other parameters will already be at their new values due to the mark The timing used to mark a cue is determined by the mark method you choose See Fade Mark verses Time Marks p 195 for details on the different timing methods you can use when marking cues How to Mark to a Cue There are several methods to assign a cue to mark e Select the Ma
92. increasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose Out to assign a path to be applied to parameters when the fixture they belong to is decreasing in intensity during the crossfade Choose All to assign a path to be applied to parameters of fixtures irrespective of whether their intensity is in creasing or decreasing The Paths Toolbar will open see Figure 13 7 The Paths Toolbar 5 Select the desired path from the Paths Toolbar The different types of path are explained in Paths p 210 Al h Out Mode Control Figure 13 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths Accelerate Figure 13 7 The Paths Toolbar 13 3 2 Assign Parameter Timings with the Command Line 214 To assign the fade time for all parameters of a fixture High End Systems Section 13 Timing 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time to 4 seconds To assign separate fade in and fade out times 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign a time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Time 4 7 Enter assigns the Fade In time to 4 seconds and the Fade Out time to 7 seconds To assign a fade time for a particular parameter type 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Colour Time 4 Enter assigns the fade time of the colour parameters to 4 seconds To assign a delay time press the Tim
93. intensities using the key and the numeric keypad High End Systems 131 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers e Fixture 4 70 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 70 Fixture 4 5 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 50 not 5 e Fixture 4 05 Enter assigns Fixture 4 to 5 To assign fixtures to full or zero e Fixture 4 Full assigns Fixture 4 to full e Fixture 4 Out assigns Fixture 4 to zero The Out button is on the Main Toolbar The intensity of a fixture can be changed relative to its current level for example e Fixture 4 5 Enter increases the intensity of Fixture 4 by 50 e Fixture 4 10 Enter reduces the intensity of Fixture 4 by 10 The intensity of a fixture can be scaled proportionally for example e Fixture 4 70 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 70 of its ori ginal value e Fixture 4 120 Enter scales the intensity of Fixture 4 to 120 of its original value With the i Wheel On the Hog 4 Console and on Hog 4PC only Moving the I Wheel changes the level of the selected fixtures When selecting several fixtures and adjusting levels the wheel will maintain relative differences between them so that all intensities change by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 20 and 2 will move to 60 By holding the Pig key whilst using the wheel intensities will be increased or d
94. keyboard is mapped to the shortcuts when disabled text entry via the computer keyboard is possible The current status is shown in the Command Line Toolbar see Figure 32 1 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar Whenever possible Hog 408S intelligently disables the keyboard shortcuts when text entry is expected after pressing Set or double clicking in a cell When the text entry session is completed the shortcuts are automatically re enabled By default shortcuts are disabled when you start a show When shortcuts are disabled only the shortcut mapped to the Set key remains functional to allow quick labeling from the external keyboard AbcF age 1 Programmer Master 10 O 9 08 AM MAP F age 1 Programmer Master 10 O 9 09 AM Figure 32 1 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar The following table show how keys map to Hog 40S functions when using a US keyboard High End Systems 435 Section 32 Cheat Sheets Function Keystroke Function Keystroke Toggle Shortcuts Pause Break or Ctrl Main GO or or Space Q Pig CTRL Main Pause or Open ESC or O Skip Fwd K Set NumLock or Insert or Skip Back J i Intensity F11 Goto G Position F2 Release Z Colour F3 Pig Release ALT Z Beam F4 Assert A Effects F7 Next Page or Macro F5 or Group Fl Full or Fixture F12 Thru gt orX Scene F9 Minus Or_ Cue F10 Plus or List F8 slash or Page F6 Point or gt Record R Choose Master 1
95. kinds and or user kind functions you want to start off with in the mask by listing them on the command line before the Record command e Colour Position Record Colour 3 Enter records the colour and position parameters of the Programmer or editor contents into Colour Palette 3 Recording Only Selected Fixtures By default all fixtures currently in the Programmer or editor are recorded To record only selected fixtures 1 Fixture 2 select the fixture s you want to record in the palette 2 Record 3 On the Record Options Toolbar press Selected 4 Position Enter records only the position values for fixture 2 into the next available position palette rather than values for all fixtures in the Programmer 8 6 3 Palette Timing To include timing when recording palettes ensure that the Time kind in the kind masking menu is selected after pressing record see Masking Using the Record Options Toolbar p 162 You can also record palettes that contain only timing information no function values by only masking in Time when recording the palette For example to record a time only colour palette with a fade time of 6 seconds 1 Assign any values to the fixture functions you want to create a timing palette for 2 Assign a fade time to the fixture functions such as 6 seconds 3 Time Record Colour 2 Enter records only the timing information that was in the programmer into Colour Palette 2 You can also edit timings in t
96. listed under its manufacturer while conventional fixtures such as Desk Channels and Scroller Dimmers are listed under Generic You can filter the list of fixtures to only the fixtures currently scheduled in the show by clicking on the Limit to fixture in use button at the top of the Fixture window Alternatively you can type a fixture name into the Search fixture name field at the top of the window to filter the names of the fixtures to more quickly find the exact fixture type you are looking for 105 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Fixture Schedule Specify how many fetures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set Search facture name ia Limit to fictures in use Count Name A Adamson Lighting AkaRe Figure 5 1 The Fixture Schedule window 3 Once you find the fixture type you wish to add click on or touch the fixture in the list and use the count column to input the number fixtures of that type your wish to add 4 When you have finished select OK and you will now see these added fixtures list in the patch window where you will patch them to outputs 5 2 106 Patching Fixtures Once fixtures have been added to the show they need to be patched to the appropriate DMX address Many fixtures such as moving lights use several DMX channels to control their various parameters Generally these DMX channels are in a continuous numerical range and it is the first of these chann
97. live e blue neutral e green yellow earth 2 As the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not corres pond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connec ted to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow e the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black e the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red 3 Class I equipment This equipment must be earthed 4 Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture 5 Disconnect power before servicing 6 Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts inside High End Systems Section 35 Safety Information 35 2 Informations Importantes Sur La S curit 35 2 1 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incendies e Cet appareil comporte une protection de 20 A contre les surcharges lectrique 35 2 2 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs Electriques 1 Si cet quipement est livr sans prise sur le cable d alimentation veuillez connecter la prise de courant selon le code suivant e marron phase e bleu neutre e vert jaune terre 2 D branch
98. manually triggered A cuelist is run from a master dead black out A parameter value which has not been adjusted by the user This value is assigned by the fixture s Library and may not always be zero For ex ample the default value of Shutter Open Strobe Off may be Open See Also touched value tracking The time the console waits before starting a cue s crossfade See Also wait time crossfade path Single conventional lights that only have intensity control via a dimmer are defined as desk channels by Hog 40S By contrast automated lights are referred to as fixtures Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a way for a computer to ask a master computer on a network to assign it an IP address when it connects Many existing networks are configured this way and Hog 40S supports this system You should talk to the administrator of the network you want to connect to to find out more See Also ethernet IP address See conversion curve A window which displays palettes scenes or groups See Also palette Short for DMX 512 DMX is the communications protocol most com monly used to connect lighting consoles to fixtures and dimmers High End Systems Glossary DMX address DMxX universe DMX Processor editor effects engine encoder wheel ethernet fade time fanning fixed kind fixture library function High End Systems A number between 1 and 512 that identifies a controllable parameter of a fi
99. master Enters the Goto command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue on the chosen master Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cue s time Go instantly to the next cue on the chosen master Go instantly to the previous cue on the chosen master High End Systems Section 18 Pages 18 1 How Pages Are Used Pages allow you to predefine layouts of cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters so that they can be loaded quickly on to the available playback masters For a concert for example cuelists can be organized in one page per song so that before each performance it is possible to re arrange the pages to reflect the current running order of the songs One cuelist can be used several times within a page or on several pages or it can be unique to a specific page A template page can define certain masters to be the same on every page 18 2 Creating a New Page Selecting a page that currently does not exist will automatically create a blank page and load it onto the masters Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters can then be assigned to the masters on the newly created page To create a new page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory 2 Make sure that Guard is not selected in the Page Directory otherwise you will not be able to create a new page using this method
100. master with a single button press Tip Pressing an encoder wheel cell on the touchscreen while holding choose for a master will assign the physical fader for that master to the cordin ating fader function scale playback rate scale effect rate scale effect size intensity The current fader assignment of a master is indicated by a blue outline around the cordinating encoder wheel cell on the touch screen Manually Crossfading Cuelists You can assign any cuelist to be operated manually allowing you to perform the crossfades from one cue to the next manually using the fader Once a cuelist s Manual Fade option is selected the Master s fader will no longer control intensity but instead the crossfade progress of all para High End Systems Section 17 Playback meters from the current cue to the next starting when moved from any end stop finishing when the opposite end stop is reached If you select Manual Fader mode when the fader is at 50 a manual fade cannot take place until the fader is moved to and then from an end stop further moves from end stops will manually work through the cuelist sequentially To assign a cuelist s Manual Fade function 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Master 2 Select Manual Crossfader from the Fader menu None fader IPCB crossfader Manual crossfader Scale Playback Rate Scale Effect Rate Scale Effect Size Manual crossfade mode will be indicated on the Playback Bar above the
101. merging fixtures you can merge the programming user kinds groups palettes plots cuelists scenes pages macros views and reports from the source show see Figure 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window Group Merge t Merge Groups Odd Mac 301 LED 16b8 standard Even Mac 301 LED 16bit standard Mac 301 LED 16bit standard 1 3 Deselect Al Select Al Mac 301 LED 16bt standard 2 3 Mac 301 LED 16bit standard 3 3 Figure 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window When merging programming the following merge methods are available from the drop down menu in the Merge field e Append adds all of the programming from the source show to the current show e Append Different if programming with the same name cannot by found in the current show the programming from the source show is appended e Merge By Name if programming with the same name is found in the current show merge the source programming into the current show If there are any clashes the source programming will overwrite the current programming This option is not available when merging views High End Systems 103 4 12 4 4 12 5 4 12 6 104 Section 4 Shows e Merge By Number is the same as Merge By Name but the matching is done by number This option is not available when merging views e Replace if programming with the same number is found in the current show it is overwritten with
102. moving lights that have continuous colour mixing the colour is controlled by three parameters Cyan C Magenta M and Yellow Y Fixtures that use the CMY system start by producing white light and then filter out the unwanted colours to leave the desired colour higher parameter values produce a greater filtering effect so that setting them all to 100 produces black To avoid wasting the light intensity of the fixture you should always keep at least one of the CMY parameters at 0 setting the other two at higher values to get more saturated colours For example values of 0 C 0 M 20 Y will produce a pale yellow tint while 0 C 100 M O Y will produce a fully saturated magenta Mixing two of the colours will produce further shades so 50 C 0 M 50 Y will produce a middle saturation green e RGB this system is used mainly by fixtures based on LEDs The colour is controlled by three parameters Red R Green G and Blue B with the three parameters at 0 the fixture produces no light output and the higher than value of these parameters the greater the fixture s total light output If the three parameters have equal values then the light output will be white within the limits of the technologies used Use one or two of the parameters to get the colour you want and then add the other s to de saturate it dilute it towards white For example values of 0 R 0 G 100 B will produce a bright satur ated blue while 80 R 80 G
103. new fixture type is added to a show through the fixture scheduler its functions are auto matically populated in the fixed kinds and organized onto wheelsets based on a default master wheelset template established by the Hog 40S Fixed kinds cannot be deleted or moved This is why they are known as fixed kinds Functions that are marked with a lock icon on the wheelsets within a fixed kind cannot be deleted This is because those functions are considered to be permanent residents of that fixed kind and are fundamental to the masking scheme of that fixed kind However you can add additional functions to a fixed kind if you wish For example you can add a colour mixing function such as Cyan to the fixed position kind if you desire Be aware that any additional functions you add to a wheelset in a fixed kind will not function as part of that fixed kind s masking The arrangement of the functions on the wheelsets within a fixed kind are completely customizable regardless of whether or not they are marked with a lock icon 15 1 2 User Kinds User kinds unlike fixed kinds are not automatically generated when adding fixtures to the show User kinds are custom built by the user allowing you to create smaller collections of fixture functions on fewer wheelsets User kinds are stored in the kinds directory and are also accessable using the 12 function keys on the front panel of the console when the function keys are set to kind mode To toggle the fun
104. or 2 Super or Boar 4 verses 1 Super duper Road 8 Uni 4 Universes 4 Single or 1 Super or Hog 4 verses 1 2 Super duper Hog 4PC 8 Uni None 8 Single or 2 Super or verses 1 Super duper Hedge 6 Uni 2 Universes 4 Single or 1 Super or Hog 4X verses 1 2 Super duper Hedge 4 Uni 2 Universes 2 Single or 1 2 Super Hog 4 verses 4N 4S High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System To attach an external DMX widgets 1 Setup Network Connect the USB port of the dmx widget to the an open USB port on the console Superwidgets also require an external DC power source Assign the dmx widget to one of the available dmx outputs of the internal DP8000 by selecting the wing s unique ID number in the drop down menu If you have more than one dmx widget plugged in you can identify which is which by pressing the Beacon button for the appropriate universe output 3 8 DMX Widget Status LEDs LED Slow Blinking Off Link TX Mode RX Mode DMX OK Active widget is transmitting not implemented not implemented not implemented widget is outputting dmx widget has lost connec tion to active DP and widget is transmitting DMX at a 2HZ keep alive widget is mapped and connected to an active not implement widget has loaded its not implemented widget is not transmit ting dmx not implemented widget is not output ting dmx DMX widget is not mapped to an active DP widget has not loaded
105. or a 6 5mm nut driver 5 Wipe the tracks with a dry clean tissue Do not use solvents 6 Re assemble the console by following the disassembly steps in reverse order High End Systems 451 Section 34 Service 34 4 Replacing the Trackball Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel To replace the Trackball on a Hog 4 or Full Boar 4 console 1 Undo the four front panel screws with a 3mm allen key plus the two thumb screws in the armrest on the Hog 4 console and carefully lift up the front panel from the edge closest to you and insert into service slot 2 Look undermeath the front panel and locate the cable connection that connects the Trackball to the PCB Unplug this connection 3 Unscrew the 3 allen screws that hold the Trackball to the front panel use a 3mm allen key You should now be able to remove the trackball from the console 4 Replace with a new trackball assembly and reassemble your console by per forming this procedure in reverse 452 High End Systems Section 35 Safety Information 35 1 Safety Warnings 35 1 1 For Continued Protection Against Fire e Only connect this equipment to a branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A 35 1 2 For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 1 If this equipment was received without a line cord plug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code e brown
106. or similar conventional tungsten source or in a Source 4 which has a slightly bluer light output There is a button to open the Gel Picker in the Colour Directory window Gel Picker Par64 Source 4 Supergel GamColor Medium Amber 27 Gold Amber Dark Amber 5 2 Medium Figure 6 9 The Gel Picker Note that the Gel Picker colours are not palettes and will not be embedded in programming they are simply shortcuts to the appropriate HS values Gel Picker colours are a closer match when applied to colour calibrated fixtures than non calibrated ones Fine Control Holding the Pig key and moving the encoder wheel allows fine adjustment of the currently selected parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount This is useful for making exact adjustments to values Touching Parameters When you start to record your programming as cues you will find that only the parameters that you have assigned values to are stored these are known as Hard Values This is important be cause in cuelists values track through until they are changed and this allows different playbacks to interact to create a single onstage look For a complete explanation of tracking see Tracking p 31 However you will sometimes want to ensure that a value is stored at its current value in a cue or palette To do this you can Touch it To touch all parameters of the current selection simply press the To
107. plot 1 Ds Enable the fixture edit button at the top of the plot window Select the fixtures in the plot you wish to remove fixture selection can either be done directly in the plot window or by using the command line or groups Press the Delete button in the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window To edit a fixture change its properties 20 2 2 Gangs Gangs are collections of fixtures arranged in geometrical shapes Gangs themselves can be resized and rotated Gangs also feature several options for how the fixtures contained with the gang are ordered In this section we will review how to edit gangs add remove fixtures from gangs and Enable the fixture edit button at the top of the plot window Select the fixture s you wish to edit Use the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window to adjust the the fixture s position and or rotation You can also reposition a fixture by using the mouse or touchscreen to click and drag the fixture into position Note fixtures that are attached to gang must first be detached dragged off the gang in order to be custom positioned delete gangs To remove a gang 1 High End Systems Enable the gang edit button at the top of the plot window Section 20 Plots Basic Plot 2 Select the gang you wish to delete 3 Press the Delete button in the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window the gang and all the fixture
108. press enter Type exit and press enter You may now close the terminal window 415 10 11 12 13 14 15 Section 30 Updating Console Software Start Unetbootin When Unetbootin starts you will see a single window on your screen Select the Disk Image option and make sure ISO is selected from the drop down menu Ensure your USB flash drive is inserted in your Macintosh computer and is selected in drive drop down menu in Unetbootin Now click on the browse button in Unetbootin the browse button is the button with three dots on it and select the correct Full Restore ISO file that you downloaded from the Hog 4OS support website Click okay and Unetbootin will proceed to create your USB flash drive When Unetbootin is finished it will alert you Remove your USB flash drive and proceed to use it to restore your console as outlined in section 24 1 30 3 Updating the DMX Processor Software Normally updating the console software will also update the software of connected network processors If necessary you can update the software manually 1 2 3 Setup Network open the Network window The network window will display a list of any connected DMX Processors who s softwae does not match the console software version under a heading titled Upgradeable Nodes Right click on the DP you wish to upgrade and select upgrade node If the console and network processor are running different software
109. programming from the source show If no match is found the source programming is appended to the current show After selecting the merge method you can select which programming objects to merge by clicking on each item displayed in the window Items highlighted in blue are selected for merging Tip You cannot replace palettes in the current show because you could replace a palette with one that doesn t contain programming for fixture paramet ers that other programming expects it to have Dependencies In order to merge certain parts of a show you must have chosen to merge other parts To merge groups you must have merged fixtures To merge palettes you must have merged fixtures To merge cuelists and cues you must have merged fixtures and palettes e To merge scenes you must have merged fixtures and palettes To merge pages you must have merged fixtures cuelists and scenes To merge plots you must have merged fixtures Patching after show merge If you chose to merge fixtures using the replace method during the show merge process then you will have to re patch any replaced fixtures and or patch any un matched appended fixtures in the current show file following the show merge In addition you must also re assign PixelMap layers to PixelMaps following a show merge that involves fixture replacement as well Merging Examples Example 1 You have programmed your show on two separate consoles perhaps one con
110. s HS colour system is its ability to match colours across different fixture types Assigning the Hue and Saturation parameters of two different types of fixtures will set them to the same visual colour within the limitations of the fixtures but it might send different DMX values to each Furthermore they will maintain that match through a crossfade ensuring even colour fades For colour matching to work the fixtures need to have a colour calibration in the fixture library you can check this in the Fixture window Setup Patch If the fixture has Yes in the Col Cal column then it has a colour calibration Fixtures that are not calibrated will use a standard DMX mapping to determine hue and saturation Different types of fixture have different colours for white because of the different types of lamp used Tungsten lamps have a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other but there needs to be a single agreed white point for all fixtures to match when the Saturation parameter is assigned to 0 Hog 40S allows you to assign the White Point to Tungsten or Arc 1 Setup Preferences Misc 2 Choose between Arc and Tungsten In a theatrical environment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predomi
111. s Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Tip Fixture notes can be displayed in editors such as the Programmer but this is turned off by default To display notes right click on any column header in the editor and select Note Patch Notes Patch Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture regarding its patching To add a Patch Note 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Patch Note cell 3 Set text of note Enter Type in the note text Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes Depending on a fixture s orientation in the rig you may want to invert or swap its pan and tilt axes For example inverting the pan can ensure that when moving the Trackball left a fixture rigged facing the operator moves to the operator s left not the fixture s left Similarly if units are rigged facing across the stage rather than facing up or down stage then swapping the axes keeps the Trackball movement and the fixture movement the same This also ensures that fixtures selected in groups all move in the same direction as the Trackball is moved Fixtures that are rigged in other positions for example on the stage floor as opposed to hanging then combinations of swap and invert either pan tilt or both may be required To invert axes 1 Open Fixture 2 Scroll to the desired fixture and select either its Pan Invert or Tilt Invert cell 3 Press Set and choose Yes to invert the axis To swap axes 1
112. screen High End Systems 425 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Welcome to the Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Please wait while the Setup Wizard prepares to guide you through the nstallston Computing space requrements 3 Ensure any Hog 4 USB devices such as widgets or wings have been discon nected from your computer and click on the Next button to continue 4 The wizard displays an End User License Agreement After you select accept the terms in the License Agreement you can click the Next button to continue ISERVER amp DESKTOP USE ONLY THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA IS A INDIVIDUAL LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN HES AND YOU AS AN II ANDIOR IF PURCHASED OR OTHERWISE ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY AN ENTITY PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND USING THE Wl Laccept te teres in the Ucense Agreernerd om tek C net cm 5 You can now choose which features of Hog 4PC you wish to install The listed options will vary depending on which components are already installed on your machine Select your preferences and click on Next to continue 426 High End Systems Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC x Custom Setup Select the way you want features to be inetsled Cik the icons in the tree below to change the way features wil Be irstabed J a Software Drivers and E Hog isusiner Connectivity Documentation This feature requres 77035 on your
113. selec ted master by M Tip You can still run cues to time when manual fader mode is selected by pressing the master s Go key Note that you have no individual fader control of intensity and accidentally moving a fader will start to run the next cue manually 17 5 4 IPCB Faders You can adjust the output values of any intensity position colour or beam parameter information in any cuelist by assigning its fader as a IPCB fader To assign a cuelist to use the IPCB fader function 1 Open the Programmer from the Main Toolbar In the Programmer select the fixtures and parameters that you wish to adjust with the fader then assign a maximum level 2 Record 1 Enter record the cue to the chosen master High End Systems 287 Section 17 Playback 3 Pig Choose gt Playback Options open the options window for the cuelist s master 4 Inthe Master pane select IPCB Crossfader from the Fader drop down menu You can now adjust the value of the parameters contained in the IPCB fader cue by adjusting the master s fader level 17 5 5 Using a Cuelist as a Chase You can use a cuelist to make a chase Any wait times are ignored and each cue becomes a step in the chase where the rate is set in Beats Per Minute BMP To use a cuelist as a chase 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Is a Chase Properties 0O Use HTP 0O qe ls A Chase Reset On Release 0O Track Through Cue Only Mark Time New Cues
114. show since all servers will have the same data However the last server to shut down will also clean up the database so it s preferable that this be the initial server when starting up next time So it s preferable to designate a single console to store the master copy of the show and ensure it s always the first server to start and the last server to shut down 6 If some servers log off then new data continues to be replicated to the remaining servers If all servers then log off some consoles will have newer data the consoles that remained logged in and some will have older data the consoles that logged off early Launching a server using an older copy of the show makes that the active server and any servers that then join will be backup servers and the old data will be replicated to them That includes servers that may have had a newer copy of the show So here is one way that new show data may be lost replaced with old show data from a console that never saw it Understanding Multi Server Partitioning and Rejoining 74 1 All servers in a networked show constantly check for connectivity to each other If connectivity is broken for more than a few seconds the servers consider themselves isolated from the servers they can t reach This is called a partitioned network The servers within each partition will continue to replicate changes amongst each other so newly created data will be replicated amongst all servers in a partition
115. show immediately Click Cancel to return to the Start window If you specified a delay of 0 seconds the delay window will not be displayed Auto Launch The following show will automatically launch in Ss Figure 4 1 The Auto Launch window High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 6 Managing Show Data All show data is stored on the internal hard disk of the console Show files and folders are stored in the Shows folder while libraries are stored in the Libraries folder As you edit your show file all of your changes are immediately saved to the console s internal hard disk In the event of power failure the Hog 40S will have already saved the show data to disk so that none of your work is lost You can use the Show Manager window see Figure 4 2 The Show Manager Window to backup your current show file check the integrity of your current show file s data or to move copy and delete existing shows files To open the Show Manager Setup Shows Show Manager Qi Creative Production and Design Show Hog 4 Show 2 0555 Pu l Fess show Heg4 Show 2 03 17 Pl g Man Stage Show Hog 4 Show 2 0341 Pu Q NewShow Hog 4 Snow 2 0515 PU T Touring snow Heg 4 Show 2 0405 Pu T Tetri show Hog 4 Show 2030 Pu Figure 4 2 The Show Manager Window 4 7 Startup Comment Macros You can assign comment macros to be executed when a show file is launched Comment macros can be used to automate a variety of tasks such as recall
116. shown in the Levels View window 17 4 1 Control and Playback Toolbar Feedback Playback Control LEDs The LEDs of the playback controls give information about the cuelist s status e Gokey Green When solidly lit this indicates that a fade is in progress When flashing it indicates that a fade has been paused e Halt Back key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling parameters other than intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of those parameters has been overridden by other playbacks 278 High End Systems Section 17 Playback e Flash key Red When solidly lit this indicates that this playback is controlling intensity When flashing it indicates that its control of intensity has been over ridden by other playbacks The Playback Bar Figure 17 5 The Playback Bar The Playback Bar is located at the bottom of the left touchscreen giving feedback for each master see Figure 17 5 The Playback Bar For each master the Playback Bar displays the following information e If the master is empty its number is shown Console masters are numbered 1 to 10 while masters on playback wings are numbered 1 1 to 1 10 for the first wing 2 1 to 2 10 for the second wing and so on e The number and name of the cuelist This is shown in blue if the master has been held over after a page change see Options When Changing Page p 302 The name and number will appear in lavender if th
117. similar to how IPCB palettes are applied to fixtures To assign a fixture s parameters to a PixelMap 1 2 3 Make a fixture selection Open the plots directory Pig Open Fixture At the top of the plots diretory choose which fixture parameters you wish to pixelmap RGB CMYI HSI Select a plot from the plot directory be sure to choose a plot in which the currently selected fixtures are plotted inside a PixelMap The parameter values of the current fixture selection are now assigned to the plot in the editor This means that those fixture values will now be determined by the content being passed into the PixelMaps in that plot Now select and program the PixelMap layers assigned to the PixelMaps in the referenced plot Caution Deleting a plot automatically removes any references to that plot in all existing cues and palettes 20 4 3 Programming PixelMap Layers PixelMap Layers are used to send media content to PixelMaps which are then output to the mapped lighting fixtures In the previous section we discussed how to program lighting fixtures to listen to PixelMaps In this section we will discuss how to program the PixelMap layers to output content to the PixelMaps they are assigned to To program a PixelMap Layer 1 High End Systems Select a PixelMap Layer by entering its user number in the command line and pressing Enter Adjust the intensity parameter to the desired level Choose a media folder an
118. specifications 459 split times 209 spreadsheets 39 aggregation 42 compact mode 41 start window 89 starting up 89 startup macros 91 state button 192 status bar 22 sub selections of fixtures 129 Suck button 246 suppress MSC out 329 swapping axes 121 switching off the console see shutting down symbols 19 syntax 21 T tables effects 227 tap sync 290 technical specifications 459 technical support 443 High End Systems template page 308 template pages 34 theatre lighting consoles 31 tilt see position time format 51 setting the console clock 51 timecode 218 327 editing values 338 351 jump points 339 351 simulating 339 351 triggering cues 337 350 viewing 337 349 timing 207 effects 233 fanned 217 scenes 205 toolbars clock 222 editor toolbar 45 editor values toolbar 45 fanning toolbar 146 fanning toolbar 130 jump toolbar 46 playback bar 279 304 record options toolbar 162 with cuelists 200 with cues 184 with groups 154 with palettes 165 with scenes 205 Record Options Toolbar with effect palettes 236 select toolbar 129 Slot Toolbar 125 status bar 22 view toolbar 27 window control toolbar 25 touch screens backlight off time 52 brightness 52 calibration 52 external 53 replacing 449 touched values 183 touching parameter 140 touching parameters with live 248 with pig 141 489 touchscreen brightness 94 track backwards 189 track f
119. sssssssssssrsrssrssrrsrrsrssrrrreresresrrerens 49 3 Setting Up the System ccccccseeeeeeeee eee sees eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 51 3 1 Setting Up the Console nnie a r T A A 51 3 1 1 Starting Up the Console seessrerereererrenerernereeren 51 3 1 2 Adjusting the Date and Time assesseer 51 3 1 3 Calibrating the Touch SCreens ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eee tees 52 3 1 4 Adjusting the Touschscreen LCD Backlight 0000 52 3 1 5 Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout eee 52 3 1 6 Adding External Monitors sesers 53 3 1 7 Adding External Touch Screens cceeeeeeeee nets teens 53 3 18 Key bOard s 2 2c ti ee adivedaavte a a ahah ea eee 55 351 9 Track balls nek erene oara TAA A Taaa Aaa ib teat ne ETa EEEN 56 3 1 10 Shutting Down and Restarting the Console 57 High End Systems iii Lighting Control System 3 1 11 Locking the Console for ACCESS cceeeeeeeeeeeeee teenies 57 3 2 DMX Processor 8000 Setup ceeeeeeeee eee eee eee een eee eeeeeeeeaeeeeenes 59 3 2 1 Setting the Net NUMbE cece cece e eee e eee a eeeaeeeaes 59 3 2 2 Setting the Port NUMbE eect e eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeees 59 3 2 3 Setting IP Addresses for the HogNet Adapter on a DMX Processor 8000 errierta traa aia trate aE A aia a dees 59 3 2 4 Setting the DMX Processor DMX Output Refrsh Rate weiss E EE E A T 60 3 2 5 Setting the DMX Processor back to Defaults 08 60 3 2 6 Locking t
120. t select the group in the Program mer or editor enable the Guard button in the Group Directory or press and hold the Pig key while selecting the group 4 Move Choose move the group to the required master Or using the command line 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures 2 Group group number Move Choose High End Systems 293 Section 17 Playback The Playback Bar will show the group name above the chosen master When the master level is less than 100 the Playback Bar will also display a bar showing the level When the Flash key is pressed the Playback Bar will display BO see Figure 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 2 Group 2 Group Group Group Inhibitive Inhibitive Inhibitive master with master at full master at50 flash key pressed Figure 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar 17 8 294 Configuring Playback Controls For each cuelist and scene you can configure how the playback controls work For example you can e Assign the master Go key to assert the selected cuelist over 3 seconds e Assign the main Halt Back key to Halt the selected cuelist with the option to Release if already halted e Assign the Fader to be a manual crossfader rather than an intensity fader e Assign the Flash key to only flash to 50 and to Go the cuelist To assign the function of each control together with any associated opti
121. that is created by the console or the user XXXxX dark blue text indicates information that you should literally input into the Hog 40S verbatim XXXX dark blue text inside a set of brackets indicates the manual is only describing the type of information that you should input into the Hog 40S XXXX XXXX XXXX dark red text separated by commas indicates key or button presses that are sequential XXXX XXXX dark red text followed by indicates a key or button press that is held down while the second key or button is pressed XXXX XXXX XXXX dark red text mixed with arrows indicates a sequence of operations that navigate you through windows and toolbars High End Systems 19 20 Section 1 Getting Started You will also find important or useful information highlighted t Z Caution Information regarding potetial hazards to the equipment or your person nel Important Information regarding items require special attention Tip Information to help you be more productive in your programming High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 1 The Command Line The majority of user input into the Hog 4 Operating System is handled through the command line Keystrokes and button presses accumulate on the Command Line Toolbar where users build executable commands such as recording a cue In some cases command line entries are executed immediately but in most cases you must press Enter to confir
122. that same show High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 3 3 3 4 Node Types and Net Numbers There are two elements that help to identify a node s role in a network show node type and net number The node type is inherent to device hardware and cannot be changed For example a Hog 4 is a console node type while a DMX Processor 8000 is a DMX Processor node type Secondly there is the device s net number The net number is a user configurable setting that further defines the node s role in a network show For example a DMX Processor 8000 set to net number 1 means the DMX Processor 8000 will load and output patch information stored in the show file for DMX Processor 8000 1 Important Within a single node type each device must be set to a unique net num ber For example you cannot set two physical DMX Processor 8000s to net number 1 in a show Only one of the DPs will actually load show data while the other DP will sit idle as a duplicate Consoles are the only ex ception to the duplicate net number rule Individual consoles can be set to identical net numbers which allows them to fully track one another in terms of their current page chosen master and playback state This tracking feature when combined with the failover functionality dis cussed in Configuring the Network for Console Failover p 71 provides the user with the ability to configure a tracking backup console on the network Connecti
123. the editable editor If the destination already exists and the action to take is unclear then you will be asked what the console should do Some examples of command line syntax are shown below Note that a final press of the Enter key is required to tell the console to the command is complete and ready to be executed High End Systems 21 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals SolaSpot Pro CMY 1 SolaSpot Pro CMY 2 Figure 2 1 The Command Line Source Mask Command Options Destina Comments tion Record Position 1 Records a position palette to location 1 in the posi tion palette directory No source is given so the content of the current ed itor is assumed Record Replace Position 1 The Replace option on the Record Options Tool bar ensures that the new palette replaces the previ ously recorded palette Position1 Copy Position 2 The Copy command takes the Position 1 palette as its source Position 1 Move Replace Position 2 This example combines using a source and a re cord option Group 2 Record Position 3 Here Group 2 acts asa mask for the record com mand so that only fix tures in Group 2 are recor ded into the Position 3 palette Cue 1 Group 3 Copy Position Cue 5 Here the parameter val ues of fixtures in Group 3 are copied from Cue 1 to Cue 5 The Position option applied to the copy com mand means that only position parameters are included Tip The text of the command line turns red
124. the settings window navigate to the DMX Widgets tab Ensure that the console s built in dmx widget outputs are listed and assigned in this window If they are not assigned and you have confirmed all the steps in this troubleshooting section then per form a full re install of the Hog 4 OS 443 Section 33 Troubleshooting 5 Ifa you have performed all the troubleshooting steps in this section and the problem continues to persist then please contact High End Sytems technical support for further assistance 33 3 No ArtNet Output from console s FixtureNet Port 1 Double check the patch window and ensure that your fixtures are patched to the correct DP and the correct dmx universes This sounds like a simple thing to check but in some cases output is failing only due to a mis patch If you are still not seeing ArtNet output from the console proceed to step 2 2 Open the network window setup network and make sure the internal DP8000 is reporting Outputs Active It the DP8000 is being reported as offline then log off the show and click on the settings button in the start window Ensure that run internal DP is turned on and set to the appropriate net number Log back onto the show and check output again If console is still not ouputting Art Net the proceed to step 3 and continue troubleshooting 3 Open the network window setup network and click on the internal DP8000 to which the fixtures are patched Click on the settings b
125. the validation code 7 Press the Finish The console will now reboot and operate as the new platform model 420 High End Systems Section 30 Updating Console Software Console Upgrade Confirmation Console upgrade succeeded Console will now reboot 30 5 Upgrading USB DMX Widgets Some older USB DMX Widgets single universe are compatible only with Hog 2 These USB DMX widgets will need to be upgraded to be compatible with Hog 4 OS Please contact your High End Systems dealer for pricing and details When purchasing you need to provide your Widget serial number and Widget ID number Once the upgrade is purchased you will receive an Upgrade Kit for each USB DMX Widget This kit contains labeling hardware software and a unique authorization code compatible only with the specified widget serial number After receiving your upgrade kit follow these steps to upgrade your USB DMX Widget 1 Connect your USB DMX Widget s that match the serial numbers on the in cluded authorization sheet to your Hog 4 OS console or Windows PC running Hog4PC 2 Press the control panel button in the start screen of the Hog 4 OS Navigate to the diganostics tab of the control panel and press the Widget Upgrades button 3 The widget upgrade utility wizard will now appear Press Next to begin High End Systems 421 Section 30 Updating Console Software 4 Select a Widget ID number from the drop down menu To confirm the identity
126. time for parameters belonging to fixtures that are increasing in intensity while the fade out time is the fade time for parameters belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity e Delay time The time between the cue being triggered and parameter values starting to change As with fade times you can assign a single delay time or have separate in delay and out delay times The in delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belonging to fixtures that are increasing in intensity starting to change while the out delay time is the delay between the cue being triggered and parameters belonging to fixtures that are decreasing in intensity starting to change e Path How parameter values change during the fade The simplest path is a straight line so that parameter values change smoothly and evenly throughout the fade but you can use paths that make all of the change happen at the start of the fade for example The different types of trigger values are e Wait time The time from the previous cue being triggered to the current cue being triggered e Follow on time The time from the end of the previous cue to the current cue being triggered High End Systems 207 Section 13 Timing e Timecode A specific timecode value when a cue is triggered see Triggering Cues from MIDI Timecode p 337 e Clock A real world time and date value when a cue is triggered see Clock Triggers p 220 Figure 13 1
127. to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the dialog box When a Hog server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Wholehog Network Found then to Loading Show and finally to Running Status Status Status Status Wholehog Network Found Status Loading Show Status Running Session Session Connected Session Connected Info Initiaksing network OK Into Loading Foture Data Info Outputs Active The Session and Info fields will contain additional network information The Wholehog DP application can be configured similarly to an actual DMX Processor You can assign Hog network port and the net number for this application The Port field must be as signed to the same port as your Hog console on the network The Number field represents the net number and is similar to the number in the upper right hand corner on a DMX Processor Assign the number to a unique device net number that is not used by any other devices on the Hog network Press Apply after making changes Configuring the Visualiser Universes In the Wholehog DP window on your visualiser computer press the Patch button to open the Patch window Using this window you can connect any of the 24 DMX universes within your visualiser to any DMX Processor and universe from your Hog show For example to assign visualiser universe 3 to respond to the DMX from universe 3 of DMX Processor 2 simply select DP 2 Universe 3 in the 3 row Press OK after co
128. to the wheels The assignment of DMX addresses to fixtures See Also DMX The set of information that defines where a fixture is patched including DMxX address DMX universe and DMX Processor Some fixtures have multiple patch points See Also DMX DMX address DMX Processor A way of defining the way that a parameter changes during a fade You could assign a path that makes the fixture parameter snap to its final value at the start of the fade for example Paths should not be confused with conversion curves paths are the properties of a cue while a conversion curves is the property of a fixture See Also fade time conversion curve The Pig button is a modifier key and may be used in conjunction with other keys to alter their function A system where new objects are added to previous ones rather than re placing them Hog 40S can be assigned to pile on desktop views so that new windows are opened but ones from the previous view are not closed recangular plot objects which can be used to map the pixels of rich media content photos and videos onto lighting fixtures through a process known as PixelMapping programmable fixtures that are used to send media content to PixelMaps A Hog accessory that increases the number of physical masters available by 10 See Also master a user created graphical layout that contain programable objects such as fixtures and PixelMaps Plots can be used to select fixtures gather fixture
129. top right buttons Kensington SlimBlade Trackball Model K72327US High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 1 10 3 1 11 Shutting Down and Restarting the Console To properly shut down or restart the desk select Setup Quit The Quit button is on the right hand end of the Setup ToolbarAfter press the quit button the Shut Down dialog will open see Figure 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog with the following options Shut Down Hog Session Do you want to Figure 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog Shut Down shutting down will turn the Hog console off completely e Restart Console restarting is like shutting the console down and turning it on again and will take you to the Start window Log Off logging off will close your current desktop Programmer and output screens as well as closing the current show file The console remains powered up and running and returns to the Start window e Cancel cancels the quit command In all cases your show data is automatically saved to disk Locking the Console for Access Consoles can be locked for access at any time by hitting the setup key on the console front panel and then pressing the lock button on the quit toolbar Consoles can also be locked remotely by enabling the lock local access button under the security tab of the console settings window for the console on the network you wish to lock Figure 3 5 The Lock Button on the quit toolbar When the c
130. using the buttons in the Function column There are buttons for all parameter types for all intensity all colour all position all beam and for each individual parameter type High End Systems 231 Z Section 14 Effects Tip All effect attributes can be fanned using the Fan key and parameter wheels remember to select the required parameter types in the Effects Engine Functioncolumn first You can also enter a value of say 50 Thru 80 in a cell of the Effects Engine window See Fanning p 144 14 1 4 Building Table Effects in Editors Effects can be assigned directly to specific fixtures and their attributes in any editor including the Programmer This is helpful when you wish to make small changes without opening the Effects Engine Effect types are assigned and edited in the Table view whilst effect attributes can be adjusted in the Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot views The views are selected by buttons at the top of the Programmer or editor window For example to create an offset circle effect using fixtures in positions from the current onstage look T 8 Main Toolbar Programmer open the Programmer 1 Thru 5 Position Suck sucks position information from fixtures 1 through 5 that are currently live on stage Table select the Table view in the Programmer the pan and tilt column will read Off Select all pan and tilt cells of the selected fixtures by clicking and dragging Set Sine
131. versions and the above pro cedure is not fully working or if the console is not recognizing the network processor on the network you can force the network processor to update its software at the DP 1 Turn off the mains power to the network processor Check that the DP is connected to the console s network and that the console s Enable DHCP Server and Enable Boot Server options are enabled in the network tab of the control panel Hold down the all three buttons on the network processor s front panel and apply power The DP s display should now read Forcing software reload The network processor will download its software from the console and reboot The DP s net number and port number settings will be set back to defaults 30 3 1 DMX Processor 8000 Reset Options The keys on the front panel of the DMX Processor 8000 are used for standard menu navigation However as the unit boots you can view specific boot information via a scroll bar Once the 416 High End Systems Section 30 Updating Console Software DMxX Processor 8000 is fully booted it displays the standard menu In addition the following reset options are available Hard Reset to force a hard reset of the DMX Processor 8000 hold the middle and bottom buttons for four seconds use the center and right buttons for older DP8000 units where the front panel buttons are laid out horizontally Once the reset begins you will see I O Board Disconnected on the display D
132. very powerful feature that allows you to make global changes to the show very simply and quickly rather than having to re program every cue individually If you wish to make a palette that is just a programming tool where later changes to the palette will not cause cues scenes and other palettes recorded with it to be updated then you can use direct palettes With direct palettes actual parameter values are placed into cues rather than references See Direct Palettes p 164 Tip Hog 40S can automatically generate a useful set of palettes based on the fixtures in your show see Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically p 117 Directory windows give you quick access to groups palettes scenes cuelists and so on and they all work in essentially the same way Colour Directory Guard 2 2 C 13 magenta1 red 18 19 c 20 Cj 21 22 C 23 cyan mix magenta fyellow mix red mix green mix blue mix mix Figure 2 7 A Typical Directory High End Systems 35 36 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Figure 2 7 A Typical Directory shows a typical directory The main part of the window is filled with large buttons used to access the group palette scene cuelist or page as well as dis playing their names and some other key information Description Display Applies To Ga Palettes D Palettes R Palettes H Palettes L Palettes Cuelists Cuelists Cuelists T Pages R Pages Shows the parame
133. when this button is enabled E aeg Close closes the frontmost window Open Backspace EJ Using the Mouse or Trackball To move a window click and hold on the window s top status bar whilst dragging it to its new position To move a toolbar click and hold its left hand edge and drag to its new position Windows can be resized by clicking and holding on corners until the resize arrow appears You can then drag the corner to make the window bigger or smaller Note that you can only use the mouse or Trackball to move and resize windows if you have un locked them with the Lock button on the Window Control Toolbar Keeping the windows locked is useful when using the touch screens so that you do not accidentally drag or resize windows with their title bars or borders You can still move and resize windows with the buttons on the toolbar 26 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Scrolling Window Contents When a window s contents is too great to fit inside the window scroll bars appear along the right and bottom edges of the window You can scroll by pressing or clicking and then dragging on the scroll bar s slider or by pressing or clicking on the arrows at the ends of the scroll bar In addition you can scroll window contents by holding down the Open key and using the Trackball I Wheel or parameter wheels to scroll Desktop Views Palettes Output Programmer Commands Michaels View Chri Figure
134. with the Thru key on the console keypad For example 0 gt 255 would result in a full range for an 8 bit DMX channel DMX ranges can be inverted if desired for ex ample 255 gt 0 to match the real world range they correspond to If a function is defined as a 16 bit DMX function then DMX values and ranges may be between 0 and 65535 If a DMX value is out of the allowable DMX range the minimum or maximum value will auto matically be used an entry of 0 gt 500 will become 0 gt 255 Real World 376 This field defines the label value or range that is displayed on the console when the function and feature is used The selected function and feature will automatically define the type of value available within this field For example an intensity function will always be displayed as a per centage while pan or tilt will always be displayed in degrees and strobe frequency in hertz Hz You may enter a single value or a range of values 0 gt 260 using the Thru key on the console keypad The Real World range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range Note that if a single value is entered 100 for a corresponding DMX value range 0 gt 255 then you will not be able to adjust the parameter throughout the defined range High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder When defining the Real World values for a function feature you can simply enter the numeric value 0 gt 100 and the predefined unit type will automatical
135. y jeo Jopen Joe Jo lw Om fm os oso odoo 100 jonen fs O a Hf a a JocanJoKr oft open fodz C E Siral i 5 oon TSF NFINFSAIMNFIFSAS IAN powa peen SSL SIL PIL SSL SS ore gt Figure 11 1 The Cue Editor window High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer See Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters p 127 Once you have made changes be sure to press the Update key to save them the Cue Editor will then automatically close 11 6 1 Viewing Different Cues in the Editor In addition to the usual functions available in all editors described in Editors p 45 the Cue Editor window has controls that allow you to select which cue is displayed e Next and Back The Next and Back buttons to allow you to easily step through the cues in the cuelist to view or edit them e View Cue You can jump to another cue by typing its number in to the View Cue box and pressing the Enter key Follow Current If you select the Follow Current button the Cue Editor window will always show the current cue as the cuelist is played back If you use Next Back or View Cue to view another cue or if you edit the current cue then Follow Current is disabled Follow Next This is similar to Follow Current except that the next cue is dis played rather than the current one When the last cue is played the first cue in the cueli
136. you have finished editing in the Programmer you can merge the parameter values into the currently playing cues palettes and scenes by pressing the Update key The Auto Update window will open showing which cuelists cues palettes and scenes are contributing to the look on stage so that you can choose which to update For cuelists you have several choices e Either update the current cue in the cuelist or track the programming backwards so that the new values are merged into the last cue with a hard value for that parameter see Tracking Values Backwards When Recording p 189 If you have existing programming that refers to a palette you can choose to update the palette instead of adding new parameter values to a cue In this case these updates will be performed first and anything left in the Programmer after this will be used to update the selected cue or Track Backwards For scenes you have the option to merge the programming into the scene or into the palettes that are referred to in that scene Once you have chosen your options press OK to perform the update Note that the parameter values remain in the Programmer Tip If there is no playback on stage when you press Update the Auto Update window will not appear and the Update key press is ignored When you press the Update key the Update Toolbar will also appear see Figure 16 2 The Update Toolbar This allows you to select which parameter types are updated whether
137. 00 Cue 2 100 80 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 If you now delete Cue 2 Fixture 1 will track from Cue 1 through Cues 3 and 4 at 30 rather than going to the expected 100 in Cues 3 and 4 Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You can prevent this happening by deleting the cue cue only which adds any values that previ ously tracked through from the deleted cue into the next cue Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 3 100 80 50 Cue 4 40 To delete a cue without tracking the changes forwards 1 2 3 4 List 1 Cue 3 select the cue to be deleted Press and hold the Delete key The Record Options Toolbar will appear Deselect Forward from the Record Options Toolbar Release the Delete key 11 7 4 Blocking Cues Blocking cues prevent changes made earlier in the cuelist from tracking through to subsequent cues in the cuelist Using State You can create blocking cues using the State button on the Record Options Toolbar For ex ample suppose that you have the following cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 192 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists to turn Cue 4 into a blocking cue you copy it to itself with state 1 Cue 4 Copy State Cue 4 Enter the State button is on the Record Options Toolbar that appears when you press Copy 2 Select Replace The values are now Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1
138. 0mb Ethernet switch or router Gigabit switches are also HogNet compatible The simplest HogNet network consists of a console and a DMX Processor connected to the lighting rig Only slightly more complex is the case of a system with a single console and several DMX Processors connected together with an Ethernet switch Large systems can have several consoles Hog 4PC systems and DMX Processors controlling large lighting rigs Configuring Console Network Adapters At the top of the HogNet tab in the Control Panel is a drop down menu of all the installed network adapters usable by the Hog OS The Hog 4 console will only list one network adapter and it will be greyed out while Windows computers running Hog 4PC might have more than one network adapter listed depending on how many network adapters are installed and enabled on the computer High End Systems oo C oo CcC oo CcC C C C CE Section 3 Setting Up the System Control Panel v1 0 0 b 238 Network Adapter DHCP Boot Server MAC e0 cb 40 01 3b 6f C iaaa COES Address Range End PEPRIREIEES O Obtain an P address using DHCP Use custom P settings Figure 3 10 The Network pane of the Control Panel After selecting an adapter from the drop down menu the area below the menu will show the adapter s current status e A link status of Up indicates the adapter is connected to a network and is ready to be configured to communicate to other network devices e A li
139. 1 06 29 PM Tutorial Show Hog 4 Show 9 7 2012 11 40 12AM 9 7 2012 2 36 00 PM Figure 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 4 12 1 Merging Fixture Types Once you have selected a source show Hog 40S compares the fixture types contained within each show file and creates a list of fixture types which have changed see Figure 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window 100 High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 12 2 Merge Show Type Merge Select the fixture types to merge from the source file SS l l E E Name Rev Change Calibrated i EF Martin L _ mac 301 LED 16b8 standard 3 Not In Show Deselect Al A Back Next K Cancel Figure 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show window An expanding tree shows the fixture types that do not match exactly and will explain what their differences are e Newer the fixture type in the source show is a newer revision e Older the type in the source show is an older revision e Not In Show the type is in the source show but not the current show If you want to see all fixture types in the source show file even if they match the fixture types destination show press Show Same Revision Select the fixture types to merge by clicking on their check boxes The Deselect All button allows you to clear the current selection and start again Press Next to continue Merging Fixtures After choosing to merge fixture types you can merge t
140. 10 ALT 1 0 Merge E GO Master 1 10 TAB 1 0 Move M Pause Master 1 10 Backspace 1 0 Copy P Undo CTRL Z Delete D or Delete Redo CTRL Y Update U Visual Cut CTRL X Live V Visual Copy CTRL C Time T Visual Paste CTRL V Setup S Visual Select Range CTRL cursors Control L Backspace backspace Fan F Enter Enter Highlight H GM and or Blind B Central Choose ALT Clear C Bottom Right toolbar TAB F1 F12 Next N Top Left toolbar Shift F1 F12 Back Y Top Right toolbar ALT F1 F12 High End Systems Section 32 Cheat Sheets 32 2 Magic Key Combinations Several of the functions of the Hog 4 OS can be accesed through use of the front panel key combinations and onscreen button combinations found in the tables below High End Systems 437 Section 32 Cheat Sheets Programming Patching Pig Blind Pig Clear Pig Flip Pig Park Pig Touch Pig parameter wheels Pig Record Pig Merge Pig Fixture any encoder wheel any encoder wheel backspace any encoder wheel any encoder wheel Pig any encoder wheel any kind button Open Fixture Pig Pig l Wheel Window Control Pig Open Colour Pig Open Beam Pig Open Fixture Open backspace Open Thru Open Full Open Open Fades Changes when blinding and unblinding Undo Sends fixture selection through possible flip positions in reverse order Unparks selected fixtures
141. 100 B will produce a bright blue tint 50 R 100 G 100 B will produce a middle saturation cyan While Hog 40S allows you to control the CMY or RGB parameters of fixtures directly this method has several disadvantages e With both the RGB and CMY systems it is difficult to remember what combin ation of settings will achieve the colour you want e With both systems colour and fixture intensity are linked Under the CMY system giving all three parameters values above 0 unnecessarily reduces the light output with the RGB system fixtures often don t provide a separate in tensity parameter so you have to control it with the colour parameters However it is usually much more convenient when programming to keep colour and in tensity completely separate The different colour systems together with different lamp types used make it difficult to match colours between fixtures of different types Furthermore 136 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers during crossfades colours tend not to remain matched through the duration of the cue producing uneven colour fades Hog 40S solves these problems by using a third colour system Hue and Saturation HS Under the HS system a fixture s colour is determined by two parameters Hue the colour s position in the possible range of colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and magenta and finally returning to red As the range wra
142. 2 1 2 12 1 3 Recording Scenes You can record scenes either directly to a physical master for immediate playback or to the Scene Directory Recording to the Scene Directory To record a scene 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor 2 Record Scene the Scene Directory window opens 3 Select the destination location in the Scene Directory window 4 Alternatively enter a number on the keypad and press Enter Recording to a Physical Master You can record a scene directly to a physical master Hog 4OS will automatically put it in the next available location in the Scene Directory 1 Create the look for the scene in the Programmer or editor 2 Record Scene 3 Press the Choose key above the desired physical master Naming a Scene You can give a scene a name that will be displayed in the Scene Directory window 1 Open Scene open the Scene Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a scene when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the scene 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a scene immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the scene name and select OK High End Systems 203 Section 12 Scenes 12 2 Deleting Scenes To delete a scene 1 Scene 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete a
143. 2 3 The View Toolbar Desktop views allow you to store arrangements of windows for quick access so you do not have to re open and re arrange windows to perform specific tasks For example you could create a programming view that shows the group palette and effects directories along with the Program mer window A playback view could display the cuelist and scene directories and the Output window Desktop views are managed by the View Toolbar at the top of the left hand touch screen see Figure 2 3 The View Toolbar and the Views Directory see Figure 2 4 The Views Direct ory You can open the Views Directory by holding down the Open key and pressing the View button on the View Toolbar Views Directory a t a Se Da 1 2 3 5 6 7 Palettes Cuelist Kinds Output Programme Commands W hris s Figure 2 4 The Views Directory Tip When you create a new show it automatically contains desktop views for palettes cuelists output and the Programmer Recording a Desktop View To record a desktop view using the View Toolbar High End Systems 27 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 1 Arrange the console s windows as you want them stored in the desktop view 2 Hold down the Record key and press one of the numbered buttons on the View Toolbar Naming a Desktop View To name a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Press the Set key together with the appropriate button on the View Toolbar The Quickname wi
144. 3 Configuring Art Net Output Art Net output is configurable using the Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 1 2 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings Select the Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window see Figure 3 11 Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings win dow Universe this field denotes which DMX universe to configure Broadcast check this box to enable Broadcasting When enabled all Art Net information will be sent to all nodes UnicastIP when the Broadcast field is not checked enter an IP address of an Art Net node to Unicast the universe s data to Subnet click to select the Art Net subnet 0 15 to transmit this universe s data on By default the subnet will match the Node number of the DMX Pro cessor 8000 Universe click to select the Art Net Universe 0 15 to transmit this universe s data on Changes Only check this box to transmit only changes to Art Net data click these keys to expand or reduce the number of Art Net configurations for a specific DMX universe 3 4 4 Configuring E1 31 sACN Output E1 31 Output is configurable using the E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor window High End Systems 1 2 3 Setup Network open the Network window Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings Select the E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings wind
145. 5 Editing Discreetly arier e ten eee ate 254 16 5 1 Fade Changes ssssesersrssrrsrrsrssrssrrerererererterreresresrns 254 16 5 2 gt BING miesa aeee a csssectovss scutes aistsecsseseateacanbtees 254 16 6 Parking dien scant ka eet Seek os eae ee Se a se AET EA 255 16 6 1 Viewing and Editing What is Parked escenes 255 17 Playback i iii iiinn eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaneeaeeeneeaeneaees 259 17 1 Physical Master Playback ccceeeceeeee eee settee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 259 17 1 1 Attaching Cuelists and Scenes to Masters 259 17 1 2 Controlling Playback cece tce cece eee e eee eeeea teen nena 260 17 1 3 Releasing Masters 0 0 0 ceceeeeeeee eee eee e eee tesa tesa tena eed 263 17 1 4 Choosing and Selecting Masters cceeeeeeeee neers 266 17 1 5 Cuelist and Scene ODPtions eneren 266 17 2 Virtual Master Playback ccceceee cece eee eect eee eee eeaeeeaeeeae 271 17 2 1 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory NE EA A OT A E fan teem aeee monster aetna 272 17 2 2 Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master 272 17 2 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command Line 273 17 3 Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes saesnec 273 17 3 2 USING HTP and EDP vs icvceccietees st anonn easa aeii 274 17 3 2 Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others 008 275 17 3 3 Changing a Cuelist s Priority ee eeeeeeeeeeee seers 276 17 3 4 Multiple Cuelists with Effects
146. 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar 146 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 4 5 Multipart Fanning With the command line you can enter multipart fanning 1 Thru 9 10 Thru 50 Thru 10 The fixtures at either end of the range take the value of 10 that in the middle 50 and the others spread between 10 20 30 40 50 40 30 20 10 You can fan in as many parts as you want separating values with the Thru key Note that multipart fanning only works with the command line not when editing values in the spreadsheet 6 4 6 Fanning with Groupings Grouping allows you to control the way that parameters are fanned to make complex patterns You can group fixtures in two ways e Repeat The repeat is the number of fixtures that are fanned before the fan is repeated For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a repeat of three would result in four identical fan patterns or parts each with three fixtures in O00O000O00000 Num Intensity Desk Channel 35 3 3 3 Buddying The buddying number puts the fixtures into gangs that all take the same value For example fanning a selection of twelve fixtures with a buddying value of three would result in fixtures 1 to 3 having the same parameter value fixtures 4 to 6 having the same value and so on OOOOOO0O00000 High End Systems 147 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Num Intensity Desk
147. 6 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2002 Safety EN60950 2000 EMC EN55103 1 1996 E2 EN55103 2 1996 E2 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards h Kenneth Stuart Hansen Compliance Engineer 30 June 2012 High End Systems Table of Contents 1 Getting Started cccceecee eee ee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaees 19 EL About this Manual cscivcius atest hed ius weed ea ee 19 1 2 Manual SymbolS 00 00 00 nee eee eee e detente teen ee sa eeae eed 19 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals cccsceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeesaeeaeeeaeeas 21 2 1 The Command Line cccceeeceeeee E tesa essa essa esse esa aa 21 2 1 1 Command Line Syntax 1 0 0 cece ee eee eee ne eea eee aneenes 21 2 1 2 THE Status Bar aosi he ei enpara a ii n aah ste essen peaeh Shoes ee 22 2 2 The Graphical User Interface ccceeceee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeneeenaes 23 2 2 1 Window Management 0ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeee een eeae ees 24 203 ADSEFACEION gree nisseee ies was aa A diye pa eek N E ce coset yaacea apneic 29 2 3 1 Referring to Fixtures 2 0 ceieceeeeeeee cece eee eee eee eea tenets 30 2 3 2 Real World Un Its priri sryisinip rania ntaso fenta ei a aeaiia RE 30 2 3 3 Complex Parameters cece cece e
148. 74 2 6 2 6 1 32 Colour Matching Fixtures of different types use different methods to perform colour mixing Sending the same parameter values to fixtures of different types might produce a different colour on each type For example sending C 50 M 50 Y 0 will always produce a shade of blue but it ll be a different blue with different fixture types Usually you have to compensate for this yourself by manually creating colour palettes by eye to produce similar colours on all fixture types This is a time consuming process and later restricts you to using the palettes you have already set up The Hog 40S s colour matching system provides a new way to choose colours without these problems Colour Models Traditionally colour mixing fixtures use the CMY Cyan Magenta Yellow system to uniquely define each colour they can produce With the increasing popularity of LED fixtures the RGB Red Green Blue system is also becoming more common These two systems are called colour models Any colour can be represented equally well by either of these two colour models they are just different ways of conveying the same information Many other colour models exist perhaps the most useful of which for lighting control anyway is the HSI Hue Saturation In tensity system Hue This is the term used to specify the colours position in the possible range a colours from red going through yellow green cyan blue and mage
149. Art Net and E1 31 sACN Art Net and E1 31 also known as streaming ACN are two communication protocols supported by the Hog 40S that allow for DMX512 data to be sent over Ethernet While each protocol is unique in terms of specification and implementation they both provide the ability to carry many DMxX universes over a single cat 5 Ethernet cable This section of the manual will help you to understand how to properly configure your console or Hog 4PC to output Art Net and E1 31 Platform Art Net sACN Output Capabil ity Hog 4 Console 16 unique universes adding DMX Processors to HogNet network in creases output capability DMX Processor 8000 16 unique universes Hog 4PC matches output capability of physically connected USB DMX widgets 8 universe maximum Identifying the FixtureNet Port The FixtureNet port is the ethernet port Hog 40S uses to send Art Net and or E1 31 data to fix tures media servers and DMX converters that are capable of receiving these protocols over ethernet The FixtureNet port is located on the rear panel of the Hog 4 Console as well as on the rear panel of the DMX Processor 8000 Depending on the age of your DMX Procressor 8000 the port will either be labeled FixtureNet or Fixture Link When using Hog 4PC you have the option to select which of your computer s network adapters will act as the FixtureNet port for outputting Art Net and or E1 31 To assign one of your computer s network adapter
150. CITP media servers in the patch window and finally how to use the patch window to refresh CITP media preview packages 10 2 1 Supported CITP Media Server Clients Hog 40S v2 0 0 supports the following CITP Media server clients Arkaos MediaMaster Coolux Pandoras Box software version 4 7 or greater Green Hippo Hippotizer software version 3 2 1 or greater High End Systems Axon software version 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DL 2 software version 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DL 3 software version 2 1 2 or greater High End Systems DLV software version 2 1 1 or greater PRG Mbox Studio amp Mbox Mini software versions 3 6 1 amp 3 8 10 2 2 Configuring DP8000 for CITP Discovery In order for the console to properly discover CITP enabled fixtures on a DP8000 s FixtureNet network the FixtureNet adapter for the DP8000 must be properly configured 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 that is connected via FixtureNet to the CITP enable fixtures Select the FixtureNet tab of the node settings window Ensure that the IP address and subnet settings are appropriate for the network environment in which the CITP discovered fixtures are connected This is similar to configuring the FixtureNet adapter for Art Net and sACN output To better ensure connectivity it is recommended that the IP address assigned to the FixtureNet adapter be within in the same sub network as the CITP fix tures it is receving preview thumbn
151. Channel 31 0 32 0 a4 go 33 0 34 33 35 36 or 38 39 40 41 100 42 100 You can combine repeats and buddying to create complex patterns very simply Repeats and buddying are selected from the Grouping Toolbar press Grouping on the Main Toolbar The toolbar will remain open to allow you to combine Grouping and Buddying press Enter or click on the toolbar s Close button when you have made your selection Figure 6 11 The Grouping Toolbar The toolbar displays the current repeat and buddying size and has buttons to increase and decrease the repeat and the buddying There are also shortcuts for repeats of 0 2 3 4 and 8 and No Buddying Note that grouping and buddying are only used during fanning the grouping and buddying in formation is not recorded into cues and palettes but the resulting parameter values are recorded Tip By default grouping and buddying options are retained even after pressing the Clear key To reset grouping and buddying options when Clear is pressed enable the option in Setup Preferences Program ming 6 5 148 Removing Values As well as assigning values for parameters you will sometimes want to remove parameter values from editors For example e You no longer want to use a particular fixture in a cue scene or palette e You decide to have the colour of several fixtures controlled by a different cuelist on another playback To do this you need to remove
152. Cuelist window of the chosen master 2 Options Cuelist open the Cuelist pane of the Cuelist Options window Alternatively you can quickly access many cuelist options from the Cuelist Options Toolbar by holding down the Choose key of the master the cuelist is on Z E Tip Z You can quickly open the Playback Options window of a cuelist attached to a master by holding the Pig key and pressing the master s Choose key Chosen Master List 1 Playback Options Sam rco to beginaing otist A 4 pE Go next v Figure 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window You can configure the default settings for new cuelists in the Playback Defaults pane of the User Preferences window e Setup Preferences Playback Defaults You can also customise the function of each of the master controls and main controls see Con figuring Playback Controls p 294 High End Systems 267 Section 17 Playback Tip You can revert all of the settings in the Cuelist pane of the Playback De faults window by pressing the Reset to Defaults button in the bottom left corner of the window Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings You can assign several settings that control cuelist timing Timing Function De Notes fault Release Time 2s The time over which parameter values go to their default values when the cuelist is released see Releasing Masters p 263 Assert Time 2s The time in which parameters go to their values d
153. Date to assign a single shot trigger 6 If you want the trigger to recur at regular intervals check the Recurrence Pattern check box Then click the frequency Time Daily Weekly Monthly Yearly with which you want the trigger to recur and select options for the specified frequency Tip The next valid trigger date and time is shown at the bottom of the Clock Trigger window 7 Click OK Once you have set a clock trigger the cuelist window will now indicate the trigger time and type in the cue s Wait column High End Systems 221 Section 13 Timing Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable Folow Folow Insert Renumber Chosen Link Fade 2s 10s 15s 0 28 10s 15s 0 4 42100 PMH Copy o 2s 10s 15s 0 4 4 21 30 PMH Copy of Cue 1 2s 10s 15s 0 4 4 4 2200 PM H Copy of Cue 1 25s 10s 15s 0 To enable or disable the clock functions on a cuelist toggle the Enable Clock button in the cuelist window Chosen Master List 2 Play Learn View Enable Enable Follow Folow Insert Options Ch Timing Number Name rsz puleu 4 20 30 PM H Copy of Cue 1 Tip You can also enable or disable the clock functions for a cuelist in the cuelist s Cuelist Options window or using macros see Macros p 353 The Clock Toolbar The Clock Toolbar shows the time and date according to the Hog 40S clock and information about the next cue due to be triggered To open the Clock Toolbar
154. Delete deletes Cues 1 to 4 in Cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip To delete a cue cue only so that changes caused by deleting the cue don t track through to later cues see Deleting without Tracking Forward p 191 11 4 11 4 1 186 Copying and Moving Cues Tip Copying or moving cues affect hard values only the cue you wish to copy move may also contain tracked values that create the current on stage state If you wish to copy this look rather than just changes made by the current cue use Copy and Move with State see Using State p 192 Copying Cues To make a copy of a cue in the same cuelist 1 Make sure that the cuelist you want to work with is on the currently chosen master 2 Cue 1 Copy Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 to Cue 2 To copy in a cuelist other than the chosen one or to copy between cuelists specify the cuelist with the List key For example e List 1 Cue 1 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of Cuelist 1 to Cue 2 of Cuelist 2 To copy a range of cues e List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4 Copy List 2 Cue 2 Enter copies the contents of cues 1 to 4 of Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 starting at Cue 2 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 4 2 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 184 Moving Cues To move a cue to a new location e Cue 1 Move Cue 2 Enter moves the
155. Enter choose a location for the palette To convert an existing palette to a direct palette 1 Open Colour open the appropriate Palette Directory Set the directory window to spreadsheet view by pressing the 3 Select the Is Direct cell for the palette you want to change and press Set to toggle the value to Yes Note that converting a palette to a direct palette will not alter any programming done previously using the palette cues and scenes already recorded will still contain references to the palette Only subsequent programming will be effected 8 7 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a palette if the destination location already has a palette recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a palette only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination palette The new palette will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge incorporates the new information into the destination palette If the same fixtures and parameters are in both palettes the new values will replace the old e Replace overwrites the palette information in that destination Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a palette to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or M
156. Enter the palette name and select OK 8 2 Using Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply a palette by selecting it from its directory window The palette will be applied to the current fixture selection as long as the palette contains para meter information for the selected fixtures Doing so assigns the parameter value to be a reference to the palette A palette that puts all Studio Colors in the rig to deep red will therefore apply this immediately to any Studio Colors that are in the current selection see Figure 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette For example 1 Open Colour open the Colour Directory window 2 3 Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Colour 2 select the palette from the Colour Directory window Or using the command line e 3 Thru 5 Colour 2 Enter 4 strobe Position Colour Mixing Colour 1 ey ee Type Pan Ti Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 ME BE Colour 2 BE BE Colour 2 100 i RE Colour 2 BE EE Colour 2 Figure 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette 8 3 Editing Palette Contents ons canes rete Postia Figure 8 2 The Palette Editor window 156 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 8 3 1 You can change the parameter values that are applied when a palette is referenced during playback by editing the palette s contents in an editor window see Figure 8 2 The Palette Editor window For example to open Colou
157. Fixtures Beam Palettes If the Make Beam Palettes button is depressed the console will make beam palettes If you press the adjacent Separate by Wheel button the console will create separate beam palettes for each beam effect wheel in fixtures that have more than one This ensures that you can use the palettes to program looks that use both wheels simultaneously without the palettes con flicting with each other The Auto Palettes window also allows you to choose the alignment spacing of the palette s dir ectory window The alignment spacing controls how many palettes are displayed across the dir ectory window for example 6 for a half screen window 12 for a full screen window For more information on groups and palettes see Groups p 151 and Palettes p 155 5 7 Configuring Fixtures Each fixture has a variety of settings that control how Hog 4OS handles it Settings that control how the fixture as a whole behaves are configured in the Fixture window while settings that are specific to individual parameters are configured in the Edit Fixtures window 5 7 1 Fixture Configuration To open the Fixture window Figure 5 11 The Fixture window Setup Patch e Open Fixture a E Opao 1 161 ERN E TERN Figure 5 11 The Fixture window In the Fixture window you can view but not alter the fixture type and communications protocol for each fixture To show these columns right cl
158. However since there are multiple partitions that can t communicate with each other there are multiple different copies of the show 2 A partition can happen very easily For example by disconnecting a server s network cable for a few seconds then reconnecting it it will be partitioned from the rest of the servers 3 Even after a severed network connection is repaired and connectivity is restored to all servers they will still artificially remain partitioned There is no way to automatically merge different copies of the show There simply is no way for the software to know which copy of the show is correct since conflicting changes may be made within each partition Since Hog 4 OS can t automatically resolve the differences the servers artificially maintain the partition So each par tition s copy of the show is maintained only within that partition and new data is only replicated within each partition 4 Although the partitions are artificially maintained all consoles will continue to have control over all aspects of the show that they have connectivity to 5 Logging a console off a show and rejoining allows that console to rejoin a partition is was previously excluded from If multiple partitions exist there is no guarantee which partition it will join 6 After shutting everything down different consoles will have different data based on the par tition they were in Copies of the show from a partition that didn t see any ch
159. MX Board Firmware Reload to reload the DMX board firmware from the Processor s front panel hold down any single button the DP8000 front panel as the unit is powered on Once the process begins you will see the DP8000 Bootloader message on the display After about one minute the firmware will be reloaded CPU Board Firmware Reload and Restore to Defaults to reload the CPU board firmware hold down all three buttons on the front of the DP8000 as the unit is powered on The DMX Processor 8000 will then reload its firmware from the network Once the process begins you will see the Forcing Software Reload message on the display 30 4 Upgrading HedgeHog Consoles 2015 and later All HedgeHog consoles manufactured in January 2015 and later are built using the exact same internal and external hardware Therefore the platform or model of the desk is not determined by the physical components of the desk but rather by an encrypted software certificate installed on the console This allows any HedgeHog console manufactured in January 2015 or later to be upgraded downgraded to any one of the platforms listed in the table below without the need for new hardware or physical changes to the desk Platform HogNet En External Monitor Fixture Net DMX model abled Enabled HedgeHog 4 NO NO 4 universes 4 universes HedgeHog YES NO 4 universes 4 universes 4N HedgeHog NO YES 4 universes 4 universes 4S HedgeHog YES YES 6 universes 6 universes 4X
160. Master Playback Hog consoles have ten physical playback masters that cuelists scenes and inhibitive submasters groups can be attached to for playback Each master masters has a fader a Go key a Halt Back key a Back key and a Flash key Additional physical playback master can be added to your console by adding a playback wing or executor wing 17 1 1 Attaching Cuelists and Scenes to Masters Cuelists and Scenes are automatically attached to a master when you create them with the Record Choose syntax see Recording to a Cuelist on a Master p 183 Otherwise to attach a cuelist to a master List or Scene 1 Move Choose attaches Cuelist 1 onto the chosen master Tip You can reference several cuelists and scenes to different masters using pages see Pages p 301 Moving and Copying Cuelists between Masters Moving a cuelist between masters will detach it from its original master Copying a cuelist between masters will leave the cuelist in its original location and attach a copy of the cuelist to the new location To move a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the cuelist from 2 Move 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to move the cuelist to To copy and so duplicate a cuelist 1 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist from 2 Copy 3 Press the Choose key of the master that you want to copy the cuelist to Detaching a Cuelist f
161. Parameter TIMINGS ececeeeeetee cnet eeeeeaeeee tena es 212 13 3 1 Assign Parameter Timings using Wheels 00 213 13 3 2 Assign Parameter Timings with the Command LMG ttre de Cot ator tbess E tet mo uae tod iae tung TT 214 13 3 3 Assign Parameter Timings in an Editor 08 215 13 3 4 Fanned TIMINGS cccceceeeee eect e eect ee eee anes a eeea teeta 217 13 4 Cue Wait TIMING irae a ence cnet eee e cee e ne ee nets E 218 BAL Leari Timings r aoa eani i aada daa ENEE ROA aa Enia 219 134 2 Clock TIJJErS adnie aoea a a aE 220 13 5 Loops and LINKS svc aac aa ee lees 223 13 5 1 Creating a LINK irtera ensues aie a teenies 223 13 5 2 Creating a LOOP ceeccceee cece cette ee ee atten eee aeeeaeeeaeeaee 223 13 5 3 Tracking Through LOOPS 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeee 225 Effects aniier ee cceaecasccaeeceseasedees ented sedscensnaeeadeawsneceddesecaenes 227 T41 Table Effects ia ened retss E E EE le partes 227 14 177 Effect Tables siio rron naapa ae naas aiena EIDE 227 14 1 2 Table Effect Attributes 2 0 0 eee eee e teeter need 228 14 1 3 Building Table Effects in the Effects Engine 230 14 1 4 Building Table Effects in Editors 0 0 0 0 cece 232 14 1 5 Tracking Table Effects eenen 233 14 1 6 Cue Timing and Table Effects 1 0 0 ceeeeeeeeee tees eeeee 233 14 2 Effect Palettes 2 0c c ce nes careless ee verneess an reine dees 235 14 2 1 Predefined Effect Palettes 2 0 0 0 c
162. Select the Colour cell and press Set to open the colour selection menu 2 Click on one of the 15 preset colours to assign the directory item this colour 3 Alternatively click on Choose to select a custom colour from a colour wheel or click None to select the standard grey colour Click on Auto to have palettes in the Colour directory automatically determine the button color based upon the dominate colour value recorded in the palette Tip You can select multiple buttons or cells by clicking and dragging to assign the same colour to multiple items 2 8 Spreadsheets Similar to Excel spreadsheets many windows in the Hog 4OS such as the programmer output window and cue editors are presented as spreadsheets All of the spreadsheets in the Hog 40S share a common set of features High End Systems 39 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Preset Custom Auto None Set As Highlight Palette Figure 2 11 The Preset Colour Options e To resize a spreadhseet column Place the cursor over the right hand edge of the column header The cursor will change to a double ended arrow Click and drag to resize the column Programmer Value Fade Delay Path Show Fade Palettes Changes Strobe Edit Compact Num Intensity os column header Studio Color 575 1 100 100 100 e To move a spreasheet column Click and drag on the column header To hide a spreadsheet column Right click on the column header and choose Hide
163. Thru 11 Enter copies the parameter settings of Fixtures 1 4 to 8 11 To copy parameter values from the fixtures of one group to the fixtures of another group within an editor Group 1 Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the parameter values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 142 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers You can add parameter location and destination masks to any copy command 1 Thru 4 Intensity Copy List 3 Cue 1 Fixture 8 Thru 11 Enter copies the intensities of fixtures 1 to 4 in the current selection to fixtures 8 to 11 in cue 1 of cuelist 3 You can use Copy to reverse the order of values For example if fixture 1 is at 10 fixture 2 at 20 and fixture 3 is at 30 e 1Thru3 Copy 3 Thru 1 Enter the fixtures will now be at 30 20 and 10 respectively Tip When you press the Copy key the words Copy to appear on the com mand line This is a useful reminder of the syntax of the copy command In the Programmer or Editor Window You can copy fixture data by using the Copy and Paste commands click the right hand mouse or Trackball button on the desired cell s in the editor window and select Copy or Paste from the menu You can also use the Pig key to copy and paste selected cells Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste Copy Options By default when you copy parameter values from one fixture to another the console will copy
164. Tip You can set a trackball key turn Fade Changes on and off see Trackball Keys p 95 Blind Blind mode allows you to continue programming and editing cues groups palettes and scenes without changing the onstage parameter values of fixtures The Blind key is located above the Trackball when in blind mode the Blind key will illuminate Note that when you turn off blind mode all parameter values that you have changed in the Pro grammer or editor will instantly appear on stage High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 6 16 6 1 To exit blind mode gracefully hold down the Pig key while pressing Blind parameters will fade to their new values in the assigned or default fade time Alternatively select Fade Changes in the editor you are using prior to turning blind on or off Tip Using Pig Blind on Hog 40S is equivalent to using the Try Cue key on the Wholehog II Parking Sometimes it is useful to lock certain parameter values of fixtures independently from program ming playback and the Grand Master For example you might want to lock a particular dimmer at a certain level as a working light or point a fixture to provide light for maintenance whilst a rehearsal or programming is in progress Park is also helpful for dealing with a fixture malfunction locking its pan and tilt so that it doesn t make a noise as it tries to move during the show Parking holds a fixture s parameters on stage but still allows y
165. WYSIWYG cece eee e cette nett ates need 407 29 3 3 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition 409 29 3 4 Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG ee 409 29 4 Troubleshooting cece e eee eee e eee eee eee e eae ede e eae e nee nae 410 29 5 Visualiser Support Contacts 0 0 ecee eee ee ee eee a eeeaeenaes 411 Updating Console Software s sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 413 30 1 Software Update ois finigivesk e a a dda esate 413 30 2 Full Install System Restore ccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeneeaeenes 413 30 2 1 Creating a Full Install USB Flash Drive on a Windows COMPULER fiat aid oti iced le oie ita hea 414 30 2 2 Creating a Full Install USB Flash Drive on a Macintosh COM PUL d aaa t iat a a E ETT 415 30 3 Updating the DMX Processor Software cccesseeeeeeeeeeeenenees 416 30 3 1 DMX Processor 8000 Reset Options ececcccccrene 416 30 4 Upgrading HedgeHog Consoles 2015 and later 417 30 5 Upgrading USB DMX Widgets ssssssssssssssrsrisrrsrrernersrenrennss 421 Installing Hog 4PC ccccceseeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 425 31 1 Software Installation eee eee seers eee ates a eeea tena eed 425 31 2 Software REMOVAl staart nre nee e E EET AA 429 31 3 Hardware Installation cccccecee eee eee ates ates nets nessa nena tenes 429 31 3 1 Unpacking Hardware Components c cccceeeeeeneee ees 429 31 3 2 USB DMX Widgets 0 0 cccccce
166. When Halted menu Action Notes None The current cue remains halted Resume The current cue continues to fade Release The cuelist is released see Releasing Masters p 263 Toggle FX Toggles effects between running at 0 BPM and the pro grammed rate Configuring Fader Assignment and Actions You can assign the physical fader of a master perform one of several different functions Some fader options have additional configuration options High End Systems 269 270 Section 17 Playback Fader As signment Description Configuration Options None Fader IPCB Cross fader Manual Cross fader Scale Play back Rate Scale Ef fect Rate fader has no effect on master s output fader controls fixture in tensities being output by the master controls the play back and release state of the cur rent cue scene pro grammed fade and delay times are ignored and the cues are executed based on movement of the fader controls the forward play back of one cue to anoth er programmed fade and delay times are ignored and the cues are executed based on movement of the fader adjusts the playback rate of the master by applying a scaling value to the base playback rate of the mas ter adjusts the effect rate of the master by applying a scaling value to the base effect rate of the master NONE NONE Go Off Zero The cuelist is triggered when the fader is moved from ze
167. Window ceeeeeeeees 328 21 2 The Timecode Toolbar cccccscccseee nese nese eece een eeneeeaeesaeesaeeaaeeaee 337 22 1 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window cee 342 22 2 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window cere 343 23 1 The Timecode Toolbar cccccececseeeeeeeeeee cece tena nena eeaeeeaeesaeeaaeeaee 350 24 1 The Macro WiNdOW csore a a eee eens aan teen essa essa esa Ee aa R 361 24 2 Command Data Selection cece cee eee eee eeae een eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 362 25 1 DMX Output WINdOW cece eee eter erent e eter detente ea eeea etna eeaaes 365 27 1 The Create New Custom Type WINdOW ccceeeee sete eee eeeneeeaees 373 27 2 The Create New Custom Type WINdOW ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenees 374 27 3 The Fixture Builder WINdOW ccceceeeeee cece eee teste eee ae eeaeeaeeeaees 375 31 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 431 High End Systems xvii xviii Lighting Control System The Displays pane of the Control Panel esssssserssrrersererrerre 434 Keyboard Status in the Command Line Toolbar ceeeeeee 435 Programmer section of the Hog 4 front panel ceeeeeeeeee tees 441 Playback section of the Hog 4 front panel sssr 442 The Launched Processes WiINdOW cccceeeeeeeeeee nets nett a eeea nena eeaee 446 Back panel of RoadHog 4 Console ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeaees 462 Bac
168. Wing 4 and Playback Wing 4 will move to match the stored values The Road Hog 4 Hog 4 Nano and other non motorized fader hardware are not capable of moving their faders to match the stored value so a blue unlocked fader bar will appear to show the difference between the restored value and the actual physical potion of the front panel fader see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 304 By default Release All and Remember Fader Values are selected for new pages but you can change this in the User Preferences window e Setup Preferences Misc see Figure 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window User Preferences Figure 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences window If you want to hold over a particular cuelist scene or inhibitive master when changing page hold the master s Choose key when changing the page The item s name in the Playback Bar will have a blue background to indicate it is in holdover mode To remove a held over master simply release it and the cuelist scene or inhibitive master for that master on the new page will replace it if there is one High End Systems 303 Section 18 Pages 18 3 2 Matching Levels When Changing Page When you change page using Leave In Background it is possible for the actual position of the physical master faders to be different to the stored master level of the cuelist For example if you have the physical fader at 100 while on Page 1 then go to Pa
169. a 260 17 2 The Main Playback Controls cccceeeeeee eee e eee e eee a tenets a eeeaeeeaeeeaes 262 17 3 Example Master 1 is chosen Masters 2 thru 4 are selected 266 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window 0 267 17 5 The Playback Bar orinis io ecient a tee Ace 279 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue RUNNING ceeeeeee cece teee eee eeee es 281 17 7 The Output WINdOW cece eee e cere eee teeta ea eeaaeeaa een eeaeeaeeeaes 282 17 8 The Levels View WINdOW ccceeee cece tee e eee ee ee eeeeeene een eeaeeeaeeeee 284 17 9 The display of Inhibitive Masters on the Playback Bar asee 294 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window ee 295 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window 296 18 1 The Misc pane of the User Preferences WINdOW eeeeeeeeeees 303 18 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page seeeeeeeneeeeeeea nese eeeaes 304 18 3 Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page 308 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded aaccess 309 19 1 Command directory in list view selecting an action eese 312 20 1 The Plots Directory srr aaa aaa E tesa essa nena eeaaes 315 20 2 Example of a Basic Plot cece cet e cette eee eee a een een eeaeeeaeeeaes 315 20 3 Example of Plot Window with Feedback c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 321 21 1 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings
170. a cuelist to playback cue data one cue at a time otherwise known as a non tracking cuelist For example any cue data in cue 1 is released as you play cue 2 so that only data from cue 2 is onstage The release time of the previous cue is determined by the longest fade time in the cue being played Action of go when Looping When the cuelist is performing a continuous loop with the use of a link cue you can configure the effect of pressing the Go key using the Action of Go When Looping menu Action Notes Exit loop immediately Jumps the cuelist to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Exit loop at end Allows the loop to proceed to the last cue before jumping to the link cue at the end of the loop Use a wait time on the cue after the link if you want to go to that cue automatically when exiting the loop Restart Jumps immediately to the first cue in the loop Stop at next Stops at the next cue in the loop Ignore Ignores any press of the Go key whilst in a loop and the press is during an actively running wait time For more information on loops see Loops and Links p 223 Action of Halt when Halted By default pressing the Halt key when a cue is halted steps the cuelist back a cue in the assigned back time see Cuelist Timing and Rate Settings p 268 You can change this action using the Action of Halt
171. acintosh Computer to create a Full Install USB flash drive for use with Hog 40S Consoles Note This procedure does NOT work with Mac OS X 10 9 Mavericks this procedure only works with Mac OS X v10 7 Lion v10 8 Mountain Lion and v10 10 Yosemite 1 2 High End Systems Download and install Unetbootin http unetbootin sourceforge net Open a terminal window on your Macintosh computer If you don t know how to open a terminal window you can simply type terminal in the spotlight search field and it will usually show up as the first application result in the search results Click on the application to launch a terminal window Insert the USB flash key you wish to use into one of the USB slots on your Macintosh Computer Must be at least 2GB and formated as Fat32 In the terminal window type diskutil list and hit enter You should now see a list of disks in the terminal window Locate your USB flash drive in this list and type sudo fdisk e dev rdisk where is the disk number of your USB flash drive and hit enter When prompted type in your computer password and press enter You may ignore any error messages such as fdisk could not open MBR file Type p in the terminal window and hit enter Type f 1 in the terminal window and press enter The terminal window should now read Partition 1 marked active Type write in the terminal window and press enter When asked to confirm that a reboot will be needed type Y and
172. ackball 452 replicating fixtures 116 488 Index reporting 369 reselecting fixtures 130 restarting 57 processes 444 restore activity 304 restoring default parameters values 144 reverse button 130 RGB 32 RGB colour 136 S safety information 453 saturation 32 136 scene directory 34 scenes 203 configuring playback controls 294 copying 204 copying to pages 306 deleting 204 editing contents 205 effect size 286 moving 204 moving to pages 306 naming 203 recording 203 removing from pages 306 timing 205 scrolling window contents 27 select all 128 select toolbar 129 selected master 260 selecting fixtures 127 from what is onstage 245 selection order 151 selection order the 130 separating parameters 149 servicing 449 set key 56 show connecting to a running 89 launch automatically 90 launching an existing 89 show manager 91 show palettes button 45 show server 70 89 shows backing up 92 changing current 90 check integrity 93 High End Systems Index compress show 93 copying 48 creation date 48 deleting 48 managing 91 merging 99 moving 48 multiple on the network 77 naming 48 renaming 48 updating fixture types 99 shuffle button 130 shutting down 57 skip back key 261 skip forward key 261 slots 135 naming 125 SMPTE see timecode soft patching 108 software beta 448 clean install 413 updating 413 version numbering 448 source button 45
173. additional DMX entry for channel 10 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel Define each DMX entry for Strobe High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder 10 11 12 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX value for the Open Shutter according to the DMX protocol 0 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set A dialog box will display a list of shutter options Select the open shutter option and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the closed shutter ability of the fixture Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Intensity on the left column to display a list of Intensity function sub categories Select Strobe as the desired function The window will close and you will see Strobe assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Shutter Select thi
174. ae eae e en ee ea ee nated 465 36 9 1 Input and Output Connections eee eee eee 465 36 9 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeee ees 465 36 9 3 Performance merdei be oee denen ceases 465 36 10 Master WING 4 2 ccccceeceek eee een vide Ea AE ETE noes 465 36 10 1 Input and Output Connections eee eeee eee 465 36 10 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeee ees 466 36 10 3 Performance ccceeeee cece eee eee e eee een eeaeeen teen nena ees 466 BOM HOGARC se Noes eet a tay eee tent e bat 466 Glossary sssrin cece eee e an aa aaa aaia aa aaia iari 467 WINX A E E E A T cde 479 High End Systems List of Figures 2 1 The Command LIne 3 00 08 cet caves eter ee a a Sheena eee ees 22 2 2 The Status Bats crccssetvectee tion mack eaige aa Hae ea eee ae Gave eed 22 2 3 The View Toolbar ae a a aai ences eee ee een erate anes nee r E a dopin ETEA tigt 27 2 4 The Views Directory cccceeeeeee eee eee ee eee esse eeae esa eea seen eesa essa eeaaeenaes 27 2 5 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet View cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeas 29 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel koiria eean esa eeae esa eesa essa Ta 33 224 A pica Directory eaat oes Seats ea Sa ed ade edhe vended ge ceaeb ees 35 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View cceeeeeeeeeee tees eeeeeeeaeeeae 37 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window 5 38 2 10 Directory Item COlOUr sarren a eee ee
175. ails from 10 2 3 Patching fixtures to CITP discovered fixtures Once a fixture is scheduled into the patch window and patched to a DMX output the fixture can then be patched to a CITP fixture that has been discovered on the FixtureNet network of any High End Systems 175 Section 10 Media Picker active DP8000 connected to the console Follow these steps to patch a fixutre to a CITP discovered fixture 1 2 3 4 Z Open the patch window Select the fixture s you wish to associate with a CITP fixture in the rig Press the patch media button at the top of the patch window Select the IP address of a discovered CITP fixture from the media patch win dow Press okay You will now see the IP address of the CITP fixture in the patch window listed for the fixtures you selected in step 2 With the fixtures still selected press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window to fetch previews from the CITP fixture Caution If the IP address of a discovered CITP fixture in the rig changes you will need to perform the patch media task again Tip Selecting None from the list of CITP discovered fixtures in the media patch window will disassociate unpatch the selected fixtures from CITP discovered fixtures and revert the fixture to using the default preview package supplied by the fixture library 10 2 4 Refreshing CITP Previews The content stored on CITP discovered fixtures may change during the p
176. akes available any connected DP800s for patching but if you want to patch fixtures to DP8000s that are not currently connected to the console you must first add the DP8000s to the show 1 Setup Patch gt Patch open the Fixture Patch window The Patch button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window 2 Press the Add button below the list of DP800s The Add DP window will open Add DP Net Number 3 Assign a net number 4 OK close the Add DP window 5 OK close the Fixture Patch window To remove a DP8000 from a show file 1 Setup Patch gt Patch open the Fixture Patch window The Patch button is on the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window 2 Select the DP8000 you wish to remove from the show file 3 Press the Remove button below the list of DP800s A confirmation dialog will open Press OK to unpatch and remove the DP8000 Fixtures with Multiple Patch Points Some fixture types consist of several separate elements that work together each with their own DMxX address An example is a parcan with a scroller which operationally you want to treat as a single fixture a light that can change brightness and colour but that physically consists of a dimmer controlled lamp and a colour scroller Similarly some moving fixtures such as the Vari Lite VL5 consist of the moving head with its own control electronics fed by an external dimmer See Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Mul
177. alue will be varying over the range defined by the proportional patch value Colour Calibration 5 7 2 122 The Fixture window has a column labeled Col Cal which shows whether the fixture has colour calibration data in the fixture library You cannot edit this column but it is useful to be able to check if the fixture is colour calibrated when working with the Colour Picker see Working with Colour p 136 Parameter Configuration You can configure settings that are specific to individual parameters in the Edit Fixtures window Figure 5 12 The Edit Fixtures window Setup Patch gt Edit Fixtures High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Edit Fixtures a Releass Feature Desk Channel Studio Color 575 Pan Yes Pan Studio Sp rat Yes Tit ooo i Random Figure 5 12 The Edit Fixtures window You can select a fixture type from the list on the left hand side of the window The main part of the window then shows the configurable settings for each fixture of that type The numbered buttons in the Jump Toolbar at the top of the window take you quickly to a particular fixture of that type Pressing the Sort by Function button in the top left of the window changes the view so that the main list groups each parameter together for all the fixtures of the type selected in the list This is often the easiest way to work in the window as you can easily click or press and then
178. ame way Removing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To remove a cuelist scene or inhibitive master from a page e Delete Choose Note that this will only remove the item from the master the item will not itself be deleted from the show Clearing Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters from a Page To clear all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the current page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory window 2 Press Clear Current Page in the Page Directory High End Systems Section 18 Pages Note that clearing the current page will remove items from the masters the items themselves will not be deleted from the show Important When you clear the current page any cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that were previously loaded onto the physical masters will be released and their contents will no longer be output from the console 18 5 Copying and Moving Pages You can copy and move pages 1 Open Page open the Page Directory 2 Make sure that the Guard button is selected otherwise pressing a directory button will activate the page rather than just selecting it 3 Page 1 Copy Page 3 copies Page 1 to Page 3 Similarly using the command line e Page 2 Move Page 4 Enter moves Page 2 to Page 4 Tip The order of the pages in the directory determines which page you get when changing pages using the Next Page key You can copy and move your pages so that they appear i
179. an specify multiple targets separated with commas RS6 20 or a range with a right angle bracket HM2 gt 7 You can have multiple comment macros executed by one cue by separating them with colons HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 You can also send commands to a specified network device using H Hog to refer to a console D to refer to a DMX Processor and IOP to refer to an MIDI Timecode Processor For example GM1H2 will Go master 1 on console number 2 RND3 will reset DMX Processor number 3 High End Systems Section 24 Macros 24 3 24 3 1 Keystroke Macros Keystroke Macros are a series of keystrokes screen events and encoder movements that are re corded into an object similar to a cuelist When the Keystroke Macro is executed the recorded key presses and actions are regenerated Keystroke Macros can be executed manually or triggered by Comment Macros Recording Keystroke Macros Key presses screen events and encoder movements can be recorded interactively and are always recorded into Macros in the Macro directory To begin recording key presses 1 Record Macro the Macro Directory opens 2 Macro 2 choose a location in the directory Or using the commend line press e Record Macro 2 Enter If you leave out the Macro location e Record Macro Enter The Keystroke Macro will be recorded in the next available location If the destination Macro already exists a popup will offer options Insert Merge Replace Whe
180. anges will essentially be old Changes made in other partitions will be saved on those consoles but they may be considered backup client consoles and thus they are not expected to store the master copy of the data 7 Data loss is a real risk if the master server is briefly disconnected from the other consoles then reconnected In this case it will remain artificially partitioned from the other consoles even though it will be shown as online in the Network Window New data created on your consoles will be replicated amongst those consoles since they have their own partition but the master server won t see any of it since it stays isolated in its own partition After logging off all consoles High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 7 their partition is gone and they will each have a current copy of the show with all new changes The master server will have an old unmodified copy of the show If it s rebooted and it initially launches the show it will still be using it s old copy The consoles can now rejoin the master server but their current copy of the show will be replaced with the old show from the master server 8 To avoid data loss it recommend that users log off every console server that s NOT in the partition that has or will have the current copy of the show So in the above case the only re course is to leave the consoles online logoff the master server and log on the master server to the show It wil
181. ar has a button for each type of fixture currently in the editor allowing you to quickly jump to the parameter values for that type of fixture The Jump Toolbar only appears if aggregation is turned on see Aggregation p 42 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor To make changes to the contents of an editor you need to have its Edit button selected You can have up to eight editors open but only one can be editable at a time and the parameter wheels I Wheel and command line all operate on the contents of the currently editable editor If you have several editors open at once you can use the Edit button to determine which one you are controlling even if it is not the frontmost window or to lock the editor to prevent accidental changes Tip When you open an editor all the fixtures within the editor are automatic ally selected This aids quick editing of cues or palettes You can also deselect the Select All on active editor option under the Misc tab of the preference window so that editors can be opened and closed without changing fixture selection After you have finished editing a cue scene or palette press the Update key to apply changes Until you do this changes won t show up if you run the cue or scene or use the palette The ex ception to this is when you are working in the Programmer when the Update key will perform the Auto Update function see Auto Update p 252 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamenta
182. assign the parameter to its minimum value Inverting Parameter Values Some parameters have values either side of zero for example gobo rotation speed You can invert such parameters so that they have the same value but the other side of zero In the case of gobo rotation this reverses the direction whilst maintaining the current speed To invert a parameter e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel 6 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam To control slotted colour and beam parameters such as gobo and colour wheels 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam The Slot Toolbar shows the available parameters see Figure 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 2 Click on the required parameter and an additional toolbar will open showing the available slot positions see Figure 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 3 Select a slot from the available slot positions Srote Cotoer Gebe Geto 2 Macro Figure 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 High End Systems 135 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 open yellow a cto magenta strobe Colour Colour 2 Gobo C 2 Macro Figure 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 6 3 5 Working with Colour Fixtures that have continuously variable colour mixing create colour in different ways The two main systems are e CMY this system is used by most
183. at their programmed values irrespective of the fader po sition The proportion of the programmed intensity that a cuelist s contents is flashed to If programmed levels are 60 and the flash level is set to 50 the flashed output intensity will be 30 Flashes the contents of the cuelist to the full pro grammed level whilst sending the intensities output by all other masters including Virtual Masters to zero If set to on the Flash key stays on as if it were being held down until you press it again The cuelist is triggered when you press the Flash key as if you had pressed the Go key The cuelist is released when you press the Flash key 17 2 Virtual Master Playback You can run cuelists without assigning them to a physical master by using virtual masters Vir tual masters are always at full intensity so the intensity of fixtures is that programmed in the cues An almost unlimited number of virtual masters running different cuelists can be in operation at any one time You can operate virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window from the Cuelist window or from the command line High End Systems 271 Section 17 Playback Tip You can press List Release to release all running cuelists playing back as virtual masters 17 2 1 Running Virtual Masters from the Cuelist Directory You can run cuelist virtual masters from the Cuelist Directory window e Open List List List To run a cueli
184. ated user kind keys on the front panel you may select user kinds using the kinds directory as long as the guard button for the kinds directory is turned off If the fixture has more parameters of a particular type than there are parameter wheels you can press the parameter type keys to page through the parameters Center Wheel Functions assigned to the center wheel in the user preferences can be adjusted using the inner wheel and outer jog shuttle controls of the center wheel Hog 4 Console Only Slot Toolbar Use for parameters that have discrete rather than continuous values known as slotted such as the positions of a colour wheel This gives you button press control of the possible values The Slot Toolbar also has buttons to access the control functions Enable Mode and Control Spreadsheet You can directly edit a parameter s value in an editor s spreadsheet view Click on the cell press Set type in a value and press Enter Colour Picker You can assign hue and saturation values for a fixture s colour using the Colour Picker See The Colour Picker p 138 Gel Picker You can assign the colour of fixtures to match a colour filter from various manufacturers ranges using the Gel Picker See The Gel Picker p 139 6 3 1 Intensity Fixture intensities can either be assigned from the keypad or using the l Wheel as well as the parameter wheels and by editing directly in the editor spreadsheet With the Key To assign
185. automatically be recorded as part of the page Changes made to cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters such as editing their contents remain with that item and not with the page 305 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 4 3 18 4 4 306 Section 18 Pages Copying Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Copying a cuelist to a page creates a new cuelist which is independent of the one it is a copy of Any changes made to this new cuelist will not effect the original cuelist To copy an existing cuelist to a page e List 2 Copy Choose copies cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also copy a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to copy 2 Copy 3 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to copy the cuelist to You can copy scenes and inhibitive masters in the same way Moving Lists Scenes and Inhibitive Masters to a Page Moving a cuelist to a page does not create a new cuelist so changes made to the cuelist will affect all other uses of that cuelist on other pages To move an existing cuelist to a page List 2 Move Choose moves cuelist 2 to the selected master You can also move a cuelist from one master to another 1 Choose Move press the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you want to move 2 Choose press the Choose key of the master you want to move the cuelist to You can move scenes and inhibitive masters in the s
186. ayback and a submaster the intensity will be at the highest of the two levels For example if in the playback fixture 1 is at 50 and in the submaster High End Systems 31 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals it is at 100 then the level seen on stage will be 100 If the submaster is reduced to 40 then the on stage level will be 50 because the level in the playback is higher and will take preced ence This system generally works well for non moving light consoles but moving lights introduce a problem Parameters other than intensity don t have higher and lower values a colour of red is not higher or lower than green and a pan of 50 is not higher or lower than one of 20 Working with moving lights needs a new way to decide the precedence called Latest Takes Precedence LTP With this system the fixture parameters are at the value they have been most recently assigned In our example moving the submaster to 40 would result in a level of 40 because this is the latest instruction and will take precedence The submaster would effectively grab control of the parameter from the playback Of course running another cue in the playback might grab it back again Many moving light consoles use HTP for intensity and LTP for all other parameters By default Hog 40S uses LTP for all parameters but you can assign individual cuelists to use HTP for in tensities all other parameters are still LTP see Using HTP and LTP p 2
187. back mask to that cuelist or scene Playback masking does not determine how data is recorded into a list or scene and does not change existing recorded data Playback masking only determines which parts of the already recorded cue scene data will be executed when that cuelist or scene High End Systems 291 17 6 17 6 1 292 Section 17 Playback is played Follow these instructions to enable and configure playback masking for a cuelist or scene 1 Pig Choose opens the options window 2 Enable the Mask Playback button A mask icon will now appear on the cuelist or scene in the directory window as well as on the playback bar 3 Press the Select Playback Mask button 4 Select which fixture function kinds you want to enable for playback in that cuelist or scene Kinds that are selected will play back Kinds that are not se lected will not playback 5 Any changes made to a cuelist or scene s playback mask including enabling dis abling the playback mask will be reflected in output the next time that cuelist or scene is played or asserted Grand Master The Grand Master inhibits the intensities of all fixtures on the console including those within the Programmer Parked intensities are NOT effected by the Grand Master level GM Key Since the Nano Hog 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles do not have a dedicated Grand Master fader it is possible that you can write a cuelist over the grandmaster portion of the playback bar When y
188. bar Quit displays the exit dialog for the Hog 4PC application Displaying Four Hog 4PC Windows By default only two Hog 4PC windows are shown However the Hog 4PC software supports the display of three or four windows if desired To open these windows 1 3 Setup Control Panel Displays open the Displays pane of the Control Panel see Figure 31 2 The Displays pane of the Control Panel Set the resolutions for External Monitor 1 and External Monitor 2 which correspond to the two external displays on the Hog 4 console Select OK Note that the control panel settings are system specific so the number of screens will be retained regardless of the show file that is launched High End Systems 433 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Control Panel v1 0 0 b 268 C Displays Mid wor Time and Date External Monitor 2 Console External Monitor 1 Enabi Enable w Auto Launch o Enabled oO See 2s HogNet 1280 x 1024 60Hz 1280 x 1024 60Hz 2 FixtureNet System info Figure 31 2 The Displays pane of the Control Panel 434 High End Systems Section 32 Cheat Sheets 32 1 Keyboard Shortcuts You can use an external keyboard to operate many of the Hog 4 OS s functions This is especially useful if you are using Hog4PC You can toggle keyboard shortcuts on and off using the Pause or Break key on the computer keyboard When shortcuts are enabled known as map mode the computer
189. be color coded to help distinguish it from the other buttons in the directory To color code a directory button right click on the button in the directory window and choose from a preset palette of 12 colors mix a custom color or choose to have the console auto color code the button based on the dominant mixed color data recorded in the button palette buttons only Preset Custom Auto None Set As Highlight Palette Set As Lowlight Palette Figure 9 3 Right Click Color Coding Menu Coloring the entire button By default each directory window displays color coding using an outline around the directory buttons If you prefer that the console color the entire background of the directory buttons click on nee icon to open the window configuration menu and enable the Color Code Entire Button option The option to color code the entire button is unique for each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view al Figure 9 4 Color Coding Entire Button High End Systems Section 9 Directory Windows 9 3 Button Sizes By default each directory window displays its buttons using a medium size To change the dis played button sizes in any directory window open the window configuration menu by clicking on the a icon located at the top of the directory window Locate the drop down menu option called button sizes Here you will see the option to display the directory s buttons in three dif ferent sizes
190. can use comment macros to automate tasks on the console such as e Going Halting Asserting Releasing and Fading Masters e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Cuelists e Going Halting Asserting and Releasing Scenes Comment macros can be configured to run at these times e When a show is launched see Startup Comment Macros p 91 e When a page is loaded see Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 304 e When a cue or scene plays see Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs p 291 Comment Macros are text commands that you type or place into a macro cell the syntax used is the same in each case High End Systems 353 Section 24 Macros Controlling Masters Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Master GM master cue GM1 3 Use for the current chosen master If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Go Master GM range GM2 gt 7 Go next cue on a range of masters Halt Master HM master or range HM1 3 HM2 gt 7 Assert Master AM master or range AM1 AM2 gt 7 Release Master RM master or range RM1 RM2 gt 7 Release All RA RA Equivalent to Pig Re lease Release Others RO RO Releases all masters except the one with the macro Fade Master FM master level FM2 50 Fades Master 2 to 50 Fade Grand FGM level FGM10 Fades the Grand Master to Master 10 Choose Master CM master CM1 Controlling Cuelists Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Cuelist GL list c
191. cation for this fixture Edit press this button to edit the information about this library This cell represents the DMX Channel number per the fixture s protocol Several entries for a single DMX channel may exist each defined with different functions or features Typically each DMX value or range defined by a fixture s DMX protocol will result in an additional DMX entry for the same DMX channel Use the New DMX Entry button to add additional blank rows for the currently selected DMX channel and the Delete DMX Entry button to remove unwanted rows 16 bit DMX functionality can be defined by combining two DMX channels with the same function and feature Select a DMX channel cell press Set and type in the two DMX channels to be combined separated by from the console keypad For example to combine DMX channels 3 and 4 to create 16 bit DMX functionality enter 3 4 in the Channel cell for channels 3 and 4 Combined channels do not need to be sequential for example 3 8 is valid High End Systems 375 Function Feature Section 27 The Fixture Builder This cell represents the function or parameter used to access this channel A function is defined as the parameter name displayed when programming the fixture Examples of functions include intensity pan tilt gobo cyan etc Functions are selected from a dialog box that is sorted by the following Kind categories Unused Intensity Position Colour Beam and Control Most func
192. ccccceeeee eee e eee e eee ee eee sees eee aeeeneeeaaes 112 High End Systems xv Lighting Control System 5 7 The Clone DP WINdOW cececcceeeeee eect eee eee e eae e eae e ea ee ea eesa tesa nena eeaaes 114 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating cceeeeeeeeeeeee tees 116 5 9 Changed Fixture Type sainan eia a aa awi 117 5 10 The Auto Palettes WINdOW sssssssssssrssrssrssrsrrrrerrerisrnernnrnsrnrrerrenre 118 5 11 The Fixture WiINdOW 00 0 cece eee eee eee reese setae ee dees anes a eeeaeeaaes 119 5 12 The Edit Fixtures WiINGOW cccccceceee eee eee eee e eaten teen een eeeaeeeaeeaaes 123 5 13 The Edit Fixtures window sorted by Function ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 124 6 1 The Select Too Dal geiir Wiest een eas ete ee eee 128 6 2 Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 134 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 134 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog ccccceeeeeeeeeee tees eee ees 135 6 5 The Slot Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 0 eeeeeeeeeee eee teen eeeaeeeees 135 6 6 The Colour Slots Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 eeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 136 6 7 The Colour Wheel 0 cc cesccseetecgenesencdessstees teens aiaa Eaa 137 6 8 The Colour PICKER snenie a eed Sere eee 139 6 9 The Gel Picke ez cose cave Stee aciiek av igeeaeesiaaeeliaeetescuiasl ay veneers 140 6 10 The Fanning Toolbar ccccceeeeeeee cece eee e eec
193. ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 235 14 2 2 Adjusting Predefined Effects ccececeeeeeeeee eee eees 236 14 2 3 Recording an Effect Palette i eeeeeeee tees teens 236 14 2 4 Using Effect Palettes in Programming e 237 14 2 5 Editing Effect Palettes 20 0 eeceeeeeee teeter eee 237 14 2 6 Deleting Effect Palettes 2 0 0 cece ee eee ater need 238 14 2 7 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes eee 238 Kinds and Wheelsets sccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaee 239 USel Kinds ig edicciesesiecevesds A eta aes E pees 239 15 11 Fixed KINGS 33 2 ves ernea cock de esi Eann T A Ea oaea eaaa ii 239 1T5 1 2 User KINAS ipera rae ununa eeN nG EEEE TETEE 239 15 2 WheelSets srira in ea vase ities aa Aaa ed a a 242 Advanced Programming s s ssssssss555212252u120000555uuununnnnnnnnnn 245 16 1 Selecting from What is Onstage essssesecereererrerreernes 245 16 2 Bringing Parameter Values Into the Programmer 5 246 High End Systems Lighting Control System T02 SUCK Scere ree et cae aM ce tie cet el et sede oe oats Lona 246 16 2 2 Using Live and TOUCH ceecceeeee cece eee eee e eee a tesa eeeee 248 16 2 3 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor 00 250 16 3 Highlight and Lowlight 0 eect e eee e teen e eae eeeeeaa eens 251 16 3 1 Customising Highlight eserse 251 16 3 2 LOWIIQNE noa a a a EAE E EA TE EEA 252 16 4 Auto Update nc cccseccceccnuei yes an p a e a 252 16
194. ccececeeeeeee eee e eee eeee een eeaeeeae een neeaes 83 3 6 Adding Master WINGS cccececeeeee eee ates nese anes nets nessa nese nena eeaee 85 3 7 Adding DMX Widgets ccee cee cette eee e eee e sees teste aerate neta 86 3 8 DMX Widget Status LEDS 00 2 0 eee e cette eee e sete eee een een eeed 87 GQ SHOWS oeececeesee cece eee eee e densae aaaea raai paian aai 89 4 1 Launch a New Show cece eect eee e eee eee eee eee eee aeeeaeeeae 89 4 2 Launch an Existing SHOW ccceeeeeee eee eee e eee eee atten eee a een eeeee 89 4 3 Connect to a Network SHOW cccceeeeeeee tees eee testes eee aeeeneed 89 4 4 Change the Currently Loaded SHOW ccceeeeeeeee tees teen eeeaeeees 90 4 5 Automatically Launch a Show at Console Startup 008 90 4 6 Managing Show Data ceccccceeee eee eee eee e anes ates nee atest anes 91 4 7 Startup Comment MACOS 10 eeeeeee eee e eee tees tenet neta een eeaetaes 91 4 8 Backing Up Your SHOW c cece eee ee ence eee e eects sees antennae a eeeaeeeee 92 4 9 Repairing SHOW Files 2 2 00 e sence eee eset eae e ease anes ne eea nena eed 93 4 10 Optimizing Show Files cece cee ee eee sete eee eee een eeaeeeaies 93 4 11 User Preferences ccccccceccee eee eee e eee nee n een eee eesa nena eeaeeeaeeeae 94 4 11 1 Desklight Worklight and Vent Light Preferences 94 4 11 2 Touchscreen Backlight Brightness cceeeeeeeeeeee 94 4 11 3
195. cks 0 Slots e5 __ techwedge 0 moil 0 Slots i Slots Jes 100 gt 200 Spin 2012255 100 gt 100rpm Shutter e 20 S a S ae ipwheel 0 Strobe ooo Lamp Control Douss b 30Hz 30H2 dure Control Global Reset 205 eeture Control Shutdown 235 25s Strike Strobe Shutter SS c G o 193 ARE Yelow Gobo id Gobo sid Gobo Gobo Gobo i Gobo id Gobo Gobo Strobe Lamp Control Strobe Strobe Lamp Control Strobe New Dmx Entry el mx Entry Build Type 393 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Hog 4PC Custom type built successfully OK 27 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 1 Open the Fixture Schedule window and scroll to the User Created manufacturer 2 Select your new fixture and press Set Enter the number of fixtures to be used in the show 3 Press OK and patch the fixtures swap axes and so on as normal Fixture Window Replicate Change Edt Picture Auto Auto View Remove at r nD Fixtures Type Fixtures Bulder Paleties Kind By OP Hum a Note t of SwoAxes Panievert Tit lvert htenstv Tutorial 27 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values To define the default values for your new fixture you can edit the defaults for each parameter in the Edit Fixtures window Edit Fixtures 4 Aewsss Feature 394 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder 27 2 7 Step 7 Programming Your Cu
196. code p 336 To use Learn Timing without timecode 1 2 3 High End Systems Open Choose open the Cuelist window of the required cuelist Ensure that Enable Timecode is not selected Select Learn Timing 219 13 4 2 220 Section 13 Timing 4 Press the Go key to run the first cue and again to run subsequent cues after the required time interval A time value equivalent to the duration between Go presses will appear in the Wait cell for each cue 5 When you have finished deselect Learn Timing Now when you run the first cue the subsequent cues will be triggered at the same intervals as when you ran them manually Tip Learn Timing will only set a trigger on a cue that is currently set to Halt that is it has an empty Wait cell To remove existing wait times from cues select the wait cell s and press Set Select Halt from the toolbar Clock Triggers To assign a cue to be triggered at a particular time and date using Hog 4OS s internal clock 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist 2 Select the Wait cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 The Trigger Toolbar will appear below the Wait cell see Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar 4 Select Clock the Clock Trigger window will open High End Systems Section 13 Timing sum a o o oo Start Date v September 4 v 2012 m Recurrence Pattern Next date time for this trigger 27 09 12 4 20 00 PM 5 Adjust the Start Time and Start
197. colour parameter values so that they don t take over control of the colour parameters under the LTP rule See HTP and LTP p 31 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 Tip If you want to clear the entire contents of an editor use the Clear key Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor To remove selected fixtures from an editor known as knocking out press the Knockout button on the Main Toolbar For example Fixture 1 Thru 5 Knockout removes Fixtures to 5 from the editor e Group 2 Knockout removes all fixtures in Group 2 from the editor Removing Kinds from an Editor You can remove specific parameter types from the selected fixtures in an editor using fixed kinds or user kinds keys e Colour Knockout Select the parameter type and press Knockout Removing Individual Parameters from an Editor You can remove individual parameters from the selected fixtures in an editor e Hold Knockout and move the relevant parameter wheel or press the relevant button on the Slot Toolbar e Hold Backspace and move the relevant parameter wheel e Hold Backspace and press the relevant parameter type key this gives single handed operation e You can remove the values from the currently highlighted cells in the Program mer by pressing Pig Backspace 6 6 Separating Parameters When recording a cue scene or palette Hog 40S only records paramete
198. coming timecode source stutters or drops out High End Systems 349 Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC we sew 00 00 00 00 Figure 23 1 The Timecode Toolbar 23 4 Triggering Cues from LTC Cuelist can be assigned to listen to a single LTC source To select an LTC timecode source for a cuelist 1 Open gt Choose opens the Cuelist window 2 Options Cuelist go to the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window 3 Select LTC timecode source from the drop down list Each source will have a node name and an index 4 Once you have chosen the timecode source ensure that the Enable Timecode button is selected Tip There is an Enable Timecode button in the Cuelist window so you can easily enable and disable timecode during programming and playback without having to open the Playback Options window each time To trigger a cue from timecode 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set From the toolbar select Timecode fi ges th Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter As well as entering timecode values manually you can use Hog 4OS s learn timing function to quickly associate timecode values with cues see Learn Timing p 219 By default cuelists will follow the incoming timecode even if the timecode skips forwards or backwards generally this is a useful behaviour as for exa
199. cro See Comment Macros p 353 for more information 24 3 4 Editing Keystroke Macros You can edit the contents of a Macro in an editor window For example to open Macro 1 for editing 1 Open Macro opens the Macro Directory 2 Open Macro 1 opens the Macro editor for Macro 1 3 Alternatively using the command line Open Macro 1 Command Command D Duration Comment Figure 24 1 The Macro Window The Keystroke Macro window has six columns that define each step of the macro e Wait The Wait time is the time between the triggering of the previous step and the next step to be triggered e Name The name of the step e Command Type of comand used in this step e Command Data The data that is applied to the selected command The type of command selected will determine the type of available command data Duration The amount of time for the command data to be applied This inform ation is useful for encoder movements and flash key presses Comment A notes field Each of the above fields can be edited by selecting the appropriate cell and pressing Set Command and Command Data fields will display available selections See Figure 24 2 Command Data Selection High End Systems 361 Section 24 Macros Command Command D Duration Comment Main Playback Console Playbacks Wing 1 Playbacks Wing 2 Playbacks Wing 3 Playbacks Wing 4 Playbacks Wing 5 Playbacks Fig
200. ct Keystroke Macro Playback Every time a Keystroke Macro is recorded it will automatically recall the state of the windows at the time of the recording This assures that when a macro is run that the windows are set up in the correct places for touch screen presses At the time of macro playback the current onscreen windows will be replaced with that of the macro If the macro does not contain any specific touch screen presses you can delete the Recall View step from the macro list See Comment Macros p 353 for editing information Tip While macros provide users with increased functionality they can also cause severe problems if misused even causing the console to lock up During macro playback manual functions may become unavailable or interfere with the macro playback For instance if you enter information on the command line as the macro is doing the same the resulting command line structure may become invalid Macros have no intelligence avoid recoding sequences that access items that are likely to be moved or deleted For example consider the macro sequence where a cuelist is opened and some edit operations are then performed on this cuelist The cuelist is then deleted from the cuelist directory and the macro replayed No cuelist window will open since the cuelist no longer exists so all the subsequent edit operations will occur on whatever window was below it possible altering the contents of unintended items When open
201. ction select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can delete a range of scenes 1 Scene 1 Thru 4 Delete deletes scenes 1 to 4 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Tip To detach a scene from its master rather than deleting it completely hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the scene from the master but not from the scene directory 12 3 Copying and Moving Scenes To make a copy of a scene e Scene 1 Copy Scene 2 Enter copies the contents of Scene 1 to Scene 2 Similarly to move a scene to a new location e Scene 1 Move Scene 2 Enter moves Scene 1 to Scene 2 effectively deleting 1 If the destination scene already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 205 204 High End Systems Section 12 Scenes 12 4 Editing Scene Contents You can edit the contents of a scene in an editor window For example to open Scene 1 for editing 1 Open Scene opens the Scene Directory 2 Open Scene 1 opens the scene editor for Scene 1 3 Alternatively using the command line Scene 1 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer see Selecting Fix
202. ction keys between Kind mode and Command mode hold down Pig and press Enter The mode of the function keys is displayed on the main toolbar To open the kinds directory hold the open key and press the kinds button on the main toolbar Note The user kind keys on the Road Hog 4 console do not have LCD displays Once created user kinds can be selected by pressing the cordinating function key on the front panel or by selecting the kind from the kinds directory when guard is turned off If you create more than 12 user kinds the console will auto High End Systems 239 Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Kinds Auto Kinds Guard 1 2 7 Intensty Postion C Control a Fixed Kinds 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Strobe Colour Colour 1 T Colour Fx Gobo 1 Gobo 2 Mixing 16 17 20 21 Beam Beam Macro Global Shape Shape 2 Figure 15 1 Fixed Kinds in the Kinds Directory matically change the last function key on the front panel to a next button You can create as many user kinds as you want Tip TIP To quickly edit a user kind simply hold Open and press the user kind s button on the front panel Manually Creating User Kinds To manually create a new user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Press Record and then press any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window Auto generating User Kinds You can auto generate user kinds for your show by pressing the auto kind button a the top of the kinds directory or fixture sc
203. ction values for the current fixture selection using previews To open the media picker window hold the open key and press the media picker button on the main toolbar or press Pig Open Beam on the console front panel When a fixture selection is made the console will populate the media picker with previews as defined by the preview package assigned to that fixture See section 10 6 for details on how preview packages are created and how to manage them In general automated lighting fixtures will display previews for slotted functions such as strobe gobo color and prism while digital media servers such as the DL 3 will display previews for media files 3 D objects and masks Preview selections made in the media picker window are applied to the current active editor Media Picker lle a gt 1 HES Core HD 1080p Media 1 yt Wy Ka ENON f nay hy D rh XN Effect 1 Mode gt y ie NL al AAL Effect 2 Mode Effect 3 Mode Sync Type f NAR AVi2 2 A_Luna_Blue 8 oe Ar E Figure 10 1 Media Picker Window 10 1 Media Picker Window Options The media picker has several options for how previews are displayed in the window High End Systems 173 Section 10 Media Picker Media Effect 1 Mode Effect 2 Mod 2 A_Luna irak DORIC rE gt d 1 1 Merged Different default on when this option is turned on the media picker window merges previews for content across the current fixture selecti
204. cue from 1 to Cue 2 effectively remov ing Cue 1 If the destination cue s already exist you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 184 11 5 Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist If your cuelist has many point cues 1 2 1 5 2 5 etc or if cues have been deleted you may wish to renumber the cues so that they are all whole numbers You can renumber cuelists using the Renumber button press More on the Main Toolbar Renumber Choose renumber cues in the cuelist on the selected master starting at 1 and increasing by 1 e List1 Cue 3 Thru Renumber Enter renumber all cues from Cue 3 upwards in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 and increasing by 1 e List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber Enter renumber Cues 3 through 10 in Cuelist 1 starting at Cue 3 finishing at Cue 10 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Alternatively you can specify the range of new numbers to be given List 1 Cue 3 Renumber 5 Enter renumber cue 3 as cue 5 in cuelist 1 List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 with new numbers starting at 20 The rest of the new numbers will have the same order and spacing as before List 1 Cue 3 Thru 10 Renumber 20 Thru 30 Enter renumber cues 3 through 10 in cuelist 1 starting at 20 finishing at 30 with other cue numbers equally spaced between Note that renumbering does not moves cues within the cuelist if you try to renumb
205. cue in the cuelist on the selected master Record Remove Values from Cues You can remove the contents of the Programmer or editor from a previously recorded cue For example you might have made changes to a cue and you want the changes to track through subsequent cues see Tracking p 31 for an explanation of tracking To remove parameter values 1 Ensure that the parameters that you want to remove are in the Programmer The parameter values do not matter only that the parameters have values 2 Record Remove the Remove button is on the Record Options Toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen 3 Cue 5 Enter removes the selected parameter values from Cue 5 To remove a whole fixture ensure that all parameters are selected You can do this by selecting the fixture and pressing the Touch button on the Main Toolbar 11 3 Deleting Cues To delete a cue 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes Cue 1 in the currently chosen cuelist 2 Click OK to confirm the delete 1 List 1 Cue 1 Delete deletes cue 1 in cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete High End Systems 185 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items You can delete a range of cues 1 List 1 Cue 1 Thru 4
206. d Video Formats H 264 MPEG 4 Part 2 MPEG 2 Cinepack Windows Media Video Choosing and Optimizing PixelMapping Content When media content is imported into the PixelMap Content Package it is automatically optimized for playback in the PixelMap layer however certain measures should be taken when choosing and preparing content for import to ensure a more reliable import smoother playback and effective mapping Here are some basic tips for choosing and preparing content for import Images High End Systems 325 326 Movies Section 20 Plots Even though high resolution content can be imported most of the resolution is thrown away during import For faster import conversion it is best to use lower resolution image files Remove black pixels from images in favor of transparency and save image as PNG this will give you more flexibility when using multiple layers in a single PixelMap Avoid images that feature complex objects such as faces logos or text unless you are using a very dense grid of target fixtures in your PixelMap Trim videos to 60 seconds or shorter in length longer videos will get cut off at 60 seconds Choose videos that loop seamlessly Choose video files with frame rates of 30 fps or less and that have a high number of keyframes Even though most HD 1080p and 720p video content can be directly imported to the PixelMap Content Package most of the resolution is thrown away during import Fo
207. d a release time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default release time press the Default button adjacent to the Re lease Time cell Auto Release You can use auto release options to send fixture parameters to their default values at the end of a show or to relinquish control of parameters for use by other cuelists when a cuelist is no longer needed There are two Auto Release options for cuelists e Auto release at End Use this to automatically release the Cuelist at the com pletion of the fade and delay times of the last cue e Add Release End Cue After the last cue has run another press of the Go key will release the cuelist rather than running the first cue again You can assign auto release options in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the desired release option from the Action at End of List menu 264 High End Systems Section 17 Playback eE a RAAS rap to beginning of list Action of Go when looping Action of Halt when halted You can also assign the default Auto Release options for new cuelists in the Action at End of List menu in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Resetting Cuelists on Release You can assign a cuelist to reset when released so it will proceed from the first cue when Go is pressed again You can assign Reset on Release in the Playback Options window of each cueli
208. d as show servers continuously sync and store local copies of show data during programming setting up more than one show server in your network allows for continued show operation should one console fail This is method of redundancy is called fail over See Configuring the Network for Console Failover p 71 70 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Running the Console as a Client When the Run Server option in the Settings window of the Start screen is not checked the console will operate only as a client to other show server consoles on the network As a client the console will not keep a local copy of the network show file and as a result will be forced to log off the connected show session if all show servers running on the network are logged off Tip The generic word server is often mentioned when working with a Hog 4OS system There are three types of servers that are at work in a net worked Hog show The DHCP server manages IP address assignments to other consoles nodes and computers on the network through the use of Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP A Show server refers to the server process running on the console which manages show data and distribution The DHCP server and the Show server are independent of one another and do not need to be running on the same console The Boot server process is used by Hog consoles to provide remote software imaging for the DMX Processor 8000 3 3 6 Configuring th
209. d in the scene directory that has full timing features but does not belong to a cuelist Scenes can be used to store a single look that may be called back for use in later programming or to play back many simple looks directly from physical or virtual masters See Also cue cuelist The order in which the user selects fixtures into the Programmer or editor Hog 40S remembers this and can apply fanning or effects according to a fixture s place in the sequence The sequence is recorded as part of groups and palettes See Also group palette The Hog console that owns a show Other consoles may join the show but the original console that created the show will remain the show server A discrete step in a parameter s range such as the position of a gobo wheel A form of time code that can be used to synchronise the operation of various controllers for example synchronising lighting to video playback The Soft Keys are the row of keys above and below the touchscreens They mimic the function of toolbars docked along the edge of the screens See Also toolbar See tracked value High End Systems Glossary split fade spreadsheet suck switch TCP IP toolbar touch screens touched value timecode timing tracked value tracking High End Systems A crossfade where the incoming and outgoing cues have different times causing an imbalanced or dipped fade profile See Also crossfade in time out time
210. d master will override the value from previously activated masters Parameters that are only programmed into a single master will remain at that value When you release the most recently activated master control will be returned to the previously activated master Alternatively you can assert a previously activated master s parameters so that they override the most recently activated master see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 275 You can prevent an LTP parameter from being overridden by master actions or asser tions by giving its cuelist a high playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 276 Tip The Programmer or the current editor with blind mode off will always have priority over all masters and virtual masters Using HTP and LTP You can switch a cuelist s precedence from LTP to HTP allowing intensity parameters that have programming to be output at their highest level rather than the most recently activated level For example you may have a series of intensity chases that you wish to fade in and out over a stage look without overriding the intensity information of the original look or when touring with smoke machines you may wish to manually boost the level of smoke programmed into the main cuelist to combat changes in air conditioning or venue size at specific points in the show For a full explanation of LTP see HTP and LTP p 31 To assign a cuelist s precedence to HTP 1 Open Choose gt Options
211. d media file using the encoder wheels or the Me diaPicker window Pig Open Beam opens the media picker window The PixelMap layer will now output the selected content to the PixelMaps it is assigned to Use the other programmable parameters of the PixelMap Layer fixture such as scaling position rotation and playspeed to create dynamic and interesting pixelmapping output 323 20 4 4 Section 20 Plots Managing PixelMap Layer Content A PixelMap layer is a programmable fixture that supplies media content to PixelMaps When a PixelMap layer fixture is added to a show a small collection of stock media content is also added to the show s PixelMap Content Package The PixelMap Content Package is shared by all PixelMap layers in the show and is organized using a folder and file structure similar to how many standalone media servers store content Adding custom content to the PixelMap Content Package is easy In this section we will review how to import media into the PixelMap Content Package how to assign dmx values to the folders and files in the PixelMap Content Package which file types are supported for import and how to choose and optimize content to ensure smooth playback and effective visual representation Importing Custom Media to the PixelMap Content Package 324 The PixelMap Content Package supports up to 255 folders which can contain up to 255 media files each All custom media added to the PixelMap Content Package is
212. d select from the list of available packages in the menu Default Library Packages Are the packages defined by the fixture library These packages contain previews based on manufacturer documentation and stock fixture configuration Custom Packages Are created when the user has modified the default library preview package for fixture or set of fixtures by adding custom images or names to the previews for that fixture Once a custom package is created for one fixture other fixtures of that same type can also be assigned to use this preview package using the fixture window Cached Packages Are created when a fixture s previews are downloaded via CITP In this case a cached preview package for that fixture will be created Like custom packages cached packages can also be assigned to other fixtures of the same type using fixture window High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker Fixture Window Doron Hote Fesyen Preview Prage Anes Pon ot e ioo ve TOO IRA ee re Ne Too 0 it e ve a ve 0 G 100 Ea Toe TAR CA 1 0p a00 tt Dire E tte 8000 OWoIM 1 LP SIA aaa tle i Tce 500 1 0P 300 i Te Sw 1 0P 3000 wii wii iii Solaapat Pro CMY Cantam Figure 10 3 Fixture Window Tip Custom preview packages and CITP cached preview packages can be associated with more than one fixture of the same type For example you can create a custom preview package for S
213. da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezzione da sovraccarico massima di 20 amperes 35 5 2 Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 1 Se questa apparecchiatura stata consegnata senza una spina del cavo di ali mentazione collegare la spina appropriata del cavo di alimentazione in base ai seguenti codici e marrone sotto tensione e blu neutro e verde giallo terra 2 Disinnestare la corrente prima di eseguire qualsiasi riparazione 3 Questa apparecchiatura e da usarsi in ambienti secchi Non e da essere esposta ne alla pioggia ne all umidita 4 Per qualsiasi riparazione rivolgersi al personale specializzato L utente non deve riparare nessuna parte dentro l unita 5 Aparecchio di Classe I Questa apparecchiatura deve essere messa a terra 35 6 Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET O ELLER 456 High End Systems Section 35 Safety Information 35 7 ZEIT Stak 35 7 1 Tigt Gt KKA D DIRAIS REO Alc CO EITSARARADEMOAORA 20A OWA LER E HoOTHWET 35 7 2 Ba RBIS Sieh REO Ale High End Systems 1 2 FIFOMWITWIAGLIRE CCOKXBSSIIMOLBSRIE UFO A FRICLEADT BIILFFFERMVAITTHKSL Brown E Live 37 7 Blue Neutral a2 kDIL e Green Yellow x Earth 7 ZA COCHHAENTHSSMMICAT DEKERTA IST OimkOB Ext LTAEUBAMHAVET URID LEAS CHER LTUFSL e Green Yellow
214. data as programmed in the Hog show file However you may wish to override these values with manually entered DMX values or with Art Net values streaming into the console from a remote third party Art Net source such as another console Both of these tasks can be accomplished in the DMX output window by following the instructions outlined in this chapter Dmx Output 1 DP 8000 ee ee ee ee o lo l ass 127 i27 fo fos fos tartar o Jo ss fo ss iar fizz fo fs o fas fizz fi27 Jo fo fess fo fess f127 o J jo Figure 25 1 DMX Output Window 25 1 Manually specifying DMX Channel Values To set a dmx channel or group of channels to a specific value 1 Open the DMX Output window press the SETUP key on the front panel and select the DMX button on the main toolbar Use the two drop down menus at the top of the DMX Output window to select the corresponding DP8000 and universe you wish the manilpulate Double click on the desired dmx channel cell in the spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells and press set Enter a valid dmx value 0 thru 255 Press enter to confirm the value will now be displayed in blue 25 2 Setting DMX Channels to External Art Net Source To set a dmx channel or group of dmx channels to values based on a remote Art Net source High End Systems 365 Section 25 Direct Control of DMX Channels 1 Open the DMX Output window press the SETUP key on the front panel and select t
215. de button see Individual Parameter Timings p 212 13 2 2 Delay Time You can create a delay between the cue being triggered and the fade times beginning to execute by assigning the Delay time 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist High End Systems 209 Section 13 Timing 2 Select the cue s Delay cell and press Set 3 5 Enter enter the delay time As with fade times you can assign separate delay times for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue for example 3 5 Alternatively you can use the command line pressing the Time key twice to assign the delay time Cue 2 Time Time 5 Enter Tip Note that the Delay time should not be confused with the Wait time see Cue Wait Timing p 218 13 2 3 Paths Paths determine the way parameter values change during a cue For example with the simplest linear path an intensity parameter travels from its start value to its end value at a steady rate for the duration of the cue The paths available are shown in Figure 13 2 Path Types To select a path for a cue 1 List 1 Open open the Cuelist window 2 Select the cue s Path cell and press Set The Crossfade Paths window will open 3 Select the path type required for the incoming and outgoing parts of the cue 4 Press OK Tip The shape of the paths described above applies when the cue is asserted When it is released the path is effectively reversed For example attrib utes with a Start path will snap o
216. de esce 339 Open Sound Control sssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 341 22 1 Introduction to OSC 00 eee eee e cette eee eee e eae ee dees a ean eah 341 22 2 Configuring OSC INPUT 0 0 cece eee aaa 341 22 3 Configuring OSC Output 2 0 eee cece eee cette een een eens 342 22 4 OSC MappingS a a ecu vances aE eaaa A EKETE a cag 343 22 4 1 OSC Playback MappingS secsec 343 22 4 2 OSC Midi Note MappingS sesers 344 22 4 3 OSC Hardware MappingS cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeea essa nena 344 22 4 4 OSC Status Mappings ccececeee eee e cece tesa eeea eee eenee 346 Linear Timecode LTC ssssssnssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 347 23 1 LTC Input into Console 0 0 0 cece eect e eee eee eee a eeeaeeeaeeeaes 347 23 2 LTC Input into a DMX Processor 8000 c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 348 23 3 Viewing INCOMING LTC 2 0 eect cette eee eee e ates eee ee tesa een eenaes 349 23 4 Triggering Cues from LIC 0 0 0 eeecceee cece ee eee e ee ee ne eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 350 23 5 Editing Timecode Values for a Cue ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee eenees 351 23 6 Simulating LUG v s 32 tages cel en TEn PE EE einer teehee 351 MACOS wiccceeeeecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeneoeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeseeageeeeeeeauaeeeseauaes 353 24 1 IMFO t MACKOS krri cosanesvec udeeeia caus cave EAEE dhcaaaeaveeadseahcauh PEETA ES 353 24 2 Comment MACIOS 20 cece eee eee eee teeta neta tenes atudada iina 353 24 2 1 Entering Comment Macro Commands seenen 356
217. der should now have its Active DMX OK and TX Mode indicators illuminated A single Widget or single output of a Super Widget may only be connected to one port at any one time If a Widget that is already connected to one port is connected to a second port it will automatically be disconnected from the first port High End Systems 63 Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 3 3 1 64 HogNet Network On the back of every Hog 40S console is a dedicated Base T Ethernet jack that can be used for connecting to a network of DMX Processors computers and other consoles If there is more than one Ethernet jack on the back of the console then the jack labeled HogNet should be used The Ethernet jacks on some HedgeHog and RoadHog consoles may not labeled in which case the HogNet port is the Ethernet jack on the RIGHT when viewing the console from the rear see backpanel drawing below The hardware on personal computers running Hog 4PC will vary but at least one 100 Base T Ethernet hardware device must be properly installed and enabled in order for Hog 4PC to successfully communicate to other nodes on a network o ec eca _ eE E oo C C co cCc E E aca c oo co a CcC C eCe C C C oo C c eC C E CE oo eCe oo ec co cCc gt FixtureNet Figure 3 9 HogNet and FixtureNet Connections on back panel of RoadHog 4 Console All components of a Hog network should be connected using category 5 Ethernet cables and using at least a 10
218. ders p 449 2 Wipe the tracks with a dry clean tissue Do not use solvents 3 Replace the cleaned fader See Replacing Faders p 449 34 3 2 Cleaning faders on RoadHog 4 and NanoHog 4 1 Remove each of the 10 fader handles from the console 2 Loosen the setscrews inside each of the four encoder wheels using a 5 64 allen key and gently remove each of the four encoder wheels 3 Remove the four front panel screws with a 3mm allen key if on a Nano Hog 4 also remove the additional two screws on the back of the front panel and carefully lift off the front panel from the edge closest to you 4 Remove the 16 hex head crosshead screws on the backside of the front panel if on a Nano Hog 4 15 hex head crosshead screws with either a P2 crosshead screwdriver or a 6 5mm nut driver 5 Remove the 4 small crosshead head screws with a P1 crosshead screwdriver 6 Wipe the tracks with a dry clean tissue Do not use solvents 7 Re assemble the console by following the disassembly steps in reverse order 34 3 3 Cleaning faders on HedgeHog 4 1 Remove each of the 10 fader handles from the console 2 Remove the 10 front panel screws with a 3mm allen key and carefully lift off the front panel from the edge closest to you 3 Unplug the ribbon cable that connects the left main board to the right main board 4 Remove the 12 hex head crosshead screws on the backside of the left main board with either a P2 crosshead screwdriver
219. device such as a DMX Processor For the device type use the following letter codes H for WholeHog D for DMX Processor and for MIDI Timecode Processor Controlling Keystroke Macros Macro Syntax Example Notes GK GK macro number GK2 Runs Macro 2 HK HK macro number HK2 Pauses Macro 2 RK RK macro number RK2 Stops Macro 2 Tip You can display and select from a list of available macro commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key High End Systems 355 24 2 1 24 2 2 356 Section 24 Macros Entering Comment Macro Commands To enter a comment macro command into a macro cell 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Select a command from the drop down menu 3 Enter the specific information for the macro such as the master number 4 Press Enter to finish or select another macro and repeat If you add a further macro command the will be entered automatically Alternatively 1 Select the macro cell and press Set 2 Enter the macro command manually using the keyboard 3 Press Enter to finish Note that if you enter an invalid command then the cell will revert to being empty when you press Enter Additional Comment Macro Syntax For some comment macro commands such as fading masters you can specify the execution timing of the macro by adding a t followed by a numerical value in seconds FM10 1t10 Also within a comment macro command you c
220. ditive column 28 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 4 Press the Set key to toggle between Yes and No Views Directory 1 4 4 5 6 2 s 9 10 Figure 2 5 The Views Directory in Spreadsheet View Deleting a Desktop View To delete a desktop view using the View Toolbar 1 Hold down the Delete key and press the appropriate button on the View Toolbar 2 Press OK to confirm To delete a view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Check that the directory s Guard button is depressed so that you can select buttons within the directory without activating them 3 Press the appropriate directory button and then the Delete key aa Click OK to confirm the delete Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 2 3 Abstraction A key advantange to the Hog 40S is that you don t have to worry about the technicalities of how each lighting manufacturer implemtents the features of their lighting fixtures because the Hog 4OS acts as a layer between you and the lighting hardware automatically converting abstract High End Systems 29 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 30 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals ideas of intensity colour and so on into
221. ditors such as the programmer just as you do with other values 14 1 1 Effect Tables One of the main components of a table effect is the effect table iteself which applies a mathem atical function such as sine or tangent to the parameter values The available tables and how the parameter value varies over time are shown in Figure 14 1 Effect Tables Note that the effects table varies the value of the parameter either side of its base level represented by the dotted line in the diagrams The three types of random table are weighted differently bi asing the random parameter values towards the low high or middle part of the possible range Using Effect Tables Listed below are examples of combinations of effects tables in use e Circular Motion A Sine table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees e Square Motion A Sawtooth table is applied to pan and tilt with tilt given an Offset of 90 degrees e Can Can Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Sine table is applied to tilt e Fly In Motion A Step table is applied to pan a Ramp table is applied to tilt Blue Step Colour Effect A Mark On table is applied to cyan and magenta High End Systems 227 Section 14 Effects Sine Tangent Jha Step Sawtooth ay Ramp A Inverse Ramp L Mark Off E Spiral Random 2 ATA Random 3 High weighted Mark On Random 1 Low weighted a KK a Centre weighted Figure 14 1 Effect
222. dware 429 interface 432 patching 430 removing software 429 system requirements 466 upgrading widgets 421 windows 432 433 Hog consoles reporting problems 446 updating software 413 Hog net 67 hold over if active 302 HSI 32 HTP 31 273 274 hue 32 136 483 i Wheel 132 ignore MSC in 329 import preferences 94 inhibitive masters 293 copying to pages 306 moving to pages 306 removing from pages 306 insert button with cuelists 200 with cues 184 with groups 154 with palettes 165 with scenes 205 installing software 413 intensity 32 modifying values 131 interface see graphical user interface inverting pan and tilt 121 inverting parameter values 135 inverting the fixture selection 128 IP address 65 67 dmx processor 59 with Art net 80 IPCB fader mode with cuelists 287 J jump points in timecode 339 351 jump toolbar 44 46 K key 19 double press time 98 repeat delay 98 repeat period 98 keyboard external 55 56 on screen 56 shortcuts 435 keys 131 back 129 189 260 blind 254 choose 259 260 combinations 437 cursor 105 484 Index dbo 293 effect 230 fan 144 flash 260 go 260 halt 260 highlight 251 live 245 248 meaning of LEDs 278 modifier 47 next 129 189 next page 302 nudge up and nudge down 132 open 24 Pig 47 397 see Pig key pig 141 255 release 263 set 56 skip back 261 skip forward
223. e BO oe apa Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter As well as entering timecode values manually you can use Hog 4OS s learn timing function to quickly associate timecode values with cues see Learn Timing p 219 By default cuelists will follow the incoming timecode even if the timecode skips forwards or backwards generally this is a useful behaviour as for example you might rewind the timecode during rehearsals to repeat a part of the show and the cuelist will automatically go to the correct cue Sometimes you may want to prevent a cuelist going backwards if the timecode goes back wards You can do this using Trigger Forwards Only 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Trigger Forwards Only Editing Timecode Values To change the timecode value used to trigger a cue 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set 3 From the toolbar select Timecode 4 Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter You may need to change the timecode value for one cue and then change the timecode values for subsequent cues by the same amount to keep the same relative timings For example you might have a series of cues where each one is triggered by timecode one second after the previous one If the timecode value triggering the fir
224. e Open Clock the Clock Toolbar will open on the left touchscreen Next Trigger Cueist List 2 The Clock Toolbar will automatically update its fields according to the next valid trigger Tip You can assign the format of the date and time in the Appearance pane of the Preferences window The Clock Toolbar Cuelist triggers and the Command Line Toolbar clock will display in the selected format 222 High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 Loops and Links Normally cues in a cuelist will be replayed in numerical order but you can use links to change this Links can be used to jump to other points in the cuelist or to create loops Unlike some consoles Hog 40S creates a link as a special type of cue rather than an attribute of an ordinary cue Because it is a separate item in the cuelist you can move cues within the list without disturbing the link Tip When a cuelist gets to the end it will link back to the first cue by default so there is no need to put a link in Creating a Link To create a link 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Play the cues in the list until the current cue shown by gt in the wait column is the cue before where you want the link 3 Click on the Insert Link button in the window The link cue will be inserted after the current cue 4 Select the Fade cell of the link 5 Set cue number Enter assign the cue number to be linked to Y
225. e hog playback halt scene 1 Release a Scene hog playback re scene lease 1 Go a Macro hog playback go 2 macro Halt a Macro hog playback halt macro 2 Release a Marco hog playback re macro lease 2 OSC Midi Note Mappings Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for receiving Midi Note input For example the Hog 40S recognizes hog midi on 1 10 as a note on command for note 10 on channel 1 Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Midi Note On hog midi on channel velocity if velocity 0 then mesage is note treated as note off Midi Note Off hog midi off channel velocity note OSC Hardware Mappings Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for receiving hardware messages faders and encoders not supported on Hog 4PC For keys not listed in the table below the OSC path is hog hardware button name as listed on the front panel For paths that contain master use the master number for the front panel hardware you are trying to control For example to press the go button on the console s front panel for master 6 the OSC path is hog playback go 6 High End Systems Section 22 Open Sound Control Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Choose Keys Go Keys Pause Keys Back Keys Flash Keys Faders Grand Master Encoders Encoder Wheel Buttons Rate Wheel i Wheel i Wheel Up But ton
226. e termined by the cuelist when the cuelist is asserted see Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 275 Back Time 2s The time in which the cuelist steps back to the previ ous cue when the Halt key is pressed twice to first halt the cuelist and then send it back Playback Rate 100 Default proportion rate of the cuelist A rate of 50 will double all cue timings a rate of 200 will halve all cue timings Cue Only Off Releases previous cue s tracking values as you ad vance the list to the next cue Tracking values are released using the total fade time of the cue being played Tip If you have assigned a release assert or back time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default time press the Default button adjacent to the appropriate cell Cuelist Wrapping 268 Wrapping decides what happens to a cuelist when it reaches the final cue Configure the wrapping in the Action at End of List menu e Wrap to beginning of list Pressing Go after the final cue is reached sends the cuelist to its first cue e Add release end cue Pressing Go after the final cue is reached releases the list and sends it to its first cue e Auto release at end The cuelist is released as soon as the last cue in the cuelist has completed all its fade and delay times Don t allow wrapping The cuelist stays on the final cue until released or sent backwards High End Systems Section 17 Playback Cue Only Cue Only enables
227. e VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 Section 3 Setting Up the System High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Manu Model Size Part Video fac Number Notes turer ELO iTouch 18 5 E176026 VGA ET1919L Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 ELO Intel 22 E107766 VGADU latouch Plus ET2201L VA SON TD2340 23 VS15023 VGA amp IC HDMI Must use HDMI to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 To connect an external touchscreen to your console connect your touschscreen montor s DVI or VGA video signal cable to one of the video output connections on the back of the console Navigate to the displays tab of the control panel and use the appropriate drop down menu to set the resolution of the external monitor and hit apply You will then be prompted to restart the console After the console has restarted plug in the touschscreen monitor s USB cable to any one of the USB ports on the console Once plugged in the touchscreen will automatically be detected and begin working but may need to be calibrated see Calibrating the Touch Screens p 52 3 1 8 Keyboard Using an External Keyboard You can connect an external keyboard to the console via the console s USB ports Choose a keyboard model and assign the keyboard layout according to the language of the keyboard you have connected in the Keyboard pane of the Control Panel High End
228. e 1 to Effect Palette 2 Effect 1 Position 2 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies fixtures that are in Effect Palette 1 and in Position 2 into Effect Palette 2 Similarly to move an effect palette to a new location Effect 1 Move Effect 2 Enter moves the contents of Effect Palette 1 to Effect Palette 2 leaving 1 empty If the destination effect palette already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 165 238 High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets 15 1 Kinds Kinds are collections of fixture functions organized into wheelsets The wheelsets determine how the fixture functions assigned to the kind will cordinate with the console s main encoder wheels when the kind is selected and a fixture selection is made Kinds are stored in the kinds directory and exist in two different forms fixed kinds and user kinds 15 1 1 Fixed Kinds Fixed kinds are automatically generated by the console and collectivity contain all of the fixture functions used in your show Every function of every fixture scheduled in your show will exists in one of the seven fixed kinds Intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Time or Control The fixed kinds can be selected using dedicated front panel keys or by clicking on their respective buttons in the kinds directory The kinds directory can be openned by holding Open and then selecting Kinds from the main toolbar at the bottom of the right hand screen When a
229. e Asserting One Cuelist Over the Others p 275 Release releases the chosen master s control of fixture parameters making the cuelist inactive see Releasing Masters p 263 Skip Forward Skip Back steps forward or backward through the chosen cuelist by one cue Cue timing information will not be used the cue appears on stage immediately Back immediaetly begins a fade into the previous cue Halt pauses any running crossfades on the chosen master If there are no run ning crossfades then pressing Halt will start a fade back to the previous cue Go if the chosen cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate it onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused crossfades High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 1 3 Releasing Masters You can remove a cuelist s look from the stage so that it relinquishes control of all fixture parameters and effectively turns the cuelist s output off this is known as releasing the cuelist To release a cuelist on a master e Release releases the currently chosen master e Release Choose use the Choose key of the master with the cuelist you wish to release Pressing Go after a cuelist is released will resume playback from the current cue To have the cuelist go back to the beginning when it is released see Resetting Cuelists on Release p 265 Tip You can release all playbacks at once by pressing Pig Release If you ha
230. e Network for Console Failover When two or more show server consoles are connected to a network show a feature known as failover is automatically enabled allowing for one of the consoles to fail without causing a loss of control over the show data or dmx output Each show server on the network has the ability to take over control of the show should one of the other show server consoles suffer from power loss a severed network connection or localized failure Users are encouraged to run at least two networked show server consoles in live performance situations in the event that if one console fails the show can remain running on the secondary console while the first console is recovered High End Systems 71 lo o ooocoooooon O na g 9999 p o THAT e Oo 8 occocoosos o Hog console Server Net number 1 SSSSSSSSSoooooS D Heart E RA Pa S EET A Hog console Server Net number 2 To enable console failover 1 Connect two consoles via an Ethernet switch Section 3 Setting Up the System 8 DMX Universes 00000000 DMX Processor 8000 Net number 1 e Ethemet switch 8 DMX Universes C e00000c0 DMX Processor 8000 Net number 2 2 Enable the Run Server option in the Settings window on each console 3 Configure the primary console as Net number 1 and the secondary console as Net number 2 4 Log on primary console and then connect secondary conso
231. e a faulty show file is undesirably removing palettes and or cues from the show when logging off on 4 10 Optimizing Show Files When working with show files originally created with older versions of the Hog 4 OS or Hog 3 OS it is sometimes beneficial to optimize the show file s data to take advantage of the latest methods used by the Hog 4 OS to compress and store show data Running the compress show utlity can sometimes help to significantly reduce the size of a show file improve log on off times speed up show backups and or improve network reliability 1 Setup gt Shows gt Current Show High End Systems 93 4 11 4 11 1 4 11 2 4 11 3 94 Section 4 Shows 2 Click compress show 3 The console will now scan the look data in the show cues palettes scenes etc and re write the data in the show file using the most current and optimized methods utilized in the Hog 4 OS User Preferences Settings within the User Preferences window are stored as part of the show file and are applied whenever the show file is launched Desklight Worklight and Vent Light Preferences You can individually adjust the brightness of the console s desklights worklight and front panel key LEDs by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the cordinating parameter wheel The vent light brightness level on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles is controlled by a slider that is located in in the Appearance pane of the User Pre
232. e can be useful if you want a palette that contains program ming for more than one type of fixture but that you can apply to any fixture of a type included in the palette For example you want to create a red palette that can be applied to both Studio Colors and Studio Spots If you select the first Studio Spot and make red then select the first Studio Color and make red with different parameter values and record this as palette it will by default be by fixture and work only for those two fixtures However if you select Per Fixture Type when recording then the palette will work for all Studio Spots and all Studio Colors as signing them the same values as was used to create the palette Recording Palettes with Kind Masking The Hog 40S determines which function values are recorded into palettes based on the kind masking specified at the time of recording If the kind mask is empty no kinds are selected then the directory s kind mask will determine which function values are recorded into the palette In this section we will look at using kind masking as a method for filtering which function values are recorded into palettes The Palette Directory will display which fixed kinds are included in each palette indicated by I for intensity P for position C for colour B for beam E for effect T for time and L for control see Figure 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types High End Systems 161 Section 8 Pale
233. e designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont con us et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements internationaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entra ner sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Aba nderungen dieses Produktes k nnen dessen Sicherheit beeintr chtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbeziiglichen Sicherheitsnormen verstoBen Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto I prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems estan disefiados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamentaciones de seguridad de los Estados Unidos e internacionales Las modificaciones al producto podrian afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de confo
234. e destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 200 11 12 2 Moving Cuelists To move a cuelist to a new location within the Cuelist Directory e List 1 Move List 2 Enter moves Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If the destination cuelist already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge and Replace p 200 11 12 3 Insert Merge and Replace When copying or moving a cuelist if the destination location already has a cuelist in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace e Insert creates a new destination cuelist The new cuelist will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the source information into the destination cuelist If the cue numbers are in both cuelists the new parameter values of the cues will re place the old e Replace Overwrites the cuelist information in that destination If you are copying a cuelist all three options are available If you are moving a cuelist only the Insert option is available 200 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip If you know that you are about to copy or move a cuelist to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys High End Systems 201 Section 12 Scenes 12 1 12 1 1 1
235. e eee recess tenet ea A aoa EA 39 2 11 The Preset Colour Options cccceeeeeeeeee eee eee ee sees tea eeaeeeaeeenies 40 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode ssec 41 2 13 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned ON ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene es 43 2 14 An Aggregated Spreadsheet With Collapsed ROWS ecce 43 2 15 The JUMP Toolbar 22 2 cece cece cece aa En aa EEEE EATE tesa DE nena EErEE TARE 44 2 16 A Typical Editor ssc aeei sin ieee n ae eve ei aerate ety 45 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 006 50 3 1 Start Screen your console is ready tO USC ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeaees 51 3 2 The Calibration Screen ceccceee cece ee cette eee ates ates eee eea een eeaeeenies 52 3 3 The On screen Keyboard c cece cece eee teeters a teen eee neeeaeeea eee eeaaes 56 3 4 The Shut Down Dialog c cece eee eee eee ante n eee aeeed 57 3 5 The Lock Button on the quit toolbar cece cette eee eeeneeen tees 57 3 6 The Lock Window Requesting PIN cceeecceeee cette eee cette teen eeea een tees 58 3 7 Security Settings Tab of Console Settings WINdOW cccecceeeeeeeeee ees 58 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 63 3 9 HogNet and FixtureNet Connections on back panel of RoadHog 4 CONSOlO Msc cticecs Sh fae age EE hee AE yee dor ceva teas bt ae as cat ott 64 3 10 The Network pane of the Control Panel ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
236. e key twice 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time 2 Enter pressing Time twice assigns the delay time To assign a path press the Time key three times 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixtures 2 Time Time Time 2 Enter enter a number to represent the path Select the path by entering a number the mapping is the same as the order they appear on the path toolbar starting at zero for the default path 13 3 3 Assign Parameter Timings in an Editor To assign fade or delay times directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 View the required timing type by pressing either the Fade or Delay button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells 3 Press Set 4 Type ina time value and press Enter When entering a time value it should be in the form hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s For example High End Systems 215 Section 13 Timing List 2 Cue 1 Studio Spx 75 a he e a a a a m ma a rrrrre Studi o Color 575 8 M M ZZ cs a sfs fo es ss is el ee ees lt gt Figure 13 8 The Cue Editor window with Fade selected 2s 2 seconds in and out times 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out 1m 1 minute in and out times 1m10s 1 minute and 10 seconds in and out times 1h10m30s 1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out
237. e master is from a template page see The Template Page p 308 e The current cue and its overall time When the cue is running it is displayed in green text and the time counts down If the cuelist has been released then is displayed with the next cue shown below The next few cues and their times If you want to see more cues click and drag the top of the Playback Bar upwards to make it larger e The master level as a percentage If the master is below 100 then a red bar appears indicating the level It is possible for the position of the physical fader to be different to the master level of the cuelist in which case the vertical bar will be blue see Matching Levels When Changing Page p 304 e Whether the cuelist is a chase If it is then its rate in BPM is shown see Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 288 e Any options set for the cuelist The symbols used are shown below High End Systems 279 Section 17 Playback Symbol Description H The cuelist is working under the HTP rule The cuelist is set to Persist on Override See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 276 R The cuelist is set to Release on Other Go See Releasing on Another Go p 265 a The cuelist has a high priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 276 B The cuelist has a low priority See Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 276 EI The scene uses the master as an IPCB fader Note that this applies to scenes only M The cuelist uses the maste
238. e patch window Select the Catalyst tab in the media patch window Enter the IP Address of the Catalyst media server Ed Sc a Press okay You will now see the IP address of the Catalyst media server in the patch window listed for the Catalyst fixtures you selected in step 2 This will now associate the Catalyst fixtures in your show file with the Catalyst High End Systems 177 Section 10 Media Picker media servers in the rig as long as the Catalyst media server s IP remains the same 7 With the fixtures still selected press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window to fetch previews from the Catalyst Caution If the IP address of a Catalyst Media server in the rig changes you will need to perform the patch media task again Tip Entering an IP address of 0 0 0 0 in the Catalyst tab of the media patch window will disassociate unpatch the selected fixtures from Catalyst media servers and revert the fixture to using the preview thumbnails in the fixture library 10 3 3 Refreshing Catalyst Previews Catalyst media server content may change during the programming of your show For example the video clip file used in the openning scene might have been changed on the Catalyst media server The console is not automatically made aware of these content changes and so it is necessary to request new preview thumbnails from the Catalyst media server Follow these steps to update the previews on the console 1 Op
239. e problem can be fixed Please follow the guidelines below Please report bugs to support flyingpig com 24 7 phone support 1 800 890 8989 http forums highend com Reporting Problems with the Console Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The piece of hardware that exhibited the problem including the version number of the software being used 2 The actions taken that induce the problem in the first place including whether the problem is repeatable using the same actions High End Systems Section 33 Troubleshooting 3 The symptoms of the problem 4 The network configuration of system The type and number of Hog console systems in use e How many DMX Processors and MIDI Timecode Processors e What sort of routers hubs are being used e Other PC s or applications such as Artnet ETCNet Web Servers and so on that are sharing the same network Once a problem has been reported it will often be necessary for the support team at Flying Pig Systems to clarify some of the details and obtain additional information Typically this ends up with a request for a copy of the show so a backup of the show should be transferred to a PC where it can be mailed to support flyingpig com Tip The version number of the software installed on your console can be found on the System Info pane of the Control Panel window 33 8 2 Reporting Problems with Hog 4PC In the event of a failure with Hog 4PC it is
240. e selected cell and a range Cells that are ed itable have a red border when selected Cells labeled Colour in cuelists and scenes will open the colour selection dialog to allow you to colour code the cell 2 8 1 Compact Mode In editor windows such as the Programmer you can use compact mode to save space and get more information onto the screen without having to scroll see Figure 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode In compact mode fixtures only have columns for the actual para meters that they have rather than for all the parameters of any fixture in the editor The console uses the display space more efficiently by having multiple columns for fixture types with few parameters such as desk channels You can toggle compact mode on and off with the Compact button in the window s toolbar Programmer Programmer Studio Color 5 Strobe Pan Tilt Studio Color 5 Desk Channel 00 E Figure 2 12 A spreadsheet with and without Compact Mode Note that you cannot sort a spreadsheet that is in compact mode High End Systems 41 2 8 2 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Aggregation In windows such as the Programmer it is often useful to keep fixtures of the same type together this is known as aggregation The spreadsheet effectively becomes a list of fixtures in fixture type order with headings in the list separating each fixture type see Figure 2 13 A Spreadsheet with Aggregation Turned On
241. eal world value when button is pressed descreases wheel value by one when holding pig and pressing button Keys and Button Preferences You can adjust various key timings in the Key Timings pane of the User Preferences window Setting Function Key repeat delay When you hold down a key this is the delay before it starts to repeat Key repeat period When you hold down a key this is the time between repeats Key double press time When you press a key twice within this time the console in terprets this as a double press Note these timings only apply to the physical keys on the console s front panel and not to the on screen buttons Tip Double pressing a key is often a shortcut way of opening the window associated with the key for example double pressing the Beam key will open the Bean directory window If you prefer not to use the double press shortcuts then assign the double press time to zero to disable it Importing and Exporting Show Preferences You can export the user preference settings as a separate file so that you can later import them into any show that you are working on To export your user preferences 1 Setup gt Preferences open the User Preferences window High End Systems Section 4 Shows Dy Click on the Export button and select a location to save the preferences file to To load your preferences into the current show 1 2 Setup Preferences open the U
242. eam and Use T for time values For more on masking when recording palettes see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 161 4 Select a location from the Effect Directory window 236 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Naming an Effect Palette 14 2 4 14 2 5 You can give an effect palette a name that will be displayed in the Effect Directory 1 Open Effect opens the Effect Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a palette when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the palette to be named 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name an effect palette immediately after recording it pressing the Set key will open a Quickname window Enter the palette name and select OK Using Effect Palettes in Programming In the Programmer or editor you can apply an effect by selecting it from the Effect Directory The effect will be applied to the current fixture selection providing that it contains parameter information for the selected fixtures An iris step effect cannot therefore be applied to a fixture that has no iris function By default predefined effect palettes are direct see Direct Palettes p 164 For example 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory window 2 1 Thru 5 select the fixtures 3 Effect 1 select the effect from the Effect Directory window Or using the command line 1 Thru 5 Effect 1 Enter Editing Eff
243. ecode Toolbar displays the incoming timecode type format value and frame regener ation Frame Regeneration occurs when the console does not receive a clean timecode signal and must make up for the missing frames itself in order to prevent missed cues You can set how many frames of timecode are generated by the console before timecode is lost in the timecode settings window by clicking on the word TIMECODE in the timecode toolbar we sew 00 00 00 00 Figure 21 2 The Timecode Toolbar Triggering Cues from MIDI Timecode Each cuelist can be assigned to listen to different timecode sources from different consoles To select Midi timecode as the source 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options Cuelist go to the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window 3 Select Midi timecode source from the drop down list VO Settings n None 0O aay Enable Timeco e DP 8000 1 Index 1 LTC C tonore msc in Console 1 Index 1 MIDI High End Systems 337 21 3 4 338 Section 21 MIDI 4 Ensure that the Enable Timecode button is selected Tip There is an Enable Timecode button in the Cuelist window so you can easily enable and disable timecode during programming and playback without having to open the Playback Options window each time To trigger a cue from timecode 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set From the toolbar select Timecod
244. ecreased in pro portion to their individual level For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 On the Hog 4 Console and Hog 4PC only The Nudge Up and Nudge Down keys can be used to increase and decrease the intensity by a preset amount The size of the increment is 10 by default but you can change it in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window Using Pig Nudge Up and Pig Nudge Down will create a half nudge step It will increase or decrease the intensity by half of the assigned amount For instance if the nudge value is set to 10 a Pig Nudge Up will produce 5 Remainder Dim The Rem Dim button on the Main Toolbar takes to zero the intensity of any unselected fixtures in the current editor that currently have above zero intensity You can use the Undo button to reverse the Rem Dim command 132 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 3 2 Position Using the Trackball To switch the Trackball from controlling the cursor to controlling fixture position press the top right selection key adjacent to the Trackball When controlling fixture position the Trackball will glow blue and can be used in two modes To change mode press the top right Trackball selection key e Position Mode In the default mode the pan and tilt of the fixture follows the movement of the Trackball e Ortho Mode O
245. ect Palettes You can edit an effect palette by opening it in an editor window you can then edit its contents in the same way as you edit values in any editor See Building Table Effects in Editors p 232 To open an effect in an editor 1 Open Effect open the Effect Directory 2 Open Effect 1 open the editor for Effect 1 You can select the editor view Table Size Rate Offset Length N Shot you wish to edit in Also ensure that the editor is active with its Edit button selected You can also open an effects palette with the command line For example High End Systems 237 Section 14 Effects Effect 1 Open 14 2 6 Deleting Effect Palettes To delete an effect palette using the commandline 1 Effect 1 Delete deletes Effect Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the Effect Directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 14 2 7 Copying and Moving Effect Palettes To make a copy of an effect palette in a new location e Effect 1 Copy Effect 2 Enter copies the contents of Effect Palett
246. ect Pan as the desired function The window will close and you will see pan assigned as the function and feature for channel 2 Note the feature column will auto fill with Pan 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 65535 and press Enter High End Systems 383 Section 27 The Fixture Builder 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 2 3 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in degrees 270 gt 270 and press Enter This real world value will map the 540 degrees of movement across the DMX range so the middle of the range 32768 is equal to 0 Note that you could instead enter 0 gt 540 if desired but then this would be different than existing fixtures as the 0 value would equal a DMX value of 0 6 Repeat the above for the second 2 3 channel 7 Repeat all of the above for Tilt on the two 4 5 channels Cyan Magenta Yellow 384 Fixture Builder Tutorial Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael D Modified 0 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 Channel Function raves Dmx Value a RealV a lt a a 100 2 6 cyan Variable f255 gt 0 0 gt 100 Zo Magenta Variabe 2550 o 100 e eiw varabe 2550 om00 1 Select the function cell for channel 6 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Selec
247. ections are cumulative building the total selection until the selection is used to perform an action on the selected fixtures After that subsequent selections start from nothing unless you use or to add or subtract from the previous selection Tip To select all fixtures of a particular type press the Fixture key then Pig Fixture type from the toolbar at the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select All You can select all the fixtures in the Programmer by pressing the ALL key on the front panel of the console or by using the All button on the Select Toolbar For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer but not selected 2 Main Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar 3 All the selection is now Studio Colors 1 to 5 Al hwet Random Even Odd Previous Reverse Shuffe Reorder Cose Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar Inverting the Selection You can invert the current selection of fixtures so that the fixtures in the editor that were previously not selected become the new selection For example 1 Studio Colors 1 to 5 are in the Programmer 2 Fixture 1 3 5 select Studio Colors 1 3 and 5 Studio Color 575 3 Main Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar see Figure 6 1 The Select Toolbar High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 4 Invert the selection is now Studio Colors 2 and 4 S
248. ed Sections You can change the position of an aggregation section in the list by altering its priority Raising a section s priority will make it appear nearer the top of the spreadsheet High End Systems 43 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals To move an aggregate row up or down in priority right click the section s black header bar and then select Raise Priority or Lower Priority Jumping Between Aggregated Sections You can quickly bring aggregated sections into view using the Jump Toolbar located on the upper right of a spreadsheet window see Figure 2 15 The Jump Toolbar This has a button for each aggregation section clicking a button will scroll the list to bring the section into view Programmer Technobeam oe ee ZANA IA NFPAPIMAIF AIF AS IM a a ZAZA eee lt gt Figure 2 15 The Jump Toolbar Technobeam Iris To enable the jump toolbar Press B Press to open the Configuration window 2 Select Enable Jump Toolbar 3 Click on Apply Tip The jump toolbar is turned on by default in all editors such as the Pro grammer 2 8 3 Cut Copy and Paste You can copy and paste the contents of selected cells Right click and select Copy or Paste from the contextual menu Pig Copy copy e Pig Record paste 44 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 9 Editors Editors are windows where you can view and assign the parameter values of fixtures The most important edit
249. ed plot objects 319 Section 20 Plots to align horizonally then press the up or down arrow button for the X position property while holding the key 20 3 20 3 1 320 Using Plots Plots can be used to accomplish a variety of important programming tasks In this section we will review how to make simple and complex fixture selections using the plot window how to navigate the plot window and how to use the plot window to quickly view feedback for fixtures Fixture Selection Fixture selections made in plots are sent to the current active editor and can be used in conjunction with command line and group directory fixture selections as well In this section we review the selection tools available in the plot window and the plot window fixture selection syntax There are three selection tool buttons at the top of the plot window These tools can be used for selecting fixtures when programming looks and also for selecting fixtures gangs and PixelMaps when editing plots Button Selection Tool Name and Function Selection Or der Path Selection Tool selects fixtures Based on the or A by drawing a line through the fixtures der in which fix you wish to select tures are touched by the line as you draw it e Rectangle Selection Tool selects Fixtures inside d fixtures by drawing a rectangle around the selection the fixtures you wish to select Any rectangle are se fixture that is entirely inside the rect lected in the or
250. ee 216 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor 0 eee cece cette tesa tesa nena eeaees 217 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar cccceeece cece nese eee a E A 218 13 11 A Cuelist with a LOOP 20 0 cccecceecee cece eee eee e eee een een eesn tesa nese eeaaes 224 14 1 Effect Tables iinitan ei ccavt a a EAT a Ea eenia 228 14 2 The Effects Engine rcis enian e a e aa E at 231 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing ssssssersesreerereerrere 234 14 4 The Effect Directory 2 0 0 cece e etter eater eee eae e eae ee neta eee eeaeeee 235 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes eee 236 15 1 Fixed Kinds in the Kinds Directory cccceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeae etnies 240 15 2 User Kinds as displayed in the the Kinds Directory and on the Front PAN el ccc cuay caecs ube cae E a ehcp tied datets atenhpelve Sew pthdve sage ede daeens cou ok de 241 15 3 Auto Kinds Button in the Kinds Directory c cc eeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 241 15 4 Wheeslets displayed in a kind editor ee eece tees eeeeeeeaeeeae es 243 16 1 The Auto Update Window ceceecec eee ee eee e eee ee ee sees setae eeaeeenies 253 16 2 The Update Toolbar 20 2 0 cece cece eee teste ee ee ated esate a eeeaeeeee 254 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture WINdOW ceeeeeeeee tees eeeees 256 16 4 The Parked Output WINdOW 2 2 0 cece cece e cette eee e eter nets anes neeeaeeaaes 257 17 1 The Master Controls ccccceceeee eee a a
251. ee cette eee eeen tesa eeaeeeaaes 30 2 3 4 Interchangeable Fixtures cceeeceeeeeeeeee eee eeea teen eeeaes 30 24 MA KNO ane ana eaa rearea i cases PEA E AEE a Pa Taaa TE SESE 31 225 NTP and ETP i orriren a aa EAL EE EKE 31 2 0 Colour Matching oesie naii a ae 32 2 6 1 Colo r Models s dir ennir ei pana ae eee aa anaia 32 2 6 2 The Colour Matching System sesser 34 2 7 Palettes and Directories s sssssssssrsrssrssrrereresrrsrrerisrrsrrrrererere 34 2 7 1 Automatic Naming of Directory Items cee 37 2 7 2 Colour Coding Directory IteMS cc eeeceeeeeee tees eee eee 38 2 8 Spreadsheets zirai aeoaea deoin ts binde entadeaste y diut i ri 39 2 8 1 Compact Mod vr ipinirik eteina aa 41 2 8 2 Aggregato wi ee etn ee eae 42 2 8 3 Cut Copy and Paste 0 0 ci ececceeee eee eee e ates eeea teen etnias 44 ZrO UE GICONS fess OEE A nesses desta de Matcedes Shan A TAT 45 2 9 1 Editor Window Controls c ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaes 45 2 9 2 Changing Parameter Values in the Editor s es 46 210 Modifier KGS a eter eta Settee 47 2 V1 Undo and Redo 2 2 0 es iepa aves a een dgee veda geal peip iaaa Teann 47 2 12 The File BrOWSEN pree otiga eaa eate aA a ia aiia 48 2 12 1 Moving Copying Deleting and Renaming Files 48 2 12 2 Creating New Folders ssssssssssssrssrsrierisrrsrnsrrereerseres 49 2 12 3 Ejecting DISKS ccccccceeee ence ana a iaa aa aaia 49 2 12 4 Burning files to CD
252. ee ence eee e ee eeeeeeae een eeeaeeen essa essa eed 460 36 3 1 Input and Output Connections 2 1 0 eect eee eee 460 36 3 2 Power Weight and Dimensions cceeeeeeeeeee es 461 36 4 Road Hog 4 Console 0 ceceecececeeeee cece nets nee nessa een eeeaeeaaeeaee 461 36 4 1 Input and Output Connections 2 0 0 eee eee eee 461 36 4 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeeeees 461 36 4 3 Back Panel Drawing cc ceeceeee eee tees eeeeeeaeeeneeenies 462 36 5 Hedge Hog 4 Console ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeneeeaeeeaeeeneeaaes 462 36 5 1 Input and Output Connections eect eee eee 462 36 5 2 Power Weight and Dimensions cceeeeeeeeeeees 462 36 6 Hedge Hog 4 Console Jan 2015 and later eee 463 36 6 1 Input and Output Connections eee eee tees 463 36 6 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeee sees 463 36 6 3 Back Panel Drawing c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeenaes 463 36 7 Nano Hog 4 Console ccccceeeee eee eee eee ea ee ea eeea tesa tesa nena eeaaes 463 36 7 1 Input and Output Connections 2 1 0 cece e eee eee 463 36 7 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeeeees 464 36 8 DMX Processor 8000 viraan a i aaia ea Aiea iaa 464 36 8 1 Input and Output Connections esesecrccercee 464 36 8 2 Power Weight and Dimensions ceeeeeeeeee ees 464 36 9 Playback WING 4 ee cette etree ede e e
253. eeee eee eeee eee eee een eeaeeneeaees 430 311 333 USB WINGS errar Ceres tatierds R 431 31 4 Operations aerae yk aaar aeaaea EIEEE veka tela eect teehee tener 432 31 4 1 Using the Hog 4PC Interface eessen 432 Cheat Sheets cceecceceeeee cece eeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeaeeeanes 435 32 1 Keyboard Shortcut pirisee cece eee n eee EPEA A eeea essa eeaee 435 32 2 Magic Key Combinations c cece ceeee cece eee eeea teen tesa tena eed 437 32 3 Front Panel Diagrams ccceeeneeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeas 441 High End Systems Lighting Control System 33 Troubleshooting cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenenens 443 33 1 Console won t Startup cece eee eect e teers ates atten teen etna eed 443 33 2 No DMX Output from Console s built in DMX Outputs 443 33 3 No ArtNet Output from console s FixtureNet Port aese 444 33 4 The console appears to have crashed or frozen 006 444 33 5 Console isn t talking to DMX Processors ccecce 445 33 6 Playback controls don t behave as expected eeeeee 445 33 7 The Front Panel Reboots Unexpectedly ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 445 33 8 How to Report Problems to Support cece eeee eee settee tees 446 33 8 1 Reporting Problems with the Console assesses 446 33 8 2 Reporting Problems with Hog 4PC neeesser 447 33 8 3 Reporting Problems with the User Manual 448 33 8 4 About Software Version Numberi
254. eep x 16 43 417 39mm high 36 2 RackHog 4 Console 36 2 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back High End Systems 459 Mains in MIDI in out thru LTC In Video Out Ethernet USB DMX out Section 36 Technical Specifications IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 250V 50 60Hz 5A maximum Musical Instrument Digital Interface input output and thru ports 3 pin XLR Linear Timecode Input 1 x DVI D 1 x VGA only 1 can be used at a time 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit Ethernet port Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 2 rear 2 front 8 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Galvanized Isolated 36 2 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 300W Weight 21 Ibs 9 52 kg Dimensions 19 485mm wide x 16 5 421 5mm deep x 5 2 132 36mm high 36 3 Full Boar 4 Console 36 3 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 54 maximum DVI out 2 x 24 pin DVI D single link female connectors USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 4 rear Universal Serial Bus 3 0 ports 1 top Ethernet 2 x Neutrik Ethercon Gigabit Ethernet port LTC In 3 pin XLR Linear Timecode Input MIDI in out thru Musical Instrument Digital Interface input output and thru ports DMX Out 4 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Keyboard Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Su
255. ees 65 3 11 Art Net Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 82 3 12 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window n se 82 3 13 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays 84 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Map PING ecssseseete AT 85 3 15 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Master Wing map PINGS ras sti encacke nE ott Alda ua aE Ade ant ganas a e a AE ea a aad AET EE e 86 4 1 The Auto Launch WINdOW cece eee e reece eee ease een ee ae eeneeeaneeaes 90 4 2 The Show Manager WINdOW cccceeeeeeee eee eee eee e ates anes nessa nese een eeaee 91 4 3 The Track Ball pane of the User Preferences WINdOW 6ceeeneees 95 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window 055 100 4 5 The Type Merge page of the Merge Show WINdOW cccseceeeeee ees 101 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window s csseeeeeees 102 4 7 The Group Merge page of the Merge Show window eee 103 5 1 The Fixture Schedule Window cccceeeeeeee eee e eee a een teen eeeaeeeaeenaes 106 5 2 The Fixture Patch Window cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeee tena een eeaeeeneeeaeesaeeaaes 107 5 3 The View by DP view of the Fixture WINdOW ceeeeeeneee tees nes 109 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points esscr 111 5 5 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points esses 112 5 6 The Clone Universe WiINdOW
256. egularly so that if something catostrophic happens to you console or internal hard drive you can still access the backups The Hog 4 and Full Boar 4 consoles also feature a quick backup button on the bottom right hand side of the right screen s main toolbar Clicking on the backup button will quickly generate a backup of your show file in the shows directory using your show file s name If other backups with the same name exist in the shows directory the console will automatically append the new backup file with a number 4 9 Repairing Show Files On rare occassions show data may become unreadable or unreliable due to local hard drive failure sudden power loss during programming or poor network connectivity in multi server setups If you are experiencing problems with the reliability or integrity of data within a show file try using the following steps to attempt repairing the show file 1 Setup gt Shows gt Current Show 2 Click Check Integrity 3 The console will now scan the data in the show and attempt to fix any broken database links and perform other show database maintenance In some cases show data may not be repairable and reverting to an archived backup of the show file will be required Remember to back up show files often Tip In some cases when the check integrity procedure is unable to repair a faulty show file merging the affected show file into a new show file may stabilize the data This is most effective in cases wher
257. els known as the start address that is the DMX address that you assign during the patching process Hog 4OS uses the information about the fixture contained in the Fixture Library to calculate how many DMX channels are used by the fixture and assigns them accordingly starting at the Start Address you have given To patch a fixture High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 1 Setup Patch this opens theFixture window 2 Select the fixture fixtures you wish to patch and then press the Patch button to open the Fixture Patch window See Figure 5 2 The Fixture Patch win dow 3 Select a DP8000 in the list on the left hand side of the window If there are no DP8000s shown or you want to patch to one that isn t listed shown in the list you need to add it See Adding and Removing DMX Processors p 110 4 Click or press one of the available DMX universes shown to select a universe to patch to The display gives a graphical indication of which addresses are already occupied Type in a number for the fixture s DMX start address the next free address is shown below each universe 5 Click on OK or press Enter 6 Ifyou have finished patching click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DMX Processors Fixture Patch E Net Name Type inUse Found Cae roture Ad 1 DP 8000 DP 8000 Yes Found Dmx 2 Dmx 3 Dix 4 Dmx 8 1 Omx1 Dmx 5
258. em To navigate through the front panel menu system of the DMX Processor 8000 lt Move the cursor through the options backwards e Select the option currently highlighted by the cursor gt Move the cursor through the options forwards Setting the Net Number The net number is displayed on the main screen of the DMX Processor in the top right hand corner To assign the net number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the net number to any value between 01 and 99 3 OK return to the Main screen Setting the Port Number To assign the Port Number 1 Main Network navigate to the Network Configuration screen 2 Assign the Port Number as required 3 OK return to the Main screen Setting IP Addresses for the HogNet Adapter on a DMX Processor 8000 By default DMX Processor 8000s are set to use DHCP to get an IP address automatically from a Hog console You can turn this off in the IP Config screen 1 Main gt Network gt Console gt Console Link Config navigate to the IP Config screen Set DHCP On or Off OK return to the Console Link Status screen Close return to the Network Configuration screen A a ao OK return to the Main screen High End Systems 59 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 60 Section 3 Setting Up the System You may want to assign a fixed or static IP address perhaps if the Hog system is sharing a network with non lighting de
259. en the patch window 2 Select the fixture s you wish to refresh the media 3 Press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window A green and white animated refresh icon will appear at the top right of the media picker window to the right of the search field The media refresh is finished when the icon disappears 10 3 4 Disabling Catalyst Preview Fetching on DP8000 By default Cataylyst thumbnail preview fetching is enabled on all DP8000s in new shows To disable Cataylyst thumbnail preview fetching on a DP8000 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 2 Select the Catalyst tab of the node setting window 3 Deselect the enable button and hit apply 178 High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker 10 4 10 5 Adding Previews to Pre v2 0 0 Show Files Hog 4 OS and Hog 3 OS show files built with fixture library v4 7 and older will not display library based preview thumbnails in the media picker until the fixtures in the show file are updated using the follow steps 1 Open the patch window 2 Select the fixture s you wish to update with library based preview thumbnails 3 Press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window Renaming amp Customizing Preview Images Users can define custom names and images for fixture previews using the media picker For ex ample if a fixture in the rig has a custom gobo installed the user may want to change the library defined preview image to a custom image o
260. ences 94 external displays 53 keyboard 55 56 touch screens 53 F fade button 45 fade changes 254 fade time 207 208 default 208 with masks 209 fader go off zero 269 release at zero 269 faders cleaning 450 replacing 449 fanning 144 217 effects 230 482 Index fanning toolbar 146 from the command line 145 in spreadsheet view 145 multipart 147 options 146 with groupings 147 with the fan key 144 feedback cuelist 280 file browser 48 files sharing over a network 77 fine control of parameter values 140 firewalls 66 fixed kinds 239 fixture builder 371 fixture patch window 106 fixture schedule window 105 fixture types 99 fixture window 119 FixtureNet 79 IP Address 80 fixtures 30 adding 105 changing type 116 cloning patching 112 113 configuring 119 copying 116 copying parameter values 142 deselecting 129 duplicating 116 fixture builder 371 generic 105 interchangeable 30 inverting pan and tilt 121 inverting the selection 128 modes 105 notes 120 patch notes 121 patching 106 proportional patch 121 protocol 119 removing 117 removing from an editor 149 replicating 116 reselecting 130 select all 128 selecting 127 selecting from what is onstage 245 selection order 130 High End Systems Index sub selections 129 swapping axes 121 timing 212 type 119 unpatching 114 user number 120 flash button flash level 271 go on flash 271 la
261. end of the command line toolbar To change the console s date time and time zone open the Control Panel and navigate to the Time and Date tab To change the format in which the console displays the date and time in High End Systems 51 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 52 Section 3 Setting Up the System your show file open the Preferences window and navigate to theAppearance tab The format preference is stored in the show file and will change based on which show file you load Note In order to permanately store changes made to the time and date of the console you must restart the Hog 40S or properly shutdown reboot the console Simply switching the console s power switch off on will result in any time and date changes being lost Calibrating the Touch Screens The touch screens may occasionally need to be calibrated To recalibrate the touchscreens before launching a show select the Touchscreens button in the Start window Touch each target as it appears sequentially see Figure 3 2 The Calibration Screen After the calibration sequence is complete press Enter You can press the Set key to start the process again if necessary You can also calibrate the touch screens at any time while loaded in a show by pressing the Calibrate Touch Screens button in the Displays pane of the Control Panel Users can also start the touchscreen calibration at any time on their console by holding the Set key and pressing the encoder wheel button below the f
262. ends on the capitiblities of the show object that it is linked to For Command Keys linked to Groups Pages Views Keystroke Macros amp IPCBE Palettes The only available action is Select For Command Keys linked to Lists and Scenes The available actions include Go Pause Back and Flash The default action is Go Tip Holding down the PIG key while pressing a command key linked to a lists or scene will release that list or scene High End Systems Section 19 Command Keys 19 4 Command Key Feedback When a command key is executed the function key associated with that command key will provide the following feedback to indicate the running state of the show object linked to the command key For Command Keys linked to Groups Pages amp IPCBE Palettes Blue LED on indicates the object is selected Blue LED off indicates the object is not selected For Command Keys linked to Lists Scenes amp Keystroke Macros Blue LED on indicates the object is onstage Blue LED off indicates the object is not onstage released Fast flashing blue LED indicates the linked object is actively executing cross fading running releasing slow flash blue LED indicates the linked object is paused For Command Keys linked to Views No LED feedback is provided for command keys linked to views as views are simply recalled when executed and do not have a status The commands directory also provides feedback for the running state of the s
263. er Cue 5 as Cue 3 you will get an error message You should use Move for this purpose see Copying and Moving Cues p 186 High End Systems 187 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Important Using Renumber will affect the number column and numeric entries in the Name column Also renumber will not rewrite macros or links that refer to renumbered cues you will need to update these manually 11 6 188 Editing Cue Contents You can edit the contents of a cue in an editor window see Figure 11 1 The Cue Editor win dow To open the current cue of the chosen master Cue Open e Cue Cue To open a specific cue in a specific cuelist for example Cue 2 of Cuelist 1 1 Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window 2 Open Cuelist 1 opens the Cuelist window for Cuelist 1 3 Open Cue 2 opens the Cue Editor for Cue 2 Alternatively using the command line List 1 Cue 2 Open You can also preview a cue using View Cue in the Cuelist window however you will need to press the Edit button in the Cue Editor window to select this as your current editor in order to make any changes If the cue to be edited is on stage selecting Edit will enable blind mode until changes are updated or Edit is deselected see Blind p 254 You can leave the mode otherwise by pressing the Blind key List 1 Cue 2 Studio Spot 575 i 100 opa W o Track ed s le le se sles le 8 2 100 T fo E T AAAA AAAA Studio Color 575
264. er le courant avant d effectuer des r parations 3 Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer la pluie ou l humidit 4 A l int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplagables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien 4 un personnel qualifi 5 Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis la terre 35 3 Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit 35 3 1 Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr Dieses Ger t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem Uberlastungsschutz von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden 35 3 2 Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me 1 Wenn dieses Ger t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der ents prechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen e Braun Unter Spannung stehend e Blau Neutral e Griin Gelb Erde 454 High End Systems Section 35 Safety Information 2 Da die Farben der Leitungen im Hauptanschluss m glicherweise nicht mit den farbigen Markierungen die die Anschlussklemmen identifizieren tiberein stimmen fahren sie wie folgt fort e Die Gr n und Gelb gef rbte Leitung muss im Stecker mit der mit dem Buchstaben E oder dem Erde Symbol markierten oder der Gr n und Gelb gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden e Die blau gef rbte Leitung muss mit der mit dem Buchstaben N oder der Schwarz gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden Die Braun gef rbte Leitgun muss mit der
265. erver and all other nodes obtain an IP address from it 8 DMX Universes III T ap 2222222 DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP Ethernet switch 8 DMX Universes 00 00 DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP Hog 4 console Static IP 172 31 0 1 Run DHCP server Example C A DHCP Router serves all components High End Systems 67 3 3 2 68 Section 3 Setting Up the System 8 DMX Universes i i 2222229222929902 2929 9909999999990999 pr go 00000000 DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP DHCP Router 8 DMX Universes DMX Processor 8000 Obtain IP using DHCP Hog 4 console Obtain IP using DHCP Example D All components have a custom unique static IP address BELISSSSSSFSSSSS 9909999999999992 DMX Processor 8000 Static IP 172 31 0 2 O coooooDoce 0 BRRRAREBRR g Ethernet switch 8 DMX Universes Hoe BEENI 6 seeesersss O DMX Processor 8000 Static IP 172 31 0 3 Hog 4 console Static IP 172 31 0 1 Port Number Since multiple shows can be run on a single network each show server running on the network must have its own port number to keep lighting data for each show on the network seperated Nodes connecting to the show server must then have the same port number as the show server console For example a console running a show server on the network on port 6600 means other nodes such as DMX Processors on the network will need a port number of 6600 as well to join
266. ess and hold the Choose key for Master 3 and press the Assert key The Assert Time When you assert a cuelist the parameters that have been asserted change to their new values over the assert time The default is 2 seconds but you can assign your preferred assert time for each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Assert Time cell High End Systems 275 17 3 3 276 Section 17 Playback Timing Mark Time Release Time Assert Time Back Time Playback Rate 3 Set 5 Enter change the assert time to 5 seconds Alternatively you can assign the Assert Time for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigned an assert time to a cuelist and you want to revert to the default assert time press the Default button adjacent to the Assert Time cell Changing a Cuelist s Priority Under the LTP rule the most recent action determines the value of a fixture parameter see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 273 However you can override this precedence by as signing cuelists different priorities so that cuelists with a higher priority take precedence over those with a lower one If their priority is equal then the LTP rule is used to determine which cuelist will take precedence and determine the parameter s value A cuelist s default priority is 0 and you can assign the priority value in increments o
267. etwork open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window see Figure 21 1 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings window In the MIDI pane check MSC In 327 Console Settings Security MIDI Show Control MIDI Notes MIDI Timecode Section 21 MIDI sive SysEx Device Group 112 MIDI Show Control MSC unei 01 General Lighting Bad Enable 0O MSC In MSC Out x Cancel Figure 21 1 The MIDI pane of the Console Settings window Tip You can selectively disable MSC input for individual cuelists or scenes by enabling the Ignore MSC in option in the options window 21 1 2 Sending MSC from the Console To send MSC from a Hog Console 1 Connect the input of an MSC device to the Midi OUT port on the back of the console If you are sending MSC output directly to a USB Midi device such as a third party control system then connect the USB connection of that external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console 2 Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi output port for MSC output then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is listed and selected as the midi output device If you are outputting MSC directly to a connected USB device then select that device from the output drop down menu Nw SE w 328 Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings
268. etwork you may need to specify a different address according to how your network is configured See Also ethernet A physical button on the console s front panel The manual reserves the word button for buttons that appear on screen Kinds are collections of fixture functions organized into wheelsets Kinds are stored in the kinds directory and exist in two different forms fixed kinds and user kinds See Also fixed kind user kind Knocking out is the process of removing fixtures from the Programmer window so that they will not be recorded into cues Latest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the most recent instruction to assign the value of a parameter is the one that applies A cue run on one master can take control of fixtures set by a cue in another master See Also HTP The Hog 40S s Maintain State feature eliminates the common problem with tracking where playing back cues out of order results in incorrect lighting states on stage See Also tracking A method of selecting information that is specific to a palette fixture cue scene or group when recording making selections editing program ming or playing back cues scenes For example the fixed function kinds can be used to mask which function kinds intensity position colour and beam get record into a cue or palette Master is a generic term that can be used to refer to any cuelist scene or chase in the show When a cuelist scene or chase is a
269. evel of the main toolbar with buttons for many of the console s windows such as the Output and Parked windows From the Command Line You can specify the window to be opened using the command line and then press the Open key For example e Position 5 Open opens the editor window for Position Palette 5 Cue 4 8 Open opens the editor window for Cue 8 in the cuelist on Master 4 Double Pressing Keys You can also open some windows by double pressing the appropriate key e Position Position opens the Position Directory window Tip If you prefer not to use the double press shortcut to open windows then assign the double press time to zero to disable it see Keys and Button Preferences p 98 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Closing Windows Windows can be closed using the window s Close button marked with a cross at the right hand end of its title bar by pressing Open Backspace or with the Close button EJ on the Window Control Toolbar Fronting Resizing and Moving Windows You can open as many windows as you wish but you can only work in one at a time To work in a window make it the frontmost by clicking or pressing the touch screen within it or use the Focus button on the Window Control Toolbar The window s title bar will turn blue to show that the window is frontmost otherwise it is grey Windows and toolbars can be placed any where within the console s internal touch screens or
270. ext when you use Next Page to change pages by having the pages in the desired order in the Page Directory See Copying and Moving Pages p 307 18 3 1 Options When Changing Page When you change page there are three options for what happens to any cuelists scenes or inhib itive masters that are still active e Release All releases all cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters on the old page and replaces them with the cuelists on the new page Hold Over If Active keeps active cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters from the old page on their master until you release them They are then replaced with the contents on that master on the new page Leave In Background leaves the old cuelist scene and or inhibitive master active in the background and attaches the new one to the master To get to the background item go back to the page that it is on On the Hog 4 Console the built in motorized faders will automatically adjust themselves to match the master s stored level 302 High End Systems Section 18 Pages Tip You can think of changing pages using the Leave In Background option as being similar to having one very long page and moving the masters to look at different sections of it A further option Remember Fader Values allows a page s fader levels to be restored back to where they were the last time the page was loaded If the physical faders have moved then the motorized faders on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 Master
271. extual menu with commands such as copy and paste 95 4 11 4 96 Section 4 Shows Left Click the same as left click with the mouse Shuffle shuffles the pointer across windows bringing that window to the front unlike shuffle on the Window Control Toolbar which shuffles the screen view Swap to Screen moves the pointer between screens useful for when external displays are connected to quickly move between screens Set the same as the Set key but closer to the Trackball for quick cell editing Close Window closes the active window Toggle KindKeys CmdKeys toggles the function keys between kind mode and command key mode In addition the following fixture and playback functions are available Next sub selects the next fixture in the current selection See Sub Selections p 129 Back sub selects the previous fixture in the current selection See Sub Selections p 129 Select All selects all the fixtures currently in the Programmer See Select All p 128 Flip changes the pan and tilt of a moving head fixture to point at the same position on the stage but from the other end of its movement range See Flip p 133 Fade Changes toggles the state of the Fade Changes button in the active editor See Fade Changes p 254 Next Page advances to the next page in the page directory See Changing Page p 302 Out assigns the current selection s intensity to zero see Intensity p 131 The default sett
272. f 10 For example if the priority of the cuelist attached to Master 5 is at default 0 and the priority of that on Master 4 is 50 then a Go triggered on Master 5 will not override common parameters currently active on Master 4 Conversely you can apply a minus priority so if the cuelist on Master 3 has a priority of 50 common parameters on Master 5 will override those on Master 3 To change a cuelist s priority 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select the Playback Priority cell High End Systems Section 17 Playback Priority 0O P Persist On Ov 3 Set 50 Enter change the priority to 50 Alternatively you can assign the Playback Priority for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist In the event that two or more cuelists share the same priority level normal LTP rules are applied Persist on Override 17 3 4 Hog 40S automatically releases cuelists when all of their parameter contents have been overridden by other cuelists However sometimes it is useful to return to a cuelists s look when overriding cuelists have been released in this case you can use Persist on Override When this option is activated the overridden cuelist will not automatically release and will remain active when the overriding cuelist is later released To turn Persist on Override on for a cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Pers
273. fade back to the previous cue Back immediaetly begins a fade into the previous cue Fader controls the intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback When the fader is at full fixtures appear on stage at their programmed intensity As the fader level is reduced the intensity of fixtures is reduced proportionally Flash momentarily puts the intensity of fixtures under the control of this playback to their full programmed value as if the fader had been put to maxim um You can customise the function of master controls to suit the requirements of the user or a par ticular show see Configuring Playback Controls p 294 J Tip Pressing or clicking on the Playback Bar is equivalent to pressing that master s Choose key The Main Controls The main playback controls positioned to the right of the masters see Figure 17 2 The Main Playback Controls work with the currently chosen master You can also use them with another master by holding down the required Choose key while pressing a key from the main controls High End Systems 261 262 Section 17 Playback Choose Key Assert Key Release Key Pig Key Skip Forward Skip Backward Back Key Halt Key Go Key Figure 17 2 The Main Playback Controls The main playback control keys are Assert reasserts control of fixture parameters by the chosen master if other masters have taken control under the Latest Takes Precedence rule se
274. feedback and apply PixelMapping values to fixtures A cue who s number contains a decimal point Point cues are initially given whole numbers but a point cue can be inserted between two whole number cues For example cue 2 5 is a point cue between cues 2 and 3 On a computer network the port number defines a particular type of network traffic In the case of a Hog network each show running on the 473 474 programmer rate Rate Wheel remainder dim saturation scene selection order show server slot SMPTE Soft Key soft parameter value Glossary network has its own port number so that a console can identify and connect to a particular show A window where cue and scene data is created or edited The Programmer takes priority over all commands sent to a fixture elsewhere in the console The adjusted speed at which a recorded cuelists scenes chases and ef fects are played For recorded chases rate is represented in beats per minute For recorded cues scenes scenes and effects rate is represnted in percentage For example a 2s cue will playback in 4s when the cuelist it is part of has a rate of 50 The wheel on the left hand side of the Hog 4 console and Hog 4PC used for adjusting playback and effect rates Used after selecting a fixture or group of fixtures setting all remaining fixtures to a zero intensity level The amount of pigment in colour notation See Also hue a single cue store
275. ferences window The vent light will turn off during periods of console unactivivity as determined by the Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout p 52 setting Similar to the desk lights the vent light will come on at full intensity on a cold boot before you have loaded a show file The desklights feature both blue and white LEDs By default the desklights are white during normal activity and turn blue during periods of unactivivity as determined by the Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout p 52 setting If you prefer the desklights to always be blue you can select Use Blue Desklights in the Appearance pane of the User Preferences window Touchscreen Backlight Brightness You can adjust the brightness of each of the console s touchscreen backlights by holding down the Setup key and adjusting the cordinating parameter wheel Trackball and Trackball Ring Preferences The Trackball and it s outer ring have two modes e Pointer Mode The trackball controls the on screen pointer like a mouse on a personal computer while the trackball ring acts as a vertical scroll wheel e Position Mode The trackball lights up in blue and controls the position pan and tilt of fixtures while the trackball ring controls whichever function is as signed to it in the Trackball tab of the User Preferences window You can switch between the two modes by pressing the top right Trackball key To lock the Trackball to one mode High End Systems Section 4 Shows
276. found in computer applications allowing the user to work back through the last commands entered by the user undoing them each time the button is pressed In the Hog 408 the undo key is global working back through operations in chronological order and you can go back all the way to the point at which you logged on to the console generally this is when you started the console up In cases where multiple consoles are networked together the undo task will only undo actions of the local desk High End Systems 47 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Pressing the Pig button together with the Undo button will redo the last undone action Again if you have gone back through several undos you can redo repeatedly until you get back to the most recent action The undo and redo feature works on your show data but generally not on other things Undo is not available for e Changes to the fixture selection in the Programmer However the selection may change as a side effect of an undo action e Changes to Control Panel settings and other things not directly related to your programmed show e Changes to window positions and views and the like If undo is not available you will always be asked to confirm important changes before they take place 2 12 2 12 1 48 The File Browser You can browse and organize several different kinds of system files in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window see Figure 4 2 The Show Ma
277. g Next on the View Toolbar Open first encoder wheel Open second encoder wheel Open third encoder wheel Spreadsheets Pig Set Pig arrow keys Pig Backspace Pig Copy Pig Move Directories Pig Set Pig arrow keys Pig button in a directory File Browser Pig Set Pig click on file Playback Pig Release List Release Scene Release Pig Main Play Pig Main Pause Holding choose for any physical master Console Debug Pig Open Backspace High End Systems Sizes active window clockwise Sizes active window counter clockwise Cycles through the possible window sizes in the re verse order Opens view 1 9 Opens view 10 Changes view toolbar to previous page of views rather than next page of views Vertical Window Scroll up down Horizontal Window Scroll left right Zoom plot window only Acts as a right mouse click Allows for selection of multiple cell items in spread sheets Removes values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer or editor Copies the contents of the currently selected cells Pastes into the currently selected cells Acts as a right mouse click Extends directory item selection Overrides directory Guard button Acts as a right mouse click Allows for selection of multiple files Pig key is acting like control key Releases all active cuelists and scenes Releases any active cuelists NOT attached to mas ters on the curren
278. g 40S allows you to record a cue between other cues without destroying existing tracking values To do this record the inserted cue without tracking forwards by deselecting the Forward button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after pressing the Record key For example 1 Press the Record key 2 Deselect Forward on the Record Options Toolbar 3 Cue2 5 Enter insert Cue 2 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master This is sometimes refered to as recording cue only as the changes only affect the recorded cue and do not track into subsequent cues Note that you can only turn tracking forwards off when you insert a new cue into a cuelist or when you merge values into a cue not when adding new cues to the end of a cuelist Important When recording or merging as cue only any parameter values that did not previously exist in a cuelist an Off indication will be placed into the subsequent cue for these parameters This Off indication will release the parameter value back to its previous state as if it were not programmed in the list 11 7 3 Deleting without Tracking Forward When you delete a cue this can have unexpected consequences on later cues in the cuelist if the deleted cue contained parameter values that tracked through to contribute to the state of the later cues For example you have the following cues High End Systems 191 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 1
279. g key as this will prevent you from ac cidentally changing any data within the show 3 1 6 Adding External Monitors You can attach three external displays to the Hog 4 using standard DVI or VGA connectors To use external displays you must enable them and set the screen resolution in the Displays pane of the Control Panel Setup Control Panel Displays You will need to restart the console to enable the external monitors NOTE The Full Boar 4 s DVI D monitor output connections do not support analog output to VGA displays such as those featured on the older Full Boar 3 playback and programming wings 3 1 7 Adding External Touch Screens External USB touch screens are supported on the Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Road Hog 4 consoles When an external touchscreen is required High End Systems recommends using Master Wing 4 or Playback Wing 4 for the greatest level of compatability and integration Additionally Hog 4 OS consoles are compatible with touchscreen monitors listed below High End Systems 53 54 Manu Model Size Part fac Number turer Video Notes ELO AC 12 All Part cuTouch No ET1229L ELO AC 12 E432532 cuTouch ET1215L ELO AC 17 E103047 cuTouch ET1725L ELO iTouch 15 6 E232070 ET1519L VGA Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 VGA Only Must use VGA to DVI ad apter with for use with Full Boar 4 VGADM VGA Only Must us
280. ge 2 and reduce the physical fader to 50 and then go back to Page 1 the console must resolve the difference between the stored value of the master and the new physical position of the fader see Figure 18 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page If this situation happens on a Hog 4 or Full Boar 4 console the built in motorized faders will automatically adjust themselves to match the master s stored level Console such as the Road Hog 4 and Hog 4 Nano that do not feature motorized faders or for connected wing hardware that does not feature motorized faders the master level of the cuelist will be shown on the Playback Bar in blue together with a red dot showing the physical fader position This state is known as having the fader unlocked To relock rematch the levels move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the cuelist master level in the normal way Page lloaded Page2loaded Page 1 reloaded Physical fader fader moved to masterlevelis moved to 100 50 not matched to matched to physical fader master level Figure 18 2 Matching Levels when Changing Page 18 3 3 Restoring Activity When Changing Pages You can trigger cues to go and assign masters to specific fader levels when changing page by using Restore Activity To do this you capture the desired activities as a macro which is later executed when the page is loaded To capture page activity 304 High End S
281. h library defined previews 179 merge button with cuelists 200 with cues 184 with groups 154 with palettes 165 with scenes 205 merging shows 99 MIDI 327 Midi Notes 329 midi show control 327 MIDI timecode 336 modifier keys 47 monitor see display move in black mark cues 194 moving cuelists 200 cuelists to pages 306 cues 187 effects 238 groups 153 inhibitive masters to pages 306 pages 307 palettes 158 scenes 204 scenes to pages 306 shows 48 user kinds 241 multiple patch points 110 shows on the network 77 multiple consoles 69 naming cuelists 198 cues 184 desktop views 28 effects 237 groups 151 palettes 155 scenes 203 shows 48 slots 125 net number 59 69 110 network 64 67 boot server 66 client 71 485 connecting to an existing 77 console failover 71 console tracking 75 DHCP server 66 67 dmx processor status 61 dmx processors 66 file sharing 77 firewalls 66 IP address 67 multiple consoles 69 net number 69 port number 68 77 show server 70 using art net 79 network adapter 64 IP address 65 new show 89 next button 189 next key 129 next page key 302 nudge up and nudge down keys 132 numbering cues 184 see also renumbering O odd button 129 on screen keyboard 56 open key 24 OSC open sound control 341 input configuration 341 mappings 343 output configuration 342 output window 281 P pages 301 changing 302 c
282. h produce white light when you compare them side to side their colours are considerably different The tungsten lamp has a warmer colour with a higher red and yellow content while arc lamps usually have a cooler light with more blue in it One version of white is not more correct than the other so either may be chosen to be the reference point depending on the situation In a theatrical environment where tungsten sources are more common tungsten white is likely to be most appropriate base In other environments predominantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white for information on changing the white point see Using Colour Matching p 138 High End Systems 33 2 6 2 2 7 34 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The Colour Matching System The Hog 40S s colour matching system is based on a fixture library that contains colour calibration data for the fixture types in use This calibration ensures that fixtures of different types can easily be assigned to the same colour including to a chosen definition of white It can also be used for fixtures that have not been calibrated but the colours that will be produced may not match the colours from fixtures that do have calibration data You can choose colours using the parameter wheels to assign cyan magenta and yellow values or hue and saturation values or you can use the on screen visual colour picker see The Colour Picker p 138 It i
283. h to 10Hz You can decrease this range by adjusting the size 2Hz will give a range between 3Hz and 7Hz When combining effects adjusting specific parameters effect sizes will change the look of the effect For example a circle effect comprising of a sine table on the pan and tilt can be modified to look like an elipse by altering the size of either pan or tilt The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different size values Ax 100 50 150 Effect Offset The offset sets the effect start and finish point for each effect so they can be staggered It is as signed in degrees For example to create an intensity ripple across a range of fixtures divide 360 degrees by the number of fixtures and offset each fixture by multiples of this amount For example with six fixtures offset at 0 60 120 180 240 300 degrees The easiest way to do this is to use fanning see Fanning p 144 The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different offset values 0 180 360 Effect Begin End Start The begin and end values of an effect represent the limits that the function value will hit as it passes through the effect table The begin and end values can be edited diretly in the effects ed itor window or in the programmer cue editor Be aware that editing the begin and end values an effect resul
284. h to import from the USB flash drive into the folder you created in step 6 Hold pig to select multiple files You can also drag entire folders of content from the USB Flash Drive to the PixelMap Content Package as long as the folder you are importing does not contain sub folders High End Systems Section 20 Plots All files imported into the PixelMap Content Packages are automatically as signed a dmx address To manually change the dmx address assignment of a file in the PixelMap Content Package right click on the file and select renum ber Enter a numeric value and confirm by pressing Enter Note If you wish to have more control over how the console auto assigns dmx addresses to files during import then simply prefix the names of the folders and files you are importing with a three digit number that coincides with the desired dmx address value For example if you import a file named 023 BigBird png it will automatically be assigned a dmx address value of 23 Caution Any folders or files in the PixelMap Content Package that do not have a dmx address assignment will still show up in the media picker window but will not be selectable for output File Types Supported for PixelMap Content Package Import The following file types have successfully been tested and are supported for import into the PixelMap Content Package Image Formats JPEG PNG TIFF BMP GIF only first frame of animated GIFs will be importe
285. hat Fixture 1 Thru 10 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 1 and going up in numerical order while Fixture 10 Thru 1 1 patches the fixtures starting with Fixture 10 and going down in re verse numerical order Patching Fixtures to Multiple Addresses You can patch one fixture to multiple different DMX addresses this can be useful with desk channels where you want one desk channel to control several dimmer channels This is sometimes known as soft patching To patch a fixture to a second DMX address select the fixture again and patch it as before Al ternatively using the command line Fixture Desk Channel 1 2 1 1 4 2 5 Enter patches the desk channel to DMX Processor 2 universe 1 address 1 and to DMX Processor 4 universe 2 address 5 Similarly you can patch a fixture multiple times so as to fill a specified range of DMX addresses This can be useful if you want to soft patch a desk channel to a continuous series of dimmer DMX addresses High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Fixture Desk Channel 1 1 Thru 10 Enter patches the desk channel to each address between 1 and 10 Tip You don t have to patch fixtures before you start programming Once the fixtures have been added they can be programmed However without a patch you will not be able to output DMX 5 2 3 Finding Unused DMX Addresses Fixture Window Type j Sta um Start Type S y Num lt y yp
286. he DMX Processor Front Panel Controls 60 3 2 7 Backlight Off TiMe e 0 2 ec eee liiewiend cee levied 61 32 8 WatchOG sist aro E a Sates eek casein 61 3 2 9 Resetting the DMX ProceSSOr sccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 61 3 2 10 Checking a DMX Processor s Status cccsceseeeeeeeenees 61 3 2 11 Expanding the DMX Outputs of a DP8000 62 3 3 HogNet NetWork sirean A eee hi tin arteries Pena a eg he ae 64 3 3 1 Configuring Console Network Adapters s es 64 323 2 Port Number oi ses cccsecanecnecenscueetevbe cd ccasneevetawet eaa ihade iania 68 3 3 3 Node Types and Net NUMDETS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeneeees 69 3 3 4 Connecting Multiple Consoles essere 69 3 3 5 Configuring the Network for Client Server esee 70 3 3 6 Configuring the Network for Console Failover 06 71 3 3 7 Configuring the Network for Console Tracking 75 3 3 8 More than One Show on the Network eeeeeeeeeees 77 3 3 9 Connecting to an Existing Network ceceeeeeeeee tees 77 3 3 10 Network File Sharing c cece eee eee eee tesa eee eeeeeeaes 77 3 4 Art Net and E1 31 SACN ccccccccccccscseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeevevavavevaueuens 79 3 4 1 Identifying the FixtureNet Port esseere 79 3 4 2 Configuring the FixtureNet Port cccceeseeeeeeee eee eee 80 3 4 3 Configuring Art Net Output eeren 81 3 4 4 Configuring E1 31 SACN Output 0 2 eee eee 81 3 5 Adding Playback WINGS
287. he DMX button on the main toolbar 2 Use the two drop down menus at the top of the DMX Output window to select the corresponding DP8000 and universe you wish the manilpulate 3 Select the desired dmx channel cell in the spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells 4 Press the Set to Art Net Input button in the top the value will now be dis played in red 5 Open the network settings window for the corresponding DP8000 and ensure the corresponding Hog universe has its Art Net input enabled and set to listen to the correct universe and sub net Fixture Net such as IP address and netmask must also be set appropriate as similar to when outputting art net Caution Do not configure the DP8000 s Art Net input and output settings for a given Hog universe to the same Art Net subnet universe 25 3 Reverting DMX Channels to HogNet Control To set a dmx channel or group of dmx channels back to values generated by Hog programming 1 Select the desired dmx channel cell in the DMX output window s spreadsheet or highlight a group of dmx channel cells 2 Press the Set to HogNet Input button at the top of the window the value will now be displayed in black Tip All DMX channel value changes made in the dmx output window are stored with the show file and are persisted through log off on as well as through show backups 25 4 DMX Test DMX Test allows users to temporarily set a dmx channel or group of dmx channels to the
288. he destination section of the window If there is conflicting patching on the destination DP8000 you can choose to unpatch only fixtures in conflict from the destination DP8000 or to unpatch all fixtures already patched to the destination You can create a new DP8000 if you want to clone to a universe on a DP8000 not currently connected to the console Click the Add DP button Click OK Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s 113 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Clone DMX Processor Source Destination DMX Processor Universe Usage DMX Processor Universe Net Name ype Name Type DP 8000 DP 8000 npt 2 DP 8000 DP 8000 Source Options Destination Options Oniy unpatch fotures that will block O Unpatch Conflicts the fixtures being cloned move all E Unpet r destination h r Unpatch all fectures in the destination universes before cloning Figure 5 7 The Clone DP window 5 2 8 Unpatching Fixtures You can unpatch a fixture in order to repatch it with a different start address or to stop DMX output being sent to it Unpatching does not erase any programming for the fixture in groups palettes cues and so on There are two ways to unpatch Unpatching by fixture removes all patching information for that fixture even if it has been patched to several start addresses or has multiple patch points Un patching by start address only unpatches a
289. he fixtures used in the two shows see Figure 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window If you choose not to merge fixtures you will not be able to merge any programming other than macros views and reports High End Systems 101 102 Section 4 Shows Fixture Merge Merge Fixtures Figure 4 6 The Fixture Merge page of the Merge Show window There are two options for merging fixtures Append appending fixtures will add a copy of all of the fixtures from the source show into the current show Any programming that is merged from the source show will use the appended fixtures and all programming in the current show will continue to use the same fixtures as before Replace replacing fixtures will match fixtures from the source show with fixtures in the current show using a combination of the fixture type and user number If a match is made the fixture in the current show is replaced with the one in the source show and all programming in the source and current show that used that fixture will use the merged fixture If no match is made the source fixture is appended to the current show as above Important If you merge fixtures and then merge programming because both the source show and the current show are using the same fixture any pro gramming from the source show using that fixture will overwrite the programming in the current show High End Systems Section 4 Shows 4 12 3 Merging Programming After
290. he palette s editor See Editing Palette Contents p 156 High End Systems 163 8 6 4 8 6 5 164 Section 8 Palettes Reference Palettes When you record a cue using a palette a reference to the palette is recorded instead of a numer ical value for the parameters Similarly you can record palettes using other palettes so that the new palette contains references rather than numerical values A palette recorded in this way is known as a reference palette and is marked in the palette directory window by a R icon Reference palettes are useful when you want to create palettes to use as simple building blocks which you then make more complex building blocks from For example you might create a po sition palette that focuses some Studio Spot 575s onto the lead singer and further position palettes that position other fixtures onto the remaining band members You could then make an All Band position palette with one fixture lighting each band member in which each fixture refer ences another palette instead of having parameter values If the drum riser was later moved you could adjust the position palette that focused onto it and the change would not only be updated in all scenes and cues programmed with that palette but also all programming done with the All Band palette By default palettes are not recorded as reference palettes any fixture parameters assigned using another palette is recorded as a numerical value
291. he two markers are joined by a line to indicate they are related e Fixtures that do not have colour mixing capabilities do not appear in the Colour Picker If you have several different fixture types selected the lines on the colour picker change to display the range of colours that all of the selected fixtures can achieve shown as a dotted line as well as the range of colours that at least one of the fixtures can achieve shown as a dashed line When you select a colour a single target marker X is displayed connected to a series of O markers one for each fixture type e The Colour Picker also displays the gamuts and markers for fixtures that are currently in the editor but not selected These are shown in grey Fixtures that are not color calibrated use a standard HS method and the Colour Picker will appear without any dashed lines The Gel Picker You can use the Gel Picker to select colours matched to traditional gels Clicking on a button in the Gel Picker sets the Hue and Saturation parameters of the selected fixtures to values that match the selected colour as closely as possible High End Systems 139 6 3 6 6 3 7 140 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers You can select colours from the Lee Rosco E Colour Rosco Supergel and GamColor ranges using the buttons in the toolbar at the top of the window You can also select whether to match to the gel as it would appear in a Par 64
292. hedule window Auto generated user kinds are based on pre defined families of functions established by the Hog 40S For example Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue and Saturation are all part of the colour mixing family as defined in the Hog 40S library model therefore a fixture that features they functions would automatically generate a user kind containing CMY and HS functions Deleting Users Kinds To delete a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Press and hold Delete and then press the cell of the kind you wish to delete in the Kinds Directory window 240 High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Colour Colour M Kinds I Auto Kinds Guard 1 2 Colour Colour F K 2 Fx Gobo intensity Postion r d r 11 12 n Beam cw Gnu eo r d r 20 Macro Beam Focus Snape 2 tor2 r r r Figure 15 2 User Kinds as displayed in the the Kinds Directory and on the Front Panel amp 5 7 intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Control 8 9 10 11 12 Strobe Colour Colour 1 Colour 2 Colour Fx Mixing Figure 15 3 Auto Kinds Button in the Kinds Directory Copying and Moving Users Kinds To copy a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Click on an existing user kind in the Kinds Directory press the Copy key and then click on any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window To move a user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window H
293. heir default setting when the console starts up To assign a custom default 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Default cell of the desired parameter 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit 124 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Assign a Parameter Offset This setting allows you to offset the range of values over which a parameter varies For instance if one fixture is hung at an angle to the bar so that it has a different pan centre point from all the others on that bar then you could assign an offset so that the fixture appeared to line up from a programming and operating point of view To assign a parameter offset 1 Setup Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 Select the Offset cell of the desired parameter 3 Set new value Enter Enter a value as a real world unit Important Applying an offset to a parameter after you have programmed values for it into your show will mean that those values will also be offset Naming Slots Some fixture parameters are continuously variable for example CMY colour mixing On the other hand some parameters for example gobo or colour wheels work in discrete increments or slots The Fixture Library loaded into Hog 40S defines the fixture s default slots displayed on the Slot Toolbar in palettes and the Programmer When custom gobos or colours are used you can customise the show file to displa
294. higher specification unit with a greater number of functions to that of a lower specification unit Fx Num a Note Dfa Paka Patch Ty Patch Note ry Panivet Tiivet htieasty ColCa 1 0P 1 1 Foxture No No No 100 Yes No SwpAxes Paninvert Titinvert intensty Col Cal Figure 5 9 Changed Fixture Type 5 5 Removing a Fixture from the Show To remove a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Fixture 1 Remove Select the fixture s you want to remove and press Remove 3 You will be asked to confirm Select OK Important If you remove a fixture all of its associated programming in groups palettes cues and so on will be removed from the show To disable a fixture while retaining its programming unpatch it see Unpatching Fix tures p 114 5 6 Creating Palettes and Groups Automatically Hog 40S can create groups and palettes automatically based on the fixtures in your show This rapidly gives you a set of building blocks to start programming with To use the Auto Palettes function 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Click on the Auto Palettes button located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture window and select from the options in the Auto Palettes window see Figure 5 10 The Auto Palettes window 3 Click on Generate High End Systems 117 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Auto Palettes Make Groups Maximum Group repeat V
295. holding down the pig and fan keys The blind key s led will stop flashing to indicate the front panel is no longer in HID mode 30 2 1 Creating a Full Install USB Flash Drive on a Windows Computer The following procedure demonstrates how to sue a Windows Computer to create a Full Install USB flash drive for use with Hog 40S Consoles 1 Download and install Linux Live s USB Stick Maker to your Windows PC http www linuxliveusb com 414 High End Systems Section 30 Updating Console Software Insert a USB flash drive into on of your Windows computer s USB slots and start Linux Live s USB Stick Maker USB flash drive must be at least 2GB In step 1 of Linux Live USB Creator select the USB flash drive you inserted into your computer In step 2 of Linux Live USB Creator click on ISO IMG ZIP and select the Hog 40S full restore ISO file that you downloaded from the Hog 40S support page online Skip step 3 of the Linux Live USB Creator and look at step 4 Select Format the key in Fat32 Click on the lightning bolt in step 5 of the Linux Live USB creator A dialogue box will pop up warning you that your USB flash drive contents will be erased Click okay When Linux Live USB Creator is finished it will alert you Remove your USB flash drive and proceed to restore your console as outlined in section 24 1 30 2 2 Creating a Full Install USB Flash Drive on a Macintosh Computer The following procedure demonstrates how to use a M
296. how objects linked to by the command keys High End Systems 313 Section 20 Plots Plots are user created graphical layouts that contain programable objects such as fixtures and PixelMaps Plots can be used to select fixtures gather fixture feedback and apply PixelMapping values to fixtures Plots are stored in the plots directory To open the plots directory window hold the Open key and press the Plots button on the main toolbar or press Pig Open Fixture on the console front panel Figure 20 1 The Plots Directory To open a plot hold the Open key and press the coordinating plot button in the directory You can also open a plot using the command line by pressing Pig Fixture this will put the word plot on the command line specifying a plot number and then Open For example Pig Fix ture 1 Open will open plot 1 Basic Plot A f Position Figure 20 2 Example of a Basic Plot 20 1 Creating Plots Plots can be created as entirely blank or pre populated with fixtures To create a blank plot High End Systems 315 Section 20 Plots 1 Ensure that no fixtures are currently selected Record Pig Fixture plot should now appear on the command line after record 2 3 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter the plot number you wish to create 5 Enter 6 A new and entirely blank plot has now been created To create a plot pre populated with fixtures 1 Select the fixtures you want to have
297. ia the widget Click OK to confirm the settings The Expander should now have its DMX Data indicator illuminated Expanding a DMX Processor 8000 Using Widgets and Super Widgets When you connect a USB DMX Widget or Super Widget to a USB port of a DMX Processor 8000 you will need to configure it to the next available output of the DMX Processor To manually configure Widgets 62 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System DMX Processor 8000 Settings Widget gt Single Widget 5013 FixtureNet Art Net input Art Net O Timecode Widgets Cire Catalyst Diagnostics 3 3 3 c3 3 3 3 3 amp ORR OR OR OR ROR ORS 4 O Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on its net number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Processor Settings window see Figure 3 8 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window Select the Widget Outputs pane 4 To configure an expander to output ports 9 16 of a DMX Processor 8000 click on a box associated with a port 9 16 and select the widget from the list of serial numbers that appears Super Widget ports will appear with the serial number followed by an output number Repeat for all the universes you want to output via the Widget 5 Click OK to confirm the settings The Expan
298. ick on any column header and select either Type or Protocol High End Systems 119 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Modifying the User Number The User Number is the number that you use to select a particular fixture when programming By default Hog 40S gives each fixture type its own range of user numbers so that there might be several fixtures numbered 1 of different types If this is the case the fixture number has an asterisk next to it in the Fixture window Fixture Window Fixture Patch Schedule Media Num Desk Channel 2 pe e t pe Th To change the User Number 1 Open Fixture 2 Select the fixture s Num cell short for User Number 3 Set new number Enter To change several User Numbers at once 1 Open Fixture 2 Select arange of User Number cells by pressing or clicking and then dragging 3 Set new number Enter allocates a range of User Numbers starting with the number that you enter Tip You can renumber the fixtures in your show so that each one has a unique number irrespective of its type By doing this you never have to specify the type when selecting fixtures which can speed up programming See Selecting Fixtures p 127 Notes Notes can be used to attach a comment to a fixture such as its location or intended use To add a note 1 Open Fixture 120 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 2 Select the fixture
299. ick or press on the universe to unpatch so that it is highlighted in blue 2 Press Unpatch Universe at the top of the Fixture window and confirm that you want to unpatch Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DP8000 To unpatch an entire DP8000 1 Select the DP8000 to unpatch from the dropdown list at the top of the Fixture window 2 Press Unpatch DP and confirm that you want to unpatch Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch information to the DP8000 High End Systems 115 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 3 Replicating Fixtures You can expand your show to accommodate a larger rig using the Replicate Fixture function This will create copies of fixtures including all their programming To replicate fixtures 1 Setup gt Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select one or more fixtures in the Fixture window by clicking on its numbered button in the left hand column 3 Press Replicate Fixture located in the toolbar at the top of the Fixture win dow Figure 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after replicating fixtures The new fixtures are an exact copy of the originals and will be added to every palette cue and scene that contains programming for the original fixture The comment cell shows you which fixture it is a copy of New fixtu
300. ies 371 27 1 2 Building the Fixture ccc ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeea nese essa eeeee 374 27 1 3 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show 5 377 27 2 Fixture Builder Tutorial cccceeeeeeeeee eee eeea teen teen tesa nena eed 378 27 2 1 Step 1 Create the New Fixture secsec 379 27 2 2 Step 2 Enter Fixture Details cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 379 27 2 3 Step 3 Configure Channel Features cee 382 27 2 4 Step 4 Build the Fixture 2 0 cece eeeteee eee eeeeeeeaee 392 27 2 5 Step 5 Add the Fixture in the Fixture Schedule 394 27 2 6 Step 6 Edit Fixture to Define Default Values 394 27 2 7 Step 7 Programming Your Custom Fixture 5 395 Key amp Button Combinations cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 397 Visualiser Connectivity cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenees 401 29 1 Installing the Connectivity Application ce eeeeeeeeee eee 401 29 2 Connecting the Console to the Visualizer ceeeeee 404 29 2 1 Configuring Visualisers 2 2 0 eect cette eeeeeeeeeeeeen eens 404 29 2 2 Configuring the Network Connection seee 404 29 2 3 Configuring the Visualiser Universes eeee 405 29 2 4 Using the Visualizer 2 0 0 0 eeeeee cece eee eeaeeenees 406 29 3 Connecting to WYSIWYG cece eect eee eee ee setae teats ae eenies 406 29 3 1 Configuring the Network Connection ceee 406 29 3 2 Configuring
301. ies A great advantage of palettes is that when you record a cue using the palette the cue contains a reference to the palette rather than the parameter values that the palette contains If later you change the palette then all cues that have been recorded using the palette are also changed This is especially useful if for example the position of a piece of set on stage is moved and moving High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals lights have been programmed to light it The palette can be updated once to accommodate the change rather than in every cue For more information see Palettes p 155 Palettes allow intensity position colour and beam parameters to be recorded as easily accessible building blocks to be used when programming Palettes are stored in classified directories For general information on working with directories When you use a palette to assign parameter values in the Programmer and then record the contents of the Programmer as a scene or cue the Hog 40S records a reference to the palette rather than numerical values for the parameters During playback the console refers to the parameter values stored within the palette when outputting cue data to the stage Because of this referencing when you modify a palette s content the cues and scenes that were programmed using it will in effect be automatically updated with the new values The palette is said to be referenced in the cue This is a
302. ific fixtures use the key e Fixture 1 deselects Fixture 1 Alternatively you can deselect a fixture visually in the Programmer or editor window by clicking on its number in the Num column High End Systems 129 6 1 7 6 2 6 2 1 130 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Reselecting Fixtures You can recall the last sub selection made before deselecting fixtures by pressing Previous on the Select Toolbar Selection Order The order in which you select fixtures is significant in controlling how fanning and effects are applied to them see Fanning p 144 and Effects p 227 For example applying a fan or effect after selecting fixtures 1 5 can appear different than if you selected fixtures 1 3 2 4 5 The selection order is relevant during programming and is recorded as part of groups but it is not recorded in palettes cues or scenes Tip Because the console records the selection order as part of groups you can select the group and use the Next and Back keys to subselect each fixture in a particular order By controlling the selection order when you record the group you can then work through a series of fixtures in the order they are physically positioned in the rig instead of in numerical order Reverse Shuffle and Reorder You can change the selection order of fixtures in predefined ways The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons are on the Select Toolbar and Fanning Toolbar e Ma
303. igh End Systems Glossary 1 10 Base T 100 Base T abstraction layer blocking cue buddying button cell chase CITP command keys High End Systems An older flavour of Ethernet that is slower 10 MBits per second than the 100 Base T used by Hog components If connected to other equipment that only supports this flavour then Hog components will automatically detect this and run their Ethernet connections at this slower speed See Also 100 Base T A flavour of Ethernet that supports data rates of up to 100 MBits per second All Hog components support this flavour of Ethernet and comply with all relevant standards so networking equipment designed for 100Base T should be compatible with the Hog See Also 10 Base T Hog 40S separates abstracts the user from the details of how fixtures work For example most values are expressed in real world values such as degrees of rotation rather than DMX values A blocking cue prevents changes made to earlier cues from tracking through to later cues See Also tracking During fanning buddying keeps fixtures in gangs that all take the same parameter value See Also fanning An on screen control operated by clicking with the mouse or trackball or touching the screen In this manual the work key is reserved for hardware buttons on the console s front panel A single rectangle in a spreadsheet containing a value See Also spreadsheet A series of cues
304. igh End Systems 241 Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets 2 Click on an existing User Kind in the Kinds Directory press Move and then click on any empty cell in the Kinds Directory window 15 2 242 Wheelsets Wheelsets are the building blocks of both fixed kinds and user kinds They specify how fixture funtions assigned within a kind are displayed on the console s main encoder wheels when a fixture selection is made Note The center wheel located below the center touchscreen on the Hog 4 console s front panel is configured separately from the wheelsets established in the fixed or user kinds For more in formation on the center wheel s function assignments Center Wheel Preferences p 96 Every effort has been made by the developers of the Hog 40S to provide you with a logical wheelset arrangement by default but sometimes a re arrangement of the functions within a wheelset or a re arrangement of the wheelsets themselves is neccessary This section is intended to increase your understanding of how to manage the wheelsets in your show To access the wheelset for any particular fixed or user kind 1 Open Kinds opens the Kinds Directory Window 2 Hold Open and click on any existing kind in the Kinds Directory Within each kind editor are two main sections On the left is a list of functions On the right is a graphical interface showing sets of encoder wheels arranged in groups of five Each one of these groups of encoder wheels is ca
305. imilarly with masking options High End Systems 153 Section 7 Groups e Group 1 Intensity Copy Fixture Group 2 Enter copies the intensity values of the fixtures in group 1 to the fixtures in group 2 7 7 Insert Merge and Replace When recording or copying a group if the destination location already has a group recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace If you are moving a group only the Insert option is available Insert creates a new destination group The new group will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination group e Replace Overwrites the group information in that destination Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a group to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 154 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 8 1 Recording a Palette There are five palette directories intensity position colour beam effects into which users can record preset values for easy recall during show programming The Hog 40S determines which function values are recorded into palettes based the kind masking specified at the time of recording If the kind mask is empty no kinds selected at the time of recording then the palette directory s
306. important to provide as much information as possible Different computer configurations other applications and additional hardware may all have unexpected results When reporting errors please provide the following information Name e Date e Hog 4PC software version and build number e Operating system e Computer specifications Number of displays e Connected USB devices e Networked devices e Other running applications e Detailed description of the problem including instructions to reproduce if possible and the exact syntax used e List of any errors reported by the software If Hog 4PC crashes or fails it will output a dmp file in the application directory for example C Program Files Flying Pig Systems Hog4PC if you accepted the default location when you installed Hog 4PC Please send this dmp file along with your bug report to support flying pig com High End Systems 447 Section 33 Troubleshooting 33 8 3 Reporting Problems with the User Manual Please include the following information in your bug report 1 The nature of the problem e Missing information e Incorrect information e Unclear or ambiguous information e Unable to find information in the index 2 The section number where the problem is 3 The version number of the manual In printed and PDF editions you can find this on the title page at the start of the manual The on line help within the console shows the version on the ma
307. in Toolbar gt Select open the Select Toolbar Reverse reverses the selection sequence so that the last is first and the first is last For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 5 1 Shuffle randomises the selection order of the current selection For example the fixture selection 1 5 becomes 3 54 2 14 4 Reorder sorts the selection order to match the User Number order For example the fixture selection 3 5 2 1 4 becomes 1 5 Tip The Reverse Shuffle and Reorder buttons can also be found on the Fanning Toolbar which you can open by pressing and holding the Fan key See Fanning p 144 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 3 Modifying Parameters Once fixtures are selected within an editor you can modify their parameters Hog consoles provide several ways to adjust the different parameter types Command Line Use for intensity and selecting palettes I Wheel Use for intensity Trackball Use for position pan and tilt Use the top right Trackball key to switch the Trackball between controlling the on screen pointer and the position of selected fixtures Parameter Wheels Use for all fixture functions To change the parameter type currently controlled by the parameter wheels select one of the fixed kind keys on the front panel Intensity Position Colour Beam Effect and Time or one of the user kind keys on the front panel For consoles that don t have a dedic
308. in contents page you can go to this page by clicking home at the bottom of any page 33 8 4 About Software Version Numbering The software version number is made up of four parts the major version number the minor version number the current release number and the build number For example v1 2 3 b512 1 is the major number 2 is the minor version number 3 is the current release and 512 is the build 33 8 5 About Beta Software As new releases of Hog 40S are developed High End Systems relies on input from console users If you are interested in learning more about the High End Systems Software Testing Pro gram please visit www flyingpig com 448 High End Systems Section 34 Service All Hog 4 family consoles must be serviced by a qualified service technician The information in this section is intended to assist qualified personnel only 34 1 Replacing the Screens 1 Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel Damaged screens are easily replaced 1 With the LCD box in the horizontal flat position undo the six screws sur rounding the screen using a 3mm allen key Carefully remove the front metal work and Soft Key strips soft key strips are on Hog 4 Console Only With the LCD box in the vertical upright position undo the eight scews on the back panel of the screen assembly using a 3mm allen key Remove the back panel metal work This entire ste
309. in your new plot Record Pig Fixture plot should now appear on the command line after record 2 3 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter the plot number you wish to create 5 Enter 6 A new plot has now been created containing a box gang that contains all of the fixtures you selected in step 1 NOTE You can also use the plots directory to create a new plot by pressing on a blank directory button in the plots directory window after pressing record 20 2 Editing Plots All plots contain three main types of objects fixtures gangs and PixelMaps In this section we will review how to add remove and edit these different types of objects as well as a few tricks on how to quick manipulated multiple plot objects at once 20 2 1 Fixtures To add fixtures to a plot 1 Open the plot Pig Fixture Open 2 Enable the fixture edit button at the top of the plot window Basic Plot Show 3 Click on the add fixtures tab of the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window 316 High End Systems Section 20 Plots T Use the buttons listed under the add fixtures tab to choose what type of gang arrangement you will like to use for adding the fixtures to the plot Make a fixture selection Drag your finger across the plot window to add the fixtures or click and drag using the trackball mouse The fixtures are now added to the plot using the gang type you selected To remove fixtures from a
310. ing 1 may crash while playback continues normally Before restarting the entire console therefore you should see if the problem can be cured by restarting the individual process Pig Open Backspace open the Launched Processes window see Fig ure 33 1 The Launched Processes window Kill processes that are not responding by right clicking on them and selecting Kill Restart the process by right clicking and selecting Restart An exception is the Editor process which will disappear when killed you can restart it by re opening the Programmer or an editor window 33 5 Console isn t talking to DMX Processors 1 Check that the display on the DMX Processor shows Outputs Active If it does not then see if it is in the process of getting the show data or connecting or crashed if it has crashed restart it by disconnecting the mains power waiting a few moments and reconnecting it Check the network cabling The Link light will be lit on the DMX Processor if the correct connection has been made Check the network settings The DMX Processor and console both need to be on the same subnet Check the port number setting The DMX Processor and console both need to have the same Port Number See HogNet Network p 64 Check the software The DMX Processor and console both need to be running the same version of the software see Updating the DMX Processor Software p 416 33 6 Playback controls don t beha
311. ing 110 cloning 113 dmx refresh rate 60 expanding XLR outputs 62 IP address 59 locking the controls 60 mains power 59 net number 59 port number 59 removing 110 reset options 416 resetting 61 selecting when patching 106 status 61 updating software and firmware 416 using 59 watchdog 61 dmx processor 8000 technical specifications 464 dmx refresh rate settings dmx processor 60 dmx test 365 dmx universe 106 dmx widgets 86 configuring on Hog 4PC 430 installation with Hog 4PC 429 Status LEDs 87 upgrading 421 edit button 46 edit fixtures window 122 editing cue contents 188 cue timings 210 effects 230 237 group contents 152 palette contents 156 parameter timings in cues 212 scene contents 205 editor toolbar 45 editor values toolbar 45 editors 45 bringing in values from onstage 246 clearing the contents of 148 locking 46 which is the current editor 22 effect directory 34 effects 227 481 copying 238 deleting 238 editing 230 237 engine 230 fanning 230 length 228 moving 238 n shot 228 naming 237 offset 228 palettes 236 predefined 235 rate 228 size 228 tables 227 timing 233 using in programming 237 embedded palettes 155 enable aggregation 42 enable jump toolbar 44 enable timecode 337 350 encoder wheel encoder wheel button options 98 endstops of parameter values 135 ethernet 64 even button 129 expander 62 export prefer
312. ing 223 paths 210 recording 183 removing parameter values 185 with a delay time 209 with a fade time 208 with selected fixtures only 185 with state 192 timing 207 tracking backwards when recording 189 tracking forwards when deleting 191 tracking forwards when inserting 190 triggering 218 triggering from timecode 337 350 wait time 218 cursor keys 105 cut 44 date creation of a show file 48 format 51 High End Systems Index setting the console clock 51 dbo key 293 default value of parameters 124 delay button 45 delay time 207 209 fanned 217 deleting cuelists 199 cues 185 desktop views 29 effects 238 fixtures from groups 152 groups 152 link cues 223 pages 307 palettes 158 scenes 204 shows 48 user kinds 240 deselecting fixtures 129 desk channels 30 105 desklights 94 desktop views 27 deleting 29 naming 28 options 28 recalling 28 recording 27 DHCP server 59 66 67 diagrams front panel 441 direct palettes 34 164 directories 34 automatic naming of items 37 colour coding items 38 default item names 37 directory windows 167 button sizes 169 color coding 168 color coding entire button 168 list view 171 show auto color swatch 170 show fewer buttons 169 write permissions 167 discrete parameter values see slots displays 52 displays external 53 dmx address 29 106 dmx highlight 366 dmx processor 64 High End Systems adding for patch
313. ing value is applied to all fixture parameters in the cue However you can assign fade delay or path values to individual parameters in the Programmer and these settings are then included when you record cues and scenes and optionally palettes You can also assign timings to parameters High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 3 1 in the cue scene and palette editors Note that you can only assign timings for a parameter that has a value in the editor To display parameter fade times delay times or paths in an editor select the Fade Delay or Path buttons from the top left of the editor window You can assign the individual timings of parameters using the parameter wheels the command line or directly in editor windows You can also assign timings to all parameters of a fixture using the parameter wheels or the command line Important If you assign individual timings for parameters and subsequently assign an overall cue time then the individual parameter timings will be replaced by the overall cue time Assign Parameter Timings using Wheels To assign fade and delay timings to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Wheels Toolbar will show the available timing types Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out together with their current settings see Figure 13 4 The Wheels Toolba
314. ing Parameters cceeece cece cece eee eee ee ee ea eee atten teen nena eed 131 6 3 1 Intensity ceseroun eE es sevtusedecety Rt 131 6 3 2 POS t ON etanu di ia i ain 133 6 3 3 Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam 05 134 6 3 4 Slotted Parameters Colour and Beam eeeeee 135 6 3 5 Working with Colour eceeeeceeeeeeeee eee a essa eeea tesa eeeee 136 6 3 6 FING Control ix aie aie a ee hes 140 6 3 7 Touching Parameters ccccccece cece ee eee eee nesta nese tesa eeaee 140 6 3 8 Copying Parameter SettingS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 142 6 3 9 Restoring Default Values 2 1 0 cece eeeeeeeee testes eee 144 High End Systems v Lighting Control System 6 4 CANNING 5 e2cct wee ado aceasta a a a a tes e ise iadiene 144 6 4 1 Using the Fan Key 0 0 cece eece eee eter etre eee ates atten eeaa ees 144 6 4 2 In the Programmer WINdOW sneer 145 6 4 3 With the Command Line 1 00 eect ee eee eee e teen etnias 145 6 4 4 Fanning Options cece eee cece ee eeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeee 146 6 4 5 Multipart Fanning ccceeec cee eee eeeee eee testes eeaeeeaeeeas 147 6 4 6 Fanning with GroupingS cccecceeeeeeneee nese tesa eee eeaee 147 6 5 REMOVING Value S 20 2 ae e cette a PETEA EAE EE EE 148 6 5 1 Removing Entire Fixtures from an Editor ascese 149 6 5 2 Removing Kinds from an Editor eceeeeeeeeee eee ne es 149 6 5 3 Removing Individual Parameters from an Editor
315. ing a window it will appear in the position in which it was last used This means that unless the window is open when the macro is recorded there is no guarantee that it will open in the right place with the macro is replayed For example consider recording a macro with a blank set of screens The group window is opened and a couple of buttons are touched then recording is stopped Move the group window to the other touch screen and close it When the macro is replayed the group window will get opened on the other touch screen but all the touch screen presses will still be on the original blank touch screen High End Systems Section 24 Macros It is also possible to speed up a macro so that it runs faster than the console can keep up with This problem tends to manifest itself as key presses being missed out when replaying the macro Increasing the amount of time in the Wait column of the macro will solve this problem The size of the wait required varies depending upon the number of things the desk is trying to do at once and the complexity of the task initiated by the preceding key presses To stop the playback of a running macro 1 Macro Release 2 Alternatively Pig Macro Running a Keystroke Macro from the Macro Directory Window You can run Keystroke Macros from the Macro Directory window Open Macro OR e Macro Macro To run a Macro make sure that the Guard button in the Macro Directory window is deselected Then p
316. ing value to value specified Scale Fader As Adjusts scaling based on fader s control assignment i e if fader is signment assigned to Scale Playback Rate then a button assigned to Scale Fader Assignment will scale the playback rate e Temporary When temporary is turned on scaling will be applied when button is pressed down and re leased when when button is released e Action and Value When action multiply then button press will multiply scaling value by the value specified when action set then button press will change rate scaling value to value specified High End Systems Section 17 Playback Manual cross fader Scale Playback Rate Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Fader The fader controls fixture intensities being output by the master Scale Effect Rate The fader adjusts the effect rate of the master by applying a scaling Scale Effect Size The fader adjusts the effect size of the by applying a scaling value e Go Off Zero The cuelist is triggered when the fader is moved from zero as if you had pressed the Go key e Release At Zero The cuelist is released when the fader returns to zero see Releasing Masters p 263 The fader control cues manually move the fader to the bottom to pick up the next cue then move it up to start the crossfade The fader adjusts the playback rate of the master by applying a scaling value to the base playback rate of the mas
317. ing views or changing pages Startup comment macros are assigned in the Misc pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Misc High End Systems 9 Section 4 Shows User Preferences amp Appearance DE Asyback Bar Options w Show cuelst numbers Show cue Smes Tami Show cue numbers Show cue names Highlight template f Progra mng Page Change Options Ores rome ssen IN Y Naming al Remember intensity vales im Remember scale valves v Custet Window Ont Cuetst Window CITP Preview Fetch Options jest fi a sere J E gt For details of the macro syntax see Macros p 353 4 8 92 Backing Up Your Show It is recommended that you backup your show file regularly by saving a compressed copy of your show file on the console s hard disk or on a USB Flash Drive Backup files are small in size and are also easy to transfer from one console to another Compressed backups provide a method for reverting to older archives of your show file should a major problem occur with your show file Use the following steps to make a compressed show file backup 1 Setup gt Shows Current Show 2 Click Backup 3 Browse to a location on the hard drive or an external disk to save the backup file 4 Click OK A compressed copy of your show will be saved with _bck appended to its file name High End Systems Section 4 Shows Tip You should backup your show files to external media r
318. ings for the Trackball keys are Trackball Key Pointer Mode Position Mode top left flip flip top right ball mode ball mode bottom left left click next bottom right right click ortho toggle Center Wheel Preferences The user preference for which fixture functions are assigned to the center wheel on the front panel of the Hog 4 Console is managed in the Center Wheel pane of the User Preferences window In this window you can assign as many functions as you like to the center wheel by dragging functions from left hand side of the window to the wheel display on the right hand side of the window To delete functions from the center wheel click on the function in the right hand High End Systems Section 4 Shows pane of the preferences window to highlight the function in blue and then press the delete key on the console front panel User Preferences Colour Mixing Colour Temperature Control Programming Defaut Timing fault Naming When a fixture selection is made functions assigned to the center wheel will be diplayed on the toolbar located at the bottom of the front panel s center display Functions that you ve assigned to the center wheel wil only be displayed if they are valid for your current fixture selection To cycle the center wheel through the functions press the button to the bottom right of the center wheel The action of the button to the bottom left of the center wheel is determined by the Enc
319. ings window 6 Inthe Timecode Widgets pane use the drop down menu to map the attached LTC widget to an index 348 High End Systems Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC DMX Processor 8000 Settings Security Processor Unit LTC Widget 371 lt DMX FoctureNet aaa Art Net input Art Net Output E O pfaff g O J i PAARA 1 31 sACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets Diagnostics lt 4 O8BBAAROO O 23 3 Viewing Incoming LTC You can view the LTC being processed by any DP8000 in the sytem by openning the Timecode Toolbar associated with that DP8000 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DP8000 in the list that you wish to view incoming LTC for LTC inputs directly into a console this is going to be the DP8000 that is running internally on that console Settings opens the Settings window 4 Click on the view timecode toolbar button associated with the LTC index you wish to view If you have a cuelist with a timecode source assigned in the options for that cuelist then you can open the Timecode Toolbar with the View Timecode button in the Cuelist window From left to right the Timecode Toolbar displays the logical name of the timecode source the index number for that source the timecode type the timecode format the timecode clock value and the number of frames generated by the console the number frames the console is configured to auto generate when the in
320. ion protocol that can be used to send a variety of control messages between OSC enabled devices OSC input is supported on every console in the Hog 4 family including Hog 4PC When configured properly OSC will enable you to use OSC enabled controllers such as a synthesizers electronic music instruments produc tion audio software and mobile phone apps such as Touch OSC to control the basic functions of the Hog 40S 22 2 Configuring OSC Input To bring OSC messages into the console 1 High End Systems Connect your OSC controller to a physical network port that is attached to the same local area network as the console s HogNet port Setup Network opens the network window Right click on the console number and select Settings opens the Settings window In the Open Sound Control pane enable OSC In and assign the input port to match the output port of your OSC output device For your convenience the console s IP address is also listed to the right of the port number to assist in configuring the output of your other OSC devices 34 Section 22 Open Sound Control Console Settings Input Port Neem 192 168 0102 MIDI Notes enable _ oscin MIDI Timecode Output Open Sound Control Port BEGGES 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics Enable 0O OSC Out Protocol uoe Pi D x Cancel Figure 22 1 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window 22 3 Configuring OSC Output To send OSC messages from the Console 1 Connect you
321. irst main encoder wheel Press each of the targets in turn to calibrate Press Set to start calibration again Press Control to swap external screens Press Enter to finish Figure 3 2 The Calibration Screen Adjusting the Touschscreen LCD Backlight You can adjust the brightness of the built in touchscreens by adjusting the LCD backlight settings of the console Hog 4 and Full Boar 4 only To adjust the LCD backlight hold down the Setup key and adjust the parameter wheels labelled Left Backlight or Right Backlight Tip If you find the graphics on the screens are too bright you can change the console s colour scheme to a darker one in Setup gt Preferences gt Appearance Changing the LCD Backlight Timeout The backlights that illuminate the console s primary touch screens switch off automatically after a period of time if the console is idle You can adjust the amount of time the backlights will wait before switching off in the Appearance pane of the User Preferences window High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 1 Setup gt Preferences gt Appearance 2 Adjust the Backlight Off time located at the bottom of the pane either by pressing the arrows to increment or decrement the value or by clicking on the value pressing Set and typing in a new value 3 Select OK to apply and close Tip Once the Hog displays are asleep you can wake them up by pressing any key It is a good idea to use the Pi
322. is indicated by the percentage completed in the same column Pausing a cue will turn the arrow red and the letter H Halted is displayed Customising Cuelist Feedback There are several view options selected by buttons at the top of Cuelist window e Play Controls displays alternative play controls at the top of the Cuelist win dow These are useful for running virtual masters see Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master p 272 e View Cue opens the current cue as denoted by an arrow in the wait column in an editor e Follow Cue selecting Follow Cue from the top of the Cuelist window will make the list of cues scroll to keep the current cue in view as the cues are played back e Follow Chosen during playback you may not want to have multiple Cuelist windows open Select Follow Chosen from the top of any Cuelist window so Hog 40S automatically displays the cuelist of the currently chosen master If Follow Chosen is off the same cuelist will always be shown in the window ir respective of the chosen master e View Timecode turn the display of timecode information on or off 17 4 3 The Output Window The Output window displays the output value of all parameters controlled by Hog 40S from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors and parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the status of shared parameter values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 17 7
323. isplayed known as dynamic So pressing Set and entering the name of colour palette 3 as amp d amp n will assign the name to be Colour 3 If you assign the name to be amp D amp N the name will also be assigned to Colour 3 The difference is that moving this palette to position 4 will automatically correct the name to Colour 4 Colour Coding Directory Items Each directory window allows for unique colour coding of each button within the directory The default colour for new directory items is standard grey When you copy a directory item the console will automatically copy the directory item s custom colour as well see Figure 2 10 Directory Item Colour High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Position Directory if P Up N Out Blinder Figure 2 10 Directory Item Colour To customise a directory item in button view 1 Using the mouse right click on the directory button to open the right click menu 2 Click on one of the 15 options shown in Figure 2 11 The Preset Colour Options to assign the directory item this colour 3 Alternatively click on Choose to select a custom colour from a colour wheel or click None to select the standard grey colour Click on Auto to have palettes in the Colour directory automatically determine the button color based upon the dominate colour value recorded in the palette To customise a directory item in spreadsheet view 1
324. ist scene chase is to open the options window for that master and directly modify the effect size field Any modifications made to effect size field in the options window are stored and persisted as the base size Holding choose and adjusting the main encoder wheels Press and hold the Choose key for a master and then use the parameter wheels to adjust the effects size for the selected master Any changes you make the base effect size for a master are stored and will persist as the base size Assigning the physical fader of the master to Scale Effect Size in the cuelist scene options window Assigning the physical fader control of a master to Scale Effect Size allows users to utilize the physical fader to scale multiply amp divide the base effect size of the master The middle of the fader travel always equals 1x scaling no scaling applied while moving the fader up or down will beging to adjust the size of the effects playing back on the master by multiply ing dividing the base effect size of the cuelist scene The upper and lower boundary options of the Scale Effect Size option determine how much scaling will be applied to the master s base effect size when the fader is moved Assigning the button controls of the master to Scale Effect Size the cuelist scene options window Assigning any of the physical button controls of the master to Scale Effect Size allows users to scale multiply amp divide the base effect size of the
325. ist on Override Priority 0O 2 Persist On Override 0O R Release On Oth Alternatively you can assign Persist on Override for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Multiple Cuelists with Effects If a cuelist contains parameters that are running an effect when another cuelist or scene changes the underlying values of those parameters the effect continues to run Use Pile Add FX to allow the second cuelist or scene to override the effect as well as the underlying values High End Systems 277 Section 17 Playback For example to allow the cuelist on Master 10 override effects running on other masters 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for Master 10 2 Options open the cuelist s Playback Options window 3 Select the Cuelist pane and select Pile Add FX Properties 0O Use HTP Pile add Effects O qo ls A Chase 0O Track Through Loops 0O Mark Fade New Cu Mark Time New Cues O OQ Mask Playback Select Playback Mask 17 4 Understanding Feedback There are several ways in which you can tell the status of the console s output The status of masters is shown by the playback control key LEDs and the on screen Playback Bar e You can use a cuelist window to follow the progress of running cuelists The total output of all fixtures parameter values is shown in the Output window and the total output of all fixture s intensities is
326. it is linked to and vice versa 19 2 Copying Moving and Deleting Command Keys Command keys can be copied moved and deleted using both the commands directory and the function keys on the front panel when the console s function keys are set to command mode To delete a command key Press and hold delete then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory To move a command key Press and hold move then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory after you release the move key press any empty command key on the front panel or empty cell in the commands directory High End Systems 311 Section 19 Command Keys To copy a command key Press and hold copy then press a command key on the front panel or in the commands directory after you release the copy key press any empty command key on the front panel or empty cell in the commands directory 19 3 312 Changing the Action of a Command Key The action that occurs when a command key is pressed can be configured by viewing the com mands directory in spreadsheet view and editing the Action cell Commands N Name j Action Target Type Target Number ee L FOCTURES OO 7 TT r TECHNOS FULL MMMM Gist Sf TECHNOS GREEN FF Go Scene S Go Pause Back Figure 19 1 Command directory in list view selecting an action Not all command keys have the same action options The list of available actions for a Command Key dep
327. itor for Colour Palette 2 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Select the B Beam button on the Palette Masking Toolbar Edit the fixture parameter values to assign the required gobo Oy po o e D Press Update to save the changes High End Systems 157 Section 8 Palettes Tip You can also use the Palette Masking Toolbar to quickly remove all values of a particular parameter type from a palette by deselecting the appro priate button before updating 8 4 Deleting Palettes Important Deleting a palette will remove all references to the palette that have been recorded in cues scenes and other palettes and replace the refer ences with numerical parameter values Creating a new palette in the same location will not replace the references which are removed once the palette is deleted To delete a palette using the command line 1 Colour 1 Delete deletes Colour Palette 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the palette directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the palette to be deleted from directory 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences gt Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items
328. its firmware High End Systems 87 Section 4 Shows 4 1 Launch a New Show To launch a new show press the Launch New Show button in the start window A browser window will open Select the directory where you wish to store the show give it a name and then press the finish button The console will then launch all the neccessary processes to get you up and running in your new blank show TIP If the launch new show button is greyed out or unavalaible make sure that the run server option is checked in the start screen s settings window If run server is checked but the new show button is still greyed out then it s possible another console is running a show on the same port on the network 4 2 Launch an Existing Show To launch an existing show press the Launch Existing Show button in the start window to launch the last launched show file Alternatively you can press the Browse button to select from existing shows on your console s hard drive a USB flash drive or a CD Show files with a icon are ready to launch existing show files Show files that have a icon are archived show files and will need to be extracted to the hard drive in order to load The unarchiving process is done automatically by the console but will slightly lengthen the amount of time needed to launch the show 4 3 Connect to a Network Show To connect to a show already running on the network look at the connect to show section of the s
329. k panel of HedgeHog 4 Console Manufactured 2015 and High End Systems Section 1 Getting Started 1 1 About this Manual This manual describes the Hog 4OS as it pertains to the Hog 4 range of consoles Hog 4 Full Boar 4 Road Hog 4 Hedge Hog 4 Nano Hog 4 RackHog 4 and Hog 4PC Some of the information contained in this manual will only apply to specific consoles in the Hog 4 family but that information will be clearly identified as console specific In this manual the word key is used to indicate a hardware button on the console s front panel For example press the Enter key The word button when used in this manual refers to virtual buttons that can be pressed on the touch screens or clicked on with the Trackball or mouse This manual can be read in any order but if you haven t used a Hog 4 console before you may want to start with the Hog 40S Fundamentals p 21 You can open your console s built in User Manual at any time by pressing the Help button on the Window Control Toolbar at the top of the right hand screen 1 2 Manual Symbols The following formatting conventions are used in the text of this manual XXXX text that is italicized and underlined indicates a reference to a term in the glossary XXXxX dark red text indicates the name of an interface element such as a button key or window XXXX dark red text inside a set of brackets indicates a button that has a label specific to the show
330. keys see keys cursor art net 79 art net input 365 assert 275 assert time 275 auto kinds 240 auto launch 90 auto palettes 117 auto release 264 auto update 252 back button 189 back key 129 260 back time 268 backlight off time 61 console touch screens 52 backup 92 backwards button 189 beacon 83 beam modifying values 134 135 blind mode 254 blocking 192 removing blocking 193 boot server 66 brightness desklights 94 touch screens 52 buddying with fanning 147 bugs reporting 446 burning a CD 49 High End Systems button 19 C calibration colour 34 138 calibration of touch screens 52 capture activity 304 CD drive creating a CD 49 ejecting a disk 49 center wheel 96 131 chases configuring playback controls 294 setting rate with Tap Sync 290 using cuelist as 288 check integrity 93 choose key 259 260 CITP 175 cleaning faders 450 client 71 clock 22 display format 51 clock toolbar 222 clock triggers 220 clock console 51 clone see copying fixture parameter values cloning patching 112 113 CMY 32 136 collapse aggregated sections 42 colour modifying values 134 135 colour calibration 34 138 colour coding 37 colour models 32 136 colour picker 34 138 colour scheme 52 colour temperature 33 command keys 311 changing what happens when a command key is pressed 312 copy move delete 311 creating 311 feedback 313 command line 23 syn
331. l close Check the splash screen to ensure the console is indeed running the upgraded software version You may now use the console as normal 30 2 Full Install System Restore You may occasionally need to do a full install of the Hog 40S on your console Performing a full install completely erases and replaces the Hog OS core operating system and clears the console of any saved show files A full install in not typically required to upgrade console software unless specified in the release notes Howeer in some cases a full install may be advised by support staff as a measure to restore console functionality Important Before installing new software ensure that your show data is backed up A Full Install will erase all data on the console s hard drive To do a full install system restore High End Systems 413 Section 30 Updating Console Software 1 Ensure that all show data is backed up onto external media as the full install procedure will clear all show data from the console See Backing Up Your Show p 92 2 Download the latest Hog 4 OS Full Install SO file from the support section of the High End Systems website 3 Use the full install ISO file you downloaded in step 2 to to create a Full Install USB flash drive Refer to sections 24 2 1 and 24 2 2 for instructions on how to properly do this 4 Insert the Full Install USB flash drive you created in step 3 into any one of the console s USB ports 5 Res
332. l editor make changes and update the look if necesary Note Function values cannot be edited directly in the report results sheet You must first click on the location cell to open the data in an editor 370 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder The fixture builder gives users the ability to create their own basic fixture libraries The fixture builder should only be used in extreme cases when a new library is needed and there is no time to contact High End Systems support Generally it is best that you contact hoglibraries barco com to request properly built fixture libraries The fixture builder utility is only recommended for advanced programmers with extensive lighting fixture and Hog 4 Operating Software knowledge Knowledge of the fixture DMX pro tocol is essential prior to creating a custom library This guide roughly explains the use of the fixture builder but in no way is intended to be a complete manual for creating custom libraries Users are urged to contact support to have libraries properly built and installed into the software 27 1 Working With the Fixture Builder The fixture builder utility does not allow full access to all abilities of libraries built by High End Systems and therefore should only be utilized in extreme situations Please note that custom libraries become part of the show file they were created in but individual fixtures can be merged between show files Libraries can be built from a bla
333. l mode for the console front panel that allows it to be used as a keyboard during a full software install Pig Fan Up Cursor Key puts the front panel into HID Mode Pig Fan Down Cursor Key takes the front panel out of HID Mode and puts it back into Hog mode See Also tracking Highest Takes Precedence In this system of operation the highest value assigned for a parameter is the one that applies A fixture can be in cues on two masters and the highest level of the two will be the one seen HTP is only relevant to intensity parameters where the idea of highest has meaning See Also LTP The colour pigment element of colour notation See Also saturation The I Wheel on the right hand side of the console is used to control fixture intensity The time of the fade up of the incoming cue during a crossfade All fix tures that are increasing in intensity will come up over this time See Also split fade path fade time High End Systems Glossary inhibitive submaster IP address K key kinds knockout L LTP maintain state mask master master wing High End Systems A master that sets a maximum level on a group of fixtures If the master is at 80 then the fixtures will never come above 80 in the console s output On an Ethernet network each Hog component has an address called an IP address used to identify it You can usually use the default addresses but if you are connecting to an existing n
334. l then replicate the current show from the consoles Configuring the Network for Console Tracking Console tracking allows two or more consoles to track each other in terms of the chosen page the chosen master and playback state while still maintaining individual desktop programmer experiences between the desks A backup secondary networked show server console set to the same net number as the primary console is recommmended when setting up Hog control systems for live shows This creates system redundancy and protects from total loss of control should the primary console fail High End Systems 75 76 Section 3 Setting Up the System 8 DMX Universes AE HERH AERA roi T o mad let number B E A Hog console Server Net number 1 229999990000000 00 2999909999090990 00 C aa ae SSSSSSSSSSUSSSSS DMX Processor 8000 Net number 2 i ERCEROGHH E iiini jeceesseue a i J Hog console Server Net number 1 To enable Console Tracking 1 Connect two consoles via an Ethernet switch 2 Enable the Run Server option in the Settings window on at least one of the consoles You can choose to enable the Run Server option on both consoles to also engage failover functionality 3 Set both consoles to Net number 1 4 Log the primary console to a show and then connect the secondary console to the same show The two consoles will now mirror each other in terms of chosen master
335. lay and path value in the usual way see Individual Parameter Timings p 212 These timings control how the fixture parameter changes from its starting value to its underlying value in the cue or scene as the cue or scene is played back You can assign separate effects timings fade delay and path to control how the effects movement changes as the cue or scene is played back Figure 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing shows how different timing values control how a parameter with a step effect changes during playback of a cue High End Systems 233 234 Section 14 Effects 100 A Fade time 5 seconds Intensity Underlying value 50 50 No effect Os 5s 10s Time 100 Fade time 5 seconds Intensity Effect fade time 5 seconds 50 Underlying value 50 100 Fade time 0 seconds Effect fade time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Intensity 50 100 Fade time 5 seconds Intensity Effect fade time 5 seconds 50 Effect delay time 5 seconds Underlying value 50 Os 5s 10s Time Figure 14 3 Controlling Effect Transitions with Timing You can assign effect fade times using the command line 1 Fixture 1 select the fixtures you want to assign an effect time to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Effect Time 4 Enter assigns the effect fade time to 4 seconds To assign a effect delay time 1 Fixture 1 select the desired fixture s 2 Effect Time Time 2 Ente
336. le After configuring the network for failover each console connected to the show will monitor the status of the primary console the console that first loaded the show on the network for any failures or forced log offs In the event that the primary console suffers a critical error or is disconnected from the network all other consoles connected to the show will post the message shown below notifying the user that a failover has occurred and indicated which of the other server consoles has taken over as the active show server primary console 72 High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Hog 4PC Le The active show server S 013b6f has failed 1 No backup server has been d For more information please consult the network win OK If you see this message first check to see if the original primary console is still physically con nected to the network then power cycle the original primary console and reconnect it to the show In the event that the console operator intentionally logged off the primary console all other consoles connected to the show will post the failover message shown below to indicate that the primary server console has logged off and another server console has assumed the role as the active show server primary console Hog 4PC Le The active show server Server 1 002 1 The new active show serve For more information please consult the Since this message is the direct result of the
337. le positioning fixtures High End Systems 133 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 3 3 Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam Colour and beam parameters can be either discrete known as slotted or continuous An example of a slotted parameter is the gobo and colour wheels in a moving light which can be assigned to values such as Gobo 1 and Colour 3 Examples of continuous parameters are the colour mixing controls on some moving lights irises and variable speed strobes these can be assigned to a percentage or real world value It is sometimes useful to treat slotted parameters as continuous for example you might want to assign a gobo or colour wheel part way between two positions to achieve a particular effect Hog 40S allows you to treat such parameters as either slotted or continuous when assigning values to them To control continuous colour and beam parameters 1 Press the appropriate parameter type key Colour or Beam or any user kind key that contains colour and beam functions The Wheels Toolbar shows the available parameters and their current value see Figure 6 2 Wheels Toolbar for the Beam Parameters of a Studio Spot 575 2 If the selected fixture has more parameters of the selected type than there are wheels the Wheelsets Toolbar will open see Figure 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Page through the available parameters by pressing the parameter type key again o
338. learing 306 copying 307 copying cuelists to 306 copying inhibitive masters to 306 copying scenes to 306 creating 301 deleting 307 moving 307 moving cuelists to 306 moving inhibitive masters to 306 486 Index moving scenes to 306 removing cuelists from 306 removing inhibitive masters from 306 removing scenes from 306 template 308 which is the current page 22 palette directory 34 palettes 34 155 automatic naming 37 copying 158 creating automatically 117 default names 37 deleting 158 direct 164 editing contents 156 effect 236 global 159 moving 158 naming 155 recording 155 recording with masking 161 recording with timings 163 reference 164 showing references to in editors 45 types of content 159 using in programming 156 pan see position parameter defaults 263 parameter types removing from an editor 149 parameter wheels 133 134 center wheel 96 parameters 30 131 default value 124 default values restoring 144 making non releasable 125 minimum and maximum values 124 modifying values 131 naming slot values 125 offset value 125 removing value from an editor 149 separating 149 timing 212 park editor window 255 parking 255 paste 44 patch proportional 121 patch points multiple 110 patching 106 High End Systems Index adding DPs 110 cloning 112 113 finding unused addresses 109 fixtures to multiple addresses 108 Hog 4PC 430 multiple patch poi
339. leases all virtual scenes scenes not attached to masters Releases all virtual lists lists not attached to masters Opens the playback options for the cuelist on the selected master Toggles playback bars off on Window Control Key Presses Result Open backspace Open Full Open Open thru Open Open Pig Size on the Window Control Toolbar Open Open 1 Open encoder wheel 1 Open encoder wheel 2 Open Fixture Pig Open Colour Pig Open Colour Open Choose Open any command key Closes active window Maximizes active window Moves Active window to next screen Cycle focus between open windows Split and make copy of active window Sizes Active Window in clockwise direction Cycles through the possible window sizes in the reverse order Sizes Active Window in counter clockwise direc tion Opens View 1 also works for views 2 thru 9 Scrolls active window vertically Up Down Scrolls active window horizontally Left Right Opens Fixture Window Opens the Colour Picker rather than the Colour Directory Opens the Colour Picker rather than the Colour Directory Opens the cuelist window for the selected mas ter Opens the object linked to the command key High End Systems Section 28 Key amp Button Combinations Spreedsheets Key Presses Result Pig Copy Pig Record Pig Backspace Pig with the arrow keys Copies
340. lled a wheelset High End Systems Section 15 Kinds and Wheelsets Kind Editor intensity Fusctons mag Y Search Function Wheelset Bana H Beam Shape gt Beam Shape 2 Pan Function Socket Indicates functions can t be deleted from kind Secerste Parameters Figure 15 4 Wheeslets displayed in a kind editor Wheels are holding places for fixture functions and cordinate with the encoders on the front panel You will notice that several wheelsets can exist within a single kind editor To assign a function to a wheelset Click and drag a function from the list of functions on the left hand side of the window to any wheel on one of the wheelsets To delete a function from a wheelset Click on the function It will highlight in blue Press delete The function will be deleted from the wheelset To add a wheelset Click and drag a function from the list of functions on the left hand side of the window to wheel on the greyed out wheelset at the bottom of the right hand side side of window To delete an entire wheelset Click anywhere on the wheelset s frame The wheelset will highlight in blue Press delete The entire wheelset and its contained functions will be deleted To move a function on a wheelset Click and drag the function you wish to move Tip Functions marked with a lock icon and wheelsets containing functions marked with a lock icon cannot be deleted High End Systems 243 Section 16 Advanced Progra
341. lled after the tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1 New Dmx Entry Delete Dmx Entry Build Type 372 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch When you press the Create New button the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 27 1 The Create New Custom Type window Create New Custom Type Create New Custom Type cece EES Notes Figure 27 1 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes You can also choose to create blank or create from existing from within this window In the Channel Count cell enter the total number of DMX channels used by the fixture In the Add Patchpoint Channel cell enter a DMX channel number to define a new patchpoint A patchpoint is used to create fixtures with dual DMX addressing capabilities similar to a scroller dimmer fixture type When the fixture is later patched in the patch window you will be able to patch this fixture at two discrete DMX addresses as you have defined the starting point for each within this window the 1st channel is automatically defined as the first patch point Only 1 additional patch point is currently allowed Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 374 Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library When you press the Copy From butt
342. llowing tables High End Systems Section 17 Playback The Master Go and Master Halt keys Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Assert Asserts the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time for the master overriding the cuelist s assert time Release Releases the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own release time for the master overriding the cuelist s release time Go Go s the master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time for the master overriding the cuelist s time Halt Halts the master stopping any fades that are in progress Select Use Fade Time to use the previous cue s fade time when going backwards instead of the cuelist s Back Time Select Trigger Cuelist Macro to trigger the previous cue s macro when going backwards Back Reverses the currently running crossfade Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time for the master overriding the cuelist s back time Restart Goes to the first cue in the cuelist Goto cmdline Goto Skip forward Skip back Scale Playback Rate Scale Effect Rate Adjusts the effect rate of the master by applying a scaling value to High End Systems Enters the Goto command into the command line so that you can enter a cue number and press Enter to go to that cue Enter a cue number to go to in the Target Cue cell Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your o
343. lows the current master to remain chosen while recording cues onto other masters Programmer contents after Recording a Cue When you record a cue the values remain in the Programmer but the background colour changes from blue to grey This indicates that the parameter values in the Programmer are no longer touched and so are available for recording to another cuelist but not to the same cuelist You can keep the values in the Programmer to act as the basis for the next cue on the same list but because of tracking only the changed parameter values will be recorded For an overview of tracking see Tracking p 31 High End Systems 183 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 1 3 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a cue if the destination location already has a cue recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace Insert creates a new destination cue The new cue will be assigned a free loc ation lower than the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination cue If the same fixtures and parameters are in both cues the new values being merged will take priority e Replace Overwrites the cue information in that destination If you are copying a cue all three options are available If you are moving a cue only the Insert option is available Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a cue
344. ls 2 10 If you hold down the Update key the Update Toolbar will appear This allows you to select which parameter types are recorded whether changes should track forwards and whether refer ences should be allowed when recording palettes See Stopping Values from Tracking Forward p 190 and Reference Palettes p 164 If you close the editor without updating you will be asked whether you want to save or discard the changes or cancel the closing of the editor Tip The name of the current editable editor is shown in the Command Line Toolbar By default it is the Programmer The name of the item being edited appears in the title bar of the editor window Modifier Keys The Hog 4 family of consoles all share a common set of useful multi purpose modifier keys that when held down extend the base functionality of other keys and wheels on the front panel similar way to a Shift or Control key works on personal computers There are several modifier keys but the core modifier keys in the Hog 40S are Pig Open Delete Backspace Set Cue and Move r p s Setup Goto Ks r 7 r Q Fan Open Pig Key Modifier Examples 1 Pig l Wheel Changes wheel to proportional intensity mode 2 Pig Record Pastes information into the selected location Key amp Button Combinations p 397 has a full list of commands that use the Pig key 2 11 Undo and Redo The Undo button found on the Main Toolbar is similar to the undo command
345. lter the at tributes Rate Size Offset and Length of the effect using the parameter wheels for explanations of the different attributes see Table Effect Attributes p 228 The Wheels Toolbar shows the current parameter value being assigned by each wheel whenever the Effect key is selected see Figure 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes For more on the different effect attributes see Table Effect Attributes p 228 Effects Rate Effects Size Effects Offset Effects Length er r dom 100 Figure 14 5 The Wheels Toolbar showing Effect Attributes 14 2 3 Recording an Effect Palette You can record any combination of effect parameter values into a palette 1 Inthe Programmer or editor select the fixtures and assign the required effects You can do this directly in an editor or using the Effects Engine 2 Record Effect the Effect Directory window opens 3 Select a location by pressing a button in the directory window This will only record parameters that have been touched in the Effect window and does not in clude the parameters underlying values To include underlying intensity position colour beam and time information use the mask function 1 Select the fixtures and assign the desired effect table 2 Record Effect 3 Select Mask from the Record Options Toolbar and select the parameter types that you wish to record Use for intensity Use P for position Use C for colour Use B for b
346. ly be defined for intensity this would appear as percentage for position as degrees for strobe as hertz you do not have to enter in the unit type Also if a Real World value is out of the range of the console the minimum or maximum value will automatically be used an entry of 0 gt 200 will become 0 gt 100 Many features also allow negative values to be used When defining the real world values for a rotating gobo for example you could enter 50 gt 50rpm This real world range will be mapped directly to the corresponding DMX value range so if the DMX value range was 0 gt 255 then the real world value of Orpm would be equal to a DMX value of 128 positive rpm values would map to higher DMX values and negative rpm values would map to lower DMX values Decimals may also be used with some Real World values 22 5 gt 99 7rpm In the case of features defined as slots gobos or colours an additional popup box will become available when the Real World cell is selected This dialog box will allow you to select a name for the gobo or colour from a predefined list of names Slot entries will appear on the slot toolbar during programming Additionally you can define an offset for the slot name in the field at the bottom of the dialog This offset defines the range used by the function when dialling values on the encoder wheel Leaving this field blank will result in the default 0 being used Additional function feature selections may result i
347. m that the command is complete and ready to be executed To remove any unwanted keystrokes from the command line press Backspace once To completely clear the command line double press Backspace 2 1 1 Command Line Syntax The basic order and structure of the Hog 4 OS command line syntax is Source Mask Command Options Destination e Source The source is the object within the show that you want to take data from It might be a palette scene cue or the editable editor With most com mands the source object is not modified e Mask The Mask is a filter for when you only want some of the data from that object There are two types of mask a fixture mask specifies only data for certain fixtures for example Cyberlight 1 a kind mask specifies only data for certain kinds for example Colour Beam If no mask is specified then the entire con tents of the current active editor are included in the command e Command The Command is the operation you want to perform Commands include Copy Record Delete Move Merge Knockout Some of these only need a source to be specified others only need a destination but they all have the same syntactical form Options The behaviour of some commands for example Record can be altered with options These usually appear on a popup toolbar once the command key is pressed e Destination The destination is the object that will be affected by the command Again it might be a palette cue scene or
348. maxi mim value of 255 when the cordinating cells are selected in the dmx output window 1 Toggle on the Test button at the top of the dmx output window 2 Select any dmx channel cell or group of dmx channel cells in the DMX output window spreadsheet 366 High End Systems Section 25 Direct Control of DMX Channels Tip The dmx test feature can be used to perform a traditional dimmer check by toggling on the Test button in the dmx output window selecting a dmx channel cell in the spreadsheet and using the cursor left and right keys to go through the dmx channels for that universe High End Systems 367 Section 26 Reporting The reporting tool of the Hog 4 OS enables users to quickly search for specific programming in the current show file by creating custom queries that search for specific show data For example you may want to identify which fixtures in the show are referencing position palette 12 in list 43 This data can quickly be found by running a report that queries for this data The following section will cover how to build a report query run the query and organize and save the results 26 1 Building Saving Deleting and Running Report Queries Reports are generated by running a report query which identifies which data you want the console to search for This section will cover how to build save delete and run report queries Follow these instructions of for building a new query 1 Hold the OPEN key
349. methods High End Systems 195 11 8 3 196 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists A Fade mark uses the fade and delay times assigned in the marked cue to mark fixtures Fade marking occurs on a fixture by fixture basis so several fixtures could be marking at different times and rates depending upon their individual cue data in the marked cue In the fade mark example below when cue 2 completes its 2 second fade to 0 intensity cue 3 will automatically play all of its data except intensity in a 5 second fade Then when cue 3 is played only the intensity will crossfade at 5 seconds The fixtures will have moved from centre to left and changed from red to green automatically while in black Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 1 2s 100 Centre Red Cue 2 2s 0 Centre Red Cue 3 Fade 5s 100 Left Green A Time mark uses the time you enter into the mark column to mark fixtures Time marking occurs at a single uniform rate so all fixture parameters will mark at the same rate regardless of the data in the next cue In the time mark example below when cue 2 completes its 2 second fade to 0 intensity cue 3 will automatically play all of its data except intensity in a Os second fade Then when cue 3 is played only the intensity will crossfade at 5 seconds The fixtures will have moved from centre to left and changed from red to green automatically while in black Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 1 2s 100 Ce
350. mit dem Buchstaben L markierten oder rot gef rbten Anschlussklemme verbunden werden Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse I Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden 4 Diese Ger te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit gesch tzt werden 5 Vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen 6 Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Das Ger t enth lt keine wartungsbed rftigen Teile 35 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad 35 4 1 Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n m xima contra las sobrecargas de 20 A 35 4 2 Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones 1 Si se recibi este equipo sin el enchufe de alimentacion monte usted el enchufe correcto seg n el clave siguente e moreno vivo e azul neutral e verde amarillo tierra 2 Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de prestar servicio de reparaci n 3 Este equipo se adecua a lugares secos solamente no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad High End Systems 455 Section 35 Safety Information 4 Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario 5 Equipo de Clase I Este equipo debe conectarse a la tierra 35 5 Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza 35 5 1 Per Prevenire Incendi e Questa apparecchiatura e
351. mming 16 1 Selecting from What is Onstage You can select fixtures from what is on stage using the Live key Fixtures are considered to be on stage if their intensities are non zero If you wish to select fixtures that are onstage but have intensity values at zero then you can use Pig Live Below are some examples of how live can be used e Live Enter selects all fixtures that are on stage with intensities above 0 e Pig Live Enter selects all fixtures that are on stage regardless of intensity You can apply a mask to the selection This allows you to select all fixtures that are onstage that are assigned to particular values or palettes For example e Live 50 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 e Live 50 Thru 80 selects fixtures that are on stage at 50 to 80 Live 0 selects fixtures that are at 0 Using a palette as a mask Live Blue selects fixtures that are on stage that are at their Blue palette settings You can use the Live and keys together to select fixtures that are both live on stage and in a specified fixture selection e Live 1 Thru 5 selects fixtures that are in the range 1 to 5 that are live on stage e Live Group 1 selects fixtures that are in Group 1 that are live on stage Note that in all the above examples using the Live key only selects fixtures it does not alter values in the Programmer or editor Tip Fixtures that do not have an intensity parameter such as a c
352. mple you might rewind the timecode during rehearsals to repeat a part of the show and the cuelist will automatically go to the correct cue Sometimes you may want to prevent a cuelist going backwards if the timecode goes back wards You can do this using Trigger Forwards Only 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Trigger Forwards Only 350 High End Systems Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC 23 5 Editing Timecode Values for a Cue To change the timecode value used to trigger a cue 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Wait cell for the cue and press Set 3 From the toolbar select Timecode 4 Enter a timecode value in hours minutes seconds and frames in the form hh mm ss ff then press Enter You may need to change the timecode value for one cue and then change the timecode values for subsequent cues by the same amount to keep the same relative timings For example you might have a series of cues where each one is triggered by timecode one second after the previous one If the timecode value triggering the first cue needs to be increased by 12 frames you may want the values for all the subsequent cues to also be increased by 12 frames to maintain the 1 second separation Hog 40S allows you to do this easily 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Click and drag to select the Wait cells for the range of cues you want to edit 3 Press Set 4 Edit the
353. mpleting the patching Patch ES High End Systems 405 29 2 4 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity Using the Visualizer Once the above configuration is complete the connectivity between the Hog system and the visualiser should begin working You can close the Wholehog DP window and the connectivity will continue as long as the Hog logo remains in the task bar wo m 7 11 57 AM 29 3 29 3 1 406 Connecting to WYSIWYG The Hog Connectivity for WYSIWYG supports multiple DP s up to the number of channels supported by your WYSIWYG dongle Contact Cast for WYSIWYG upgrade information Configuring the Network Connection When WYSIWYG is launched the Wholehog DP window will be launched and opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen Stotus Status Locating Wholehog Network Session Info Scanning port 6600 Configuration Port 6600 UserNumber 1 vie A Hog logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running m Io 11 57AM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog DP will continue to run and double clicking on the task bar icon will re open the dialog box When a Hog server is detected on the network the Status field will change to Wholehog Network Found then to Loading Show and finally to Running High End Systems Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity Status Status Status Staus Wholehog Network Found Status Loading Show
354. n 19 Command Keys Command Keys are user created single button executers that trigger existing show objects includ ing palettes groups views lists scenes and keystroke macros Command keys are stored in the commands directory and are also accessable using the 12 function keys on the front panel of the console when the function keys are set to command mode To toggle the function keys between kind mode and command mode hold down Pig and press Enter The mode of the function keys is displayed on the main toolbar KIND CMD To open the command directory hold the open key and press the Commands button on the main toolbar 19 1 Creating Command Keys Command keys are created by using the move syntax of the console to assign existing show objects to empty cells in the commands directory or to blank function keys on the front panel when the console s function keys are set to CMD mode Please note that the original show objects are not actually being moved Here is an example of how to create a command key for cuelist 1 1 List 1 2 Move 3 Press any empty cell in the command directory or press any empty function key on the front panel if the console s function keys are set to command mode Tip When command keys are created they automatically inherit the name and color coding of the show object that they are linked to Changing the name or color coding of a command key will change the name and color coding of the show object
355. n a parameter High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 6 4 2 6 4 3 1 1Thru 5 30 Enter select the fixtures and assign the intensities to 30 Num 4 Intensity Studio Color 575 1 30 3 2 Press and hold the Fan key whilst slowly moving the l Wheel The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range Strobe Position Num amp Intensity Tyoe Pan Tit Studio Color 575 1 4 open open open open E a E ae ESS S35 In the Programmer Window To fan a parameter 1 Select a range of cells for example the intensity cells of Studio Colors 1 to 5 2 Set10Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the intervening range You can also fan backwards continuing the above example e Set 50 Thru 10 Enter Studio Color 1 has an intensity of 50 and Studio Color 5 an intensity of 10 You can also fan several columns at once fanning both Pan and Tilt for example With the Command Line To fan intensities from the command line e 1Thru 5 10 Thru 50 Enter The fixtures at either end of the range take the values 10 and 50 with those in between evenly spread across the in tervening range You can also fan backwards High End Systems 145 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet
356. n also plug in up to eight external USB LTC widgets to the console for addition LTC inputs Setup Network opens the Network window In the network window right click the DP8000 that is associated with console s built in outputs this is typically DP8000 1 unless you have configured the console s internal DP8000 to run on a different net number NOTE You must be running an internal DP8000 on the console to bring LTC input into the desk as LTC input is handled by the DP8000 process Select Settings from the right click menu opens the Settings window In the Timecode Widgets pane use the drop down menu to map the built in LTC widget or any external USB LTC widdgets to an index 347 Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC DMX Processor 8000 Settings Security LTC Widget 371 lt Fr FPP FH Timecode Widgets cmp Catalyst CRR ORC RORO RCE ORR OR ROR ORONS 23 2 LTC Input into a DMX Processor 8000 To bring LTC into the system using a DMX Processor 8000 1 Connect an external USB LTC widget to one of the USB ports on the rear panel of the DMX Processor 8000 up to 8 USB LTC widgets are supported on the DP8000 each LTC input is mapped to an Index 2 Connect the LTC source to the LTC widget using a balanced 3 pin XLR con nector 3 Setup Network opens the Network window 4 In the network window select the DP8000 that you connected the LTC Widget to 5 Settings opens the Sett
357. n board To re assemble follow disasembly steps in reverse order 34 2 2 Replacing faders on RoadHog 4 and NanoHog 4 Remove each of the 10 fader handles from the front panel of the console Loosen the setscrews inside each of the four encoder wheels using a 5 64 allen key and gently remove each of the four encoder wheels Remove the four front panel screws with a 3mm allen key if on a Nano Hog 4 also remove the additional two screws on the back of the front panel and carefully lift off the front panel from the edge closest to you Remove the 16 hex head crosshead screws from the backside of the front panel if on a Nano Hog 4 15 hex head crosshead screws using either a P2 crosshead screwdriver or a 6 5 mm nut driver Remove the 4 small crosshead screws with a P1 crosshead screwdriver Identity which fader you wish to remove and gently unplug it s cable lead from the main board Press the black plastic clips on the fader from the backside of the main board Remove desired fader Replace fader and re assemble the console by following the disassembly steps in reverse order 34 3 Cleaning Faders Faders are often unnecessarily discarded when all they need is a cleaning This section will cover how to clean the faders on all of the consoles in the Hog 4 family 450 High End Systems Section 34 Service 34 3 1 Cleaning faders on Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Playback Wing 4 1 Remove the dirty fader See Replacing Fa
358. n press enter For example to select Studio Color number 1 If more than one fixture in the show file has the same user number then you must first specify the fixture type as demonstrated below e Fixture Studio Color 575 1 when you press the Fixture key types of available fixtures will appear at the bottom of the right hand touch screen where you can select Studio Color 575 Desk Studio Studio Technobeam Channel Color 575 Spot 575 Iris Hog 40S maintains the type of the last fixture selected If for example Studio Colors are selected then all fixture numbers entered into the command line will refer to Studio Colors until a new fixture type is selected Tip Repeated pressing of the Fixture key will cycle through the available fix ture types Note that throughout this manual the examples generally assume that you have assigned user numbers so that they are unique Selecting Multiple Fixtures You can select more than one fixture using the and Thru keys For example 1 5 Enter selects fixtures 1 and 5 1Thru5 Enter selects fixtures 1 to 5 High End Systems 127 6 1 3 6 1 4 128 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers 1Thru5 4 selects fixtures to 5 but not 4 1Thru5 7 selects 1 to 5 and also 7 5ThruEnter selects from fixture 5 of the current type through to the last fixture of the current type ThruEnter selects all fixtures of the current type Note that sel
359. n the Go of a cue but will snap at the very end of that cue being released behaving like an End path 13 2 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window You can edit fade or delay times in the Cuelist window Assigning fade or delay times here will assign the new value to all the parameters of all the fixtures in the cue 1 Open Choose open the cuelist of the desired master 2 Click in the cell for the fade or delay time of the desired cue and press Set 3 Type in a time value and press Enter When entering a time value it should be in the form hours h minutes m seconds s hours h minutes m seconds s 210 High End Systems Section 13 Timing Path Description Default Linear Start End Over Under Damped Brake Speed Up Shake at Sh Ese tla IS Uses the default path from the fixture s library definition This is generally Linear for continuous parameters and Start for slotted parameters Fades at a steady rate for the duration of the cue Snap change at the beginning of the cue Snap change at the end of the cue The parameters overshoot their destination and then return to it The parameters move first in the opposite direction before going to their destination The parameters change more slowly at the start and end of the cue than in the middle The parameters change more slowly at the end of the cue The parameters change more slowly at the sta
360. n the Keystroke Macro begins recording the Macro key LED will flash red and M will display in the far right of the command line to signify that recording has commenced All subsequent button presses screen events and encoder movements will be recorded into the specified Keystroke Macro The time interval between the previous and current button press will also be recorded Only one macro can be recorded at a time the console will not allow you to record another macro while one is being recorded To stop the recording of a Keystroke Macro e Pig Macro key The Macro key LED will stop flashing and the M will disappear from the command line to signify that the macro has stopped recording To stop the recording of a Keystroke Macro e Pig Macro key The Macro key LED will stop flashing and the M will disappear from the command line to signify that the macro has stopped recording High End Systems 357 24 3 2 24 3 3 358 Section 24 Macros Naming Keystroke Macros You can give a Macro a name that will be displayed in the Macro Directory window 1 Open Macro open the Macro Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally active a Macro when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the Macro 4 Set Name Enter type in the name Tip To name a Macro immediately after recording it press the Set key to open a Quickname window Enter the Macro name and press OK to sele
361. n the correct order for your show You can then go through the performance using Next Page rather than select ing from the directory 18 6 Deleting Pages To delete a page 1 Page 1 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete You can delete a range of pages 1 Page 1 Thru 4 Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the delete High End Systems 307 18 7 308 Section 18 Pages Note that you cannot delete the current page Deleting a page does not delete cuelists or scenes from the show Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items The Template Page The template page specifies which cuelists will appear on specific masters for every page without physically having to load them onto the same masters on all pages For example you could have a primary cuelist containing the commonly used cues of the show which you want available on the same master regardless of which page you are on When you move this cuelist to a master on the Template page it will then appear on the same master of all pages If a normal page and a template page have a cuelist on the same master the normal page s cuelist will override the template page s cuelist To make a page into the template page 1 Open Page opens the Page Directory
362. n those receivers that support per slot priority the per universe priority will be ignored when per slot priority is enabled e Priority click to the per universe priority for the E1 31 data being sent for that universe of data Valid settings range from 0 to 200 with higher numbers representing higher priority e Per Slot Priority click on the Enable button to enable per slot priorities for the universe Click on the Configure button to set the per slot priority values for individual slots within that universe Valid settings range from 0 to 200 Higher numbers represent higher priority A slot priority of 0 indicates that the slot should be ignored e click these keys to expand or reduce the number of E1 31 configurations for a specific DMX universe When E1 31 is configured and fixtures are patched the Net Data LED on the DMX Processor 8000 will illuminate to indicate E1 31 Output 3 5 Adding Playback Wings You can increase the number of physical masters on your console as well as add an additional touchscreen monitor by attaching a Hog 4 Playback Wing High End Systems 83 Section 3 Setting Up the System Playback bar 1 for Console playback Masters 11 20 bar for Masters 1 10 ee es 6 Besseeee68o Playback Wing Hog console Masters 11 20 Masters 1 10 Figure 3 13 Docking Playback Bars with wings and external displays To attach a Playback Wing 1 Ap
363. n various Real World value selections via a dialog box For instance a strobe function and shutter feature will allow a Real World value entry of either open or closed 27 1 3 Adding User Created Libraries to a Show Once libraries have been built within the fixture builder they are stored within the show file You can then add these fixtures to your show in the same method as existing fixtures within the selected library 1 In the Fixture window open the Fixture Schedule 2 Scroll down to the User Created manufacturer and expand to view all custom made libraries High End Systems 377 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Schedule N many fextures of each type you wish to use Select a type and press Set h facture Terbly Theatre Projects Thomas Toshiba Twinkle Works Ushio Lighting V Light VFX Lighting Select Library 3 Add patch and program custom libraries in the same manner as existing lib raries Once a fixture is created it behaves the same as built in fixture libraries e You can merge custom libraries from one show to another using the Merge Show function e You can use the Edit Fixtures window to adjust default values and further cus tomize user created libraries e You can replicate and replace to and from user created fixtures e You should send a show containing your custom made fixtures to support fly ingpig com so they may be added to future built in libraries
364. nager Window On the left is a list of the main console folders and the console s drives Clicking on one of these will display its contents in the right hand list The browser shows the name description and creation date and time of the file as well as the version number of the library used to create the show in parentheses If the show is marked as modified then the library has been altered through a library merge Moving Copying Deleting and Renaming Files To move a file e Drag and drop files to destinations in the left hand folder list Generally you will find dragging with the mouse or Trackball much easier than using the touchscreen To copy a file e Drag and drop files while holding down the Pig key or the Control key on an external keyboard To delete a file e Right click on the file and select Delete from the contextual menu You will be asked to confirm the action To rename a file High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 12 2 2 12 3 2 12 4 e Right click on the file and select Rename from the contextual menu Type in the new name and press Enter Tip You can also copy and paste files by right clicking on them and selecting Copy or Paste from the contextual menu Creating New Folders You can create sub folders in the Shows and Libraries folders to help organise your work 1 Click on the folder you want to make a new folder in oe Click on the A button 3 En
365. nantly using arc sources it will be more convenient to use arc white Important Before assigning the colour of fixtures using Hue and Saturation make sure that you have selected your preferred white point Changing it after you have started programming will change the appearance of previously programmed colours The Colour Picker 138 You can use the Colour Picker to graphically select Hue and Saturation values To open the Colour Picker e Hold down the Open key and select HS Picker Pig Open Colour There is also a button to open the Colour Picker in the Colour Directory window The Colour Picker will change its display according to the fixture selection High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Colour Picker Figure 6 8 The Colour Picker e With no fixtures selected you just see the colour wheel with saturated colours around the outside and paler colours towards the centre e When a calibrated fixture is selected a dashed line will be superimposed on the colour wheel This line represents the fixture s gamut or range of colours that it can achieve To select any colour within this range simply click on it The new selection will be marked by a superimposed cross and circle If you select a colour outside the fixture s gamut one marker X indicates the colour that was chosen while a second O indicates the closest colour that the fixture can produce T
366. nched Run the installer again 4 The Wholehog DP window always says Locating Wholehog Network Check the port matches on the settings on the console Check Ethernet connections Check that there is only one DHCP server in your network Reboot the visualiser computer 5 The Wholehog DP window displays Connection Error while trying to connect Check the network settings on both the visualiser computer and the Hog console Reboot the visualiser computer 6 The Wholehog DP window displays Couldn t get file handle while trying to connect Check that another visualiser is not running on the same computer Reboot the visualiser computer 7 The Wholehog DP window displays Loader version is old need x y z while trying to connect High End Systems Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity 10 You need to update the Connectivity Application Check www flyingpig com for the latest version No visible fixture output in the visualiser Check that the console Grand Master is up Cycle the Blind key to assert the contents of the Programmer WYSIWYG displays Could not connect the following consoles Wholehog DP Check that the Wholehog DP window indicates it is connected to the console and is running Check that the address in the Properties window on WYSIWYG matches the DMX Pro cessor in your Hog show and that another device is not already connected to that number WYSIWYG Autofocus does not appear to function Check that the
367. nd the new patch in formation to the DP8000s In the Fixture window these types of fixture will span more than one row one for each Patch point see Figure 5 5 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points High End Systems 111 5 2 6 112 Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 1 DP 8000 2 23 Intensity 1 DP 8000 4 420 Fixture Figure 5 5 A Fixture with Multiple Patch Points Cloning Universes Cloning patching copies fixture and associated patch information from one DMX universe to another A selected fixture will therefore control recurring patch locations across several universes To clone the patching of one universe to another 1 Setup gt Patch gt View by DP open the Fixture window in View by DP view 2 Select the universe to clone by clicking on the column in the spreadsheet The selected universe is highlighted in blue 3 Press Clone Universe The Clone Universe window will open see Figure 5 6 The Clone Universe window 4 Select a destination DP8000 and universe You can create a new DP8000 if you want to clone to a universe on a DP8000 not currently connected to the console and you can specify an offset for the patch addresses to position them differently in the universe Click on OK when you have finished 5 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Clone Universe Clone the patch from universe 1 on DP
368. nded 199 11 12 Copying and Moving Cuelists esenee 200 11 12 1 Copying Cuelists 2 0 0 0 aaa ae E aE A 200 11 12 2 Moving Cuelists ssssesssssessrssrssrsrerererrsresrrsrrerererere 200 11 12 3 Insert Merge and Replace cscccccererenerenee 200 SCONES woe eccceecccee cece eeeeeeeceeeeceeeaeeuseneeeseeueueeeeugeusugausugaeeagenss 203 12 1 Recording SENES sesira ea cain Gans ate eee eee 203 12 1 1 Recording to the Scene Directory ceeeeeeeee eee eee 203 12 1 2 Recording to a Physical Master ccceeeeeeeee eters 203 High End Systems vii viii 13 14 15 16 Lighting Control System 12 1 3 Naming a Scene sssssssssssrsrerersrrsrnsrrsrrerererererrereerne 203 12 2 Deleting SCENES prioste ti ikp en inaina eena een eeaeeeaeeaae 204 12 3 Copying and Moving SCENES ssssrssrsrrerrerrerrerrsrnererrrrren 204 12 4 Editing Scene Contents ssessssssssrssrsrirrrerreresrrsrnnrnsrrererere 205 12 5 Scene TIMING drier aiani ede andei Pie aaa r ETRE p PET ne ade 205 12 6 Insert Merge and Replace ssssssssssrssrsrierrerrerierrereerrrrerren 205 Si E a A T 207 13 1 Timing BASICS erae ea aa E ica seated ET EA hS 207 13 2 Fade Delay and Path ssessssssssssssserssrrersrrrrrerrerrerrernerserrnrs 208 T3 2 1 Fade TIME s sewedecseeteses e aeaa EEL EE a EEEa A 208 13 2 2 Delay TIME iissa ur iuni a e ei aia 209 aE A A PACS E T T 210 13 2 4 Assigning Cue Timings in the Cuelist Window 210 13 3 Individual
369. ndefinitely until paused or released e Stop On Last the chase stops at the last cue in the cuelist until released or triggered again with a Go e Release On Last the cuelist chase is released when it reaches the final step e Stop On First the chase completes one cycle and stops on the first cue until triggered again If any loop type other than continuous is chosen then you can assign the number of cycles the chase completes before the loop behaviour is actioned Selecting Release on Stop releases the chase cuelist either when it stops because of an actioned loop behaviour or because of a manual stop using the Halt key Tip gZ The Playback Options of a master can be quickly accessed by holding Pig and pressing the master s Choose key Adjusting Chase Rate with Tap Sync 290 A cuelist chase can be manually sync ed to a beat such as a piece of music using Tap Sync Once sync ed Hog 40S maintains the chase rate until a new one is assigned To adjust the rate of a chase using Tap Sync hold down the Choose key of the master the chase is attached to while pressing the master s Go key repeatedly to the required beat Hog 40S will learn the speed of the chase from you in a minimum of two beats after this you can release the Choose key High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 5 6 17 5 7 17 5 8 Note that you can only use Tap Sync with chases loaded onto physical masters not virtual ones Cuelists and Tracking Yo
370. ndow will open 2 Enter a name and click on OK To name a desktop view using the Views Directory 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the button for the view you want to name Make sure that the Guard button is depressed otherwise you will activate the view instead of just select ing it 3 Press the Set key The Quickname window will open 4 Enter a name and click on OK Tip You can also assign view names and add comments to them in the spreadsheet view of the Views Directory See Desktop View Options p 28 Recalling a Desktop View You can recall desktop views in two ways With the View Toolbar located at the top of the left hand screen The views each have their own button and are loaded in pages of ten onto the toolbar You can load the next page by pressing the Next button at the right hand end of the toolbar while Pig Next loads the previous page e With the Views Directory window press the view s button in the Views Directory window Make sure that the Guard button is not depressed otherwise you will only select the view rather than activating it Desktop View Options By default when you recall one desktop view it replaces the previous one so that all windows not part of the new view are closed However you can set views so that they are additive instead 1 Open View opens the Views Directory 2 Select the directory s spreadsheet view 3 Select the view s cell in the Ad
371. nel opens a screen where you can assign the delay time before the backlight goes off The Permanent setting keeps the light on continually Watchdog The Watchdog feature automatically restarts the DMX Processor if its software stops running for some reason Watchdog is on by default and generally it is best to leave it switched on However if you suspect that an DMX Processor is not working correctly you may want to turn Watchdog off so that you can see any error messages before restarting it 1 Inthe Control Panel select Watchdog 2 Deselect the Watchdog checkbox and select OK Resetting the DMX Processor There are two types of reset soft and hard Soft Reset resets the DMX Processor so that it re initialises communication with the network Hard Reset is equivalent to turning off and on the DMX Processor s mains power You can do both types of reset from the Control Panel In addi tion you can reset a DMX Processor by right clicking on its entry in the Network window of the console Setup Network and selecting Reset Node Checking a DMX Processor s Status The indicator lights on the front of a DMX Processor 8000 display its status on the network High End Systems 61 Section 3 Setting Up the System Light On Blinking Off Status Connected to ashow Connecting Not Connected to a show DMX Data DMX Data output 2Hz Keep Alive No DMX sending Net Data Art Net output Art Net configured but Art Net not configured not
372. nformation associated with the fixture s parameters see Fade Delay and Path p 208 The Editor Toolbar The Editor Toolbar has the following buttons High End Systems 45 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Button Purpose Press this to make the contents of the editor editable rather than just Edit to view it Instructions given to the command line or using the para meter wheels and l Wheel are directed to the editable editor Snow In cue editors press this to see all the parameters that will appear on State stage including those that have tracked through from earlier cues in the cuelist With Show State deselected only the hard values actually recorded in the cue are displayed Show Press Show Palettes to see the palette name rather than the parameter Palettes value see Palettes p 155 Fade Press this to have parameter values changed in this editor fade rather Changes than snap onto stage see Fade Changes p 254 Press this to toggle compact mode on and off Compact mode fits more Compact information into the editor without having to scroll However the column for a particular parameter won t necessarily be aligned across different fixture types so sorting is not possible Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window ce BEG p Configure This allows you to control various aspects of how the editor window displays information The Jump Toolbar 2 9 2 46 The Jump Toolb
373. ng seeeeeeeeees 448 33 8 5 About Beta Software 0 cece eect eee sees tesa eeae ees 448 34 Service wie cccceeeeee eee eee eee e eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeuaneeaeeeaeeaseeaeeanes 449 34 1 Replacing the SCreens oo ccecccseseeteseeesereeeseeseeteneseseeseneerens 449 34 2 Replacing Faders cccecceeee cece eee ences teste ae een ee aeeeaeeea teenies 449 34 2 1 Replacing faders on Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Playback WING A m uiuat chee ie cn oe a eee 450 34 2 2 Replacing faders on RoadHog 4 and NanoHog 4 450 34 3 Cleaning Faders eraci ie araia eeen tesa esse esse radia i ians aae 450 34 3 1 Cleaning faders on Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Playback Aae E E EE A A AT 451 34 3 2 Cleaning faders on RoadHog 4 and NanoHog 4 451 34 3 3 Cleaning faders on HedgeHog 4 ssesesssreresre 451 34 4 Replacing the Trackball cceeeeece eee eee eee ea eeeaeeeaeeea eae eed 452 35 Safety Information cccsceseeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 453 35 1 Safety WanningS erite aa eis a a an 453 35 1 1 For Continued Protection Against Fire lesser 453 35 1 2 For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 453 35 2 Informations Importantes Sur La S curit eee 454 35 2 1 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Incen NE Sie fected ath wehe fated ash stents E A tan eeden T 454 35 2 2 Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs BIS CEIQUES nin aoi Gor unrated eaves ieee CaM ee A EN 454 35 3 Wich
374. ng Multiple Consoles Multiple Hog consoles can be connected together in various configurations when running on the same port number Client Server configuration allows multiple users to program on the same show file Console Failover provides network backup of two or more consoles running the same show Console Tracking creates redundancy of all console functions across multiple consoles You should link all consoles and network devices to an Ethernet switch using certified Category 5 non crossover cables High End Systems 69 Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 3 5 Configuring the Network for Client Server E o SERBARBOg 8 g i j O22 e i x BOO g mna HEH pa p5 g o PT ted Hog console Server Net number 1 Ethernet swatch 8 ORRRRBRBR E 99 F TE QI Hog console Client Net number 2 coooo00c ae Get Running the Console as a Show Server 8 DMX Universes I1 eeoocece DMX Processor 8000 Net number 1 8 DMX Universes 00000000 DMX Processor 8000 Net number 2 When the Run Server option in the Settings window of the start screen is checked the console is enabled as a show server A show server console is able to do three main things that it would not otherwise be able to do as a client 1 Start New Shows 2 Launch existing shows from disk 3 Connect to and sync a local copy of show data from other show server consoles on the network Since consoles that are enable
375. ng to the front 25 closing 25 cuelist 197 directory 34 edit fixtures 122 editor 45 fixture patch 106 fixture schedule 105 fixture window 119 launched processes 444 levels view 284 moving 25 on Hog 4PC 432 433 opening 24 output 281 park editor 255 High End Systems Index pinning 25 resizing 25 scrolling contents 27 show manager 91 spreadsheets 39 view by DP view 109 window control toolbar 25 wings adding master wings 85 adding playback wing 83 installation with Hog 4PC 431 playback 280 High End Systems 491
376. nk canvass or can be copied from existing fixtures within the library when using V4 libraries When an existing library is copied many of the unique elements of the factory created library are removed for compatibility with the fixture builder utility The new fixture library may not behave exactly like the library it is a copy of 27 1 1 Creating Editing and Deleting Fixture Libraries You can create edit and delete fixture libraries in the Fixture Builder window e Setup gt Patch gt Fixture Builder open the Fixture Builder window Select an option from the buttons at the top of the window High End Systems 371 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder oe ee Create New Copy From Type Information Model Name Date Modified Notes Dmx Footprint 0 Patchpoints Channel a Function Feature Dmx Value Real World The options are e Create New creates a new fixture from scratch See Creating a New Fixture Library From Scratch p 373 Copy From creates a new fixture based on an existing fixture within a fixture library See Creating a New Fixture Library Using an Existing Library p 373 Delete Current deletes the user created library selected in the drop down list To edit any existing User Created libraries select it from the drop down list Fixture Builder Tutorial Ba E e ET aac E E TE Super Cyber MOE Author Michael Date Modified 04 04 2012 15 32 25 Notes This fixture is mode
377. nk status of Disconnected indicates the adapter is running but is unable to communicate to other nodes because the network cable is not connected to a network e A link status of Down indicates the adapter is either disabled or in an unstable state and is not usable for show operation Important Only network adapters with a link state of UP will be able to communicate with other nodes on the network If none of the listed adapters are in the UP state then the Hog 40S will not operate on a network and will instead operate as a standalone console using a loopback address Configuring an IP Address for the HogNet Network Adapter In order for a network adapter to properly communicate on a network it must be configured with an IP address setting that is compatible with other devices on the network There are three main options when configuring an IP address for a HogNet adapter Default IP address select this option to use an IP address of 172 31 0 1 Obtain an IP address using DHCP select this option when running the console on a network that contains a DHCP server such as a DHCP router or a Hog console running a DHCP server High End Systems 65 Section 3 Setting Up the System Important If you choose to obtain an IP address using DHCP on the console and no DHCP server is present on the network then the console will revert to a loopback address of 127 0 0 1 which is not a usable network address for network show operation In this ca
378. nnounced on the main toolbar The chosen master can be controlled using the play halt back and pause keys in the main playback section of the console The chosen master also directly receives commands from the command line such as record goto and delete when a destination is not otherwise specified There can only be one chosen master at a time To choose a master simply press the choose button associated with that master Masters can also be selected Selected masters only respond to rate wheel changes Selected masters do not respond to the main playback controls and do not directly receive commands from the command line To select a master hold down the choose key of one master while pressing the choose keys of other masters When selecting multiple masters the last choose key to be released will become the choosen master When a master is selected it s choose LED will flash and the title of the master will be shown on the playback bar with a striped blue background 1 List 1 2 List 2 3 List3 4 List 4 5 List 5 Grand Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 2s Cue 1 Master Figure 17 3 Example Master 1 is chosen Masters 2 thru 4 are selected 17 1 5 Cuelist and Scene Options You can configure various options that determine the cuelist s priority timing and other properties that affect how it is played back in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 266 High End Systems Section 17 Playback 1 Open Choose open the
379. ns Output 1 None Output 2 None Output 3 None Output None Output 5 None Output 6 None Most Nane i 4 Inthe Address field enter the DP number used when patching on the Hog console Click OK to close this window 5 Bind the ports to the universes in your WYSIWYG show consult the WYSI WYG documentation for detailed instructions 408 High End Systems Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity Patch Universe Select C a ID Name Console Port EOMx EDMx patch Not bound Automated PORT B Not bound 6 Once the universes are bound you can connect to the Wholehog DP Repeat the above steps for each DMX Processor used in your Hog show file 29 3 3 Additional Steps for WYSIWYG Console Edition When using some versions of Console Edition CE WYSIWYG to connect directly to a Hog system only one universe of visualization is possible at a time If your version of CE is limited to one universe you will need to specify which universe is active within the WYSIWYG file 1 With the WYSIWYG file open go to the Live Module and select Edit gt Universes 2 The Visualisation Universe Selection window will open This window will display all the currently configured universes within your drawing Use this window to select the universe you wish to visualize from the console Visualisation UiMyverse Selection 2 x Current Universe name Set Current EDMX 29 3 4 Using the Connectivity with WYSIWYG
380. ns into independent parameters so that you do not need to remember the detailed workings of a particular fixture in the example given above the intensity strobe and reset functions all appear as separate parameters so there is no possibility of going from strobe into reset With parameters that share a DMX address changing the value of one will override the value of all the others since there can only be one DMX value In the case of our example assigning a strobe speed will override any intensity value the console will show a in place of the intensity value to indicate that this has happened Interchangeable Fixtures Any fixture already programmed into a show can be replaced by a fixture of a different type at any time and Hog 4OS will as far as possible convert the programmed data to apply to the new fixture type If the new fixture has more limited capabilities than the old one this is handled as gracefully as possible For more on replacing fixtures see Changing the Fixture Type p 116 High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 4 Tracking All Hog 4 family consoles are tracking by default which means the Hog 40S records only changed cue data into cues and scenes allowing unchanged data that was recorded in previous cues and scenes to track through until a change is recorded for that particular fixture parameter Below is an example of how a series of cues might be seen by a viewing audience Fixture A B
381. nstallation is complete press Finish to exit the installer High End Systems 403 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity i Hog Connectivity 10 0 2668 Setup E E m Completed the Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Cikk the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard 29 2 29 2 1 29 2 2 404 Connecting the Console to the Visualizer The Hog 4 visualiser connectivity supports multiple DMX Processors dependent upon the number of universes supported by your visualiser and or license Contact the visualiser manufacturer for upgrade information Configuring Visualisers Refer to your visualiser documentation for information regarding configuration of DMX input via the Hog visualiser connectivity application Most visualisers require selecting the input source and it must be mapped to the Hog connectivity Configuring the Network Connection As the visualiser application opens the Wholehog DP window will be opened on the bottom right of your visualiser computer screen T wholehog DP Status Status Locating Wholehog Network Session Gose hio Scanning port 6600 Patch eae Cortiguration Reconnect Por 6600 User Number f1 x v3 10 High End Systems Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity 29 2 3 A Hog logo will also be placed in the Windows task bar when this application is running wo ff 11 57AM If you close the dialog box the Wholehog DP will continue
382. nta and finally returning to red As the range wraps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours positioned around the edge with red at the top green at High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 degrees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees see Figure 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel Saturation This is how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low saturations while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Intensity This is simply a measure of how much light is being emitted from 0 black to 100 the brightest possible This is identical to the dimmer control on most fixtures Red Magenta Yellow hue Blue Green Cyan Figure 2 6 The HSI Colour Wheel With these three pieces of information hue saturation and intensity every possible colour can be represented As most fixtures already feature a dimmer to control the intensity it is only ne cessary to specify the Hue and Saturation to uniquely represent any colour The Hue and Saturation of White Light White is defined as the colour with 0 saturation the hue doesn t matter However while tungsten and arc lamps bot
383. ntre Red Cue 2 2s 0 Centre Red Cue 3 Os 5s 100 Left Green Tip Marking occurs with the intensity parameter for standard fixtures as well as Red Green and Blue parameters for RGB fixtures such as LEDs Marking the First Cue in a Cue List If the first cue in a list is assigned to mark it will only mark after the last cue in the list is played By recording a blank cue prior to the first cue in the list you can create a mark cue for the first look of a show For example Mark Fade Intensity Position Colour Cue 0 5 Cue 1 Fade 0 2s 100 Right Blue Cue 2 2s 50 Left When cue 0 5 plays it will mark cue 1 so that cue 1 will fade up intensities on stage after the fixtures are already in position and color Furthermore since the intensity time of cue 1 is assigned to 2 seconds and the other parameters are assigned to zero the mark cue will occur as quickly as possible High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 8 4 Cuelist Feedback for Mark Cues The following figures show the different states of a marking cue Chosen Master List 1 Lear View Enable Enable Folow Folow insert Timing Cue co Clock Cue Chosen Link Comment Figure 11 2 Cue 3 with a Fade Mark Chosen Master List 1 Learn View Enable Enable Follow Folow insert Timing Cue Clock Cue Chosen Unk Name Figure 11 3 Cue 3 Actively Fading into its Mark Chosen Master List 1 Enable Enable Follow Folo
384. ntrols p 261 17 2 3 Running Virtual Masters from the Command Line To run a cuelist on a virtual master from the command line List 1 Enter sends a Go command to cuelist 1 17 3 Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes Because Hog consoles can simultaneously run ten cuelists on masters and more if virtual masters and playback wings are used the question arises as to which master actually has control over a particular fixture parameter To decide which master takes precedence Hog 40S applies the following rules e For intensity parameters by default intensity parameters are controlled on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis therefore the value of an intensity parameter that appears in several cuelists will be output from the cuelist with the highest playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s Priority p 276 In addi tion you can assign cuelist options so that a master works on a Highest Takes Precedence HTP basis this means that if several masters have programming for the same intensity parameter the highest programmed level will be output to stage For a full discussion of HTP and LTP see HTP and LTP p 31 High End Systems 273 17 3 1 274 Section 17 Playback For position colour and beam parameters Hog 40S deals with position colour and beam parameters on a Latest Takes Precedence LTP basis If sev eral masters have programming for the same parameter then the value from the most recently activate
385. nts 110 removing DPs 110 several fixtures at once 108 unpatching 114 path button 45 paths 207 210 per fixture button when recording palettes 159 per fixture type button when recording palettes 159 persist on override 277 pig key 47 141 for copy and paste 44 for fine control of parameter values 140 to unpark parameters 255 when using desktop views 28 when using directories 34 with the i Wheel 132 Pig key list of commands 397 pile add effects 277 pinning windows 25 pixelmapping 322 adding removing editing pixelmaps 318 choosing and optimizing content 325 importing custom content 324 managing content 324 PixelMaps layers 322 programming PixelMap layers 323 supported file types 325 using PixelMaps in programming 323 playback see masking configuring controls 294 cuelists 259 priority 273 using pages 301 playback bar 279 304 displaying 83 Playback Mask 291 playback priority 276 playback wing 280 adding 83 playback wing 4 technical specification 465 plots 315 High End Systems adding removing editing fixtures 316 adding removing editing pixelmaps 318 creating new 315 editing 316 editing multiple objects 319 feedback 321 removing editing gangs 317 selecting fixtures 320 using 320 window navigation 321 point cues 184 pointer mode see trackball port number 68 77 89 dmx processor 59 position flip 133 modifying values 133 position mode see trackball
386. ny rate thruster modifications that are not stored are be lost when the master is released Assigning the fader of the master to Scale Playback Rate or Scale Effect Rate in the cuelist scene options window Assigning the physical fader control of a master to Scale Playback Rate or Scale Effect Rate allows users to utilize the physical fader of the master to scale multiply amp divide the base playback rate or base effect rate of the master The middle of the fader travel always equals 1x scaling no scaling applied while moving the fader up or down adjusts the associated rate by multiplying dividing against the base play back effect rate The upper and lower boundary options of the scale options determine how much scaling is applied as the fader is moved 285 Section 17 Playback Assigning the button controls of the master to Scale Playback Rate or Scale Effect Rate in the cuelist scene options window Assigning any of the physical button conrols of the master to Scale Playback Rate or Scale Effect Rate allows users to scale multiply amp divide the base playback rate or base effect rate of the master with a single button press 17 5 2 Adjusting the Effect Size of a Master 17 5 3 286 The effect size of a master cuelist scene chase can be adjusted several different ways Z Changing the effect size field in the cuelist scene options window The simplest way to adjust the effect size for a master cuel
387. o continue or Cancel to exit the Setup Ward 3 The wizard displays an End User License Agreement High End Systems 401 402 5 Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity VE accept te terms in the Ucerse Agreertert rm Geert pone After you select J accept the terms in the License Agreement press Next to continue The installer now shows you which features of the Hog Connect application are going to be installed and into which location Do not make any changes to the install location as most 3rd party visualizer applications are hard coded to point to the default installation directory and changing this option could lead to failure of the connectivity driver to start properly Press Next to con tinue Select the way you want features to be inetsed Cik the icons in the tree below to change the way features wil be irstabed C1 Program Fies x86 Flying Pig Systems Hog a Conectati mn ee ee eae This prompts a Ready to Install screen with instructions on beginning or can celing the installation Press Install to begin installing High End Systems Section 29 Visualiser Connectivity Cik retal to begin the installation Click Back to review or change any of your instalation settings Cick Cancel to exit he wirard 6 Please wait while the Setup Wizard installs Hog Connectivity 1 0 0 256 State Va daing istal e 7 Completing the installation when the i
388. oder Wheel Options preference see See Encoder Wheel Button Options p 98 The inner part of the center wheel acts exactly like the main encoder wheels on the desk The outer spring loaded ring of the center wheel acts more like a shuttle whereby a move in either direction will initialize a value change at a fixed rate The more you turn the ring the high the rate of change Shuttle Control A Direct Control Encoder Wheel Button Change Function High End Systems 97 4 11 5 4 11 6 4 11 7 98 Section 4 Shows Encoder Wheel Button Options You can adjust the action that occurs when pressing the grey encoder wheel button located to bottom left of each encoder wheel in the Programming pane of the User Preferences window Setting Function Fine Mode de makes encoder wheel adjustments more refined same as holding fault pig key when encoder wheel button is held down Cycle Feature changes the feature mode of the function assigned to the encoder Mode wheel when the encoder wheel button is pressed Set opens a direct entry dialogue box for the encoder wheel when button is pressed similar to holding set and turning encoder wheel Max Min sets wheel to max value when button is pressed first time sets wheel to minimum value when pressed second time Neg Pos sets wheel to negative value when button is pressed first time sets wheel back to positive value when pressed second time Adjust by One increments wheel by one r
389. oftware developed by the Botan Project and its contributors Copyright 1999 2005 The Botan Project All rights reserved Libtar This product includes software developed by the University of Illinois Board of Trustees and Mark D Roth Copyright 1998 2003 University of Illinois Board of Trustees Copyright 1998 2003 Mark D Roth All rights reserved QT The Qt GUI Toolkit is Copyright C 2011 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Contact Nokia Corporation qt info nokia com Qt is available under the LGPL version 2 1 GNU Lesser General Public License version 2 1 X11 TM and X Window System TM is a trademark of The XFree86 Project Inc XFree86 is a trademark of The XFree86 Project Inc Xorg Xorg is copyright software provided under licenses that permit modification and redistribution in source and binary form without fee Xorg is copyright by numerous authors and contributors from around the world Licensing information can be found at http www x org Refer to the source code for specific copyright notices 4 High End Systems Declaration of Conformity According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name High End Systems Distributor s name High End Systems Distributor s address 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA Declares that the product Product Name Hog 4 Product Number All Product Options All Conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 33
390. ol The fixed kinds are represented by dedicated front panel buttons and onscreen menus See Also kinds A data file that contains details of a fixture s parameters required so that Hog 40S understands how the fixture works and what it can do The fixture libraries are an important part of making the console s abstraction layer work See Also abstraction layer See parameter 469 470 gamut gobo graphical user inter face group GUI hard value HID Mode HTP hue I Wheel in time Glossary The range of colours that a fixture is capable of producing Each fixture type has its own gamut Image placed within the optical system of the fixture projected onto lit object Also known as a pattern A way of displaying information and allowing the user to work with it in a visual form Most personal computers use a GUI with windows buttons and a pointer See Also command keys pre recorded fixture selections complete with selection order information stored in the group directory Groups allow the quick selection of multiple fixtures and like ordinary fixture selections can be combined and ma nipulated in a variety of ways See graphical user interface The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and soft paramet er values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while soft values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking A specia
391. olaspot fixture 1 and then use the fixture window to assigned Solaspot fixtures 2 lt 10 to the same preview package enabling those fixtures to display the same custom previews Likewise you can utlitize a single CITP cached preview package by assigning it to multiple fixtures your show High End Systems 181 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 Recording a Cue To record a look created in the Programmer or editor as a cue within a cuelist you need to specify a cuelist and cue number to record to If the cuelist does not yet exist Hog 40S will create it automatically For example to record Cue 4 into Cuelist 2 Record List 2 Cue 4 Enter Recording to a Cuelist on a Master You can choose a master rather than a cuelist when recording a cue This will record the cue to the cuelist currently attached to the chosen master or create a cuelist if it doesn t exist For ex ample 1 Press the Choose key above Master number 10 The Choose key will light up to show that Master 10 is the chosen master 2 Record 1 Enter records Cue 1 in the cuelist attached to Master 10 creating it if necessary To record more cues e Record 1 5 Enter inserts a new cue numbered 1 5 into the cuelist on the currently chosen master e Record Enter appends the cue to the end of the cuelist attached to the currently chosen master e Record Choose appends the cue to the end of the cuelist of the selected master This al
392. ole enable the Use custom address range button and specify the start and end addresses in the fields below the button Firewalls and Hog 4PC Firewalls help to provide increased network security by controlling access to private networks and computers based on the public IP address of the client Since the Hog 40S depends on multi cast network traffic for communication to other system devices it is encouraged that users con figure their network and computer firewalls and security settings to allow for HogNet network traffic For some firewall applications this might mean turning off the firewall completely Configuring HogNet Network Settings on a DMX Processor In the front panel menu system of the DMX Processor 8000 is a network configuration menu used to configure IP address settings for that particular node This menu can be accessed by first selecting Network HogNet HogNet Config High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Configuring the IP addresses and subnet addresses on Hog processors follow the exact same rules and principals as outlined for network adapters consoles in Configuring Console Network Adapters p 64 Typical HogNet Network Configurations Example A A single console and single DMX Processor Cat5 Ethernet Cable 3 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS p SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS gt ee 29999 P Obtain P using DHCP THAE T o Hog 4 console Static IP 172 314 0 1 Run DHCP server Example B The console is a DHCP s
393. olour scroller are always considered live on stage and will be selected when using the Live key High End Systems 245 Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 2 16 2 1 246 Bringing Parameter Values Into the Programmer Sometimes you will end up with a look onstage or in a cue scene or palette that you want to reuse in further programming There are various ways in which you can bring those fixtures and parameter values into the Programmer or editor Suck You can use Suck to assign fixture parameters to the values that they currently have on stage It doesn t assign parameters that are at their default value or that belong to fixtures with an in tensity value of zero This helps to ensure that you don t have redundant values in the cues that you create which can cause problems later by blocking values that should track through The Suck button is located on the Main Toolbar You need to have fixtures selected before using the Suck command For example if Group 3 contains Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 e Group 3 Suck assigns the fixtures in Group 3 to their current on stage values Output K Show Studio Studio Palettes Color 575 Spot 575 Compact z Values Effects Sources Plots DA Strobe Position Colour Mixing Co y Num amp Intensity Type Pan Cyan Magenta Yellow Saturatio Co Studio Color 575 1 Programmer Q Vale Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Bounce nap Color 575 Sh
394. on even if the preview images do not match When in this mode a page turn icon will appear in the upper right corner for preview that is not the same across the entire fixture selection 2 Show hide dmx value default on shows and hides the dmx value of the previews displayed in the media picker 3 Show hide name shows and hides the preview names in the media picker 4 Reverse Display Order reversed the order in which the previews are dis played in the media picker 5 Search Filter input text to filter the contents of the media picker window 6 Package Status Icon Icon indicating the health status of the preview package for the current fixture selection Click on the icon for a detailed view of all runnning and completed preview package tasks 7 Function Tabs fixture functions such as gobo wheels color wheels media indexes etc are grouped into selectable tabs for easy navigation 174 High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker 10 2 CITP Previews in the Media Picker By default the media picker displays previews for fixtures using a default preview package for that fixture type as supplied by the fixture library However the media picker can also display previews that have been downloaded and cached from connected CITP enabled fixtures In this section we will review which CITP clients are supported by the Hog 40S for previewing how to configure the DP8000 for CITP fixture discovery how to associate fixtures to
395. on the Create New Custom Type window will open see Figure 27 2 The Create New Custom Type window High End Systems 373 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Create New Custom Type Create New Custom Type DEERE User Focture Type 1 Author Notes O Create From Existing Figure 27 2 The Create New Custom Type window Within this window you can define the Model Name Author and enter any Notes The currently loaded fixture library within the show will be displayed Select a manufacture and fixture to copy the existing library to the fixture builder Select OK to submit the library information and begin the building process see Building the Fixture p 374 27 1 2 Building the Fixture Once you have added a fixture library from blank or from a copy you will see the DMX channels in the fixture builder 374 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Fixture Builder Ea Fixture Builder Figure 27 3 The Fixture Builder window Use the fixture s DMX Protocol to edit the cells as needed to build the custom library The various cells and their uses are Type Information Channel Model Name the name assigned to this library Author the author of the library Date Modified the date of the last modification to this library Notes any notes entered by the author DMX Footprint total number of DMX channels used by this fixture Patchpoints total number of unique patch points and their lo
396. on up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 toggle off 1 toggle on X Y values 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 345 Section 22 Open Sound Control Arrow Left key hog hardware left Arrow Right key hog hardware right key hog hardware at key hog hardware minus key hog hardware plus key hog hardware slash backspace key hog hardware back space H keys func hog hardware h tion keys Main Play key hog hardware maingo Center Choose hog hardware main key choose Skip Forward Skip Back hog hardware skipfwd Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Arrow Down hog hardware down 0 button up 1 button down key Main Pause key hog hardware mainhalt Main Back key hog hardware mainback hog hardware skipback 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button u
397. onds For more on fanning including fanning using the parameter wheels and in spreadsheet views see Fanning p 144 High End Systems 217 Section 13 Timing 13 4 Cue Wait Timing In addition to manually pressingGo to execute you can also automate the triggering of a cue by assigning a wati value for the cue The wait value for a cue is assigned in the wait column of the cuelist window To assign how long a cue timing 1 List 1 Open open the cuelist 2 Select the Wait cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 The Trigger Toolbar will appear below the Wait cell see Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar Select an option from this Hak Wat Folow Timecode Manual Clock 25 Figure 13 10 The Trigger Toolbar A cue s wait column options are e Halt Does not allow the cue to be triggered automatically unless a timecode value later in the list causes the cue to be jumped In all other cases the Go key must be manually pressed to execute this cue Halt is shown by an empty Wait cell and it is the default wait column value for newly created cues e Wait Triggers the cue after the specified time has passed from the triggering of the previous cue either automatically or by pressing Go It should not be confused with the Delay which is the time between the cue being triggered after a Wait if there is one and the fade starting The Wait time schedules cues within the cuelist whereas the Delay time schedules the fades of
398. ons 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Options open the Options for the cuelist 3 Under Controls select the Master or Main Controls pane see Figure 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window and Figure 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window High End Systems Section 17 Playback 4 Select the action you want controls to have from the corresponding drop down list together with any options 5 Press OK when you have finished Tip Holding down the PIG key while pressing any one of a master s playback keys will release that playback regard less of the function assigned to that key Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options yes r C v C v C v C v C v Figure 17 10 The Master pane of the Cuelist Options window High End Systems 295 17 8 1 296 Section 17 Playback Chosen Master Disco Chase Playback Options Irs Cuelist 7 A gt Assert Assert Fade Detaut Use Cuelist Time Master Main Release Fade Defaut Use Cuelist Time Skip forward Use Fade Time CJ Trigger Cuelist Macro a Use Fade Time 0O Trigger Cuelist Macro Figure 17 11 The Main Controls pane of the Cuelist Options window Configuring Master Controls When you configure master controls these settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied to the master that the cuelist is on The configuration options for the master controls are shown in the fo
399. onsole is locked the user cannot access any part of the show file or change any dmx output to the stage To unlock the console enter the PIN code you have setup for your console using the touch screen the numeric keypad on the front panel or an external keyboard High End Systems 57 58 Section 3 Setting Up the System Locked Enter PIN Code ES Sa 7 4 Figure 3 6 The Lock Window Requesting Pin By default the lock code for consoles is 1234 To change the lock PIN code for the console open the network window right click on the console you want to change the settings for click on settings and navigate to the security tab Change the PIN code to the desired value and hit apply Console Settings Security 0O Local Access Locked MIDI Show Control PIN Code w 1234 MIDI Notes MIDI Timecode Open Sound Control Diagnostics Figure 3 7 Security Settings Tab of Console Settings Window If you forget the passcode and are locked out of the console you will need to powercycle the console and relaunch the show in order to regain access to the show Lock pin codes are stored per show and per console High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 DMX Processor 8000 Setup To begin setting up your DMX Processor 8000 plug in mains power at any voltage between 100 and 240V AC The DMX Processor 8000 s most fundamental settings are available using the built in front panel menu syst
400. or example Highlight only changes the parameter values in the output not in the current cue or in the Pro grammer or editor and highlight has the highest priority when the console determines a parameter s output value Highlight will remain active until you press the Highlight key again and you can use the Next and Back keys to highlight in turn each fixture in the current selection You can release each parameter from highlight by adjusting its value in the Programmer or editor letting you modify parameters whilst keeping the fixture beam as visible as possible For example suppose that you have a Studio Spot 575 subtly lighting a part of the stage setting with a dark blue breakup gobo softened using the frost parameter and with the iris controlling the beam size The piece of set that the Studio Spot is lighting has been moved and you need to refocus it while keeping the rest of the lighting state on stage so that rehearsals can continue To do this using Highlight 1 Select the Studio Spot in the Programmer 2 Press the Highlight key The Studio Spot will retain its position on stage but the intensity will go to full the colour to white the gobo and frost to open and the iris to 100 so that you can see the beam clearly on the lit stage 3 Adjust the pan and tilt parameters to position the Studio Spot as required 4 Adjust the iris parameter to give the correct beam size 5 Press the Highlight key again to release the colou
401. or in the Hog 4OS is the programmer which acts as the default active editor for all parameter changes when no other editors are open or active Individual cues scenes and palettes can all be openned in editors Editing parameter values works in essentially the same way for all of editors see Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters p 127 List 1 Cue 1 Studio Color 575 i e T T a E a c e e e E E S E E o C C SS SS SP CR Figure 2 16 A Typical Editor You can open an editor window for any cue scene or palette by holding down the Open key and selecting it from its directory window Alternatively you can use the command line e Cue 1 Open opens an editor for Cue 1 and makes it editable 2 9 1 Editor Window Controls The main part of an editor window shows the fixture parameter values in a spreadsheet view with each row representing a single fixture see Spreadsheets p 39 At the top of the window there are three toolbars with buttons the Editor Values Toolbar toolbar the Editor Toolbar and the Jump Toolbar The following sections describe the buttons that are common across all editors some editors have additional buttons that are specific to that type of editor and these are described in the relevant part of the manual The Editor Values Toolbar The Editor Values Toolbar has buttons for Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table and N Shot Use these buttons to display the different kinds of i
402. orwards 190 191 track through 140 track through loops 291 trackball 121 133 keys 95 modes 94 replacing 452 ring 94 using for pan and tilt 133 which is the current mode 22 tracked value 31 tracking 31 140 149 192 cue only 291 mark cues 194 stopping values tracking forwards 190 191 through loops 225 track through loops 291 tracking backwards 189 trigger forwards only 337 350 trigger macro 291 triggers 218 turning off the console see shutting down type of fixtures 119 U unblock button 193 unblocking 193 undo 47 units real world 30 universe cloning 112 unpatching 115 unpatching 114 by DMX address 115 update key 46 auto update 252 updating fixture types 99 software 413 updating software 413 USB Flash Drive Making A Bootable USB Flash Drive on Win dows 414 415 user interface 23 490 Index user kinds 239 auto kinds 240 copying 241 creating new 240 deleting 240 moving 241 user manual reporting problems 448 user number modifying 120 user preferences center wheel 96 console 52 55 56 94 95 98 edit 132 149 208 playback defaults 138 302 V value button 45 version numbering software 448 video timecode see timecode view by DP 109 view cue 189 view toolbar 27 views see desktop views views directory 27 34 virtual masters 271 visualisers 401 W wait time 207 218 wheelsets 242 white point 33 138 windows bringi
403. ou are moving a scene only the Insert option is available J Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a scene to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 1 Timing Basics With Hog 40S you can assign individual crossfade timings for each parameter of each fixture giving you complete control of how each parameter changes during a cue Because of this there are no cue parts as found on some other consoles Hog 40S gives you easy ways to assign timings for the whole cue for individual fixtures and by parameter type intensity position colour beam and so on as well as for each parameter You can control three aspects of timing in the Hog 40S The speed and manner in which the transition of parameter values happens when a cue scene is played back See Fade Delay and Path p 208 e The time a cue scene waits before it is triggered See Cue Wait Timing p 218 e The order in which cues in a cuelist are played back See Loops and Links p 223 The different types of timing values are e Fade time The time that it takes fixture parameters to change from their initial value to their value in the cue that is being played back You can assign a single fade time for the cue or have separate fade in and fade out times The fade in time is the fade
404. ou can delete link cues in the same way as any other type of cue For example Cue 3 5 Delete Creating a Loop To create a loop you need to have two things A link that points to a cue earlier in the cuelist e All the cues in the loop between the linked to cue and the link cue must be assigned with wait or follow triggers see Cue Wait Timing p 218 Hog 40S will recognise this as a loop see Figure 13 11 A Cuelist with a Loop High End Systems 223 Section 13 Timing Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable be Folow Folow insert Timing Cue Time oa Cue Chosen Link Comment Fade Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Copy of Cue 1 Forever Copy of Cue 1 Figure 13 11 A Cuelist with a Loop Exiting Loops You can determine when the cuelist stops looping and continues with cues after the loop The options are e Forever the loop will run indefinitely until you press the Go key e Count the cuelist will loop the assigned number of times Assigning a count of zero will make the cuelist ignore the link e Timed the cuelist will loop until the assigned time period has elapsed To assign the looping behaviour 1 Open Cuelist 1 open the cuelist window 2 Select the link cue s Delay cell and press Set 3 Select an option from the Loops Toolbar 4 If you have selected Count or Timed enter a count or timed value You can also configure wha
405. ou could create a lowlight palette that sets the in tensity of all fixtures to 30 to give the highlighted fixture greater contrast Note that lowlight only affects parameter values of the non selected fixtures in the current editor Parameter values being output by playbacks will not be affected To assign a pre existing palette to be the lowlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the lowlight palette The lowlight palette is shown by the D icon in the palette directory window Tip You can use masking when creating the lowlight palette to ensure that all the required parameter types are included see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 161 16 4 Auto Update When you are programming a complex show the look on stage may be built up from cuelists and scenes on several masters You can change the look by assigning fixture parameter values in the Programmer but it is difficult to know which cue or scene is contributing which values to the total on stage Hog 40S s Auto Update feature automatically suggests the appropriate cues palettes and scenes to merge the changes into allowing you to choose how the updates are per formed 252 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Auto Update The list below shows cues scenes and palettes that have been overridden by the programmer Type Cue 0O Track Backwards _ cotour 3 Palette Figure 16 1 The Auto Update window When
406. ou do this fader 1 and it s corresponding flash key will no longer act as a control for the Grand Master but rather as a control for the assigned cuelist on that master However you can still access the Grandmaster by holding down the GM key This allows you to access the Grand Master when a normal master on the current page is obscuring it The GM key LED shows the state of the Grand Master e Off Grand Master is at 100 e On Grand Master is at 0 e Slow flashing Grand Master is between 0 and 100 If you use the GM key in conjunction with fader 1 on the console to change the Grand Master level it is possible for the position of the physical fader 1 to be different from the Grand Master s actual stored level If this happens then when the GM key is held down the Grand Master level will be shown on the in blue and the level of the physical fader 1 will be shown as a red dot To rematch the levels and capture the Grand Master s level with the physical fader you must move the fader until it is at the same level as the blue bar at this point the fader will take control of the Grand Master level in the normal way High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 6 2 17 6 3 DBO Key The DBO key above the Grand Master toggles the console between dead black out and the grand master s level When you engage the DBO key it will light up in red and all fixture intensities will be restricted to 0 with the exception of parked intensities When you di
407. ou to edit the data in the Program mer or other editors To park fixture parameter values 1 Fixture 1 50 Select fixture s and assign the parameter s you wish to park 2 More gt Park Select Park from the More options of the Main Toolbar To unpark fixtures select the fixtures set any value for the parked parameters and hold the Pig key while pressing Park Both the park and unpark commands will accept a parameter mask on the command line for example e Position Park parks only position parameters of the selected fixtures Viewing and Editing What is Parked You can view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window and the Output window and you can view and edit parked parameters in the Parked Output window Parked parameters are also indicated in the Wheels Toolbar The Fixture Window To view which fixtures have parked parameters in the Fixture window e Open Fixture the Fixture window opens see Figure 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window High End Systems 255 Section 16 Advanced Programming Fixture Window ufo Spe Ji oP seco 1 tt ratare 1 OP 560 1 185 Fatre iH D EAS baste 1 De seco E a Free frst Figure 16 3 The Parked column of the Fixture window The Output Window Parked parameters are shown in the Output window with black text on an orange background When the Output window Source view is selected the word Parked is displayed
408. ove keys High End Systems 165 Section 9 Directory Windows Directory windows are the windows that allow users to access recorded data such as palettes cuelists scenes pages effects kinds and groups using a grid of buttons Directory windows and their contents can be displayed in a number of ways In this section we will cover the different options available for directory windows 9 1 Mask IPBCE Palette Directories Only The Palette Directories IPCBE mask settings determine which fixed function kinds are recorded into palettes for that directory if the command line kind mask is blank at the time of recording no kinds selected To change which kinds are included in the directory s mask open the config uration window for that directory navigating to the mask tab and enable disable the individual function kinds in the menu Configuration Select which kinds this directory will mask Directory into es if the command ine mask is empty Intensity Mask O O O E O Figure 9 1 Directory Kind Mask Menu A directory mask legend is shown at the top of each directory window and indicates which kinds will be recorded into palettes for that directory if the kind mask is blank at the time of recording High End Systems 167 Section 9 Directory Windows Beam Directory Dg Figure 9 2 Directory Kind Mask Legend 9 2 9 2 1 168 Color Coding Each button within a directory window can
409. ow see Fig ure 3 12 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window Universe this field denotes which DMX universe to configure Multicast check this box to enable Multicasting When enabled all E1 31 in formation will be sent to all nodes Destination IP when the Multicast field is not checked enter an IP address to Unicast E1 31 data to Universe click to select the E1 31 Universe to transmit this universe s data on Changes Only check this box to transmit only changes to E1 31 data 81 Section 3 Setting Up the System DMX Processor 8000 Settings Changes Securty Broadcast P Address Subnet Univ Only Processor Unit go DMX FictureNet Art Net Input Art Net Output E1 31 SACN DMX Widgets Timecode Widgets CTP Catalyst Ty RTE ak shee i E Diagnostics amp amp cS amp amp amp amp 3 Muticast PAdwess Univers Se i ie E 2 KE gt gt Gs vy E E KADAV YA ORSICE SE CRORES lt amp Figure 3 12 E1 31 pane of the DMX Processor Settings window High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System E1 31 supports two styles of priority The first is a per universe priority that defines a single priority for all of the slots within the universe The second style per slot priority allows a sep arate priority be be assigned to each individual slot within that universe Not all E1 31 receivers support per slot priority O
410. ow Fade G wea Compact ED z in Palettes Changes ee a Strobe Position Colour Mixing Colour 1 Num amp Intensity Type Pan Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Similarly you can apply this to palettes scenes and cues using the Live key to bring in fixtures and their parameter values that are on stage Live Red Palette Suck fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought into the Programmer Programmer O O GRG G BAE Or you can use a mask to bring particular parameter type values from specific palettes that are on stage For example to bring the intensity values of Red Palette into the editor Live Red Palette Intensity Suck the intensity values of fixtures on stage assigned to Red Palette are brought into the Programmer High End Systems 247 Output vo a Position Num amp Intensity Section 16 Advanced Programming Values Effects Sources Abts Colour Mixing Studio Studio Color 575 Spot575 aw S 16 2 2 248 Pan Tilt Time Cyan Magenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Co Studio coio 575 oo E e e o p 20 SAA o 0 open _ eee A A red palete TE j fon redpalette Jo 0 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Studio Value Fade Delay Path Size Offset Length Table NShots Bounce Color 575 T fade Edit Show Compact fou Palettes Changes v Colour Mixing Colour 1 Strobe Position Num am
411. p 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 0 button up 1 button down 22 4 4 OSC Status Mappings 346 Hog 40S outputs the following status messages to OSC controllers Hog 40S OSC Command Path Example Front Panel LED hog status led button hog status led clear Status The Command hog status command Line line name Encoder Wheel hog status encoder Labels wheel label Encoder Wheel hog status encoder Values wheel value Function Key hog status h line1 Labels Line 1 Function Key hog status h line2 Labels Line 2 hog status commandline hog status encoderwheel3 label hog status encoderwheel3 value hog status h1 line1 hog status h1 line2 High End Systems Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC Linear Timecode LTC is a form of SMPTE timecode encoded into an audio signal The Hog 40S can listen to LTC by inputting the LTC signal directly into the back of the console or by inputting the LTC audio signal into a DP8000 through an attached USB LTC widget 23 1 LTC Input into Console To bring LTC into the system through the console 1 High End Systems Connect the LTC source timecode generator to the LTC IN port on the con sole s rear panel using a balanced 3 pin XLR connector you ca
412. p Intensity Type Pan ilt Cyan Studio Color 575 Magenta Yelow H Saturatio Colour Using Live and Touch Using Live and Touch together touches all parameters that belong to fixtures that are at non zero intensity on stage including parameters at their default values This is similar to suck except that it will bring all values into the Programmer or editor including those that are at their default values The Touch button is located on the Main Toolbar For example if Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 are in the output with an intensity of 100 e Live Touch brings all the parameters of Studio Color 575s 1 to 3 into the Programmer not just the intensity values as suck would High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming Output Show Compact ve Studio Studio Palettes Y paa fects S ces Values Effects Sources Color 575 Spot 575 7 Strobe Position Colour Mixing Num amp Intensity Type Pan itt 7 Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio C Studio Color 575 v 100 open 23 fe fo fo poo fioo f fom ne wh on Studio Color 575 Value Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table NShots Bounce Show Fade E z c Compact ii Palettes Changes p a y A _ Strobe Position Colour Mixing Colour 1 Num amp Intensity Type Pan it Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio Colour Studio Color 575 You can select the parameter types to touch e Live Colour Touch only the colour parameters are
413. p for Hog 4 Console Only With the back panel removed carefully remove the eight screws on the back of the LCD assembly using a 3mm allen key Make sure you have somebody hold the screens from the front of the console while you do this This entire step is for Hog 4 Console Only Lift the screens from the console and unplug the cables from behind Replace with a new screen assembly by performing previous steps in reverse 34 2 Replacing Faders This section covers how to replace the faders on Hog 4 Full Boar 4 Playback Wing 4 RoadHog 4 and NanoHog4 NOTE Faders cannot be replaced on the HedgeHog console as they are soldered to the mainboard t High End Systems Caution Always shut down and disconnect the mains power before removing the front panel 449 Section 34 Service 34 2 1 Replacing faders on Hog 4 Full Boar 4 and Playback Wing 4 1 2 Pull off the fader handles for the fader that you wish to replace Undo the four front panel screws with a 3mm allen key plus the two thumb screws in the armrest on the Hog 4 console and carefully lift off the front panel from the edge closest to you Gently unplug the fader s cable lead from the main board Unscrew the fader s two front panel screws from the top side of the front panel using a 2mm allen key and remove the fader Fit the new fader in place ensuring that it sits completely flat against the PCB Connect the new fader s cable led to the mai
414. ply AC power to the wing and connect the wing s USB port and DVI port to the console 2 Setup Control Panel Wings open the Wings pane of the Control Panel window see Figure 3 14 The Wings pane of the Control Panel with Playback Wing Mapping 3 Attach the wing to one of the playback bars by selecting the wing s unique ID number in the drop down menu for that playback bar 4 If you have more than one wing you can identify which is which by pressing the Beacon button for the appropriate playback bar The LEDs on the wing will flash 5 Ensure that the playback bar is visible by selecting its Display button 6 Enable the external monitor included on the wing navigate to the Dispalys tab of the control panel and enable the cordinating DVI output where you plugged in the wing NOTE The Full Boar 4 s DVI D monitor output connections do not support analog output to VGA displays such as those featured on the older Full Boar 3 playback and programming wings High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System Control Panel v1 0 0 b 238 C Displays Console Connected E Wings Piayback Bar 1 Not Connected Mid MD Playback Bar 2 Not Connected O Ti 3 ime and Date Playback Bar3 None Not Connected L Auto Launch Playback Bar 4 None Not Connected 2 HogNet 25 FixtureNet System info 0 O Piayback Bar5 NONE Not Connected Playback Bar 6 None Not Connected i
415. pported 460 High End Systems Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 3 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 500W Weight 45 Ibs 20 41 kg Dimensions 35 49 901 19mm wide x 22 65 575 36mm deep x 9 62 244 34mm high 36 4 Road Hog 4 Console 36 4 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50 60Hz 5A maximum Video out 1 x DVI D 1 x VGA only 1 can be used at a time USB 3 x Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 2 rear 1 front 2 x Universal Serial Bus 3 0 ports 2 rear Ethernet 2 x Gigabit base TX Ethernet port DMX out 4 x Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Keyboard Not included Generic Class USB keyboards Supported 36 4 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 500W Weight 38 6 Ibs 17 5 kg Dimensions 26 7 678 18mm wide by 27 61 701 32mm deep by 8 10 205 8mm high High End Systems 461 Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 4 3 Back Panel Drawing TC cco eC c C oo E C C cC Cc E E co c C C c CcC cCc c oo cCc C C oo C ca ca c oo CcC oo cc CcC a eae c C c cC oo CcC C C cD CcC gt FixtureNet Figure 36 1 Back panel of RoadHog 4 Console 36 5 Hedge Hog 4 Console 36 5 1 Input and Output Connections From right to left when viewing the console from the back Mains in IEC 320 connector 5A 250V rated cable supplied 100 240V 50
416. preferences appearance 51 loading and saving 94 prev button 129 priority of aggregated sections 43 priority of cuelists 276 problems reporting 446 solving 443 processes restarting 444 programmer 45 127 bringing in values from onstage 246 clearing the contents of 148 contents after recording 183 proportional patch 121 protocol of fixtures 119 Q quit 57 R radios personal use near the console 445 raise priority 43 Rate Wheel 285 real world units 30 record options toolbar with cuelists 200 with cues 184 487 with groups 154 with palettes 165 with scenes 205 Record Options Toolbar with effect palettes 236 record options toolbar 162 recording CDs 49 cues 183 removing parameter values 185 with a delay time 209 with a fade time 208 with selected fixtures only 185 with state 192 desktop views 27 direct palettes 164 effect palettes 236 effects 230 groups 151 link cues 223 pages 301 palettes 155 parameter timings 212 scenes 203 reference palettes 164 release all 302 release cue 264 release key 263 Release on Other Go 265 release time 263 releasing parameters 125 remainder dim button 132 remember fader values 302 renaming shows 48 renumbering cuelists 187 reorder button 130 repeat with fanning 147 replace button with cuelists 200 with cues 184 with groups 154 with palettes 165 with scenes 205 replacing faders 449 touch screens 449 tr
417. primary console being willfully logged off from the show there is no need to perform any troubleshooting Simply reconnect the logged off console to the show and it will once again participate as a show server console on the network Understanding Multi Server Failover Behavior Below are some specific rules and examples that describe how the Hog 4 OS works when setup in a Multi Console Multi Server environment 1 The server that initially launches a show is the active server Other servers that join the show are backup servers The active server replicates it s copy of the show to all backup servers as they join the show replacing any existing copy of the show on the backup servers 2 If all servers stay connected to the network and remain visible to each other then all servers will have the same copy of the show New data created on any console will immediately replicate to all servers 3 If any server logs off then the remaining servers will continue to store the show and can rep licate the show to new consoles that log on As long as at least one server is always available then consoles can log off and log on at will 4 If any server logs off the show and later rejoins it will always rejoin as a backup server and the active server will replicate it s current copy of the show to the backup High End Systems 73 Section 3 Setting Up the System 5 If all servers log off at the same time then any server can initially launch the
418. ps around you can visualise it as a circle with the colours posi tioned around the edge with red at the top green at the lower right blue at the lower left and the intermediate colours in between The angle between 0 and 360 degrees specifies the hue of the colour red has a hue of 0 degrees yellow has a hue of 60 degrees and cyan has a hue of 180 degrees See Figure 6 7 The Colour Wheel e Saturation how strong or pale the colour is Pale colours have low satura tions while strong colours have high saturations Saturation is specified as a percentage between 0 white and 100 the strongest possible saturation Red Magenta Yellow hue Blue Green Cyan Figure 6 7 The Colour Wheel When you program with the HS parameters Hog 40S stores all values as HS and converts them to CMY or RGB as required when sending DMX data to the fixtures As part of this process the console is able to match the colours of different fixture types see Using Colour Matching p 138 The Hue and Saturation parameters of fixtures with continuous colour mixing are controlled in the same way as other continuous parameters see Continuous Parameters Colour and Beam p 134 You can also use the Colour Picker and Gel Picker see The Colour Picker p 138 and The Gel Picker p 139 High End Systems 137 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Using Colour Matching One of the advantages of the Hog 40S
419. r pressing Time twice assigns the delay time You can also view and assign effect timing values in the Effects Engine window High End Systems Section 14 Effects Effect timings Effects Engine 14 2 Effect Palettes 14 2 1 Predefined Effect Palettes You can quickly apply effects to the current selection using predefined effects palettes in the Effect Directory see Figure 14 4 The Effect Directory Effects palettes for parameter functions not available in the current selection will be greyed out for example the Iris Step palette is not available for Studio Color 575s as they do not have an iris parameter To open the Effect Directory e Open Effect Effect Effect E 12 L E 13 E 14 E 6 E 17 8 CE 19 CE z2 chaser fader pot redstep green step blue step red step CE 23 24 25 26 CE 27 E 29 E3 blue fade red fade green fade green rainbow is step iris step DOW rainbow Figure 14 4 The Effect Directory To apply an effects palette High End Systems 235 Section 14 Effects 1 1Thru5 50 Enter select the required fixtures and assign an intensity value 2 Effect 13 Enter assigns Effect Palette 13 Studio Colors 1 to 5 fade their intensity between 0 and 100 You can also select the effect palette by pressing or clicking on its button in the Effect Directory window 14 2 2 Adjusting Predefined Effects Once you have applied a predefined effects palette to the selected fixtures you can a
420. r gobo and frost parameters from Highlight so that they return to their original programmed values The values for pan tilt and iris retain their new values in the Programmer 6 Press Update and OK to record the changes in the appropriate cue see Auto Update p 252 Customising Highlight By default highlight brings intensity to full with all colour and beam parameters at their default values However you can use a palette to assign the highlight values for each parameter of each fixture This can be useful as the default highlight values for some parameters may not be what you want for example you may prefer to leave zoom focus and iris settings unaltered by Highlight so that you can see the programmed beam size and edge quality To assign a pre existing palette to be the highlight palette right click it in the palette directory and select it as the highlight palette The highlight palette is shown by the o icon in the palette directory window High End Systems 251 Section 16 Advanced Programming Tip You can use masking when creating the highlight palette to ensure that all the required parameter types are included see Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 161 16 3 2 Lowlight By default the parameters of fixtures that are not selected when you use highlight remain at their current output values You can customise the output values of these parameters during highlight by creating a lowlight palette For example y
421. r OSC controller to a physical network port that is attached to the same local area network as the console s HogNet port 2 Setup Network opens the network window 3 Right click on the console number and select Settings opens the Settings window 4 Inthe Open Sound Control pane enable OSC Out and assign the output port to match the input port of your OSC output device You must specify the IP address you wish to output to as well as which protocol you wish to use for OSC output 342 High End Systems Section 22 Open Sound Control Console Settings Security Port EEE 192 168 0102 MIDI Sho MIDI Notes enable _ oscin MIDI Timecode Outpu t Open Sound Control Port m EES 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics _ Enable 0O D x Cancel Figure 22 2 The OSC pane of the Console Settings window 22 4 OSC Mappings 22 4 1 OSC Playback Mappings Hog 40S uses the following OSC paths and commands for sending and receiving playback messages High End Systems 343 22 4 2 22 4 3 344 Section 22 Open Sound Control Hog 40S OSC Command Path Data Go a Cuelist hog playback go 0 cuelist Go a specific cue in hog playback go 0 cuelist cue a list goto Halt a Cuelist hog playback halt cuelist 0 Resume a halted hog playback re cuelist cuelist sume 0 Release a Cuelist hog playback re cuelist lease 0 Go a Scene hog playback go 1 scene Halt a Scen
422. r Palette 2 for editing 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory 2 Open Colour 2 opens the palette editor for Colour Palette 2 3 Alternatively using the command line Colour 2 Open 4 Press the Edit button in the editor window to select this as your current editor Within the editor you can assign fixture parameters and timing in the same way as in the Pro grammer see Individual Parameter Timings p 212 Press Update after editing to save the changes to the palette For more information on working with editors see Editors p 45 Tip When you open a palette for editing you may only appear to see one fixture when you recorded several This is due to the way palettes can be global with a single set of parameter values that can be applied to any fixture see Global Per Fixture Type and Per Fixture p 159 Updating Palettes with Different Parameter Types Palettes contain one or more parameter types If you edit a palette and add values for parameters of a type that was not previously in the palette and then update the palette these values will not be stored If you want to change the parameter types that a palette contains you need to select the type from the Palette Masking Toolbar The Palette Masking toolbar For example suppose that you wanted to add a gobo a beam parameter to the existing Colour Palette 2 1 Open Colour opens the Colour Directory Open Colour 2 opens the palette ed
423. r Wheel 20 Center Wheel 21 Center Ring 22 Center Ring 23 Trackball Ring Trackball Ring Encoder 1 Encoder 1 Encoder 2 Encoder 2 COON OC ARKRWBN ad O 21 2 5 Assigning MIDI Notes to Monitor Soft Keys To assign MIDI Note information to monitor soft keys 1 Connect a MIDI device to a MIDI input on either the console or a USB MIDI input device connected to the console Setup Network open the Network window Select the console in the list Settings open the Settings window Select the MIDI Notes tab of the Console Settings window Nw eS a In the desired MIDI Channel assignment field select Soft Keys to associate with the MIDI Channel Any incoming MIDI Note information for the specified MIDI channel will use the following mappings for the associated Soft Keys High End Systems 333 Section 21 MIDI Button Lower Right 1 Lower Right 2 Lower Right 3 Lower Right 4 Lower Right 5 Lower Right 6 Lower Right 7 Lower Right 8 Lower Right 9 Lower Right 10 Lower Right 11 Lower Right 12 Note Button Upper Right 1 Upper Right 2 Upper Right 3 Upper Right 4 Upper Right 5 Upper Right 6 Upper Right 7 Upper Right 8 Upper Right 9 Upper Right 10 Upper Right 11 Upper Right 12 Note Button Upper Left 1 Upper Left 2 Upper Left 3 Upper Left 4 Upper Left 5 Upper Left 6 Upper Left 7 Upper Left 8 Upper Left 9 Upper Left 10 Upper Left 11 Upper Left
424. r as a manual fader See Manually Crossfading Cuelists p 286 Using the Playback Bar with Playback Wings Whether wings are connected or not multiple Playback Bars can be displayed using the Wings pane of the Control Panel You can drag these and dock them at the edge of an external display placed adjacent to the wing to make cross referencing the screen display and the physical wing playback controls easier If your external display is set to a resolution higher than 1024x768 you can drag the ends of the Playback Bar to stretch it to better align with the spacing of the controls of the wing For information on adding and setting up playback wings see Adding Playback Wings p 83 17 4 2 Cuelist Feedback You can view in detail the running of the cues of a specific cuelist by opening the cuelist window see Figure 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running Open Choose e Double click the Playback Bar above the required cuelist Open List 1 select the cuelist from the cuelist directory 280 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Chosen Master List 1 Leem View Enable Enable Folow Folow Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Options Number Wait Mark Comment Figure 17 6 The Cuelist Window with a Cue Running The current cue is displayed with an arrow in the wait column of the cuelist when triggered the arrow turns green and the letter R for Running is displayed the cue s progress
425. r change the library defined preview name to a custom name in order to better represent the custom gobo being used in the rig Customizing preview images and or names in your show can be done using the follow steps 1 Open the media picker window Select the fixture s you want to customize In the media picker window select the preview you wish to change Hit the set key Sie re wih Use the text field to rename the preview and or click on the Change button to browse for a custom image Images can be imported from a USB flash drive or chosen from the thumbnail library folder on the console supported image formats jpeg png gif 6 The custom preview name and image you chose will now appear anywhere that preview is presented in the show such as on the slot toolbar in the media picker and in direct entry menus High End Systems 179 Section 10 Media Picker Media Picker Strobe Y P rc e Change Colour Gobo Figure 10 2 Media Picker Window 10 6 180 Managing Preview Packages To view which preview package a fixture is using open the fixture window and locate the preview package column for that fixture Listed in this column will be the name of the preview package currently being used by the fixture to display preview names and thumnails on the slot toolbar in the editors and in the media picker To change which preview package a fixture is using double click on the preview package cell an
426. r faster conversion during import it is best to use lower resolution video files such as 352x240 VideoCD or 720x480 DVD Avoid using video files that feature complex objects such as faces logos or text unless you are using a very dense grid of target pixel fixtures to display this content High End Systems Section 21 MIDI 21 1 MIDI Show Control MIDI Show Control MSC is supported on every console in the Hog family including Hog 4PC Midi Show control allows you to control the basic playback functionalities of the Hog 4 OS from other MSC enabled consoles or from a Midi Show Control output device such as a personal computer running show control software 21 1 1 Bringing MSC into the Console To bring MSC into a Hog Console High End Systems 1 Connect the output of an MSC device to the MIDI In port on the back of the console If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or an external USB Midi Widget to send MSC into the console then connect the USB connection of your external USB midi device to one of the USB ports on your console Setup Control Panel Navigate to the midi tab of the control panel If you are using the console s built in midi input port then make sure USB LTC Midi Midi 1 is selected as the midi input device If you are using a USB Midi device such as a USB keyboard or external USB Midi widget to bring MSC into the console then select that device from the input drop down menu Setup N
427. r select a button on the toolbar 3 Adjust the parameter value using the parameter wheels Gobo 2 Global Time Gobo lt gt gt Beam Time Gobo Shake Size Focus ins Figure 6 3 The Wheelsets Toolbar for a Studio Spot 575 Some parameters that appear on the parameter wheels have more than one mode These modes are shown as a list on the Wheels Toolbar and you can select the modes by clicking on the wheel s button on the toolbar Direct Value Entry For parameters appearing on the parameter wheels you can hold Set then press the associated button on the Wheels Toolbar to open a direct value entry dialog see Figure 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog 134 High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Gobo pe Gobo gt Focus Figure 6 4 The Wheels Toolbar Direct Entry Dialog Enter a value for the parameter in the direct value entry box and select any available modes Press Enter to complete the direct value entry Snapping to a Single Value When you have several fixtures selected you can make all the values of a parameter the same as that of the first fixture e Press and hold the key while turning the appropriate parameter wheel Jumping to Endstop Values You can assign a parameter to its endstop values e Press and hold the key and adjust the appropriate parameter wheel clockwise to assign the parameter to its maximum value and anticlockwise to
428. r showing Timing 4 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired Fade In Fade Out Delay In and Delay Out Note that if you want to see the timings that you have assigned in the editor you can select the Fade or Delay views using the buttons in the top left of the editor window You don t have to be in these views to assign timings however Fade In Fade Out ree 2s 2s Figure 13 4 The Wheels Toolbar showing Timing To assign fade and delay timings to specific parameter types 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign timings to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key The Wheels Toolbar will show the available timing types 4 Click on Fade In Fade Out Delay In or Delay Out and select a parameter type see Figure 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar 5 Use the parameter wheels to assign the desired timing High End Systems 213 Section 13 Timing Fade in Fade Out rns 2s Figure 13 5 Selecting Parameter Types from the Wheels Toolbar To assign a path to all the parameters of a fixture 1 Select the fixtures that you want to assign a path to making sure that they have been given parameter values 2 Press the Time key 3 The Slot Toolbar will show buttons for All In and Out see Figure 13 6 The Slot Toolbar showing Paths 4 Choose In to assign a path to be applied to the parameters when the fixture they belong to is
429. ral values that control timing fade wait delay and path See Also fade time wait time delay time path The output of a master running a cuelist is a mix of hard and tracked parameter values Hard values are those that are in the current cue while tracked values are those that have tracked through from previous cues See Also tracking A method of dealing with cuelists that does not record information in a cue unless it is a change from the previous cue This allows multiple cuelists to be running at the same time without them interfering with each other 475 476 UDP user kind USB view virtual master visualiser wait time wheelset white point widget Glossary See Also hard value tracked value touched value default value A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run the Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet User kinds are customized kinds built by the user allowing you to create smaller collections of fixture functions on fewer wheelsets See Also kinds Universal Serial Bus a means of connecting computer peripherals such as keyboards and mice Hog consoles also use USB to connect expansion wings See Also playback wing An user defined
430. ratio 500 1 typical Viewing angle 160 x 160 degrees typical Response 80 ms typical Brightness 300 cd m2 typical 36 10 Master Wing 4 36 10 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in Digital video in USB High End Systems Built in Power Supply with IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum DVI D connector Type B USB input socket USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 465 Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 10 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power Weight Dimensions 36 10 3 Performance Display Native resolution Input frequency Contrast ratio Viewing angle Response Brightness 36 11 Hog 4PC 75W 27 2 lbs 12 33 kg 20 14 511 56mm wide by 24 02 610 05mm deep by 9 62 244 34mm high 15 6 Diagonal active matrix TFT LCD 1366 x 768 31 5 80 kHz H 56 75 Hz V 500 1 typical 160 x 160 degrees typical 80 ms typical 300 cd m2 typical Processor Memory Supported Operat Windows Vista 32 bit or 64 bit SP2 or greater Windows ing Systems Hard Disk Space Screen Resolution 1024x768 or higher resolution monitor 1 8 GHz Dual Core CPU or faster 7 32 bit or 64 bit SP1 or greater Windows 8 32 bit or 64 bit Windows 8 1 32 bit or 64 bit 2GB 5 GB of free disk space For larger shows using a more powerful processor is advisable Please ensure that you are using the most up to date drivers for your graphics card 466 H
431. res are given User Numbers that follow on sequentially from the original fixtures numbers but they are not patched or added to any groups An asterisk will appear next to User Numbers that may now conflict with existing ones E Figure 5 8 Fixture window before and after replicating 5 4 Changing the Fixture Type It is sometimes useful to change the type of a fixture for example because of production changes where one fixture of one type is replaced by another of a different type or because the rig has been changed perhaps by adding a scroller to a desk channel fixture such as a Par To change the fixture type 1 Setup Patch 2 Select the fixtures you want to change by clicking on the numbered button in the left hand column 3 Press the Change Type button and select the new fixture type from the list 4 Hog 40S cannot change a fixture s type while it is patched You will be asked if you want to unpatch any patched fixtures don t forget to repatch them after wards Figure 5 9 Changed Fixture Type shows the contents of the Fixture window before and after changing the fixture type 116 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Important Changing a fixture s type may cause ambiguities in any programming that has already taken place Whilst Hog 40S translates all real world figure data including colour and beam between fixture functions it cannot match the performance of a
432. ress a Macro button in the directory and it will playback During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line The Macro buttons in the directory are colored to show the Macro status e Red the Macro is recording Macro Directory 1 Macro 1 e Green the Macro is running High End Systems 359 Section 24 Macros Macro Directory a v 1 2 3 N Macro 1 Macro 2 acro 3 Running a Keystroke Macro from the Macro Window 1 Open Macro open the Macro Directory Window Check that the Guard button is depressed Open Macro 4 open the required Macro T Press the Play Controls button in the Macro window The on screen playback controls will appear Play Folow Controis Maco S Command Command D Duration The controls are from left to right the Go Pause and Stop buttons During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line When a Macro is paused the Macro key LED will flash green Running Keystroke Macros from the Command Line To run a Keystroke Macro from the command line Macro 1 Enter sends a start command to Macro 1 During Macro playback the Macro LED will illuminate green and M will appear to the right of the command line 360 High End Systems Section 24 Macros Tip Keystroke Macros can also be triggered within cuelists or scenes by using a Comment Ma
433. ress and hold the Choose key for a master and use the parameter wheels to adjust the playback and effects rates Any modifications made to the playback and effect rates via the encoder wheels are stored and will persist for that cuelist scene as the base rate Using the Rate Wheel The wheel located on the left hand side of the console is known as the rate wheel The rate wheel allows users to make temporary modifications to the base playback and effects rates for the chosen and selected masters To toggle the rate wheel mode playback effect none press the rate key located below the rate wheel The rate wheel s mode is displayed on the main playback bar base rate rate wheel modification Moving the rate wheel in the upward direction will increase the selected rate while moving the wheel in the downward direction will descrease the selected rate To clear the rate wheel s modifications for the active rate mode of the rate wheel press the restore key located above the rate thruster You can also clear rate wheel modifactions by holding choose for a master and pressing the encoder wheel button for the matching rate on the main endoder wheels To permantently store the rate wheel s modifications for a cuelist scene master hold the pig key and press the restore key You can also permanantely add the rate wheel s modifications into the base rate of a master by holding choose and turning the encoder wheel matching the rate on the main encoder wheel A
434. ress of the remote computer Share name the name of the shared directory on the remote computer e Username the user name to access the shared directory on the remote computer if required e Password the password to access the shared directory on the remote computer if required e Domain if the user account is a member of a windows do main enter that domain name here otherwise leave this field blank High End Systems 77 Section 3 Setting Up the System Connect To Network Disk E3 Server name Share name Username Note that depending upon your network drive configuration not all fields may be required Check the box if you want the connection to be saved with the console If this option is not selected then this mapping will be lost when the console is re booted or power cycled Check the box to save the password if you wish to have the password for the drive mapping saved with the above option Accessing Network Drives Once a network drive is mapped it will appear in the Start and Backup windows under the console heading as a valid drive to browse to Sub folders of the primary networked drive will also be available Disconnecting Network Drives When browsing a network drive the Eject _ button is available in the top right corner of the browse window Pressing this button will un map and disconnect the network drive High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 4 3 4 1
435. ressing the directory s buttons does not activate them Instead it selects the item and inserts it in the command line High End Systems Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals 2 7 1 Colour Directory 7 on fe Baal amp lt 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 oo 0 A v Figure 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View Tip Z You can override the effect of the Guard button by holding down the Pig key while pressing a directory button Automatic Naming of Directory Items When you create or copy a directory item the console automatically generates a name for the new item For example if you have two position palettes and them create a third the new one will be recorded into location 3 in the directory and named Position 3 If you then copy this position palette the copy will be recorded into location 4 in the directory and named Copy of Position 3 You can customise how the console automatically generates these names in the Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window see Figure 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window To open the Default Naming pane Setup Preferences Default Naming To customise the generated labels 1 Click or press on the text box for the required type of directory group intens ity position and so on Labels for when the new directory item is created by recording or by copying are handled in separate text bo
436. rk cell of a cue press Set and then Enter If you wish to time mark the cue then first input a time using the keypad and then Enter To re move the mark from a cue select the Mark cell of the cue press Set hit Backspace and then Enter High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Learn View Enable Enable Folow Follow Timing Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Name Mark Comment e Enable the Mark Fade New Cues or Mark Time New Cues option in the Cuelist Options window All new cues will be created with the mark type Note that when Mark Time New Cues is selected all newly recorded cues will get a 2s mark time by default Properties _ Pie add effects CT Reset On Release 0o Track Through Loops 0O Cue Only nT Mark Fade New Cues 0O Mark Time New Cues e Ea AS VVrap to beginning of list Baa e Toggle the Mark Fade or Mark Time button in a Cue Editor window of the cue you wish to mark List 1 Cue 1 Vabe Fade Delby Path Sze Rate Offset Length Table NShots Gounce Direction Ep Mk Mark Siow SHOW Fade acs X Fade Time Stste Palettes Chang a amp te Beam Sh Beam SA Macrt Num amp btensity Magenta Yellow Ssturatic Shap ape vee Studio Color 575 hes 100 ys 100 y 100 5 11 8 2 Fade Mark verses Time Marks Cues can be marked with either a fade mark or a time mark While the basic principles of marking are the still the same the timing in which the mark is executed varies between the two
437. rlying state for the effect for example the center position of a fixture doing a circular movement effect 230 High End Systems Section 14 Effects Equally an intensity ripple between 0 100 will need a base value of 50 in order to use the full length of the effect 2 Open Effect the Effects Engine and Effect Directory will open 3 In the Effects Engine select the Table cells for the fixture parameters that you want to apply the effect to 4 Press Set choose the effect table from the menu and press Enter Figure 14 2 The Effects Engine Once the effect table is assigned you can modify the effect attributes either by editing the values in the spreadsheet or using the parameter wheels when the Effect key is selected Tip You can quickly edit the attributes of all one parameter type All Intensity All Position All Colour All Beam or for all parameters within the top five rows of the Effects Engine To edit the values in the spreadsheet 1 Select the cells for the parameters that you want to edit and press Set 2 Type anew value and press Enter Or using the parameter wheels 1 Press the Effect key 2 Select the individual parameters that you want to edit in the left hand Function column of the Effects Engine window 3 Adjust the Size Rate Offset and Length parameter wheels as required Note that the parameter wheels only control the current effects row selected
438. rmidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes 2 High End Systems ETEA a High End Systems N MILT X VAGRHARVU ERRAERZOVBREC BLT KIRHRUREENT EF TOA HRIOMT SRESRSICMLCHEERIET BARU BERERE aR BAMHVET Important Safety Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in Safety Warnings p 453 Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Les instructions se rapportant la protection permanente contre les incendies l lectrocution et aux blessures corporelles se trouvent dans Informations Importantes Sur La S curit p 454 Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler de monter ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer elektrischen Schlag und Verletzung von Personen finden Sie in Wichtige Hinweise Fiir Ihre Sicherheit p 454 Vor der Montage dem Zusammenbau und der Inbetriebnahme dieses Ger ts alle Anleitungen sorgf ltig durchlesen Informazioni Importanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi folgorazione e infortuni sono contenute nell Sezione 35 5 Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di assemblare montare e azionare l apparecchiatura Informacion Importante De Seguridad En el Informacion Importante De Seguridad p 455
439. rnal power supplies If used without the desklight and internal USB hub will not function and LED dimming will be unavailable All other functions will remain unaffected The USB Expansion wing is self powered and requires external power When the internal hub is active with an external power supply connected it operates as a self powered hub It is therefore possible to connect high power USB devices to the internal hub such as the USB DMX Widget or another Wing USB Wings are high power USB devices when used without an external power supply and so should not be connected to bus powered USB hubs unless the external power supply is connected Use the supplied cables to connect any Flying Pig Systems USB devices to your computer Windows should automatically detect and install the new hardware This process may take a few seconds but should not require any input from you If this is the case you may ignore the follow ing section on troubleshooting High End Systems 431 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC 31 4 Operation 31 4 1 Using the Hog 4PC Interface Hog 4PC Windows When Hog 4PC opens the Start window will be displayed along with the splash screen Once a show file is loaded or opened the two Hog 4PC default screens will be displayed The Front Panel Interface The front panel of Hog 4PC looks and behaves very similarly to the front panel of the Hog 4 console Click on buttons to simulate pressing keys on the console You
440. ro as if you had pressed the Go key Release At Zero The cuelist is released when the fader re turns to zero see Releasing Masters p 263 Upper Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at top of travel Full Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bot tom of travel 0 Upper Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at top of travel Full Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bot tom of travel 0 High End Systems Section 17 Playback Fader As Description Configuration Options signment Scale Ef adjusts the effect size of Upper Bound Determines the fect Size the by applying a scaling amount of scaling applied to the value to the base effect size of the master master when the fader is at top of travel Full e Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bot tom of travel 0 Configuring Flash Button Actions You can configure the level and actions of the Flash key Setting Default Notes Level Solo Latch Flash on Flash off On 100 Off Off Go on flash Off Release on flash Off Set to off to prevent accidentally flashing of a cuelist s contents When on pressing the Flash key will output the cuelist s intensities
441. rogramming of your show For example the video clip file used in the openning scene might have been changed on the media server The console is not automatically made aware of these content changes and so it is necessary to request new previews from the fixture in order to update the cached preview package on the console Follow these steps to update cached CITP previews on the console 1 2s 3 Open the patch window Select the fixture s you wish to refresh the media Press the refresh media button at the top of the patch window A green and white animated refresh icon will appear at the top right of the media picker window to the right of the search field The media refresh is finished when the icon disappears 10 2 5 Disabling CITP on DP8000 By default CITP is enabled on all DP8000s in new shows To disable CITP on a DP8000 1 2 176 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 Select the CITP tab of the node settings window High End Systems Section 10 Media Picker 3 Deselect the enable button and hit apply 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 Catalyst Previews in the Media Picker In addition to CITP and fixture library defined preview packages the Hog 4OS is also capable of displaying previews for content stored on Catalyst media servers In this section we will review how to configure D8000s for downloading Catalyst previews how to associate Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst media servers in the patch window and how to
442. rom a Master To detach a cuelist from a master High End Systems 259 Section 17 Playback Delete Choose detaches the cuelist from the chosen master Note that this will not delete the cuelist itself or remove it from the cuelist directory only detach it from the master 17 1 2 Controlling Playback Once assigned to masters cuelists can be played back using the master s contols or using the main controls Master Controls Each of the ten masters has a Choose Go Halt Back Back and Flash key as well as a fader see Figure 17 1 The Master Controls Go Halt Back Back Fader Figure 17 1 The Master Controls By default the controls work as follows e Choose allows the master to be chosen or selected If the blue LED is illumin ated solid then it is the chosen master and you can use the main playback controls to control this master If the blue LED is flashing then it is a selected master and you can use the rate wheel to control the playback and effect rates for the 260 High End Systems Section 17 Playback master The console allows for multiple selected masters but only one master can be chosen at any time Go if the cuelist is inactive pressing Go will activate it onstage If the cuelist is already active then pressing Go will run the next cue or restart paused fades see Halt Back below Halt pauses any running fades If there are no running fades then pressing Halt will start a
443. rs that have been changed or touched since the last cue was recorded See Tracking p 31 and Working with Tracking p 189 However some parameter types are treated as a single fixture attribute so for example when you touch one of the three colour parameters of a colour mixing fixture cyan magenta or yellow the other two are automatically touched at either their current value from playback or at their default values High End Systems 149 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers For most purposes this provides the results that you would expect but there may be situations where you want to separate the linked parameters for example to run separate chases with the cyan magenta and yellow parameters By default Hog 40S links all position parameters together and all colour parameters together You can separate linked parameter types in the kinds editor window for both fixed and user kinds 1 Hold Open key and select the Kinds button from the steup toolbar 2 Toggle separating parameters on and off by pressing the parameter type buttons see Figure 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned on Kind Editor Colour literate n Show v Saturation Gh Blank Gk Beam Gr Beam Shape GH Beam Shape 2 EF Colour GF Colour 1 Magenta GI Colour 2 Separate Parameters Figure 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned on 150
444. rt of the cue The parameters follow a chaotic sawtooth fade over the course of the cue Figure 13 2 Path Types For example High End Systems 2s 2 seconds in and out times 2s 5s 2 seconds in 5 seconds out 1m minute in and out times 1m10s 1 minute and 10 seconds in and out times 1h10m30s 1i1h 1 hour 10 minutes and 30 seconds in time and 1 hour out time 211 Section 13 Timing Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Note that if you enter 140 the time will be 1 minute 40 seconds not 140 seconds 2 minutes 20 seconds To assign paths directly in the Cuelist window 1 Click in the Path cell for the desired cue and press Set 2 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The In path is applied when a fixture is increasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when a fixture is decreasing in intensity 3 Press OK In Out Linear Linear Figure 13 3 Selecting a Path in a Cuelist Window The different types of path are explained in Paths p 210 13 3 212 Individual Parameter Timings When you record a cue all of the fixture parameters in the cue are assigned the default fade delay and path values Similarly when you assign timings to a cue after recording the tim
445. rtho mode helps the accurate positioning of fixtures by con straining pan while changing tilt or vice versa The Status Bar at the right hand end of the Command Line Toolbar shows when the Trackball is in Position Mode with the legend POS and when it is in Ortho Mode with the legend Ortho You can assign the way that fixtures move in relation to the Trackball See Inverting and Swapping Pan and Tilt Axes p 121 Tip An external mouse will always control the graphical pointer so you can keep the Trackball in position mode to save having to change modes as you program Using the Parameter Wheels The pan and tilt parameters also appear on the parameter wheels after the Position key is de pressed and can be used as an alternative to the Trackball Flip With some moving lights there is more than one combination of pan and tilt that results in the beam hitting the same point on the stage You may sometimes want to change the pan and tilt combination being used for example to ensure that the fixture takes the most direct route during a position change The Flip function cycles the selected fixtures through the possible combinations in turn To do this select the fixture or fixtures and press Flip on the Main Toolbar Holding the Pig key down while pressing Flip cycles through the combinations the other way Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the top left Trackball key also acts as a Flip key for quick access whi
446. s Values gt gt tr Positior Num Intensity oe a a Desk Channel Green values are in a Go state Show Palettes Values n Positi Num amp Intensity ee ran s Tit Studio Spot 575 o oven Jase Joe fi o oven fase foo fi 0 open jase Joe Ji Orange values are in a mark state Num amp intensity RGB LED 101 102 103 104 105 4 Output E Show Desk Palettes Values Channel Num 4 intensity vce Position Pan Desk Channel 1 eI SSASLLL LAD a SILL ILL LL i gt Red values are in a pause state Output E Show Desk Palettes vars Channel Pe Position Num Intensit i y Tvoe Pan Desk Channel 1 Teal values are from an effect Values Effects Sources Plots Strobe Position Bold Dark Blue values are from a plot High End Systems 283 Section 17 Playback 17 4 4 The Levels View Window The Levels View window displays the output value of all intensities controlled by Hog 40S from all cuelists virtual cuelists scenes the Programmer and other editors and parked parameters It provides an accurate indication of the status of shared intensity values when multiple cuelists are running simultaneously see Figure 17 8 The Levels View Window To open the Levels View window e Press and hold the Open key then select Levels from the Main Toolbar Levels View Values Effects Sources Figure 17 8 The Levels View Window The Level
447. s View window by default displays raw intensity values you can configure it via buttons at the top of the window to display output information in the following ways e Values displays the raw parameter values e Source displays the source that currently has control of an intensity for ex ample the Programmer or a cuelist and cue number e Plots displays the name of the plot that has control of the parameter if you want to see the real world value being calculated by the plot for the parameter then choose value instead of plots Show Palettes as with source displays the palette that is supplying the intensity value Crossfading values will appear in the Levels View window in the following colors 284 High End Systems Section 17 Playback 17 5 Advanced Playback 17 5 1 Adjusting the Playback and Effect Rates of a Master The playback and effect rates of a master cuelist scene chase can be adjusted several different ways High End Systems Changing the playback and effect rate fields in the cuelist scene options window The simplest way to adjust the playback and effects rates of a master cuelist scene chase is to open the options window for that master and modify the playback and effect rate fields Any modifications made to the playback and effect rate fields in the options window are stored and persisted for that cuelist scene as the base rate Holding choose and adjusting the main encoder wheels P
448. s attached to it will be deleted from the plot To edit a gang change its properties 1 Enable the gang edit button at the top of the plot window 2 Select the gang you wish to edit 3 Use the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window to adjust the the gang s position size fixture layout fixture ordering etc You can also reposition the gang by using the mouse or touchscreen to click and drag the gang into position Similarly you can resize and rotate the gang using the blue object handles that appear when the gang is selected circle handle for gang rotation square handle for gang sizing 20 2 3 PixelMaps PixelMaps are rectangular plot objects which can be used to map the pixels of rich media content photos and videos onto lighting fixtures through a process known as PixelMapping In this section we will discuss how to add remove PixelMaps in plots For more detailed information on PixelMapping refer to section 20 4 To add a PixelMap 1 Enable the PixelMap edit button at the top of the plot window Basic Plot 2 Click on the add PixelMap tab of the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window 318 High End Systems Section 20 Plots 3 Touch or left click and drag across the plot window to draw a pixel map To remove a PixelMap Enable the gang edit button at the top of the plot window Select the gang you wish to delete Press the Delete button in the proper
449. s cell and press Set Choose Rate from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX range for the Linear Strobe according to the DMX protocol 1 gt 127 and press Enter Select the Real World value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in Hertz 0 gt 30hz and press Enter Repeat steps 8 13 for the random strobe ability of the fixture Fixture Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories Select Control on the left column to display a list of Control function sub categories Select Fixture Control as the desired function The window will close and you will see Fixture Control assigned as the function for channel 10 Note the feature column will auto fill with Idle Select this cell and press Set Choose Global Reset from the dialog box Select the DMX value cell for this DMX Entry and press Set Enter the DMX for the fixture reset according to the DMX protocol 205 and press Enter Repeat the above steps for the shutdown ability of the fixture Note that Real World values are not allowed for Control functions High End Systems 391 Section 27 The Fixture Builder Lamp Control commands from Strobe channel 1 5 Select the function cell for a blank DMX Entry of channel 10 and press Set
450. s in External DC Power Supply 5 5A 12V 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum USB Type B USB Input Socket Universal Serial Bus 2 0 ports 2 rear DMX Out 4 x 5 pin XLR DMX Outputs when DMX output kit is in stalled 36 7 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 5W Weight 18 1 Ibs 8 21 kg Dimensions 26 7 678 18mm wide by 13 76 349 52mm deep by 3 54 89 85mm high 36 8 DMX Processor 8000 36 8 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in V Lock style locking IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 4A maximum DMX out Neutrik 5 pin female XLR Isolated Half Duplex DMX512 outputs x8 Ethernet EtherCon Gigabit Ethernet port x2 Expansion USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 36 8 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 200W Weight 2 7Kg Dimensions 480mm w x 280mm d x 45mm h 1U 19 inch rack compatible 464 High End Systems Section 36 Technical Specifications 36 9 Playback Wing 4 36 9 1 Input and Output Connections Mains in Built in Power Supply with IEC 320 connector 100 240V 50 60Hz 1 5A maximum Digital video in DVI D connector USB Type B USB input socket USB A 2 0 High Speed x2 36 9 2 Power Weight and Dimensions Power 75W Weight 27 6 Ibs 12 51 kg Dimensions 20 14 511 56mm wide by 24 02 610 05mm deep by 9 62 244 34mm high 36 9 3 Performance Display 15 6 Diagonal active matrix TFT LCD Native resolution 1366 x 768 Input frequency 31 5 80 kHz H 56 75 Hz V Contrast
451. s preferable to program using Hue and Saturation whenever possible The advantages are e Selecting colours using Hue and Saturation or the colour picker will produce the same visual colour output on all calibrated fixture types e You can use fanning and effects on Hue and Saturation to produce attractive looks quickly e When you use Hue and Saturation to pick a colour Hog 40S will automatically use the best possible DMX value settings for each fixture type to achieve maximum light output from each fixture e You can crossfade from a saturated red to a saturated green without the saturation changing The crossfade will work through all the saturated colours between red and green rather than taking an unexpected path to get there as can happen when using CMY programming e Crossfades between colours recorded using Hue and Saturation will remain matched on all fixtures through the progress of the crossfade This produces a better more even looking colour crossfade Tip It is strongly recommended that you do not change between the HSI and CMY systems within a show Palettes and Directories Palettes help to simplify the programming process by allowing pre defined lighting elements to be created and then used as required Once you have created a palette such as a particular set of position settings with moving lights you can recall those settings instantly and record them into cues Palettes are stoed in windows called director
452. s to act as the Hog 4PC FixtureNet port 1 Control Panel gt FixtureNet 2 Select a network adapter from the list of available adapters at the top of the window If only one network adapter is available then it will be selected automatically and the drop down box will be greyed out If no network adapters are available the drop down menu will be blank and greyed out Important Hog 4PC will only output Art Net and sACN for universes 1 thru 8 anda USB DMX Widget must be connected and assigned to the matching uni verse Important It is recommended that you do not combine HogNet and Art Net or E1 31 sACN within the same network This can produce network errors and unreliable data When using Hog 4PC you have the ability to assign High End Systems 79 3 4 2 80 Section 3 Setting Up the System both HogNet and Art Net E1 31 to a single adapter but using separate network adapters is strongly advised Configuring the FixtureNet Port In order to successfully output Art Net or E1 31 from your Hog 4 console DMX Processor 8000 or Hog 4PC you must first properly configure the FixtureNet s IP address to settings that are appropriate for your network To configure DMX Processor 8000 s FixtureNet from the DP8000 front panel Network Fixture gt FixtureNetConfig To configure DP8000 s FixtureNet from the console 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 and press Settings 3 Selec
453. se you should use a custom IP address Custom IP address This option allows you to specify the IP address and subnet mask settings of the Console This option is most commonly used on networks where a DHCP server is not present but multiple unique IP addresses need to be specified Enabling the DHCP Server In addition to being DHCP client compatible all network enabled consoles are also capable of running a DHCP server themselves Enabling DHCP allows the console to hand out IP addresses to other consoles DMX Processors and computers on the network without needing to manually configure static IP addresses for every device on the network Choosing BOOT Server ONLY Included in the DHCP server options of the console is the Boot server The Boot server process is separate from the DHCP server and is used by Hog consoles to provide remote software imaging for the DMX Processor 8000 You can select options to either run only a Boot server with or without a custom address range or to run both a Boot server and a DHCP server When running both the custom address range applies to both the DHCP server and the Boot server Using a Custom DHCP Server Range Sometimes in more complex networks where more than one DHCP server is present specifying a custom DHCP server range is necessary to avoid IP address conflicts Using a custom DHCP address range applies to both the DHCP server and the Boot server processes To use a custom DHCP range on your cons
454. sed does not operate if fader is assigned to scale Press Solo to have the intensity outputs of all other masters taken to zero when the Flash key is pressed If you select Latching the action of the Flash key is maintained until it is pressed a second time Configuring the Main Controls When you configure the main playback controls the settings are part of the cuelist and will be applied whenever you select the Choose key for the master that the cuelist is on The configur ation options for the main control keys are shown in the following table Main Go keys The Assert Release Goto Skip Forwards Skip Backwards Main Halt and Goto cmdline Goto Skip forward Skip back Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Assert Asserts the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own assert time overriding the cuelist s assert time Release Releases the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own release time overriding the cuelist s release time Go Go s the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own fade time overriding the cuelist s time Halt Halts the chosen master stopping any fades that are in progress Back Reverses the currently running crossfade on the chosen master Deselect Use default cuelist time to enter your own back time overriding the cuelist s back time Restart Goes to the first cue in the cuelist on the chosen
455. sengage the DBO key its red light will turn off and the Grandmaster fader will regain control Flash key below the Grand Master The Flash key below the Grand Master fader is a non latching key that can be assigned in the user preferences window to send the grand master s level to zero to full or to whichever value is opposing the grandmaster s current fader position 17 7 Inhibitive Masters Inhibitive masters allow you to limit the intensity of a group of fixtures If the inhibitive master is at full then the fixtures that it controls will be at the level determined by the playbacks Pro grammer and so on As the inhibitive master level is reduced the fixture intensities will be re duced in proportion For example if you have four fixtures at 0 50 80 and 100 in a cue that is being output and these fixtures are also in an inhibitive master then the levels will change as follows Fixture 1 2 3 4 Master at 100 0 50 80 100 Master at50 0 25 40 50 Master at 0 0 0 0 0 Pressing the Flash key of an inhibitive master is the same as momentarily changing its fader level to 0 taking all fixture intensities controlled by the inhibitive master to 0 Intensity values are restored when you release the key To create an inhibitive master 1 Record a group containing the required fixtures See Recording Groups p 151 2 Group Group open the Group Directory 3 Select the required group To ensure you don
456. ser Preferences window Click on the Import button browse to the location of your preferences files and select a preferences file to import 4 12 Merging Shows Show merging allows you to take the programming from one show and merge it into another show To merge show files you must first load the show you want to merge data into This is known as the current show The show you then select to merge data in from is called the source show To select a source show to merge in 1 High End Systems Setup Shows gt Current Show opens the Current Show pane of the Show Manager Press Merge to be guided through the merge process The Merge Show window will open see Figure 4 4 The Source Location page of the Merge Show window Choose a source show file Note that if you have chosen a backup bck or Shw file it may take a few extra moments for the console to uncompress the show file and read its contents Once you have chosen a source show you will be offered several options for data that can be merged Fixture Types Fixtures and Programming user kinds groups palettes plots cuelists scenes pages macros views and re ports 99 Section 4 Shows Merge Show Source Location CY a Description Created Modified Hog 4 Show 9 25 2012 2 53 12 PM 9 25 2012 2 59 42 PM Festival Show Hog 4 Show 9 10 2012 2 29 44 PM 9 25 2012 2 59 50 PM q Main Stage Show Hog 4 Show 9 24 2012 9 45 24 AM 9 24 2012
457. specific start address leaving other start addresses associated with the fixture intact Unpatching by Fixture To unpatch all patch information associated with a fixture 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 2 Select the fixture by clicking on it then press Unpatch at the top of the Fixture window This unpatches the fixture but leaves all programming for the fixture intact 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Or using the command line 1 Setup Patch open the Fixture window 114 High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 2 Fixture 1 Pig Enter 3 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to send the new patch in formation to the DP8000s Unpatching by DMX Address To unpatch a specific DMX start address you need to change the Fixture window to View by DP 1 Setup gt Patch open the Fixture window 2 View by DP change the Fixture window to View by DP When View by DP is selected the Unpatch button is available on the top toolbar of the Fixture window To unpatch start address 200 in the currently selected DMX universe highlighted in blue Unpatch 200 To unpatch several start addresses e Unpatch 1 2 200 2 3 300 To unpatch a range of start addresses e Unpatch 200 Thru 300 unpatches all start addresses between 200 and 300 To unpatch an entire universe 1 Cl
458. ssigned to one of the choose keys on the console it is know as a physical master oth erwise it is referred to as a virtual master See Also cuelist A Hog accessory that increases the number of physical masters available on the console by 30 471 472 media picker MIDI MIDI Show Control modifier multicast net number node on stage open sound control OSC out time page Glossary See Also master A graphic user interface window that displays selectabled thumnbail previews of slotted content for the current fixture selection See Also CITP Musical Instrument Digital Interface Allows communication of musical notes programmes and timing data between electronic instruments and other devices such as lighting consoles See Also timecode Subset of MIDI used in the entertainment industry for integrated control of lighting sound and stage automation A key that is used in conjunction with other keys or buttons to change the effect that it has For example the Pig key See Also pig key A network protocol or language that computers use to talk to each other over Ethernet Hog 40S uses this standard protocol which means that it can safely be connected to other networks of computers and will not in terfere with them For show critical situations you should run Hog system on its own independent network See Also ethernet The number that identifies the console when it is operating as part of a
459. st 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Reset on Release Properties O 0O qe ls A Chase Reset On Release 0o Track Through Loops 0o Mark Fade New Cues Mark Time New Cues 0O QO Mask Playback Select Playback Mask Alternatively you can turn on Reset on Release for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Releasing on Another Go When running several cuelists in a show see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 273 you may want a cuelist to release when another cuelist is triggered This effectively gives the cuelist the lowest possible playback priority for more on playback priority see Changing a Cuelist s High End Systems 265 Section 17 Playback Priority p 276 You can set Release on Other Go in the Playback Options window of each cuelist 1 Open Choose gt Options gt Cuelist 2 Select Release on Other Go Playback Priority W a A Priority CT Persist On Override Alternatively you can turn on Release on Other Go for all new cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist 17 1 4 Choosing and Selecting Masters At all times one of the physical masters of the console is chosen When a master is chosen its choose LED will be illuminated the title of the master will be shown on the playback bar with a blue background and the master s name will be a
460. st make sure that the Guard button in the Cuelist Directory window is deselected Then press a cuelist button in the directory and it will playback onstage as if Go had been pressed on a physical master Holding your finger down on the cuelist s button is the equivalent of holding the master s Choose key and you can then use the central playback controls The cuelist buttons in the directory are coloured to show the cuelist status e Green cuelist is crossfading into a cue e Red cuelist is paused in the middle of a crossfade e Purple cuelist is releasing e Grey cuelist is overridden e Blue cuelist is active on stage and halted e Teal cuelist is active on stage halted and running effects Cue 1 48 4 Active Active w Running FX Cue 1 17 2 2 Using Cuelist Play Controls to Play a Master To run a cuelist virtual master from the cuelist window 272 High End Systems Section 17 Playback 1 Open List open the Cuelist Directory window Check that the Guard button is depressed Open List 1 open the required cuelist e p Press the Play Controls button in the Cuelist window The on screen playback controls will appear Chosen Master List 1 a a8 K gt i Release Options Number Name Mark Comment The controls are from left to right the Go Halt Back Skip Back Skip Forward and Release buttons These function in the same way as their front panel equivalents see The Main Co
461. st cue needs to be increased by 12 frames you may want the values for all the subsequent cues to also be increased by 12 frames to maintain the 1 second separation Hog 40S allows you to do this easily 1 Open gt Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Click and drag to select the Wait cells for the range of cues you want to edit High End Systems Section 21 MIDI Press Set 4 Edit the timecode value of the first cell then press Enter All the selected timecode values will be adjusted by the same amount of time added or subtrac ted from the first value 21 3 5 Simulating MIDI Timecode You can temporarily simulate midi timecode on the console using the Timecode Toolbar To simulate Midi timecode 1 Press the simulate button on the Timecode Toolbar Simulate is now enabled and all external timecode input for that source will be ignored 2 Press the play button next to the simulate button to simulate timecode from the current clock value as displayed for that timecode toolbar TIP Using the jump toolbar you can jump the simulated timecode value to six different jump points To change the jump points click on the word TIMECODE on the far left hand side of the timecode toolbar A drop down menu will appear with a set of fields allowing you to change the simulated jump points High End Systems 339 Section 22 Open Sound Control 22 1 Introduction to OSC Open Sound Control OSC is a modern network based communicat
462. st is displayed Tip As well as the buttons in the Cue Editor window you can also step through the cues using the Next and Back keys while holding down the Cue key 11 7 Working with Tracking Hog 40S uses tracking which gives it some very powerful abilities Tracking can also add extra complexity but Hog 40S has several functions that make working with tracking straightforward For a detailed discussion about tracking see Tracking p 31 11 7 1 Tracking Values Backwards When Recording You can use the Track Backwards feature when you record a cue to assign the parameter values to the last cue they appeared in rather than the cue being recorded For example suppose that you have a series of cues with intensity values for three fixtures Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 70 High End Systems 189 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists If you assign all three fixtures to 100 and record with merge into Cue 3 see Insert Merge and Replace p 184 for recording with merging you would get these values Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 50 50 50 Cue 2 60 60 Cue 3 100 100 100 However if you did the same thing with Track Backwards you would get Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 50 50 100 Cue 2 60 100 Cue 3 100 The value of 100 has been applied to the last cue that the intensity parameter had a value in If you Track Backwards a parameter that hasn t been given a value since the start of the cuelis
463. stem Restore p 413 33 2 No DMX Output from Console s built in DMX Outputs 1 High End Systems Open the control panel setup control panel and select the system info tab Ensure the serial number of the internal DMX Widget is being reported For HedgeHog consoles two DMX Widgets should be reported If the widget serial is listed then move to step 2 and continue troubleshootng If it is listed as not found then most likely the widget s power and or USB cable has been disconnected Access the inside of the console and confirm the widget has power and a good USB connection to the motherboard Open the network window setup network and make sure the internal DP8000 is reporting Outputs Active If the internal DP8000 is reported as offline then log off the show and click on the settings button in the start window Ensure that run internal DP is turned on and set to the appropriate net number Log back onto the show and check output again If console is still not ouputting DMX then proceed to step 3 and continue troubleshooting Double check the patch window and ensure that fixtures are patched to the correct DP and dmx universes This sounds like a simple thing to check but in some cases output is failing only due to a mis patch If the console is still not outputting dmx then proceed to step 4 Open the network window setup network and click on the DP8000 to which the fixtures are patched Click on the settings button In
464. stom Fixture When programming with the fixture from the tutorial bear in mind the following High End Systems Pan and Tilt are 16 bit DMX but appear as a single parameter and use 2 DMX channels each Cyan Magenta and Yellow function properly in respect to the DMX values being inverted from the Real World value The Gobo slots appear on the Slot toolbar The Gobo Spin and Random functions appear on the Gobo encoder wheel The various types of parameters that are controlling channel 10 shutter strobe fixture control and lamp control Notice how each appears as unique functions although they all output on the same DMX channel 395 Section 28 Key amp Button Combinations Many of the console s functions can be accessed quickly through a mixture of front panel key combinations and on screen button combinations The following tables lists these combinations and their uses Programming Patching Key Presses Result Pig with parameter wheels Pig Blind Pig Flip Encoder Wheel Pig Encoder Wheel Pig Nudge Up above the I Wheel Pig Nudge Down below the I Wheel Pig Park Pig Touch Pig with the I Wheel Pig Moving the parameter wheel with Pig allows fine adjustment of the parameter so that each turn of the wheel will change the parameter value by a smaller amount making exact adjustments easier When leaving blind mode parameters will fade to their new values in
465. stored in the show file and is included in show file backups To add custom media content to the PixelMap Content Package 1 Put the custom content you wish to import into the show onto a USB Flash Drive 2 Insert the USB Flash Drive into one of the console s USB ports 3 Open the shows window on the console Press Setup key on front panel and select Shows from the main toolbar 4 Select the PixelMap Content tab of the shows window On the left hand side of the window you will see a normal file browser where you can access files and folders on both the internal hard drive as well as on external drives such as USB flash drives On the the right hand side of the window is a broswer that allows you to see the contents of the PixelMap Content Package Note If the PixelMap Content tab doesn t show up in the shows window then you have not yet scheduled a PixelMap layer in your show and will need to do so first 5 Create a new folder in the PixelMap Content Package by clicking on the new folder icon at the top of the window or by right clicking in the browser and selecting new folder 6 Give the folder a dmx address assignment by right clicking on the folder and selecting renumber Enter a numeric value and confirm by pressing Enter 7 Use the browser on the left hand side of the window to locate media stored on the external USB flash drive that you inserted into the console in step 2 8 Drag and drop the media files you wis
466. t the value is added to the first cue in the cuelist To record a cue with Track Backwards select the Backwards button on the Record Options Toolbar that appears after you press the Record key 1 2 3 4 Z Fixture 1 Thru 3 100 Enter Record Cue 3 Select Track Backwards on the Record Options Toolbar Enter Tip You can also Track Backwards when you update cues using Auto Update see Auto Update p 252 11 7 2 Stopping Values from Tracking Forward When you insert a new cue into a cuelist or merge changes into an existing cue the new values track forwards into later cues in the cuelist For example your cuelist has Cues 1 to 4 and Cue 1 has Fixture 1 programmed into it at 30 so that it tracks through the subsequent cues Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 190 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists You now insert a Cue 2 5 with Fixture 1 at 100 Because cues 3 and 4 do not change the intensity of Fixture 1 it will remain at 100 for the rest of the cuelist Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 40 You may want to record the new cue so that parameter values in the new cue return to their ori ginal value in the next cue so that the inserted cue does not change the original looks due to tracking Fixture 1 2 3 Cue 1 30 50 100 Cue 2 100 60 Cue 2 5 100 Cue 3 30 50 Cue 4 40 Ho
467. t 1 open the cuelist window 2 Press Options and select the Track Through Loops tickbox Note that Track Through Loops also applies when the cuelist automatically loops back to the start of the list after you play back the last cue in the list Important The Track Through Loops option applies to the whole cuelist Using it may have unintended consequences when playing back other cues in the cuelist out of sequence High End Systems 225 Section 14 Effects Effects can be used to create a repeating change or movement in the value of fixture parameters Effects are recorded as part of cues scenes and palettes 14 1 Table Effects Table effects are effects applied to fixture functions using wave tables that apply mathematical functions such as sine or tangent to values against time Table effects have seven main attributes table size rate offset and length bounce and direction Each effect table also has its own timing parameters for fade delay and path There are three ways to apply table effects to a fixture selection Predefined Effect Palettes A range of pre programmed effects can be found in the effects dir ectory window that can be quickly applied and then tweaked if desired The Effects Engine A special editor window where users can assign and edit the effects values for the current fixture selection Using the Programmer Cue Editors You can assign and edit effects values for specific fixture in e
468. t Colour on the left column to display a list of Colour function sub cat egories 3 Select Cyan as the desired function The window will close and you will see Cyan assigned as the function and feature for channel 6 Note the feature column will auto fill with variable High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 6 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the Cyan channel 255 gt 0 and press Enter Note that the DMX value is inverted because the protocol shows 0 is full colour and 255 is no colour 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 6 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter 6 Repeat the above steps for Magenta on channel 7 and Yellow on channel 8 Gobo Wheel Since the DMX Protocol lists 8 discrete DMX values or ranges used by channel 9 the number of DMX entries needs to be increased for this channel 1 Select the Channel cell for channel 9 2 Press the New DMX Entry button to add an additional DMX entry for channel 9 3 Repeat the above until there are 8 channel entries for this channel High End Systems 385 Section 27 The Fixture Builder ixture Builder Tutorial W CreateNew Copy From Delete Current Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 05 10 2012 11 02 27 Notes The fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s 1
469. t happens when you press the Go key during a loop see Action of go when Looping p 269 224 High End Systems Section 13 Timing 13 5 3 Tracking Through Loops By default Hog 4OS s feature ensures that when you use links to change the order of cue play back the cues appear on stage as if they had been played back in the order they appear in the cuelist Sometimes however you might want to track through links rather than maintain state For ex ample you are creating a loop where the first time through you want the four fixtures to come on one at a time and throughout the loop you want them to alternate colour between red and blue To do this you might plot Cue Fixture 1 Fixture 2 Fixture 3 Fixture 4 Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour Int Colour 1 50 Red Blue Red Blue 2 J Blue 50 Red Blue Red 3 L Red 4 Blue 50 Red Blue 4 J Blue L Red L Blue 50 Red 5 Link to Cue 1 The idea is that the intensity of the next fixture is brought to 50 in each cue and that these values then track through for the duration of the loop shown by the arrows However because of the Maintain State function when the cuelist loops back to cue 1 Hog 40S will make cue 1 look as it would have if you had run the cuelist in order The result is that fixtures 2 to 4 will go out just as they were the first time round the loop To stop this happening you need to enable Track Through Loops in the Cuelist Options window 1 Open Lis
470. t in an adjustment to the base value for that fixture function as well The start value of an effect is the real world value at which the function will start the effect The start value of an effect is directly tied to the offset value of an effect High End Systems 229 Section 14 Effects The following diagram shows the begin end and start points of a simple efffect Begin Start Effect Length The length is the proportion of the effect s period that it is active for It is assigned as a percentage The following diagram shows how the value of a parameter assigned to the sawtooth table changes over time with different length values VAN 100 50 200 N Shot This is the number of times that the effect repeats before finishing A dash in the N Shot cell denotes that the effect will run indefinitely Bounce When bounce is enabled for an effect the fixture function will run one direction through the effect cycle and then reverse direction to run through the cycle in the oppositie direction and will con tinue to alternate the direction in which it runs through the cycle Direction The direction of an effect determines whether the selected wave table will be applied to the function in a forward or reverse direction 14 1 3 Building Table Effects in the Effects Engine To apply an effect 1 Inthe Programmer or editor select the required fixtures and assign their base parameter values These settings will be the unde
471. t page Releases any active scenes NOT attached to masters on the current page Plays all cuelists and scenes attached to masters on the current page Pauses all cuelists and scenes attached to masters on the current page Allows for the adjustment of that master s playback rate effect rate and effect size and intensity using the main encoder wheels Opens the Launched Processes window 439 440 Pig Open 1 Pig Open 5 Pig Open Delete Misc Pig Enter Pig Setup Pig Undo Pig text with on screen key board Setup first encoder wheel but ton Setup encoder wheels Pig Section 32 Cheat Sheets Opens the Log Viewer window Opens the debug toolbar Restarts the console after holding this key combina tion for 5 seconds Toggles the function keys between Kind Key and Command Key mode Toggles the worklight on and off Redo Acts as a shift key to type upper case characters Calibrate touchscreens quit calibration by pressing setup key Adjustment for brightness of Icd backlights leds on front panel keys desklights and worklight Toggles slot toolbar and encoder wheel toolbar on off High End Systems Section 32 Cheat Sheets 32 3 Front Panel Diagrams vrg yag E ie E e E Damh KSN p VA VSA TOC oS D o SeA vy PaA gt lt TO OUO S ys os K gt Damm l Je Figure 32 2 Programmer section of the Hog 4 front panel
472. t the FixtureNet pane of the DMX Processor Settings window To configure the Hog 4 console or Hog 4PC s assigned FixtureNet port from the console 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 assigned to net number 1 or whichever DMX Processor is associated with the local internal DMX Processor 8000 in your show and press Settings 3 Select the FixtureNet pane of the DMX Processor Settings window From these configurations menus you can configure the FixtureNet s IP address source address in one of two ways e Obtain an IP address using DHCP select this option when running the Art Net side of the console on a network that contains a DHCP server such as a DHCP router When using DHCP the IP Address Netmask and Gateway fields will be grayed out The information contained with them is not relevant to the DHCP configuration Important If you select Obtain an IP address using DHCP on the console and no DHCP server is present on the FixtureNet network then the FixtureNet adapter will revert to a loopback address of 127 0 0 1 Use Custom IP Settings This option allows you to specify the IP address and subnet mask settings of the FixtureNet adapter This option is most commonly used on networks where a DHCP server is not present Once selected you will need to enter the IP Address Netmask and Gateway for this device on the network High End Systems Section 3 Setting Up the System 3 4
473. t the top left hand corner of the plot window 2 Hold Open and turn the third encoder wheel on the front panel 3 Hold Open and turn the trackball ring There are three main ways to scroll the plot window horzontally and vertically 1 Use the scroll bars in plot window 2 Hold Open and turn the first and second main encoder wheels on the front panel 3 Hold Open and move the trackball up down left right Feedback The plot window provides feedback for the fixtures in the plot in terms of intensity and mixed color CMY HS RGB Note Slotted colors gobos and other media are not yet supported in the plot feedback system Figure 20 3 Example of Plot Window with Feedback 321 Section 20 Plots 20 4 20 4 1 322 PixelMapping One of the more complex objects that can be added to a plot is a PixelMap A PixelMap allows the fixtures inside of it to dynamically change their parameter values based on the PixelMap Layer content being sent to the PixelMap This process is called PixelMapping Section 20 2 3 covers how to add and remove PixelMaps in a plot In this section we will discuss how to add and assign PixelMap Layers to PixelMaps how to program fixtures to use PixelMap values and how to manage PixelMap Layer content PixelMap Layers PixelMaps are responsible for mapping media content onto lighting fixtures but they do not supply the media content themselves The content comes from programable fixtures kno
474. tallation of Hog 4PC software 31 3 Hardware Installation Hardware installation for Hog 4PC should only be performed after the Hog 4PC software has been installed on your computer 31 3 1 Unpacking Hardware Components If you ordered a USB DMX Widget Super Widget or Super Duper Widget you should have received e USB Widget e Power supply not needed for single universe dmx widget e USB cable e Hog 4PC software installation CD If you ordered a USB Wing you should have received e USB Wing e Protective cover for the wing e USB cable High End Systems 429 Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC e Power supply unit with IEC power cable e LED desklight with protective pouch If you ordered an LTC Midi Combo I O Widget you should have received e USB I O widget e USB cable 31 3 2 USB DMX Widgets Hog 4PC supports up to eight universes of DMX output via USB DMX widgets You can connect any combination of USB DMX Super Widgets or USB DMX Widgets or USB DMX Super Duper Widgets to total 8 DMX outputs In addition an unlimited number of DMX outputs is possible when using Hog DMX Processors Connecting and mapping DMX Widgets to Hog 4PC also enables those Hog universes to be output through art net and sACN Always connect DMX widgets either directly to your computer or to a self powered hub To configure Widgets 1 Setup Network open the Network window 2 Select the DMX Processor 8000 in the list by clicking on i
475. tart the console 6 When the console boots up a full install menu will appear Press Enter on the built in keyboard or external USB keyboard to begin the installation Note If you used Unetbootin on your Macintosh computer to create the USB flash drive you will not see this step and the installtion process will begin automatically Full Boar 4 Road Hog 4 and HedgeHog 4 If do not have an external USB keyboard plugged into the console you can use the enter key on the front panel for this step but you must first put the console s front panel into HID mode To put the console s front panel into HID mode press the cursor up key while holding down the pig and fan keys The blind key led will start flashing to indicate the front panel is in HID mode Pressing enter on your console s front panel will now continue the full install procedure 7 The installation will now take several minutes to complete 8 When the installation procedure is complete a finish the installation screen will appear Remove the Full Install USB flash drive from the console and press the Enter key on the built in keyboard external USB keyboard or front panel if the front panel is in HID mode to finalize the installation The console will now reboot 9 IMPORTANT If you put the console s front panel into HID mode during the installation procedure be sure to set it back to Hog mode after the full install is complete To do this press the cursor down key while
476. tart window If a show is running on the network and on the same port number then it s file name will show up on the button Pressing the button will connect the console to that show If No Show found is displayed on the button then it s possible your network settings may need to be reconfigured in order to connect to a network show First check the following e Make sure your console is set to the same port number as the server console on the network High End Systems 89 Section 4 Shows Check that your console s IP address settings are correct for that particular network setup 4 4 Change the Currently Loaded Show If you are logged into a show but want to change to a different show 1 Ds 3 Setup gt Quit Select Log Off In the Start window either launch a new show or browse to launch an existing show 4 5 90 Automatically Launch a Show at Console Startup You can assign the Hog 40S to automatically launch an existing show file at startup 1 2 3 4 Setup Control Panel Auto Launch Select Enable Auto Launch Choose a show file you wish to auto launch Assign a delay time which will determine how long the console will wait before the show is automatically launched At startup a pop up window will tell you that the show will be launched automatically after the assigned delay see Figure 4 1 The Auto Launch window Click Load Now to ignore the re maining delay and launch the
477. tax 21 comment macro see macro compact mode spreadsheets 41 compress show 93 479 console locking the console 57 reporting problems 446 updating software 413 console failover 71 console tracking 75 control panel console date and time 51 displays 53 keyboard 55 56 network settings 89 system info 446 copy 44 copying cuelists 200 cuelists to pages 306 cues 186 effects 238 fixture parameter values 142 fixtures 116 groups 153 inhibitive masters to pages 306 pages 307 palettes 158 parameter values into an editor 250 scenes 204 scenes to pages 306 shows 48 user kinds 241 creating effects 230 pages 301 creation date 48 crossfade manual 286 cue only 291 cuelist directory 34 cuelists 197 configuring playback controls 294 copying 200 copying to pages 306 cue only 269 default rate 268 deleting 199 effect rate 285 effect size 286 feedback 280 IPCB fader mode 287 moving 200 moving to pages 306 480 Index multiple 273 naming 198 options 266 ordering of cues 223 pages 301 playback 259 playback rate 285 removing from pages 306 renumbering 187 status 278 using as a chase 288 wrapping 268 cues clock triggers 220 copying 186 deleting 185 editing contents 188 editing parameter timings 212 editing times 210 follow on 218 learn timing 219 linking 223 looping 223 manual 218 moving 187 naming 184 numbering 184 order
478. tching 271 release on off 271 solo 271 flash key 260 flip 133 follow chosen 281 follow cue 281 follow current 189 follow next 189 follow on 218 follow on time 207 forward button 190 191 Front Panel HID Mode 413 front panel diagrams 441 G generic fixtures 105 global palettes 159 global button when recording palettes 159 glossary 19 467 gm key 292 go key 260 gobo reversing rotation 135 grand master 292 dbo Key 293 flash key 293 gm key 292 graphical user interface 23 432 group directory 34 groupings see fanning groups 151 copying 153 creating automatically 117 deleting 152 editing contents 152 moving 153 High End Systems naming 151 recording 151 removing fixtures 152 using 152 guard button 34 45 272 H halt 218 action of halt when halted 269 halt key 260 hard command see hard value hard values 31 140 192 HedgeHog Console upgrading model 417 help getting started 19 key to this manual 19 help button 34 45 HID Mode 413 highlight 251 customising 251 highlight palette 34 Hog 4 Consoles clean software install 413 Full Boar 4 technical specifications 460 Hedge Hog 4 technical specifications 462 463 Making A Bootable USB Flash Drive 414 415 Nano Hog 4 technical specifications 463 RackHog 4 technical specifications 459 Road Hog 4 technical specifications 461 technical specifications 459 Hog 4PC configuring widgets 430 installing har
479. ter Upper Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at top of travel Full e Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bottom of travel 0 value to the base effect rate of the master Upper Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at top of travel Full e Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bottom of travel 0 to the base effect size of the master Upper Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at top of travel Full e Lower Bound Determines the amount of scaling applied to the master when the fader is at bottom of travel 0 High End Systems 299 17 8 2 300 Section 17 Playback The Flash key Function Options and Notes None Disables the control Flash The Flash key brings either the intensity playback state or current scaler value determined by the assignment of the fader to a spe cified level determined by the cuelist or scene on the master This is equivalent to momentarily bringing the fader to a certain value You can enter a percentage level for the Flash function Press Go On Flash to go the master when the Flash key is pressed does not operate if fader is assigned to scale Press Release on Off to release the master when the Flash key is relea
480. ter a name for the folder and press Enter Note that you cannot create folders on a CD ROM Tip You can also create a new folder inside an existing one by right clicking on it and using the contextual menu Ejecting Disks You cannot eject a disk in the console CD drive if it is in use Before ejecting make sure that you don t have the disks folder selected in the File Browser If a disk will not eject check that you are not browsing its contents elsewhere and that the console is not currently accessing it Burning files to CD To burn files onto a recordable CD 1 Setup gt Shows gt CD Burning see Figure 2 17 The CD Burning pane of the Show Manager window 2 Select a file to be copied in the left hand list and click the Add to CD button to move it to the right hand list You may be asked to archive the file before adding it to the list click OK to agree to this 3 Repeat for all the files you want to copy to the CD 4 Insert a recordable CD into the CD drive located under the console s front wrist rest 5 Press the Burn button and then the Start Burn button in the CD Burning window The window will show the progress of the writing operation High End Systems 49 50 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Show Manager Browse the Nara Descrpton co Buming FA Fie Browser A Big S j09 4 Sho 9 10 2012 2 0223 PM Hog 4 Show 222944 Pu w g Main Stage Show Hog 4 Show 9 10 2012 3 26 47 PM Fie Folder
481. ter types recorded in the palette intensity P position C colour B beam E effect T time See Recording Palettes with Kind Masking p 161 The palette is a direct palette See Direct Palettes p 164 The palette contains references to other palettes See Reference Palettes p 164 The palette is the Highlight Palette See Customising Highlight p 251 The palette is the Lowlight Palette See Customising Highlight p 251 The cuelist is a chase See Using a Cuelist as a Chase p 288 The cuelist has timecode active See MIDI p 327 The cuelist has clock triggers that are enabled See Clock Triggers p 220 The page is the template page See The Template Page p 308 The page has a Restore Activity macro defined See Restoring Activity When Changing Pages p 304 You can rename the selected button with the red border by pressing the Set key You can also hold Set and press any button to rename it At the top of the window there are four buttons common to all directories Switches to a spreadsheet view allowing you to edit attributes of the items in the directory such as their names See Spreadsheets p 39 and Figure 2 8 A Typical Directory in Spreadsheet View Reports This allows you to print the contents of the window Td i Configure This allows you to control various aspects of how the directory window displays information Guard When this is depressed p
482. that run automatically connected with link and delay attributes See Also cue cuelist Controller Interface Transfer Protocol a protocol used by the Hog 4 OS to supply the media picker with thumbnail previews of content on con nected Media Servers See Also media picker User created single button executers that trigger existing show objects 467 468 command line conversion curve crossfade cue cuelist dbo default value delay time desk channel DHCP dimmer curve directory DMX Glossary A method of entering information into the Programmer using the numer ical keypad and the button See Also programmer A curve that defines the relationship between the plotted parameter value and the DMX value sent to the dimmer or fixture Conversion curves are like dimmer curves or profiles on other consoles and should not be con fused with paths Conversion curves are properties of the fixture while the path is a property of a cue See Also path A transition between two cues one replacing the other A look on stage achieved through the manipulation of fixture parameters recorded as part of a cue list A cue requires a trigger either manual or automatic and has attributes such as fade wait and delay times See Also scene fade time wait time delay time A group of cues that run in a specific order consecutively or even simul taneously These may be automatically linked to form a chase or
483. the assigned or default fade time rather than snapping to their new values When using Flip to cycle a fixture through its flip positions goes through the possible positions in the reverse order to Flip without Pig Sets wheel to defaul value Sets wheel to default value and mode Nudges the intensity up by half the set nudge value Nudges the intensity down by half the set nudge value Unparks selected fixtures rather than parking them Un touches specified parameters and fixtures rather than touching them Intensities are increased or decreased in propor tion to their individual level rather than all in tensities changing by the same amount For example if fixture 1 is at 10 2 at 50 and the wheel is increased by 10 then fixture 1 will move to 11 and 2 will move to 55 When patching with View by DP enabled un patches the selected fixtures High End Systems 397 398 Section 28 Key amp Button Combinations Playback Key Presses Result Pig Main Go Pig Main Halt Pig Main Back Pig Release Pig Go Halt Back or Flash ona master Pig Next Page Scene Release List Release Pig Choose Pig 0 lt 9 Equivalent to pressing Go on all masters Equivalent to pressing Halt on all masters Equivalent to pressing Back on all masters Releases all masters Releases the individual master Changes the page to the previous page rather than the next page Re
484. the contents of the currently selected cells Pastes into the currently selected cells Removes values from the currently highlighted cells in the Programmer or editor Extends the selected cells in the spreadsheet Directories Key Presses Result Pig with the arrow keys Pig when pressing a button in a dir ectory Extends the selected directory items in the dir ectory Overrides the effect of the Guard button File Browser Key Presses Result Pig Copy Pig Record Pig with the arrow keys Pig when dragging files in the File Browser pane of the Show Manager window Copies select files to the clipboard Pastes files from the clipboard Extends the selected files in the file browser Copies the dragged files rather than moving them Console Debug Key Presses Result Pig Open delete Pig Open 1 Pig Open 5 Pig Open backspace Pig Open encoder wheel 1 button Restart the console Open Log View Window Opens Debug Toolbar Opens Launch Proccesses Window Calibrate Touchscreens quit with setup Pig when entering text with the on screen keyboard Pig Pig 0 lt 9 Pig setup Toggle Worklight On Off Misc Key Presses Result Pig Undo Redoes the last undone action Acts as a shift key to type upper case charac ters Toggle slot toolbar and encoder wheel toolbar off on Toggles playback bars off on High End Systems
485. the specific instructions that the fixtures need defined by their DMX protocol Referring to Fixtures The Hog 4OS treats every fixture as a single entity Every fixture is assigned a user number that allows users to easily recall a fixture and manipulate it s feature set no matter how many parameters it has For more information on giving your fixtures custom user numbers see Modifying the User Number p 120 Hog 40S treats conventional lights consisting of a luminaire controlled by a dimmer as a special kind of fixture known as a desk channel A desk channel has only one parameter intensity Real World Units Fixture parameters are described as far as possible in real world units For example rotation is described in degrees while chases are described in beat per minute This speeds up programming and allows fixtures of different types to be selected and adjusted at the same time for example you can assign several fixtures of different types to all strobe at 10 Hz without having to worry about the different DMX values required by each fixture to achieve this Hog 40S will give you the best possible match between fixtures the only limitations are those of the fixtures themselves Complex Parameters Some fixtures put more than one parameter onto a single DMX address For example a fixture might use DMX values in the range 0 127 for intensity 128 250 for strobe and 251 255 for fixture reset The Hog 40S separates such functio
486. ties pane located on the right side of the plot window To edit a pixelmap change its properties Enable the PixelMap edit button at the top of the plot window Select the PixelMap you wish to edit Use the properties pane located on the right side of the plot window to adjust the the PixelMap s position size rotation and layer assignments You can also reposition the PixelMMap by using the mouse or touchscreen to click and drag the PixelMap into position Similarly you can resize and rotate the PixelMap using the blue object handles that appear when the PixelMap is se lected circle handle for gang rotation square handle for gang sizing 20 2 4 Tips for editing multiple plot objects This section will cover some handy shortcuts and tips for editing multiple plot objects at once These tips can help you to build complex plots more quickly and symetrically To equalize the properties of multiple plot objects 1 High End Systems First select a plot object that has a property value that you want to apply to other objects in the plot for example you may want to align objects to have the same X position as one of the objects already in the plot Now select the plot objects you wish to adjust to match the first plot object you selected Hold the key on the front panel of the console Press the up or down scroll button for the property you want to equalize all the selected objects to for example if you want all the select
487. tige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 454 35 3 1 Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr eseese 454 35 3 2 Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me 454 35 4 Informaci n Importante De Seguridad eese 455 35 4 1 Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios 455 35 4 2 Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocu CIONES 3 c4ivcectawenica seu ee cues taue TAS EaR TA aE lechantas stu ectadeckaenseenveerees 455 35 5 Importanti Informazioni Di SicureZZa cerere 456 35 5 1 Per Prevenire Incendi ssssssssssrsrerersresrrsrrsrrerererereee 456 35 5 2 Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche csccccccceree 456 35 6 Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation ssessssseerrersereeiserrrrrirerrerrens 456 35 7 Sl Ba SN i oE pe eae a A ees 457 35 7 1 FA KAS ORAS REE O BE aiseee 457 35 7 2 BE RECHI SHG SRBO AS oes 457 36 Technical Specifications cccceceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 459 High End Systems xiii Lighting Control System 36 1 Hog 4 Console cc cecccecce ences eee eset eee eset esa eea esa eesa teen ease eed 459 36 1 1 Input and Output Connections eee teeter eee 459 36 1 2 Power Weight and Dimensions cceeeeeeeeee ees 459 36 2 RackHog 4 Console ccecceeee cece eee ee cent eens tees eee eeaeeeaeeeae 459 36 2 1 Input and Output Connections cece eee eee 459 36 2 2 Power Weight and Dimensions sesser 460 36 3 Full Boar 4 Console ccccceeee
488. time Use the H M and S buttons that appear when editing a fade or delay time cell to enter the H M and S text into the cell Alternatively you can use an external keyboard Tip If you enter 120 this will be interpreted as 1 minute 20 seconds To have the console interpret it as 120 seconds i e 2 minutes enter 120s To assign paths directly in the spreadsheet of an editor 1 Press the Path button in the top left of the editor window 2 Click in the cell for the desired parameter or click and drag to select a range of cells 3 Press Set 4 Choose a path from the displayed list see Figure 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The In path is applied when the fixture is increasing in intensity during the crossfade and the Out path when the fixture is decreasing in intensity 5 Press OK 216 High End Systems Section 13 Timing In Linear Linear Figure 13 9 Selecting a Path in an Editor The different types of path are explained in Paths p 210 13 3 4 Fanned Timings You can fan timings across multiple fixtures just as you can fan colour or position For example to fan times across 10 fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 10 Time 5 Thru 14 Enter fans the fade times of Fixtures 1 through 10 between 5 and 14 seconds 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Similarly you can fan delay times e Fixture 1 Thru 5 Time Time 5 Thru 10 Enter fans the delay times of Fix tures 1 through 5 between 5 and 10 sec
489. timecode value of the first cell then press Enter All the selected timecode values will be adjusted by the same amount of time added or subtrac ted from the first value 23 6 Simulating LTC You can temporarily simulate timecode perhaps because the actual LTC source is not available during programming Timecode simulation is controlled from the Timecode Toolbar To simulate timecode 1 Press the simulate button on the Timecode Toolbar Simulate is now enabled and all external timecode input for that LTC source will be ignored 2 Press the GO button located to the right of the simulate button to simulate timecode TIP Using the jump toolbar you can jump the simulated timecode to six dif ferent jump points by clicking on the jump button and then clicking on one of the six jump buttons To change the jump button values click on the word TIMECODE on the far left hand side of the timecode toolbar High End Systems 351 Section 23 Linear Timecode LTC A drop down menu will appear with a set of fields allowing you to change the jump points 352 High End Systems Section 24 Macros 24 1 Intro to Macros There are two types of macros you can use to automate tasks on the console Comment Macros are placed in the macro field of cuelist and other objects to trigger activity on the console Key stroke Macros allow a sequence of screen and button presses to be recorded for later playback 24 2 Comment Macros You
490. tions also have a sub category called feature A feature is defined as a sub classification of a function For example a gobo function can have slots spins and random features All features within a function are mutually exclusive In other words each feature is a unique behaviour of the function and no two features can occur at the same time Each feature can have its own DMX value or range of values The function type defined in the function cell will determine what features are available in the feature cell For in stance selecting a Strobe function will result in a choice of 13 features including shutter rate ramp ramp snap random etc Many functions have pre defined features that cannot be changed Intensity Pan Cyan etc When building a fixture library you define a feature as a sub set of a particular function and associate it with a specific DMX value or range A gobo function might have six slot features one for each gobo one spin feature and one random feature Each of these entries should be mapped to the corresponding DMX value s according to the fixture s DMX protocol A single DMxX channel can have many different functions and features each with their own unique DMX values or ranges of values DMX Value This field is used to define the exact DMX value or range of values used by the function and feature of the DMX channel Entries in this field can be a single DMX value or a range of values Ranges can be entered
491. tiple Patch Points With such fixtures there are two or more DMX start addresses which may not be numerically adjacent and indeed may be on different universes and DP800s Hog 40S handles this by giving these fixtures multiple Patch Points which you address separately in the Fixture Patch window For example to patch the fixture with a scroller of fixture type Scroller Dimmer shown in Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures Scroller VLS address 1 2 501 Smart Repeater address 1 1 1 65685650 address 1 4 1 DMX Processor 8000 Figure 5 4 Examples of Fixtures requiring Multiple Patch Points 1 Setup gt Patch Open the Fixture window 2 Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window 3 Select the Fixture Patch Point for the scroller from the drop down list in the top right corner of the Fixture Patch window Patch points Ww Dmx 1 Dr Intensity Click DMX 2 to select the second DMX universe 501 Enter Enter the DMX address for the scroller Click DMX 4 to select the fourth DMX universe 4 5 6 Fixture Scroller Dimmer 1 Opens the Fixture Patch window again 7 8 Select the Intensity Patch Point for the dimmer from the drop down list 9 2 Enter Enter the DMX address for the dimmer 10 Click on Apply Patch or close the Fixture window to se
492. tivate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory 3 Select the cuelist 4 Set name Enter type in the name Tip You can rename a cuelist when it is attached to a master by pressing Set Choose 11 11 Deleting Cuelists To delete a cuelist 1 List 1 Delete deletes cuelist 1 2 Click OK to confirm the delete Or from the cuelist directory 1 Open List open cuelist directory 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally activate a cuelist when pressing its button in the directory 3 Delete Cuelist 1 delete the cuelist You will be asked to confirm the action Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Setup Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items High End Systems 199 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Tip To detach a cuelist from its master rather than deleting it completely from the show file hold Delete while pressing the master s Choose button This removes the cuelist from the master but not from the cuelist direct ory 11 12 Copying and Moving Cuelists Cuelists can be copied and moved within the Cuelist Directory To open the Cuelist Directory Open List 11 12 1 Copying Cuelists To make a copy of a cuelist e List 1 Copy List 2 Enter copies Cuelist 1 to Cuelist 2 If th
493. to an exist ing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 11 1 4 Numbering Cues If you leave out the cue number when recording cues Hog 40S will give the cue the next whole number in the list If you specify a cue number you can use numbers with up to five digits before the decimal and four digits after for example 11111 1111 This can be useful to insert cues between previously recorded ones You can later renumber a complete cuelist see Renumbering Cues within a Cuelist p 187 11 1 5 Naming Cues You can give a cue a name that will be displayed in the Cuelist window and on the Playback Bar 1 Open Choose opens the Cuelist window of the selected master 2 Select the cue s name cell 3 Set name Enter type in the name Tip To name a cue immediately after recording it press the Set key This will open a Quickname window Enter the cue name and select OK 184 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 Record Options Recording Selected Fixtures Only Normally recording a cue records the total contents of the Programmer or editor but you can choose to record only the currently selected fixtures For example 1 Select the fixtures that you want to record 2 Record 3 Press Selected on the Record Options Toolbar 4 Choose records the selected fixtures as a new
494. touched High End Systems 249 16 2 3 250 Section 16 Advanced Programming Output Show Palettes Compact Values Effects Sources Abts D Strobe Position Colour Mixing Num amp Intensity Type Pan Time Cyan Studio Color 575 1 Vale Fade Delay Path Size Rate Offset Length Table F Show a Compact gamuy Van Palettes Changes _ Strobe Position Colour Mixing Edit M Num amp Intensity Type ar t Cyan Magenta Yellow Studio Color 575 Using Copy to Bring Values into an Editor Magenta Yellow Studio Color 575 Spot575 aw S Hue Saturatio Co v NShots Bounce Colour 1 Colour F Saturatio Colour You can bring parameter values from a palette scene or cue into an editor such as the Programmer using Copy e Cue 1 Copy Enter copies the contents of Cue 1 of the currently chosen cuelist into the current editor You can chose which fixtures or parameter types are copied into the Programmer For example e Cue 1 Position Copy Enter copies only the position values from Cue 1 into the current editor High End Systems Section 16 Advanced Programming 16 3 16 3 1 Highlight and Lowlight Pressing the Highlight key temporarily adjusts the selected fixtures to open white with intensity at full and all other parameters at their default settings This function can be useful when you want to see the beam of a fixture on a lit stage when assigning focus positions f
495. trolling moving fixtures and one controlling conventionals and you want to merge the shows for playback on one console Each show file contains identical palette and cuelist structures but they just control their own fixtures In this case Append fixtures and Merge By Name for all programming Example 2 You have two shows programmed using the same rig which you now want to merge Each show contains exactly the same fixtures In this case Replace fixtures and Append Different all of the programming assuming all of the programming has unique names High End Systems Section 5 Adding Patching and Managing Fixtures 5 1 Adding Fixtures To add a fixture to a show High End Systems 1 2 Setup Patch opens the Fixture window Press the Fixture Schedule button in the top left hand corner of the Fixture window The Fixture Schedule window will open with a list of fixture per sonalities in the current show file as well as fixtures that are part of the currently chosen Fixture Library The currently chosen fixture library is listed at the bottom of the fixture selec tion window To add fixtures from another library you must first install the library onto your console by openning the file browser and dragging the fixture library archive file from a USB stick or CD into the libraries folder After the library is installed you can select it as your current library in the fixture selec tion window Each fixture is
496. ts Network Number and press the Settings button to open the DMX Processor Settings window See Figure 31 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings win dow 3 Select the Widget Outputs pane 4 The Hog 4PC application provides one port for each of the DMX outputs on the DMX Processor in the show file To configure a widget to an output port of a DMX Processor click on the box associated with the port and select the widget from the list of serial numbers that appears Super Widget ports will appear with the serial number followed by an output number 5 Click Apply or OK to confirm the selection The widgets that have been con nected should now have their Active DMX OK and TX Mode indicators illu minated Some widget serial numbers will appear with red text This indicates that the USB DMX Widget is not compatible with Hog 4PC and must be upgraded see Upgrading USB DMX Widgets p 421 Tip You can identify which widget is connected to the port by selecting the Beacon button to the right of the port The widget connected to that port will flash its indicator lights for a few seconds 430 High End Systems Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC DMX Processor 8000 Settings d Ww AAAA KIILI 4 Widget DE Single Widget 2252 Figure 31 1 Widget Outputs pane of the DMX Processor Settings window 31 3 3 USB Wings The USB Programming and Playback Wings can be used either with or without the supplied exte
497. ts e eee esate nee aeeeaeenaes 146 6 11 The Grouping Toolbar ccccccccee cece eee a EEA EEE EEE RERE 148 6 12 A Kind Editor for the Colour kind with seperate parameters turned OMe eoa a eves hntan stuceta ck E Aa vet aia cadonbencak says AE A AT EATA 150 8 1 Example of Parameters set to reference a Palette ccccceseeeeenes 156 8 2 The Palette Editor WINGOW ceecceeeee eee e eee eee eee e ates tested een eenies 156 8 3 A Palette with Global Parameter Values ccceeeeeeeee eee eeen teenies 160 8 4 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeaeeeaees 160 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values ccccccceeeeceeeeeee tesa tesa tena etna eenees 160 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types 162 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar cccccceeeece eee eee e eee eee ae eeneeeaeeeaeeeaes 163 9 1 Directory Kind Mask Menu ccceceeeeee cette eee eee ates teen ees een ee need 167 9 2 Directory Kind Mask Legend cceeeeeee eee eee eee e eee een eeaeeeneeenaes 168 9 3 Right Click Color Coding Menu ccceceeceee tees nets tees tees eeeaeeeaeeeneees 168 9 4 Color Coding Entire Button cece eee teeter eee ee eea een eeneeenees 168 9 5 Button Sizes Option cer rraian aia vida Ea EEEL OEA EAA ETEA PES ETY 169 9 6 Show Fewer Buttons Option ssssssssssesserssrrsrssrtnrsrrerrerrsrrernsrrerseree 170 9 7 Auto Color Swatch Option
498. tte with Per Fixture Type Values and Figure 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values Make sure that you have aggregation turned on see Aggregation p 42 ze gt Yellow Per Type Vake Fade Deby Path Show ER Sate m i intensity All Studio Spot 575 ve a SS a a ee Figure 8 4 A Palette with Per Fixture Type Values All Studio Color 575 Rate Offset Length Table NSho w Sa Magers Yelow Studio Spot 575 1 PS erya oa o opa e on 7AA Aind 2 a ee es es ee 22 222 ee opon i A a AS Studio Color 575 101 LS e pos S en TOLALLALLALLALL A oam O M A a 6 eee ee a lt 4 Figure 8 5 A Palette with Per Fixture Values High End Systems Section 8 Palettes 8 6 2 You can override the default settings using the Record Options Toolbar for example to record a single fixture s parameter values as per fixture 1 Assign the parameters of the fixture as required 2 Press Record 3 The Record Options Toolbar will appear on the bottom of the right hand touch screen Select Per Fixture 4 Press the key to choose the palette type for example Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select the palette location by pressing it in the Palette Directory window Similarly to force a palette with one of each fixture type to be recorded as Per Fixture Type rather than the default Per Fixture use the Per Fixture Type button on the Record Options Toolbar Forcing a palette to be Per Fixture Typ
499. ttes Colour Directory Guard 1 aC Palette with only Colour 1 Colour parameters Palette with only Colour 3 Position parameters 5 IPCBETL Palette with Intensity Colour 5 Position Colour Beam Effect Time and Control Figure 8 6 Example of Palettes containing different parameter types Masking Using the Record Options Toolbar To specify masking when recording a palette using the Record Options Toolbar 1 Assign the parameters of the fixtures as required 2 Press Record The Kind Mask menu will automatically pop up above the record options toolbar and displays a grid of buttons containing all of the fixed kinds and user kinds included in your show see Figure 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar If kind masking menu does not automatically appear then check the Automatically show kind masking toolbar option in Programming pane of the user preferecnes window 3 Deselect which kinds you do not want to include in the palette by toggling off the buttons 4 Press one of the fixed kind keys to choose a palette type destination for ex ample Colour The Palette Directory will open 5 Select a palette location in the directory by pressing on any button in the Palette Directory window 162 High End Systems Section 8 Palettes Intensty Time Figure 8 7 The Record Options Toolbar Masking Using the Command Line When recording a palette using the command line you can choose which fixed
500. ttes with color mixing data will display a small color swatch in the middle of the button to indicate a dominant mixed color is recorded in that palette To enable the auto color swatch option click on noe icon and enable the show auto color swatch option The option to show the auto color swatch is unique to each directory window and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view Configuration Directory 0O Mask Cl 0O Show Auto Colour Swatch Figure 9 7 Auto Color Swatch Option 170 High End Systems Section 9 Directory Windows 9 6 Spreadsheet View By default directory windows are displayed as a grid of touch sized buttons however you can also view the contents of any directory as a spreadsheet by clicking on tne button When in list view the directory buttons can be selected and or applied by pressing on it s number in the num column The option to display a directory in list view is unique to each directory and is also stored when you record a directory window into a view Colour Directory Colour Directory tho Jo fo feo tee tee fro ge Tio No tes The Colour Directory shown in Spreadsheet view The Colour Directory shown in Button view Figure 9 8 Spreedsheet View vs Button View of Colour Directory High End Systems 171 Section 10 Media Picker The media picker is a tabbed graphical window that allows users to view and select slotted fun
501. tudio Color 575 6 1 5 Sub Selections You can make sub selections from within the current selection using the Next and Back keys and the Odd Even and Random buttons on the Select Toolbar Main Toolbar gt Select Random The Random button selects a single fixture at random from the current active selection in the Programmer Even and Odd The Even and Odd buttons on the Select Toolbar select the even and odd fixtures from the current selection according to the Selection Order p 130 Note that the selection order is not related to fixture user numbers so the sub selection produced by Odd might contain even numbered fixtures Next and Back The Next and Back keys on the console select a single fixture from within the current selection Repeatedly pressing Next or Back steps forwards or backwards through the current selection with the order determined by the Selection Order p 130 To select even or odd fixtures from the current selection based upon fixture user numbers use Pig Even or Pig Odd Tip When the Trackball is in position mode the bottom left Trackball key also acts as a Next key This can make it very fast to work through a selection of fixtures assigning their position 6 1 6 Deselecting Fixtures To deselect all selected fixtures press the Backspace key when the command line is empty You can also use the following command line syntax Fixture 0 Enter deselects all fixtures To deselect spec
502. tures and Modifying Parameters p 127 For general information on working with editors see Editors p 45 12 5 Scene Timing Scene timing controls the fade in and delay of a scene when it is run on a master You assign and edit scene timings in the same way as for cues see Fade Delay and Path p 208 You can assign scene timing in the Programmer before recording the scene or later in the scene editor You can also assign the fade time of a scene from the command line For example to give Scene 1 a fade time of 6 seconds e Scene 1 Time 6 Enter You can also record fade times with a mask For example e Scene 1 Fixture 1 2 Colour Time 4 Enter sets the fade time for the colour parameter values of fixtures 1 and 2 in Scene 1 12 6 Insert Merge and Replace When recording copying or moving a scene if the destination location already has a scene re corded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Merge or Replace Insert creates a new destination scene The new scene will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Merge Incorporates the new information into the destination scene If the same fixture parameters are in both scenes the new values will replace the old e Replace Overwrites the scene information in that destination High End Systems 205 206 Section 12 Scenes If you are copying a scene all three options are available If y
503. u can define how a cuelist deals with tracking in the Cuelist pane of the Playback Options window shown in Figure 17 4 The Cuelist Pane of the Playback Options Window Open Choose gt Options Cuelist The options are Option Default Notes Cue Only Off Use this to run the cuelist without tracking Any parameter that has no value in a cue will go to its default value rather than tracking through from the previous cue Track Through Loops Off Determines whether parameter values track from the end of a loop back to the beginning See Tracking Through Loops p 225 for a full descrip tion Triggering Automatic Tasks When a Cue Runs You can use Trigger Macros to perform a variety of tasks when a cue runs Macros are simple text instructions placed in the cue s Macro cell 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window 2 Select the Macro cell for the desired cue and press Set 3 Type in the Macro command then press Enter For a full description of the available macro commands see Macros p 353 the Macro cell in the Cuelist window and pressing the Set key Tip You can enable trigger macros to occur when using the Back key to go backwards through a cuelist See Configuring Master Controls p 296 Tip You can display a list of available commands on the console by selecting Playback Masking You can mask which fixture function kinds that a cuelist or scene will playback by applying a play
504. uch key on the Main Toolbar High End Systems Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers To touch only the parameters of a particular kind press the appropriate parameter type key followed by Touch For example e Position Touch touches all position parameters of the se lected fixtures e To touch a single parameter you can hold the Touch button while moving that parameter s wheel slightly The current value will be touched without modific ation from the parameter wheel Untouched values appear in the editor with a white backgound Once you have touched parameter values they are available for recording in the same way as any value that you have assigned They are shown with a blue background indicating that they have been modified Num 4 intensity Studio Color 575 1 Strobe Position ype Pan Num 4 intensity Studio Color 575 Ea Using Pig Touch You can bring parameter values into an editor without touching them using Pig Touch As the parameters haven t been touched they won t be recorded as part of the contents of the editor This can be useful if you want to have the parameter values in the editor in order to copy them to other fixtures For example to copy parameter values from fixtures 1 5 that are on stage to fixtures 6 10 in the current editor 1 1 Thru 5 Pig Touch select the fixtures 1 5 and bring their onstage values into the editor without touching them Colour Mi
505. ue GL1 5 GL2 5 If you omit the cue number the next cue will Go Halt Cuelist HL list HL1 6 Assert Cuelist AL list AL10 Release Cuelist RL list RL4 7 9 Controlling Scenes Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Go Scene GS scene GS12 Halt Scene HS scene HS4 Assert Scene AS scene AS1 Release Scene RS scene RS6 20 High End Systems Macros Controlling Pages and Views Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Change Page CP page CP3 Next Page CP CP Goes to the next page in the Page Directory skipping the template page and blank pages Previous Page CP CP Goes to the previous page in the Page Directory skipping the tem plate page and blank pages Recall View RV view RV2 Controlling Timecode Comment Macro Syntax Example Notes Enable Time ET cuelist ET2 Enables timecode for the selec code ted cuelist Disable Time DT cuelist DT2 code Open Timecode of node type node mnber OTh1 When DP8000 is specified as the Toolbar node type then an index number is also required example oTd1 1 Sending MIDI strings Comment Macro Syntax Example MIDI String MS node type node number MIDI message MSh1 90473F The node number is h for a console i for a MIDI Timecode Processor and its net number The MIDI message is in Hex Controlling Network Devices CommentMaao Syntax Example Notes Reset Node node type net number RNH3 Resets the selected network
506. ure 24 2 Command Data Selection Deleting Keystroke Macro Steps To delete a macro step 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the macro step to be deleted from the Macro window 2 Release the Delete key A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the delete 3 Click OK 24 3 5 Deleting Keystroke Macros To delete a keystroke macro 1 Macro 1 Delete deletes Macro 1 2 Click OK Or from the macro directory 1 Press and hold Delete whilst selecting the macro to be deleted from the Macro Directory window 2 Click OK 362 High End Systems Section 24 Macros Tip For advanced Macro control you may wish to delete either of the first two default steps of a macro The first step is a recall view and the second step clears the command line Tip If you prefer not to be asked to confirm the delete action select Don t Ask Me Again in the confirmation window You can reenable the confirm ation by going to Macro Preferences Programming and selecting Confirm before deleting directory items 24 3 6 Copying and Moving Keystroke Macros To make a copy of a macro in a new location 1 Open Macro open the Macro Directory 2 Check that the Guard button is depressed so you do not accidentally apply macros when trying to select them 3 Select the macro that you want to copy by pressing its button in the directory 4 Press and hold the Copy key 5 Press the button of the location in the directory
507. use the patch window to refresh cache Catalyst preview packages on the console Configuring DP8000 for Catalyst Previews In order for the console to properly fetch and display thumnail previews for Catalyst media servers on a DP8000 s FixtureNet network the FixtureNet adapter for the DP8000 must be properly configured 1 Open the node settings window for the DP8000 that is connected via FixtureNet to the Catalyst media servers 2 Select the FixtureNet tab of the node settings window 3 Ensure that the IP address and subnet settings are appropriate for the network environment in which the Catalyst media servers are connected This is similar to configuring the FixtureNet network adapter for Art Net and sACN output To better ensure connectivity it is recommended that the IP address assigned to the FixtureNet adapter be within in the same sub network as the Catalyst it is receving preview thumnails from Patching Catalyst fixtures to Catalyst Media Servers Once a Catalyst fixture is scheduled in the patch window and patched to a DMX output the Catalyst fixture can then be patched to a Catalyst media server that is connected to the FixtureNet network of any active DP8000 connected to the console Follow these steps to patch a Catalyst fixture to a Catalyst media server 1 Open the patch window 2 Select the Catalyst fixture s you wish to associate with a Catalyst media server in the rig Press the patch media button at the top of th
508. uter Completed the Hog4PC 1 0 0 266 Setup Wizard Okk the Anish button to exit the Setup Wizard Important It is important that you restart your computer at this point to ensure proper device driver configuration A Hog 4PC group will be added to the Programs folder on your Start Menu with icons to start the Hog 4PC application and view installed documentation A shortcut to the Hog 4PC application will also appear on your desktop In addition to the Hog 4PC application the Hog 4PC group contains the Hog 4PC Widget Up grader and a link to the User Manual 428 High End Systems Section 31 Installing Hog 4PC Warning When running the Windows XP firewall or aftermarket firewall products the firewall may block TCP IP communications Often you can add excep tions for the individual Hog 4PC processes or add exceptions for traffic that has a source IP address and destination IP address that are both pointing to the local machine Refer to the documentation provided with your firewall for further details 31 2 Software Removal You can remove the Hog 4PC application from your computer using the Add Remove Programs utility found in the Windows Control Panel 1 Inthe Windows Start menu select Control Panel then double click on Add Remove Programs 2 Select Hog 4PC in the list of installed programs and click Change Remove 3 Select Remove click Next and follow the on screen instructions to complete the un ins
509. utton In the node settings window navigate to the FixtureNet tab Ensure that the FixtureNet IP address and subnet are set appropriately for the network Note If you make any changes to the FixtureNet IP address or subnet you must log off and log back onto the show for those new IP address settings to take effect 4 Open the network window setup network and click on the internal DP8000 to which the fixtures are patched Click on the settings button In the node settings window navigate to the ArtNet tab Ensure that the artnet outputs are set correctly for both subnet and universe 5 Connect a windows computer to the network and run a software application tool such as DMX Workshop These kinds of software applications allow you to see artnet streams on the network and can be used to further help in detecting where the problems might be occurring 6 Ifa you have performed all the troubleshooting steps in this section and the problem continues to persist then please contact High End Sytems technical support for further assistance 33 4 444 The console appears to have crashed or frozen Hog 40S runs as a series of separate processes that can start and stop individually Often when the console appears to have crashed or frozen it is only one process that is causing the problem while the rest of the processes are still running normally In particular an editor or the desktop High End Systems Section 33 Troubleshoot
510. ve as expected Check that the playback controls haven t been mapped to different functions to their normal ones See Configuring Playback Controls p 294 33 7 High End Systems The Front Panel Reboots Unexpectedly Care should be taken when transmitting a personal radio while in close proximity to a console front panel Always keep radio transmitting devices at least eight inches from the console surface Section 33 Troubleshooting Launched Processes Name Stat Pid Command Line fpdriver Running 2460 launcher Running 2584 server Running 1072 port 6587 netnum 1 showpath playback Running 5672 port 6537 nodeid 1 netnum 1 desktop Running 5812 port 6587 nodeid 1 netnum 1 dp8k Running 5828 port 6537 instance 1 console Figure 33 1 The Launched Processes window In the event of a radio transmitting within close proximity of the console the front panel firmware may reboot causing a temporary loss of control of the keys and hardware for approximately 20 seconds During this time the desk lights may dim as well After 20 seconds the front panel will reboot and normal functionality will be restored If the problems persist move the radio transmit ting device further from the console 33 8 33 8 1 446 How to Report Problems to Support When reporting problems with the console known as bugs it is important that the information you provide is as clear and detailed as possible to ensure that th
511. ve no other cuelists scenes or groups active when you release the cuelist then releasing returns all fixture parameters to their default values A fixture s default parameter values will be determined by the Fixture Library you can change the default values in the Edit Fixtures window see Assigning a Custom Default p 124 If you have other cuelists scenes or groups active then control of fixture parameters may be transferred to one of them on releasing the cuelist see Running Multiple Cuelists amp Scenes p 273 Release Time When you release a cuelist and fixture parameters go to their default values they do so over the release time and this change may be visible if you have fixtures that are visibly live on stage i e with intensities above zero To assign the cuelist s release time 1 Open Choose open the Cuelist window for the cuelist on the selected master 2 Options Cuelist open the Options window and select the Cuelist pane Alternatively press Pig Choose to open the Options window for the selected master 3 Select the Release Time cell High End Systems 263 Section 17 Playback Timing d ja Release Time Sa 0o Default r ES Back Time 0O Default 4 Set 5 Enter assign the desired release time You can also set a default release time for all newly created cuelists in the Cuelist pane of the User Preferences window Setup Preferences Cuelist Tip If you have assigne
512. vices such as personal computers You should contact your system administrator to determine the optimum settings for your network To assign a static IP address 1 Main gt Network gt Console gt Console Link Config navigate to the IP Config screen Set DHCP Off Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask as required OK return to the Console Link Status screen Close return to the Network Configuration screen Dye OE ee ay OK return to the Main screen Setting the DMX Processor DMX Output Refrsh Rate You can use set the DMX Processor s dmx output refresh rate from 2HZ to 42HZ The default dmx refresh rate for a new show is 25HZ To set the dmx refresh rate of a DMX Processor locally using the onboard LCD panel 1 Select DMX from the main menu 2 Use the front panel buttons to set the desired dmx refresh rate 1 Setup Network on the Setup Toolbar Select the required DMX Processor in the network window and click Settings 2 Select the dmx tab of the dmx processor settings window 3 Enter the desired dmx refresh rate in the dmx refresh rate field and press apply NOTE In order to achieve rates above 29Hz users must first set the inter slot time of the DP8000 to 0 microseconds For refresh rates below 29Hz users can choose to use either Oms or 20ms as the inter slot time Setting the DMX Processor back to Defaults In the Control Panel screen you can set the DP back to it s factory default settings
513. vuereevsteeescdivnevsentieecdsnaeecedrsaeeeeder 306 18 5 Copying and Moving Pages ccceeeeeeeeee nese eeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 307 18 6 Deleting Pages niss r a eee ae tenes nessa teen tesa nena eeaeeas 307 18 7 The Template Page cccccceeec eect eee esate ee ee ee ee aa eeaeeeaeeea eee 308 Command KEYS cesceeeeeeee cece eeeeeeeseeeaeeaeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaees 311 19 1 Creating Command KeyYS cccceceeeeeeeteeeeeee ates eeaeeeaeeeaeeeae 311 19 2 Copying Moving and Deleting Command Keys n se 311 19 3 Changing the Action of a Command Key sessen 312 19 4 Command Key Feedback ccccceeeeeeeneeeeeee eee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 313 PIOUS ns E E E A T 315 20 1 Creating Aa A E ee talhaeetatae hei a deendess 315 20 2 Editing PIOUS ce ci 05 mocece atte ceapesverce sees doetaes duatanpetatah ysderdanpeueces ds 316 20 21 FIXEUNES aisre rrin aA a e AE eas A aE AE eE EAREN 316 20 22 GANGS doaa Eeen eE voles EE VOEE uated alge EN G 317 20 2 3 PixelMa pS lt 2 a e EEE PE E eee 318 20 2 4 Tips for editing multiple plot objects ccecece 319 20 3 Using PIOUS sessen receiv aeaaea EEPO EE AERE SEA AN ERRET 320 20 3 1 Fixture Selection ssssssssrsrsrersresrrsrrsrrsrererererrrrrerrens 320 20 3 2 Navigation zoom scroll cccceeceeeeeseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeners 321 20 3 3 Feedback areias tence vee eee AG codec devas Seah vec narei 321 20 4 PIxelIMAPPING eiiiai adaa dvor es edvaca eves arene 322 20 4 1 PixelMap Layers
514. w insert Timecode Clock Cue Chosen nk Figure 11 4 Cue 3 Fully Marked 11 9 Understanding Cuelists Cuelists are lists of cues usually used to play back the cues in a defined order A cue number is specific to each cuelist not the entire console so there can be a cue 1 for cuelists 1 2 and 3 High End Systems 197 Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Cuelists are held in the Cuelist Directory Figure 11 5 The Cuelist Directory window and it is possible to copy or move cues between cuelists see Copying and Moving Cues p 186 To open the Cuelist Directory e Open List Alternatively List List Cuelist Directory Figure 11 5 The Cuelist Directory window To open a cuelist Figure 11 6 The Cuelist window Open Cuelist 1 select a cuelist from the Cuelist Directory Or with the command line List1 Open Open Choose select the master with the cuelist Tip Cuelist windows can be set to always show the same cuelist or to follow the currently chosen master see Cuelist Feedback p 280 11 10 Naming Cuelists You can name cuelists 1 Open List open the Cuelist Directory 198 High End Systems Section 11 Cues and Cuelists Chosen Master List 2 Learn View Enable Enable Follow Follow Timing Cue Timecode Clock Cue Chosen Name Mark Comment Figure 11 6 The Cuelist window 2 Check that the Guard button is selected so that you don t accidentally ac
515. window 2 Right click on the page and select Set As Template Page from the menu To turn off the template page right click on the template page and select Clear Template Page from the menu There can only be one template page assigning a new template page will restore the previous one to a normal page The template page is shown by a T symbol in the directory window Since the template page typically does not relate to a specific portion of your production a song for example template pages are never loaded from the Next Page key When cycling through pages with this key the template page will be skipped You can always directly load the template page using either the page directory or the command line Cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters that appear on a master of a page because they originate from the template page are shown in blue on the Playback Bar by default see Figure 18 3 Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page You can turn this off in Setup Preferences Misc by deselecting Highlight Template Figure 18 3 Playback Bar with Master 10 loaded from the Template Page High End Systems Section 18 Pages If the template page is the current page the entire Playback Bar including empty masters are also shown in blue see Figure 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded Figure 18 4 The Playback Bar with the Template Page loaded High End Systems 309 Sectio
516. wn as PixelMap layers which are added to the show using the fixture window Once added to the show PixelMap layers are then assigned to PixelMaps To add a PixelMap layer fixture to the show 1 Open the patch window 2 Click on the fixture schedule button 3 Look under the Hog manufacturer for a fixture called PixelMap Layer 4 Use the count column to specify how many PixelMap layer fixtures you want to add to the show 5 Click Ok on the fixture schedule window To assign a PixelMap Layer fixture to a PixelMap 1 Open the plot containing the PixelMaps to which you wish to assign PixelMap layers 2 Enable the PixelMap edit button at the top of the plot window 3 Select a PixelMap in the plot 4 Locate the Pixel Map section of the properties tray located on the right hand side of the plot window 5 Under the text label Layer fixture patch you will see all of the PixelMap layers scheduled in the show 6 Select the layers to assign them to the pixel map IMPORTANT NOTE Regardless of the user numbers you assigned to the PixelMap layers they are layered onto PixelMaps using the order in which you select them in step 6 Layer order is important when working with multiple layers as Z position is not adjustable High numbered layers will always appear on top of low numbered layers High End Systems Section 20 Plots 20 4 2 Programming lighting fixtures to use PixelMaps PixelMaps are applied to fixtures very
517. wn fade time overriding the cue s time Go instantly to the next cue Go instantly to the previous cue Adjusts the playback rate of the master by applying a scaling value to the base playback rate of the master e Temporary When temporary is turned on scaling will be applied when button is pressed down and re leased when when button is released e Action and Value When action multiply then button press will multiply scaling value by the value specified when action set then button press will change rate scaling value to value specified the base effect rate of the master e Temporary When temporary is turned on scaling will be applied when button is pressed down and re leased when when button is released e Action and Value When action multiply then button press will multiply scaling value by the value specified when action set then button press will change rate scaling value to value specified 297 298 Section 17 Playback The Master Go and Master Halt keys Scale Effect Size Adjusts the effect size of the master by applying a scaling value to the base effect size of the master e Temporary When temporary is turned on scaling will be applied when button is pressed down and re leased when when button is released e Action and Value When action multiply then button press will multiply scaling value by the value specified when action set then button press will change rate scal
518. xes 2 Set new label text Enter type in the label you want 3 Alternatively click or press on the arrow at the right hand end of the text box to get a list of useful labels Click on the one you want You can use special tags to have the console insert text into the name for you according to the directory name and the location in the directory High End Systems 37 2 7 2 38 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals Create labet Copy labet Create label Copy label PS Appearance Eoma DSN A A Copyof o A A Dan A ACopyofso A Q 0 Senstivty O Key Timings Ok rer Peta DEN A A Copyof o B 4 808N A A coyoso 4 rackDa oe Toa SO SN A Am Copyofso A 4 E SO 3N A AmCopyofso A 4 E Programming ie SOSN A AM Copyofso I 4 ZOE osn A AmmCopyotso A 4 Timing Cia SD SN A A Copyof o B A DETH SD SN B AmCopyofso A A O Naming Kinds Cr hA Copyofso A MAMEET soan h copyotso 4 Irs Cuetst Cl Scene Virtual Faders Er SD SN A AmeCopyofso A A CUENH osn 4 Figure 2 9 The Default Naming pane of the User Preferences window e amp d the directory name e amp D the directory name dynamic e amp n the directory number e amp N the directory number dynamic e amp o the original text This is used when a directory item is copied the original text is the name of the item that has been copied Lowercase tags are resolved once only when the name is applied while uppercase tags remain unresolved until the name is d
519. xing Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturatio 1 2 3 4 5 2 Copy 6 Thru 10 Enter copy the parameter values to fixtures 6 10 High End Systems 141 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Paramet ers Strobe Position Colour Mixing et oe Type Pan Tilt Cyan Magenta Yelow Hue Saturatio Studio Color 575 1 100 open a6 Js J J J fs jas 100 open o o Jo Jo fo J f 100 open fo Jo Jo Jo Jo J fe 100 open fo Jo Jo fo Jo J fe Ce oe Ce a ee 100 open 46 53 a ra 100 open 2 0 1 E 100 open F 0 J 0 E E 100 open 0 Ke 0 Ss ES 100 open r 0 J Yo E 5 6 7 Om 3 Record the contents of the editor is recorded with only fixtures 6 10 not 1 3 If the above example had used Touch instead of Pig Touch then you would have to untouch or knockout 1 5 before recording Tip Values with a dark or light blue background in the Programmer or editor are recordable while those with a white or gray background are not re cordable 6 3 8 Copying Parameter Settings You can copy the parameter values of one fixture to another Important If you copy parameter settings between fixtures of different types only those parameters that the fixtures have in common will be copied Using the Command Line To copy from the current selection e Copy 8 Enter copies the parameters of the current selection to fixture 8 To copy from specified fixtures e Fixture 1 Thru 4 Copy 8
520. xternal mouse Left clicking the mouse is the same as touching the screen and is used for se lecting or activating controls while right clicking brings up a context sensitive range of menu options The Soft Keys adjacent to the touch screens provide another method of accessing functions changing to match whichever toolbar is docked along that edge of the screen High End Systems 23 Section 2 Hog 40S Fundamentals The graphical environment is highly customisable giving you complete control of the console and individual window layout For example you can rearrange column headers in list windows e g the Cuelist and Programmer windows to prioritise information that is most pertinent to a specific show or user Inform ation displayed can also be sorted or filtered When a user logs out these pref erences and settings are stored and retrieved again on logging in 2 2 1 Window Management Opening Windows Windows can be opened in four ways 24 From a Toolbar Some windows may have a dedicated button that can be pressed the Programmer for example With the Open Key To open a window using console keys hold down Open and press the window s associated key or button For example e Open Position opens the Position Directory window e Open List opens the Cuelist Directory window e Open Choose opens the Cuelist window for the chosen master You can also hold down the Open key to gain access the second l
521. xture Each fixture or group of dimmers has a start address the first of the range of DMX addresses that it uses A single DMX output with 512 channels is known as one DMX universe A Hog network may support many universes each with fixture addresses between 1 and 512 See Also DMX Processor A nineteen inch rack mounted network node that distributes DMX output There may be many DMX Processors within a lighting control network See Also node A window for editing the contents of cues scenes groups or palettes See Also programmer The Hog 40S effects engine provides the opportunity to create movement sequences The engine contains library shapes whilst allowing for custom effects to be created See Parameter Wheel A defined way of connecting computer equipment together It comes in a variety of flavours See Also 70 Base T 100 Base T IP address Time in which fixtures crossfade between the parameter levels of two cues one incoming one outgoing See Also split fade in time out time A way of quickly assigning fixture parameters to an evenly spaced range of values For example you could use fanning to assign the intensity of 10 fixtures to 10 20 90 100 in a single operation See Also buddying Fixed kinds are the default collections of functions that collectivity contain all of the fixture functions used in your show There are 7 fixed kinds Intensity Position Colour Beam Effects Time and Contr
522. y a suitable name for each gobo or colour slot chosen from those in the fixture library To name a slot parameter 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures 2 For the desired fixture scroll right and select the Slot cell for the parameter required 3 Press Set select the desired slot name from the list and press Enter Releasable Parameters Fixture parameters move to their default values when they are released You can prevent specific fixture parameters from returning to their default values so that they hold their current value until they are assigned to a new programmed value 1 Setup gt Patch gt Edit Fixtures open the Edit Fixtures window 2 Click on the Releasable cell for the required fixture parameter 3 Press the Set key to assign the fixture parameter to be releasable or not as re quired High End Systems 125 Section 6 Selecting Fixtures and Modifying Parameters 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 Selecting Fixtures There are three ways to select fixtures using the command line with the numeric keypad visually selecting and clicking on the fixture s number in the programmer or by selecting groups from the groups directory Selecting Single Fixtures To select a single fixture visually in the programmer or other open editor click on the fixture s number in the Num column of the spreadsheet To select a single fixture using the command line type the fixture s user number using the keypad and the
523. you want to copy the macro to Or using the command line e Macro 2 Copy Macro 3 Enter copies the contents of Macro 2 to Macro 3 Similarly to move a macro to a new location e Macro 2 Move Macro 3 Enter moves the contents of Macro 2 to Macro 3 leaving 2 empty If the destination macro already exists you will be asked to choose an option Insert Merge or Replace Insert Add Steps and Replace When recording or copying a macro if the destination location already has a macro recorded in it you will be prompted with record options of Insert Add Steps or Replace If you are moving a macro only the Insert option is available e Insert creates a new destination for the macro The new macro will be assigned a free location just before the one chosen using a point number if necessary e Add Steps adds the macro steps from the source macro into the destination macro All new information is appended to the end of the current macro steps e Replace overwrites the macro information in that destination High End Systems 363 Section 24 Macros Tip If you know that you are about to record copy or move a macro to an existing destination you can pre select Insert Merge or Replace from the Record Options Toolbar This appears after you press the Record Copy or Move keys 364 High End Systems Section 25 Direct Control of DMX Channels By default the DMX channel values output by the DP8000 are controlled by patched fixture
524. you will see intensity assigned as the function and feature for channel 1 Note that the feature column will auto fill with Intensity 4 Select the DMX value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the DMX values range for the intensity channel 0 gt 255 and press Enter 5 Select the Real World value cell for channel 1 and press Set Enter the Real World value to be displayed in percentage 0 gt 100 and press Enter 382 High End Systems Section 27 The Fixture Builder Pan and Tilt 16 bit Fixture Builder Tutorial Type Information Model Name Tutorial Author Michael Date Modified 0 211 27 N he fixture is based on the Tutorial Dmx Footprint 10 Patchpoints 1 channel s Channel Function Feature Pan Pan 0655350540 rit e 0655350270 oe Tl i et Define 16 bit channels for Pan and Tilt 1 Select the channel cell for Channel 2 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single 16 bit fixture 2 Select the channel cell for Channel 3 and press Set Enter 2 3 to indicate that channels 2 and 3 combine to create a single 16 bit fixture 3 Repeat the above for channels 4 and 5 Configure Pan and Tilt Functions 1 Select the function cell for the first 2 3 channel and press Set A dialog will appear with a list of function categories 2 Select Position on the left column to display a list of Position function sub categories 3 Sel
525. ystems Section 18 Pages 1 Page Open open the Page Directory 2 Goto the desired page and assign the page activity you can playback cuelists and scenes and set fader levels For example Master 1 Go Master 4 at 50 Master 8 at 25 3 Select Capture Activity from the Page Directory to store the activity as a macro for the page To directly edit a page s macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory Select o change to the spreadsheet view 3 Select the Macro cell and press the Set key Type in the macro you require and press Enter For details of the macro syntax see Macros p 353 Tip You can display a list of available macro commands on the console by selecting the Macro cell and pressing the Set key To clear the macro 1 Page Open open the Page Directory 2 Deselect to change to the button view 3 Right click on the page and select Clear Activity Macros from the contextual menu Similarly you can enable or disable Restore Activity without deleting the macro itself by right clicking on the page and selecting from the contextual menu A R icon will appear as a reminder that Restore Activity is on 18 4 High End Systems Modifying Pages You can copy or move cuelists scenes and inhibitive masters to a page or remove them as well as clearing the whole page If you change which cuelists scenes or inhibitive masters are assigned to the current page then that assignment will

Manual - Prodance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents